Scholarly article review-apa
We're the ideal place for homework help. If you are looking for affordable, custom-written, high-quality and non-plagiarized papers, your student life just became easier with us. Click either of the buttons below to place your order.
Order a Similar Paper
Order a Different Paper
Using the Topic: Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Article title: Examining the association between evidence-based practice and the nurse-patient therapeutic relationship in mental health units: A cross-sectional study
Please use the rubric and the article uploaded below for a better understanding.
The book for the course is also uploaded below
2-3 pages in length, excluding the title and reference.
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeIntroduction
Required criteria:
1. Establish the purpose
2. Captures the attention
1. Statistics to support the significance of the topic to mental health care
2. Key points of the article
3. Key evidence presented
4. Examples of how the evidence can be incorporated into your nursing practice
1. Present strengths of the article
2. Present weaknesses of the article
3. Discuss if you would/would not recommend this article to a colleague
Provides analysis or synthesis of information within the body of the text
(
NR326
Mental
Health
Nursing
RUA:
Scholarly
Article
Review
Guidelines
)
Purpose
The student will review, summarize, and critique a scholarly article related to a mental health topic.
Course outcomes: This assignment enables the student to meet the following course outcomes.
(CO 4) Utilize critical thinking skills in clinical decision-making and implementation of the nursing process for psychiatric/mental health clients. (PO 4)
(CO 5) Utilize available resources to meet self-identified goals for personal, professional, and educational development appropriate to the mental health setting. (PO 5)
(CO 7) Examine moral, ethical, legal, and professional standards and principles as a basis for clinical decision-making. (PO 6)
(CO 9) Utilize research findings as a basis for the development of a group leadership experience. (PO 8)
Due date: Your faculty member will inform you when this assignment is due. The Late Assignment Policy applies to this assignment.
Total points possible: 100 points
Preparing the assignment
1) Follow these guidelines when completing this assignment. Speak with your faculty member if you have questions.
a. Select a scholarly nursing or research article, published within the last five years, related to mental health nursing. The content of the article must relate to evidence-based practice.
· You may need to evaluate several articles to find one that is appropriate.
b. Ensure that no other member of your clinical group chooses the same article, then submit your choice for faculty approval.
c. The submitted assignment should be 2-3 pages in length, excluding the title and reference pages.
2) Include the following sections (detailed criteria listed below and in the Grading Rubric must match exactly).
a. Introduction (10 points/10%)
· Establishes purpose of the paper
· Captures attention of the reader
b. Article Summary (30 points/30%)
· Statistics to support significance of the topic to mental health care
· Key points of the article
· Key evidence presented
· Examples of how the evidence can be incorporated into your nursing practice
c. Article Critique (30 points/30%)
· Present strengths of the article
· Present weaknesses of the article
· Discuss if you would/would not recommend this article to a colleague
d. Conclusion (15 points/15%)
· Provides analysis or synthesis of information within the body of the text
· Supported by ides presented in the body of the paper
· Is clearly written
e. Article Selection and Approval (5 points/5%)
· Current (published in last 5 years)
· Relevant to mental health care
· Not used by another student within the clinical group
· Submitted and approved as directed by instructor
f. APA format and Writing Mechanics (10 points/10%)
NR326 Mental Health Nursing
RUA: Scholarly Article Review Guidelines
NR326 Mental Health Nursing
RUA: Scholarly Article Review Guidelines
NR326_RUA_Scholarly_Article_Review_V4b_FINAL_MAY21 1
· Correct use of standard English grammar and sentence structure
· No spelling or typographical errors
· Document includes title and reference pages
· Citations in the text and reference page
For writing assistance (APA, formatting, or grammar) visit the APA Citation and Writing page in the online library.
Please note that your instructor may provide you with additional assessments in any form to determine that you fully understand the concepts learned in the review module.
Grading Rubric Criteria are met when the student’s application of knowledge demonstrates achievement of the outcomes for this assignment.
Assignment Section and Required Criteria (Points possible/% of total points available) |
Highest Level of Performance |
High Level of Performance |
Satisfactory Level of Performance |
Unsatisfactory Level of Performance |
Section not present in paper |
Introduction (10 points/10%) |
10 points |
8 points |
0 points |
||
Required criteria 1. Establishes purpose of the paper 2. Captures attention of the reader |
Includes 2 requirements for section. |
Includes 1 requirement for section. |
No requirements for this section presented. |
||
Article Summary (30 points/30%) |
30 points |
25 points |
24 points |
11 points |
0 points |
Required criteria 1. Statistics to support significance of the topic to mental health care 2. Key points of the article 3. Key evidence presented 4. Examples of how the evidence can be incorporated into your nursing practice |
Includes 4 requirements for section. |
Includes 3 requirements for section. |
Includes 2 requirements for section. |
Includes 1 requirement for section. |
No requirements for this section presented. |
Article Critique (30 points/30%) |
30 points |
25 points |
11 points |
0 points |
|
Required criteria 1. Present strengths of the article 2. Present weaknesses of the article 3. Discuss if you would/would not recommend this article to a colleague |
Includes 3 requirements for section. |
Includes 2 requirements for section. |
Includes 1 requirement for section. |
No requirements for this section presented. |
|
Conclusion (15 points/15%) |
15 points |
11 points |
6 points |
0 points |
|
1. Provides analysis or synthesis of information within the body of the text 2. Supported by ides presented in the body of the paper 3. Is clearly written |
Includes 3 requirements for section. |
Includes 2 requirements for section. |
Includes 1 requirement for section. |
No requirements for this section presented. |
|
Article Selection and Approval (5 points/5%) |
5 points |
4 points |
3 points |
2 points |
0 points |
1. Current (published in last 5 years) 2. Relevant to mental health care |
Includes 4 |
Includes 3 |
Includes 2 |
Includes 1 |
No requirements for |
(
NR326
Mental
Health
Nursing
RUA:
Scholarly
Article
Review
Guidelines
)
NR326_RUA_Scholarly_Article_Review_V4b_FINAL_MAY21 1
3. Not used by another student within the clinical group 4. Submitted and approved as directed by instructor |
requirements for section. |
requirements for section. |
requirements for section. |
requirement for section. |
this section presented. |
APA Format and Writing Mechanics (10 points/10%) |
10 points |
8 points |
7 points |
4 points |
0 points |
1. Correct use of standard English grammar and sentence structure 2. No spelling or typographical errors 3. Document includes title and reference pages 4. Citations in the text and reference page |
Includes 4 requirements for section. |
Includes 3 requirements for section. |
Includes 2 requirements for section. |
Includes 1 requirement for section. |
No requirements for this section presented. |
Total Points Possible = 100 points |
1762 | wileyonlinelibrary.com/journal/jan J Adv Nurs. 2021;77:1762–1771.© 2020 John Wiley & Sons Ltd
Received: 12 August 2020 | Revised: 28 October 2020 | Accepted: 24 November 2020
DOI: 10.1111/jan.14715
O R I G I N A L R E S E A R C H :
E M P I R I C A L R E S E A R C H – Q U A N T I T A T I V E
Examining the association between evidence-based practice
and the nurse-patient therapeutic relationship in mental health
units: A cross-sectional study
Antonio R. Moreno-Poyato1,2 | Georgina Casanova-Garrigos3 | Juan F. Roldán-
Merino4 | Óscar Rodríguez-Nogueira5 | MiRTCIME.CAT working group
1Department of Public Health, Mental
Health and Maternal and Child Health
Nursing, Nursing School, Universitat de
Barcelona, Ĺ Hospitalet de Llobregat,
Barcelona, Spain
2IMIM (Hospital del Mar Medical Research
Institute), Barcelona, Spain
3School of Nursing, Universitat Rovira i
Virgili, Tarragona, Spain
4Campus Docent Sant Joan de Déu Fundació
Privada. School of Nursing, University of
Barcelona, Barcelona, Spain
5Nursing and Physical Therapy Department,
SALBIS Research Group, Health Sciences
School, Universidad de León, Ponferrada,
León, Spain
Correspondence
Juan F. Roldán-Merino, Campus Docent Sant
Joan de Déu Fundació Privada. School of
Nursing, University of Barcelona, Spain.
Email: [email protected]
Abstract
Aims: To examine the relationship between the dimensions of evidence-based prac-
tice and the therapeutic relationship and to predict the quality of the therapeutic
relationship from these dimensions among nurses working in mental health units.
Design: A cross-sectional design.
Methods: Data were collected between February–April 2018 via an online form com-
pleted by nurses working at 18 mental health units. Multiple linear regressions were
used to examine the relationship between the dimensions of evidence-based prac-
tice and therapeutic relationship. Questionnaires were completed by 198 nurses.
Results: Higher levels of evidence-based practice were a significant predictor of a
higher-quality therapeutic relationship (β: 2.276; 95% CI: 1.30–3.25). The evidence-
based practice factor which most influenced an improved therapeutic relationship
was the nurses’ attitude (β: 2.047; 95% CI: 0.88–3.21). The therapeutic relationship
dimension which was most conditioned by evidence-based practice dimensions was
agreement on tasks, which was most favourable with a better attitude (β: 0.625;
95% CI: 0.09–1.16) and greater knowledge and skills for evidence-based practice (β:
0.500; 95% CI: 0.08–0.93).
Conclusion: In mental health settings, the therapeutic nurse–patient relationship is
positively enhanced by evidenced-based practice and the nurse’s level of experience,
with a great influence on shared decision-making.
Impact: This research sought to examine the relationship between the evidence-
based practice and the therapeutic relationship in mental health nursing. This study
demonstrates that an improved attitude and knowledge of evidence-based practices
of mental health nurses increases shared decision-making with patients, which is a
basic requirement for person-centred care. Because the therapeutic relationship is
considered the backbone of nursing practice in mental health units, this research will
have an impact on both mental health nurses and mental health unit managers.
K E Y W O R D S
evidence-based practice, mental health, nurse–patient relationships, practice nursing,
quantitative approaches
| 1763MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
1 | I N T R O D U C T I O N
The international literature recognizes that the therapeutic re-
lationship is an essential component of mental health nursing
(Moreno-Poyato et al., 2016; Peplau, 1988; Vahidi et al., 2018) im-
proving person-centred care and shared decision-making (Hamovitch
et al., 2018). Furthermore, it is known that evidence-based practice
enables the best clinical decisions to be made about patient care,
considering factors such as nurses’ experience and users’ expecta-
tions (DiCenso et al., 1998). In this regard, it seems clear that nurses
with greater competence in evidence-based practice should estab-
lish a better therapeutic relationship with patients.
1.1 | Background
Via the therapeutic relationship, nurses are able to positively make
an impact on the health of people with mental health problems
(McAndrew et al., 2014; Moreno-Poyato et al., 2019). Furthermore,
the establishment of an appropriate therapeutic relationship has
been empirically demonstrated to be associated with improved
health outcomes for patients (Kelley et al., 2014). Furthermore, the
therapeutic relationship also increases the effectiveness of any clini-
cal practice intervention performed by nurses in acute mental health
units (McAndrew et al., 2014). In terms of therapeutic value, via their
interactions, nurses can provide a safe place, allowing the patient to
overcome emotional resistance and move toward deep self-knowl-
edge that often results in change (McAndrew et al., 2014). Along
these lines, it was Peplau (1988) in the 1950s who referred to the
role of the nurse as a leader who should help the patient to take on
tasks through a relationship of cooperation and active participation,
thus representing a true therapeutic alliance (Bordin, 1979). In turn,
Bordin (1979) pointed out that the main components of the thera-
peutic alliance are the agreement between the therapist and the
patient on the treatment objectives, the tasks to be carried out and,
finally, the affective bond that is established between the patient and
the therapist. To build effective interpersonal relationships, Peplau
(1988, 1997) described nursing care as an interpersonal process of
therapeutic nature. Concretely, Peplau (1988, 1997) described nurs-
ing care as a human relationship between a sick person or a person
in need of help and a nurse who is properly trained to recognize and
respond to the person’s need for help. The therapeutic interpersonal
relationship described by Peplau (1988) is based on three phases:
orientation, working and termination. During the orientation phase,
the individual perceives a need and seeks professional assistance.
In this case, the nurse helps the patient to recognize, understand
and assess his or her problem and situation. Subsequently, the work-
ing phase represents most of the time that the nurse spends with
the patient, where the nurse facilitates the exploration of feelings
to help the patient cope with the illness and to be able to move on
to the last phase, the resolution phase, which marks the satisfac-
tion of old needs and the emergence of new needs to be fulfilled
(Peplau, 1988).
Multiple studies provide evidence of the attributes required for
the therapeutic relationship and their meaning (Felton et al., 2018;
Harris & Panozzo, 2019; Hartley et al., 2019; McAllister et al., 2019;
Moreno-Poyato et al., 2016). However, there is evidence of underuse
of the same by mental health nurses (Hamaideh, 2017; Youssef
et al., 2018). Clearly, it follows that knowledge and implementation
of evidence-based empirical and theoretical precepts of the thera-
peutic relationship should facilitate and improve the implementation
of therapeutic relationship in clinical practice in mental health units.
Evidence-based practice has been defined as the organized use
of the best available evidence (DiCenso et al., 1998). Some authors
consider this as being an essential element in the provision of opti-
mal high-quality care (Ramos-Morcillo et al., 2015; Stevens, 2013).
Indeed, the implementation of EBP has been associated with im-
proved health outcomes, decreased healthcare expenditure and
increased nursing staff satisfaction (Moore, 2017; Ramos-Morcillo
et al., 2015). Over recent years, certain difficulties have been ob-
served in the implementation of this empirical knowledge in the
complex clinical reality of health services (Correa et al., 2020). Thus,
limitations have been identified for its use both at the individual
level and by organizations at large. For professionals, lack of time, a
heavy workload and lack of knowledge represent major difficulties
(Correa et al., 2020; Stevens, 2013). Furthermore, the lack of human
and material support and insufficient leadership resources are
the main organizational limitations identified (Correa et al., 2020;
Warren et al., 2016). In this regard, it should be noted that mental
health nurses must overcome certain barriers that they encounter
on a daily basis to implement EBP (Yadav & Fealy, 2012; Youssef
et al., 2018). According to Alzayyat (2014), these barriers are due to
the nature of the evidence, the contribution of mental health nurses
involved in research, the personal characteristics of these nurses
and organizational factors.
In the field of mental health, nursing studies have shown that
the incorporation of evidence-based practice in clinical practice in-
creases the empathy of nurses and improves the factors that con-
tribute towards establishing a therapeutic alliance with patients
(Moreno-Poyato et al., 2018), and increasing the nurses’ self-confi-
dence, allowing them to reflect on their practice, present ideas and
acquire new knowledge (Moreno-Poyato et al., 2019). However,
these studies have not specifically evaluated the contribution be-
tween the EBP and its dimensions and the therapeutic relation-
ship from a quantitative point of view (Moreno-Poyato et al., 2019;
Moreno-Poyato et al., 2018).
Considering the impact of EBP on the therapeutic relationship in
nursing practice in general and understanding the therapeutic rela-
tionship as the essence of nursing practice in mental health (Felton
et al., 2018; Moreno-Poyato et al., 2016), it is imperative to study
the impact of EBP on this relationship in mental health units. Further
knowledge is clearly necessary, considering that the work performed
by mental health nurses in the context of the therapeutic relation-
ship must be translated into practice following the established
guidelines of empirical-theoretical precepts based on EBP. No stud-
ies to date have evaluated the relationship between both constructs.
1764 | MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
It is therefore essential to research the association between the dif-
ferent dimensions of EBP and the therapeutic relationship and its
factors, while considering the relationship between EBP and the
socio-demographic and professional characteristics of nurses, to
develop strategies to improve the quality of the nurse–patient ther-
apeutic relationship in mental health units.
2 | T H E S T U DY
2.1 | Aims
The aims of this study were to examine the relationship between the
dimensions of evidence-based practice and the therapeutic relation-
ship and to predict the quality of the therapeutic relationship from
these dimensions among nurses working in mental health units.
2.2 | Design
This cross-sectional, correlational study sought to explore the asso-
ciation between dimensions for EBP and the level of the therapeutic
relationship among mental health unit nurses. The data collected for
this study were part of the first phase of a mixed-method project
entitled MiTRCIME.CAT, which aimed to improve the therapeutic re-
lationship by implementing evidence-based practice in acute mental
health units in Catalonia (Spain).
2.3 | Sample/Participants
The 21 mental health hospitalization units forming part of the
Catalonian Network of Mental Health were informed of this study,
of which 18 units agreed to participate. All the nurses employed
at the collaborating units were invited to participate in the study
(n = 235). Resident nurses who were on clinical placements were
excluded from the study. Finally, 198 nurses participated in the
study. Considering that, to perform a multiple linear regression, it is
recommended to introduce one variable for every 10–15 individuals
(Austin & Steyerberg, 2015; Green, 1991) and that in our study, nine
variables were collected for each individual, the final sample size was
considered appropriate.
2.4 | Data collection
First, the director of each institution, plus the research team, selected
a nurse coordinator for each centre who fulfilled the conditions of
leadership and credibility and agreed to participate voluntarily in the
study. Thereafter, to recruit participants from each unit, the principal
investigator presented the research project and its aims to each cen-
tre via informational sessions with nurses. Thereafter, the nurse coor-
dinators were placed in charge of recruiting the participating nurses
and gathering the informed consent forms and email addresses to
provide them with a confidential participant code, together with a
link to the electronic form via the google forms platform to gather
the data during the first phase of the study. The data collection for
this part of the study took place between February and April 2018.
The electronic form included a questionnaire which gathered nurses’
socio-demographic and professional data and measurement tools,
including the Work Alliance Inventory – Short (WAI-S: Horvath &
Greenberg, 1989) and the Evidence-Based Practice Questionnaire
(EBPQ-19: Upton & Upton, 2006).
2.5 | Ethical considerations
This study was approved by the Research Ethics Committees of all
the participating hospitals and participating nurses signed a con-
sent form. The consent forms and the completed questionnaire
were given to participants as separate forms and data were treated
confidentially.
2.6 | Data analysis
The quantitative variables were expressed as the mean and the
standard deviation. The categorical variables were expressed as the
number and percentage. In the bivariate analysis, the association be-
tween the quantitative variables was evaluated using the Pearson’s
correlation coefficient. The relationship between quantitative and
categorical variables was determined using the Student’s t-test.
Finally, multiple linear regression models were used for the analy-
sis of the therapeutic relationship according to the EBPQ and by in-
troducing the socio-demographic profile and professional variables
of nurses as covariates. The choice of covariates was made based
on possible theoretical associations between the main factor (EBP)
and these variables. The socio-demographic and professional vari-
ables introduced in each of the models were gender, years of mental
health experience, mental health specialty and highest education.
Age was not included to avoid redundancy and multicollinearity.
Statistically significant results were established with a p-value of
<.05. The statistical analyses were calculated using the SPSS V 22.0
statistical package (SPSS Inc., Chicago, IL).
2.7 | Validity and reliability
The level of the therapeutic relationship was measured using the
Working Alliance Inventory-Short (WAI-S). The short version of
this scale contains 12 items, and each item is assessed by the health
professional based on a scale ranging from 1 (never) to 7 (always).
The scoring range of the overall WAI-S is 12–84 points. The higher
the score, the higher the therapeutic relationship. This question-
naire has three dimensions: (a) bond: the bond between patient
and nurse, which includes aspects such as empathy, mutual trust
| 1765MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
T
A
B
L
E
1
R
el
at
io
ns
hi
p
of
n
ur
se
s’
s
oc
io
-d
em
og
ra
ph
ic
a
nd
p
ro
fe
ss
io
na
l v
ar
ia
bl
es
w
it
h
th
e
EB
P
Q
a
nd
W
A
I-
S
V
ar
ia
bl
es
n
P
ra
ct
ic
e
A
tt
it
ud
e
K
no
w
le
dg
e/
Sk
ill
s
EB
P
Q
W
A
I-
S
C
or
re
la
ti
on
co
ef
fi
ci
en
t
(r
)
M
ea
n
(S
D
)
p
C
or
re
la
ti
on
co
ef
fi
ci
en
t
(r
)
M
ea
n
(S
D
)
p
C
or
re
la
ti
on
co
ef
fi
ci
en
t
(r
)
M
ea
n
(S
D
)
p
C
or
re
la
ti
on
co
ef
fi
ci
en
t
(r
)
M
ea
n
(S
D
)
p
C
or
re
la
ti
on
co
ef
fi
ci
en
t
(r
)
M
ea
n
(S
D
)
p
A
ge
(y
ea
rs
)
19
8
−
0.
02
4
.7
42
a
0.
02
9
.6
8
4a
−
0.
0
85
.2
35
a
−
0.
0
4
0
.5
77
a
0.
14
3
.0
4
4
Ye
ar
s
of
M
H
ex
pe
ri
en
ce
19
8
−
0.
01
5
0
83
6a
–
0.
02
3
.7
50
a
−
0.
01
3
.8
61
a
−
0.
02
0
.7
82
a
0.
22
1
.0
02
Se
x Fe
m
al
e
14
2
4.
5
(1
.2
)
.5
25
b
5.
7
(0
.7
)
.7
63
b
4.
5
(1
.0
)
.3
6
4b
4.
9
(0
.8
)
.9
79
b
62
.4
(5
.9
)
.4
85
M
al
e
56
4.
4
(1
.2
)
5.
7
(0
.7
)
4.
7
(0
.9
)
4.
9
(0
.8
)
61
.7
(5
.5
)
H
ig
he
st
e
du
ca
ti
on
B
ac
he
lo
r’s
de
gr
ee
13
2
4.
4
(1
.2
)
.1
0
4b
5.
6
(0
.7
)
.2
58
b
4.
4
(1
.0
)
<
.0
01
b
4.
8
(0
.8
)
.0
03
b
61
.6
(6
.0
)
0.
02
7b
P
hD
o
r
m
as
te
r’s
de
gr
ee
66
4.
7
(1
.2
)
5.
8
(0
.7
)
5.
0
(0
.9
)
5.
2
(0
.8
)
63
.5
(5
.1
)
M
H
S
pe
ci
al
ty
Ye
s
39
4.
6
(1
.2
)
.7
53
b
5.
7
(0
.7
)
.9
03
b
4.
4
(1
.2
)
.1
71
b
4.
9
(0
.9
)
.6
97
b
62
.5
(5
.9
)
0.
72
0
b
N
o
15
9
4.
5
(1
.2
)
5.
7
(0
.7
)
4.
6
(1
.0
)
4.
9
(0
.8
)
62
.1
(5
.8
)
N
ot
e:
E
B
P
Q
, E
vi
de
nc
e-
B
as
ed
P
ra
ct
ic
e
Q
ue
st
io
nn
ai
re
; M
H
, m
en
ta
l h
ea
lt
h;
S
D
, S
ta
nd
ar
d
de
vi
at
io
n;
W
A
I-
S,
W
or
ki
ng
A
lli
an
ce
In
ve
nt
or
y
Sh
or
t.
a P
ea
rs
on
’ c
or
re
la
ti
on
c
oe
ff
ic
ie
nt
b S
tu
de
nt
‘s
t
t
es
t
1766 | MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
and acceptance; (b) objectives: the agreement between patient and
nurse on the goals of therapy (i.e., mutual acceptance of what the in-
tervention aims to achieve); and (c) tasks or activities: the agreement
between patient and nurse on the tasks or activities to be carried
out. The Spanish version of the WAI-S has good reliability and valid-
ity, with a Cronbach alpha of 0.93 (Andrade-González & Fernández-
Liria, 2015). In the case of our sample, the Cronbach’s alpha value
for the total scale was 0.71, the subscales for tasks and bonding pre-
sented internal consistencies of 0.73 and 0.56, respectively, whereas
the subscale objectives had a lower internal consistency of 0.31.
Evidence-based practice was measured using the Evidence-
Based Practice Questionnaire (EBPQ-19) developed by Upton and
Upton (2006). The EBPQ-19 Questionnaire consists of 19 items,
structured in three dimensions: (a) practice, which includes six
items (e.g. ‘Formulated a clearly answerable question as the begin-
ning of the process towards filling this gap or ‘Tracked down the
relevant evidence once you have formulated the question’); (b) atti-
tude with three items (e.g., ‘I welcome questions on my practice’ or
‘Evidence-based practice is fundamental to professional practice’);
and (c) professional knowledge and skills for evidence-based prac-
tice with 10 items (e.g., ‘Knowledge of how to retrieve evidence’ or
‘Ability to critically analyze evidence against set standards’). Each
item scores from 1–7, with 1 being the least favourable value and
7 the most favourable in terms of competence in the application of
EBP. The scale ranges from 19–133 points. We used the Spanish
adaptation of this questionnaire validated by Pedro Gómez
et al. (2009) with Cronbach’s alpha values of 0.89, 0.72 and 0.92
for each of the factors. In our sample, the Cronbach’s alpha values
were 0.92 for the total scale and 0.88, 0.50 and 0.92 for each of
the factors.
3 | R E S U LT S
Of the 235 nurses who were invited to participate, 198 nurses
agreed to participate in the study and answered the form. The aver-
age age of participants was 33.8 years (SD 9.23). Only 27.5% were
male and almost 80% of the nurses lacked the official qualification
of mental health nurse. One third of the nurses (33.2%) had offi-
cial postgraduate training (Masters or PhD studies). The mean num-
ber of years’ experience in mental health was 7.9 years (SD 7.45).
Regarding the relationship between the nurses’ socio-demographic
and professional variables and the EBPQ and WAI, experience in
mental health was associated with a greater therapeutic alliance
(r = 0.221, p = .002) whereas no association was found with a greater
EBPQ. Furthermore, associations between higher academic level
and greater competence for EBP were found (t = -2.957, p = .003).
T A B L E 2 Relationship between the EBPQ and the level of
therapeutic relationship of nurses
Variable Practice Attitude
Knowledge/
Skills EBPQ
Bond 0.194** 0.273*** 0.244*** 0.287***
Objectives 0.089 0.189** 0.058 0.127
Tasks 0.250*** 0.265*** 0.308*** 0.340***
WAI-S 0.233*** 0.317*** 0.264*** 0.328***
Note: EBPQ, Evidence-Based Practice Questionnaire; WAI-S, Working
Alliance Inventory Short.
*p < .05,
**p < .01,
***p < .001.
Variable β
Model 1
(Adj R2 = 0.161)
P-value β
Model 2
(Adj R2 = 0.175)
P-value95% CI 95% CI
Gender
(female)
1.135 −0.554-2.823 .187 1.142 −0.538-2.822 .181
Years of MH
experience
0.222 0.107-0.336 <.0001 0.224 0.111-0.338 <.0001
Highest
education
(PhD or
master’s
degree)
1.355 −0.277-2.987 .103 1.427 −0.225-3.079 .090
MH Nursing
Specialty
(no)
1.430 −0.698-3.557 .187 1.473 −0.658-3.604 .174
EBPQ 2.276 1.303-3.250 <.0001
Practice 0.285 −0.484-1.054 .465
Attitude 2.047 0.876-3.217 .001
Knowledge/
Skills
0.619 −0.312-1.550 .191
Note: Abbreviations:EBPQ, Evidence-Based Practice Questionnaire; CI, confidence interval; MH,
mental health
T A B L E 3 Multiple linear regression
examining the association between the
EBPQ and the therapeutic relationship
(N = 198)
| 1767MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
Likewise, higher academic level was associated with greater thera-
peutic alliance (t = -2.222, p = .027). In contrast, specific training as a
mental health nurse specialist was not related with either EBP or the
therapeutic alliance (Table 1).
A bivariate analysis was conducted to study the association be-
tween the dimensions of the EBP competence of nurses and the
therapeutic alliance and associated factors. A significant positive
correlation was observed between most dimensions and the total
scores of both scales. Particularly noteworthy were the positive as-
sociations between competence for EBP and the relationship of the
same with the level of the therapeutic alliance, specifically regarding
the factor for agreement on tasks (Table 2).
To determine whether the level of therapeutic alliance could be
explained, firstly, by the competence for EBP and the socio-profes-
sional factors of the nurses and secondly, incorporating the dimen-
sions of competence for EBP and the socio-professional factors, two
linear regressions were calculated (Table 3). Model 1 was significant
(F (5, 192) = 8.568, p < .0001), with the variables incorporated into
the model representing 16.1% of the variation in the level of nurses’
therapeutic alliance. It should be noted that competence for EBP was
the most influential variable in this first model (β = 2,276, p < .0001).
The second model (F (7, 190) = 6,972, p < .0001) revealed that the
most influential dimension for therapeutic alliance was the attitude
towards EBP (β = 2,047, p = .001). This model explained 17.5% of the
variation of the level of the therapeutic relationship.
Subsequently, we examined the influence of the competence
dimensions for EBP and each of the factors of the therapeutic al-
liance. For this purpose, linear regressions were calculated once
again, adjusted for nurses’ socio-professional variables. The models
that emerged from examining the influence of EBP on the bond and
the agreement on therapy goals between nurses and their patients,
were also significant, although they only explained 10% and 5% of
the changes in the bond (F (7, 190) = 4.034, p < .0001) and in the
agreement on therapy goals (F (7, 190) = 2.558, p = 0,015). In both
models, the only influential dimension was attitude towards EBP, with
β = 0.686 (p = .005) and β = 0.735 (p = .014) respectively. However,
when examining the influence of EBP dimensions on task agreement,
once again a model was obtained which explained over 16% of the
changes in the agreement on tasks (F (7, 190) = 6.610, p < .0001). In
this model, experience (β = 0.096, p < .0001) and gender (β = 0.872,
p = .027) were significant socio-professional variables for nurses.
In addition, in this model it is noteworthy that attitude (β = 0.625,
p = .023) and knowledge/skills for EBP (β = 0.500, p = .022) were
predictor variables (Table 4).
4 | D I S C U S S I O N
The aim of this study was to examine the relationship between the
dimensions of EBP among mental health nurses and the therapeutic
relationship they establish with their patients. According to our find-
ings, it is worth highlighting that a greater EBP improves the thera-
peutic relationship established by nurses in mental health units.
Although this relationship appears to be evident from a theoretical-
conceptual point of view, since therapeutic relationship has tradi-
tionally been considered as the axis of care in mental health nursing
(Felton et al., 2018; Harris & Panozzo, 2019; Peplau, 1988), this find-
ing enables us to confirm the association between both constructs,
from a quantitative point of view. This reinforces the statement that
the therapeutic relationship is not only based on an experiential con-
struction of a relationship between nurse and patient (McAndrew
et al., 2014), rather it also improves when the nurse shows greater
competence for EBP.
In terms of the specific characteristics of nurses, it should be
noted that, unlike other studies, the nurses who showed the great-
est competence for EBP were those with the highest educational
T A B L E 4 Association between nurses’ characteristics and EBPQ’s subscales with WAI’s subscales (N = 198)
Dependent
variables
Bond
(Adj R2 = 0.097)
Goals
(Adj R2 = 0.052)
Tasks
(Adj R2 = 0.166)
Independent
variables β 95% CI
P-
value β 95% CI P-value β 95% CI P-value
Gender (female) 0.240 −0.452 to 0.931 .495 0.031 −0.808 to 0.870 .943 0.872 0.099 to 1.645 .027
Years of MH
experience
0.050 0.003 to 0.097 .037 0.079 0.022 to 0.135 .007 0.096 0.044 to 0.148 <.001
Highest
education (PhD
or master’s
degree)
0.529 −0.151 to 1.209 .126 0.564 −0.261 to 1.389 .179 0.333 −0.426 to 1.093 .388
MH Nursing
Specialty (no)
0.383 −0.495 to 1.260 .391 0.112 −0.952 to 1.176 .836 0.978 −0.002 to 1.958 .05
Practice 0.058 −0.258 to 0.375 .718 0.071 −0.313 to 0.455 .715 0.156 −0.198 to 0.510 .385
Attitude 0.686 0.204 to 1.168 .005 0.735 0.151 to 1.320 .014 0.625 0.087 to 1.164 .023
Knowledge/
Skills
0.267 −0.117 to 0.650 .172 −0.147 −0.612 to 0.318 .533 0.500 0.072 to 0.928 .022
Note: Abbreviation:EBPQ, Evidence-Based Practice Questionnaire; WAI, Working Alliance Inventory; CI, confidence interval; MH, mental health
1768 | MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
level (Wonder et al., 2017; Moore, 2017; Rojjanasrirat & Rice, 2017).
However, in line with other previous studies, the nurses’ experi-
ence was not associated with improved EBP (Wonder et al., 2017;
Moore, 2017; Rojjanasrirat & Rice, 2017). This fact is remarkable
given that experience is a factor associated with EBP from a the-
oretical point of view (DiCenso et al., 1998) and some studies have
also confirmed this association (Hamaideh, 2017; Zhou et al., 2016).
Likewise, no differences were found regarding whether the nurses
had training in the specialty of mental health nursing. We were un-
able to compare this finding with other studies due to a lack of liter-
ature in this area, however, it raises the question of whether training
for mental health specialists in our context is including content on
EBP.
Regarding the association between EBP dimensions and the
therapeutic relationship, the dimension which most influenced
the overall therapeutic relationship was the attitude of nurses to-
wards EBP. In fact, the attitude towards EBP is often the highest
rated factor by nurses in most settings and specialties (Cavazos-
Rehg et al., 2014; Wonder et al., 2017; Moore, 2017; Ramos-
Morcillo et al., 2015; Zhou et al., 2016). In addition, nurses’ beliefs
and attitudes about the importance and value of EBP have been
identified as one of the most important attributes for implement-
ing EBP (Schaefer & Welton, 2018). When nurses have positive
attitudes on this topic, it is easier for them to implement changes
in their daily practice (Saunders & Vehviläinen-Julkunenb, 2016).
The attitude of the nurse towards the recipient of their care is
an inherent part of the profession, which must be focused on pa-
tients’ needs, as negative attitudes prevent the establishment of
a quality therapeutic relationship (Wahl & Aroesty-Cohen, 2010).
Teaching future professionals should not reinforce certain nega-
tive attitudes but rather create strategies in the studies that help
generate attitudes of greater acceptance and understanding of the
person. However, neither practice nor knowledge explained im-
provements in the overall therapeutic relationship. Indeed, both
knowledge and practice of EBP were the dimensions that scored
the lower mean scores by the nurses. These results could be due
to the difficulties described in the literature affecting EBP in men-
tal health nursing such as lack of training, lack of time and lack of
resources for EBP, factors that directly affect both nurses’ knowl-
edge and the use of evidence in clinical practice (Alzayyat, 2014;
Hamaideh, 2017; Yadav & Fealy, 2012).
The analysis of the association between EBP dimensions and
each of the dimensions of the therapeutic relationship, revealed
a significant association between the attitude towards EBP and
experience and each of the dimensions of the therapeutic relation-
ship. The results indicate that a better attitude towards EBP al-
lows the establishment of a greater bond of trust with the patient
in the context of the therapeutic relationship, an element with a
strong attitudinal component (Bordin, 1979) and basic in the first
phase of the therapeutic relationship (Peplau, 1997). In this sense,
a higher score in the attitude towards EBP represents nurses who
are open to dialogue and change, who do not judge others when
they criticize their actions and who try to integrate opinions and
knowledge as part of a possible improvement. In short, a nurse
who accepts comments and does not judge these, who adopts the
patients’ perspective and accepts it, strengthening the link formed
in the nurse–patient therapeutic relationship (Moreno-Poyato &
Rodríguez-Nogueira, 2020). However, the nurses’ experience
had more weight in explaining the improvements in factors such
as agreement on goals and tasks. It should also be noted that a
better agreement on the tasks was influenced by attitude and by
a greater knowledge and skills for EBP. Consequently, a higher
level of knowledge and skills of EBP nurses is more relevant in
the working phase during the therapeutic relationship process
(Peplau, 1997). This finding is particularly relevant as it confirms
that knowledge and skills for EBP are necessary for person-cen-
tred care and shared decision-making. These are aspects that
positively condition the therapeutic relationship and are directly
related to the trend in current mental health care that focuses on
the paradigm of autonomy and the recovery model which recog-
nizes the importance of person-centred care. The main elements
of the recovery model include a greater involvement of the service
users, a vision of the person beyond his or her illness and the fa-
cilitating treatment selection. In short, the recovery model aims
to reverse the role of the service user from being a follower to
another where they can lead, change and direct their own care
(Newman et al., 2015; Smith & Williams, 2016).
4.1 | Limitations
This study has several limitations. First, the cross-sectional de-
sign did not allow us to detect changes in nurses’ perceptions
over time, nor make causal inferences. Second, it is important to
consider that the therapeutic relationship was assessed as a gen-
eral measure and, this was related with nurses’ overall percep-
tions of the therapeutic relationship, which could have differed
from those of their patients. Finally, although the purpose of the
study was not to validate the scales used, it should be noted that
the internal consistency of the objectives subscale of the WAI-S
in our study was low. In contrast, one of the study strengths was
the rate of participation among nurses in the participating institu-
tions. Therefore, the results can be generalized to the nurses of
mental health units in Spain. It is likely that the results can be ex-
trapolated to other countries where the training plans for nurses
and the care settings in mental health units are similar to those
of this study. Furthermore, we identified specific relationships
between the dimensions of EBP and the therapeutic relationship
and, although the degree of influence from the predictive point
of view was not high, it should be considered that taking into ac-
count that the therapeutic relationship is a multifaceted construct,
the amount of explained variance is significant and could be con-
sidered to be high. These findings suggest the need to perform
further in-depth studies of the factors that influence the quality of
the therapeutic relationship. In addition, it would be advisable to
replicate the study on an international level to confirm the results
| 1769MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
and to elaborate strategies to improve EBP and, consequently, im-
prove the quality of the therapeutic relationship.
5 | C O N C L U S I O N
The results of our study contribute to a greater understanding of the
relationship between the dimensions of evidence-based practice and
therapeutic relationship in nurses working in mental health units. The
results confirm that increased evidence-based practice improves the
establishment of the nurse–patient therapeutic relationship in mental
health units. In general, the association of nurses’ attitudes with their
experience in therapeutic relationship is noteworthy. Specifically, an
improved nurse attitude and knowledge of evidence-based practice
increases shared decision-making with patients, which is basic to per-
son-centred care. An improved attitude towards EBP is likely to help
nurses working in mental health units to apply the knowledge acquired
in daily clinical practice, improving care through new evidence-based
practices.
A C K N O W L E D G M E N T S
We would like to acknowledge all the participants of MiRTCIME.
CAT project and the College of Nurses of Barcelona for financial
support (PR-218/2017). We also thank Dr. Xavier Duran from the
Methodological and Biostatistical Advisory Service of the IMIM,
Barcelona, for his cooperation.
C O N F L I C T O F I N T E R E S T
No conflict of interest has been declared by the authors.
A U T H O R C O N T R I B U T I O N S
ARMP, JFRM and GCG made substantial contributions to the con-
ception or design of the work; or the acquisition, analysis or inter-
pretation of data for the work. JFRM contributed the main part of
the data analysis. ARMP, JFRM, GCG and ORN helped in drafting
the work or revising it critically for important intellectual content.
ARMP, JFRM, GCG and ORN contributed to final approval of the
version to be published. Agreement to be accountable for all aspects
of the work in ensuring that questions related to the accuracy or
integrity of any part of the work are appropriately investigated and
resolved by ARMP.
F U N D I N G I N F O R M AT I O N
College of Nurses of Barcelona (PR-218/2017).
P E E R R E V I E W
The peer review history for this article is available at https://publo
ns.com/publo n/10.1111/jan.14715.
O R C I D
Antonio R. Moreno-Poyato https://orcid.org/0000-0002-5700-4315
Georgina Casanova-Garrigos https://orcid.org/0000-0002-3652-9745
Juan F. Roldán-Merino https://orcid.org/0000-0002-7895-6083
R E F E R E N C E S
Alzayyat, A. S. (2014). Barriers to evidence-based practice utilization in
psychiatric/mental health nursing. Issues in Mental Health Nursing,
35(2), 134–143. https://doi.org/10.3109/01612 840.2013.848385
Andrade-González, N., & Fernández-Liria, A. (2015). Spanish adaptation
of the working alliance inventory-short (WAI-S). Current Psychology,
35(1), 169–177. https://doi.org/10.1007/s1214 4-015-9365-3
Austin, P. C., & Steyerberg, E. W. (2015). The number of subjects per
variable required in linear regression analyses. Journal of Clinical
Epidemiology, 68(6), 627–636. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclin
epi.2014.12.014
Bordin, E. S. (1979). The generalizability of the psychoanalytic concept
of the working alliance. Psychotherapy: Theory, Research & Practice,
16(3), 252–260. https://doi.org/10.1037/h0085885
Cavazos-Rehg, P. A., Breslau, N., Hatsukami, D., Krauss, M. J., Spitznagel,
E. L., Grucza, R. A., Salyer, P., Hartz, S. M., & Bierut, L. J. (2014).
Smoking cessation is associated with lower rates of mood/anxiety
and alcohol use disorders. Psychological Medicine, 44(12), 2523–
2535. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033 29171 3003206
Correa, V. C., Lugo-Agudelo, L. H., Aguirre-Acevedo, D. C., Contreras, J.
A. P., Borrero, A. M. P., Patiño-Lugo, D. F., & Valencia, D. A. C. (2020).
Individual, health system and contextual barriers and facilitators for
the implementation of clinical practice guidelines: A systematic me-
tareview. Health Research Policy and Systems, 18(1), 74. https://doi.
org/10.1186/s1296 1-020-00588 -8
de Pedro Gómez, J., Morales Asencio, J. M., Sesé Abad, A., Bennasar
Veny, M., Ruiz Roman, M. J., & Muñoz Ronda, F. J. (2009). Validación
de la versión española del cuestionario sobre la práctica basada en
la evidencia en enfermeras. Revista Española De Salud Pública, 83(4),
577–586.
DiCenso, A., Cullum, N., & Ciliska, D. (1998). Implementing evi-
dence-based nursing: Some misconceptions. Evidence-Based Nursing,
1(2), 36–37. https://doi.org/10.1136/ebn.1.2.38
Felton, A., Repper, J., & Avis, M. (2018). Therapeutic relationships, risk
and mental health practice. International Journal of Mental Health
Nursing, 27(3), 1137–1148. https://doi.org/10.1111/inm.12430
Green, S. B. (1991). How many subjects does it take to do a regression
analysis. Multivariate Behavioral Research, 26(3), 499–510. https://doi.
org/10.1207/s1532 7906m br2603_7
Hagedorn Wonder, A., McNelis, A. M., Spurlock, D., Ironside, P. M.,
Lancaster, S., Davis, C. R., Gainey, M., & Verwers, N. (2017).
Comparison of nurses’ self-reported and objectively measured ev-
idence-based practice knowledge. Journal of Continuing Education
in Nursing, 48(2), 65–70. https://doi.org/10.3928/00220 124-20170
119-06
Hamaideh, S. H. (2017). Sources of knowledge and barriers of imple-
menting evidence-based practice among mental health nurses in
Saudi Arabia. Perspectives in Psychiatric Care, 53(3), 190–198. https://
doi.org/10.1111/ppc.12156
Hamovitch, E. K., Choy-Brown, M., & Stanhope, V. (2018). Person-
centered care and the therapeutic alliance. Community Mental Health
Journal, 54(7), 951–958. https://doi.org/10.1007/s1059 7-018-0295-z
Harris, B. A., & Panozzo, G. (2019). Therapeutic alliance, relationship
building and communication strategies-for the schizophrenia pop-
ulation: An integrative review. Archives of Psychiatric Nursing, 33(1),
104–111. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apnu.2018.08.003
Hartley, S., Raphael, J., Lovell, K., & Berry, K. (2019). Effective nurse-patient
relationships in mental health care: A systematic review of interven-
tions to improve the therapeutic alliance. International Journal of Nursing
Studies, 102, 103490. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnur stu.2019.103490
Horvath, A. O., & Greenberg, L. S. (1989). Development and validation
of the Working Alliance Inventory. Journal of Counseling Psychology,
36(2), 223–233. https://doi.org/10.1037/0022-0167.36.2.223
Kelley, J. M., Kraft-Todd, G., Schapira, L., Kossowsky, J., & Riess, H. (2014).
The influence of the patient-clinician relationship on healthcare
1770 | MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
outcomes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized
controlled trials. PLoS One, 9(4), e94207. https://doi.org/10.1371/
journ al.pone.0094207
McAllister, S., Robert, G., Tsianakas, V., & McCrae, N. (2019).
Conceptualising nurse-patient therapeutic engagement on acute
mental health wards: An integrative review. International Journal
of Nursing Studies, 93, 106–118. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnur
stu.2019.02.013
McAndrew, S., Chambers, M., Nolan, F., Thomas, B., & Watts, P. (2014).
Measuring the evidence: Reviewing the literature of the measure-
ment of therapeutic engagement in acute mental health inpatient
wards. International Journal of Mental Health Nursing, 23(3), 212–220.
https://doi.org/10.1111/inm.12044
Moore, L. (2017). Effectiveness of an online educational module in
improving evidence-based practice skills of practicing registered
nurses. Worldviews on Evidence-Based Nursing, 14(5), 358–366.
https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12214
Moreno-Poyato, A. R., Delgado-Hito, P., Leyva-Moral, J. M., Casanova-
Garrigós, G., & Montesó-Curto, P. (2019). Implementing evi-
dence-based practices on the therapeutic relationship in inpatient
psychiatric care: A participatory action research. Journal of Clinical
Nursing, 28(9–10), 1614–1622. https://doi.org/10.1111/jocn.14759
Moreno-Poyato, A. R., Delgado-Hito, P., Suárez-Pérez, R., Lluch-Canut,
T., Roldán-Merino, J. F., & Montesó-Curto, P. (2018). Improving the
therapeutic relationship in inpatient psychiatric care: Assessment
of the therapeutic alliance and empathy after implementing ev-
idence-based practices resulting from participatory action re-
search. Perspectives in Psychiatric Care, 54(2), 300–308. https://doi.
org/10.1111/ppc.12238
Moreno-Poyato, A. R., Montesó-Curto, P., Delgado-Hito, P., Suárez-
Pérez, R., Aceña-Domínguez, R., Carreras-Salvador, R., Leyva-Moral,
J. M., Lluch-Canut, T., & Roldán-Merino, J. F. (2016). The therapeutic
relationship in inpatient psychiatric care: A narrative review of the
perspective of nurses and patients. Archives of Psychiatric Nursing,
30(6), 782–787. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apnu.2016.03.001
Moreno-Poyato, A. R., & Rodríguez-Nogueira, Ó. (2020). The association
between empathy and the nurse–patient therapeutic relationship in
mental health units: A cross-sectional study. Journal of Psychiatric and
Mental Health Nursing. https://doi.org/10.1111/jpm.12675
Newman, D., O’Reilly, P., Lee, S. H., & Kennedy, C. (2015). Mental health
service users’ experiences of mental health care: An integrative liter-
ature review. Journal of Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing, 22(3),
171–182. https://doi.org/10.1111/jpm.12202
Peplau, H. E. (1988). Interpersonal relations in nursing : A conceptual frame
of reference for psychodynamic nursing. Macmillan.
Peplau, H. E. (1997). Peplau’s theory of interpersonal relations. Nursing
Science Quarterly, 10(4), 162–167. https://doi.org/10.1177/08943
18497 01000407
Ramos-Morcillo, A. J., Fernández-Salazar, S., Ruzafa-Martínez, M.,
& Del-Pino-Casado, R. (2015). Effectiveness of a brief, basic ev-
idence-based practice course for clinical nurses. Worldviews on
Evidence-Based Nursing / Sigma Theta Tau International, Honor Society
of Nursing, 12(4), 199–207. https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12103
Rojjanasrirat, W., & Rice, J. (2017). Evidence-based practice knowledge, atti-
tudes and practice of online graduate nursing students. Nurse Education
Today, 53, 48–53. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2017.04.005
Saunders, H., & Vehviläinen-Julkunenb, K. (2016). The state of readiness
for evidence-based practice among nurses: An integrative review.
International Journal of Nursing Studies, 56, 128–140. https://doi.
org/10.1016/j.ijnur stu.2015.10.018
Schaefer, J. D., & Welton, J. M. (2018). Evidence based practice readi-
ness: A concept analysis. Journal of Nursing Management, 26(6), 621–
629. https://doi.org/10.1111/jonm.12599
Smith, G. P., & Williams, T. M. (2016). From providing a service to being
of service: Advances in person-centred care in mental health. Current
Opinion in Psychiatry, 29(5), 292–297. https://doi.org/10.1097/
YCO.00000 00000 000264
Stevens, K. R. (2013). The impact of evidence-based practice in nursing
and the next big ideas. Online Journal of Issues in Nursing, 18(2), 4.
https://doi.org/10.3912/OJIN.Vol18 No02M an04
Upton, D., & Upton, P. (2006). Development of an evidence-based prac-
tice questionnaire for nurses. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 53(4),
454–458. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.03739.x
Vahidi, M., Ebrahimi, H., Areshtanab, H. N., Jafarabadi, M. A., Lees,
D., Foong, A., & Cleary, M. (2018). Therapeutic relationships and
safety of care in Iranian psychiatric inpatient units. Issues in Mental
Health Nursing, 39(11), 967–976. https://doi.org/10.1080/01612
840.2018.1485795
Wahl, O., & Aroesty-Cohen, E. (2010). Attitudes of mental health profes-
sionals about mental illness: A review of the recent literature. Journal
of Community Psychology, 38(1), 49–62. https://doi.org/10.1002/
jcop.20351
Warren, J. I., Mclaughlin, M., Bardsley, J., Eich, J., Esche, C. A., Kropkowski,
L., & Risch, S. (2016). The strengths and challenges of implementing
EBP in healthcare systems. Worldviews on Evidence-Based Nursing,
13(1), 15–24. https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12149
Yadav, B. L., & Fealy, G. M. (2012). Irish psychiatric nurses’ self-reported
barriers, facilitators and skills for developing evidence-based prac-
tice. Journal of Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing, 19(2), 116–122.
https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2850.2011.01763.x
Youssef, N. F. A., Alshraifeen, A., Alnuaimi, K., & Upton, P. (2018). Egyptian
and Jordanian nurse educators’ perception of barriers preventing
the implementation of evidence-based practice: A cross-sectional
study. Nurse Education Today, 64, 33–41. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.
nedt.2018.01.035
Zhou, F., Hao, Y., Guo, H., & Liu, H. (2016). Attitude, knowledge and practice
on Evidence-Based Nursing among Registered Nurses in Traditional
Chinese Medicine Hospitals: A multiple Center Cross-Sectional
Survey in China. Evidence-Based Complementary and Alternative
Medicine, 2016, 1–8. https://doi.org/10.1155/2016/5478086
How to cite this article: Moreno-Poyato AR, Casanova-
Garrigos G, Roldán-Merino JF, Rodríguez-Nogueira Ó;
MiRTCIME.CAT working group. Examining the association
between evidence-based practice and the nurse-patient
therapeutic relationship in mental health units: A cross-
sectional study. J Adv Nurs. 2021;77:1762–1771. https://doi.
org/10.1111/jan.14715
| 1771MORENO-POYATO ET Al.
The Journal of Advanced Nursing (JAN) is an international, peer-reviewed, scientific journal. JAN contributes to the advancement of evidence-based
nursing, midwifery and health care by disseminating high quality research and scholarship of contemporary relevance and with potential to advance
knowledge for practice, education, management or policy. JAN publishes research reviews, original research reports and methodological and
theoretical papers.
For further information, please visit JAN on the Wiley Online Library website: www.wileyonlinelibrary.com/journal/jan
Reasons to publish your work in JAN:
• High-impact forum: the world’s most cited nursing journal, with an Impact Factor of 1.998 – ranked 12/114 in the 2016 ISI Journal Citation
Reports © (Nursing (Social Science)).
• Most read nursing journal in the world: over 3 million articles downloaded online per year and accessible in over 10,000 libraries worldwide
(including over 3,500 in developing countries with free or low cost access).
• Fast and easy online submission: online submission at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jan.
• Positive publishing experience: rapid double-blind peer review with constructive feedback.
• Rapid online publication in five weeks: average time from final manuscript arriving in production to online publication.
• Online Open: the option to pay to make your article freely and openly accessible to non-subscribers upon publication on Wiley Online Library,
as well as the option to deposit the article in your own or your funding agency’s preferred archive (e.g. PubMed).
6054_IFC 20/07/17 11:58 AM Page 2
Everything you need to succeed…
in class, in clinical, on exams and on the NCLEX®
YOUR GUIDE TO
Psychiatric Mental
Health NursingLE
A
R
N
IN
G APP
LY
IN
G
A
SSESSING
LEARNING APPLYING ASSESSING
Your text provides the foundational
knowledge you need to know.
DavisPlus features interactive
clinical scenarios that show you
how theory applies to practice.
Davis Edge is the online Q&A
review platform that evaluates
your mastery of the material and
builds your test-taking skills.
Your text works together with DavisPlus and Davis Edge to make
this often intimidating, but must-know content easier to master.
Don’t miss everything that’s waiting online to make learning less
stressful…and save you time. Follow the instructions on the inside
front cover to use the access code to unlock your resources today.
Your journey to success
BEGINS HERE!
6054_IFC 20/07/17 11:58 AM Page 3
LEARNING
STEP #1
Build a solid foundation.
Movie Connections list films that demonstrate the conditions
and behaviors you may not encounter in clinical.
Quality and Safety Education for
Nurses (QSEN) Activities help you attain
the knowledge, skills, and attitudes
required to fulfill the initiative’s quality
and safety competencies.
Communication Exercises let you
practice your communication skills
with vignettes and questions that
prepare you for clinical and practice.
NEW! “Real People. Real Stories”
features interviews with patients
to bring their experiences to life.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 59
One of the Quality and Safety in Nursing Educa-
tion (QSEN) criteria identified by the Institute of
Medicine (IOM) (2003) stresses that the patient
must be at the center of decisions about treatment
(patient-centered care), and this type of assessment tool
provides an opportunity to actively engage the patient in
describing what medications have been effective or inef-
fective and identifying side effects that may impact will-
ingness to adhere to a medication regimen.
Antianxiety Agents
Background Assessment Data
Indications
Antianxiety drugs are also called anxiolytics and his-
torically were referred to as minor tranquilizers. They
are used in the treatment of anxiety disorders, anxiety
symptoms, acute alcohol withdrawal, skeletal muscle
spasms, convulsive disorders, status epilepticus, and
preoperative sedation. They are most appropriate for
BOX 4-1 Medication Assessment Tool
Date __________________________ Client’s Name __________________________________ Age ______________________
Marital Status ____________________ Children __________________________ Occupation ___________________________
Presenting Symptoms (subjective & objective) _______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Diagnosis (DSM-5) _____________________________________________________________________________________
Current Vital Signs: Blood Pressure: Sitting ________/________ ; Standing __________/__________; Pulse____________ ;
Respirations ____________ Height ___________________ Weight _______________________
CURRENT/PAST USE OF PRESCRIPTION DRUGS (Indicate with “c” or “p” beside name of drug whether current or past use):
Name Dosage How Long Used Why Prescribed By Whom Side Effects/Results
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
Name Dosage How Long Used Why Prescribed By Whom Side Effects/Results
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
CURRENT/PAST USE OF STREET DRUGS, ALCOHOL, NICOTINE, AND/OR CAFFEINE (Indicate with “c” or “p” beside
name of drug):
Name Amount Used How Often Used When Last Used Effects Produced
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ ______________________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ ______________________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ ______________________
Any allergies to food or drugs?____________________________________________________________________________
Any special diet considerations?___________________________________________________________________________
TA B L E 4 – 2 Effects of Psychotropic Medications on Neurotransmitters—cont’d
ACTION ON NEUROTRANSMITTER
EXAMPLE OF MEDICATION AND/OR RECEPTOR DESIRED EFFECTS SIDE EFFECTS
5-HT1A agonist
D2 agonist
D2 antagonist
Relieves anxiety Nausea, headache, dizziness
Restlessness
Antianxiety: buspirone
5-HT, 5-hydroxytryptamine (serotonin); ACh, acetylcholine; ADHD, attention deficit-hyperactivity disorder; BZ, benzodiazepine; D,
dopamine; EPS, extrapyramidal symptoms; GABA, gamma-aminobutyric acid; H, histamine; MAO, monoamine oxidase; MAO-A,
monoamine oxidase A; MAOI, monoamine oxidase inhibitor; NE, norepinephrine; SNRI, serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor;
SSRI, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor.
AU: Ok to
add here?
Continued
6054_Ch04_054-085 17/05/17 6:16 pm Page 59
6054_FM_i-xx 20/07/17 12:18 PM Page i
Therapeutic Communication Icon
identifies helpful interventions
and guidance on how to speak
with your patients. Look for this
icon in Care Plan sections.
A FREE ebook version of your text is available with
each new printed book to make studying and reviewing
easier. Use the access code on the inside front cover.
APPLYING
STEP #2
Practice in a
safe environment.
Clinical Scenarios on www.DavisPlus.com walk you
through the nursing process with client summaries,
multiple-choice questions with rationales, drag- and
drop activities, and so much more.
6054_FM_i-xx 20/07/17 12:18 PM Page ii
ASSESSING
ASS
ESSING
STEP #3
Study smarter, not harder.
Davis Edge is the interactive,
online Q&A review platform
that provides the practice
you need to master course
content and to improve your
scores on classroom exams.
Access it from a laptop,
tablet, or mobile device for
review and study on the go.
Assignments are made by
your instructor. Or, create
your own practice quizzes
to review before an exam.
6054_FM_i-xx 20/07/17 12:18 PM Page iii
Comprehensive rationales explain
why your responses are correct or
incorrect. Page-specific references
direct you to the relevant content in
Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing.
The Success Center offers a
snapshot of your progress
and identifies your strengths
and weaknesses.
The Feedback Report drills down to
show your performance in individual
content areas. It’s easy to create new
practice quizzes that focus on your
areas of weakness or to select the
topics or concepts you want to study.
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page iv
Psychiatric Mental
Health Nursing:
Concepts of Care in
Evidence-Based Practice
NINTH EDITION
Mary C. Townsend, DSN, PMHCNS-BC
Clinical Specialist/Nurse Consultant
Adult Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing
Former Assistant Professor and
Coordinator, Mental Health Nursing
Kramer School of Nursing
Oklahoma City University
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma
Karyn I. Morgan, RN, MSN, CNS
Psychiatric Clinical Nurse Specialist
Professor of Instruction, Mental Health Nursing
The University of Akron
Akron, OH
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page v
F. A. Davis Company
1915 Arch Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
www.fadavis.com
Copyright © 2018 by F. A. Davis Company
Copyright © 2018 by F. A. Davis Company. All rights reserved. This book is protected by copyright. No part of it may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without written permission from the publisher.
Printed in the United States of America
Last digit indicates print number: 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Senior Acquisitions Editor: Susan R. Rhyner
Content Project Manager II: Amy M. Romano
Electronic Project Editor: Samantha Olin
Cover Design: Carolyn O’Brien
As new scientific information becomes available through basic and clinical research, recommended treatments and drug therapies
undergo changes. The author(s) and publisher have done everything possible to make this book accurate, up to date, and in accord
with accepted standards at the time of publication. The author(s), editors, and publisher are not responsible for errors or omissions or
for consequences from application of the book, and make no warranty, expressed or implied, in regard to the contents of the book. Any
practice described in this book should be applied by the reader in accordance with professional standards of care used in regard to the
unique circumstances that may apply in each situation. The reader is advised always to check product information (package inserts) for
changes and new information regarding dose and contraindications before administering any drug. Caution is especially urged when
using new or infrequently ordered drugs.
Library of Congress Control Number: 2014944300
ISBN: 978-0-8036-6054-0
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Names: Townsend, Mary C., 1941- author. | Morgan, Karyn I., author.
Title: Psychiatric mental health nursing : concepts of care in evidence-based
practice / Mary C. Townsend, Karyn I. Morgan.
Description: Ninth edition. | Philadelphia, PA : F. A. Davis Company, [2018]
| Includes bibliographical references (p. ) and index.
Identifiers: LCCN 2017009564| ISBN 9780803660540 | ISBN 0803660545
Subjects: | MESH: Psychiatric Nursing—methods | Mental Disorders—nursing |
Evidence-Based Nursing
Classification: LCC RC440 | NLM WY 160 | DDC 616.89/0231—dc23 LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2017009564
Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use, or the internal or personal use of specific clients, is granted by F. A. Davis
Company for users registered with the Copyright Clearance Center (CCC) Transactional Reporting Service, provided that the fee of
$.25 per copy is paid directly to CCC, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923. For those organizations that have been granted a
photocopy license by CCC, a separate system of payment has been arranged. The fee code for users of the Transactional Reporting
Service is: 978-8036-6054-0/18 0 + $.25.
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page vi
THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED TO:
FRANCIE
God made sisters for sharing laughter
and wiping tears
–Mary Townsend
To my friend and mentor, Chaplain (Colonel) Thomas W. Elsey
He was dearly loved and will be deeply missed
October 26, 1942–November 10, 2015
–Karyn Morgan
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page vii
Theresa Aldelman
Bradley University
Peoria, Illinois
Fredrick Astle
University of South Carolina
Columbia, South Carolina
Carol Backstedt
Baton Rouge Community College
Baton Rouge, Louisiana
Elizabeth Bailey
Clinton Community College
Pittsburgh, New York
Sheryl Banak
Baptist Health Schools – Little Rock
Little Rock, Arkansas
Joy A. Barham
Northwestern State University
Shreveport, Louisiana
Barbara Barry
Cape Fear Community College
Wilmington, North Carolina
Carole Bomba
Harper College
Palatine, Illinois
Judy Bourrand
Samford University
Birmingham, Alabama
Susan Bowles
Barton Community College
Great Bend, Kansas
Wayne Boyer
College of the Desert
Palm Desert, California
Joyce Briggs
Ivy Tech Community College
Columbus, Indiana
Toni Bromley
Rogue Community College
Grants Pass, Oregon
Terrall Bryan
North Carolina A & T State University
Greensboro, North Carolina
Ruth Burkhart
New Mexico State University/Dona Ana Community
College
Las Cruces, New Mexico
Annette Cannon
Platt College
Aurora, Colorado
Deena Collins
Huron School of Nursing
Cleveland, Ohio
Martha Colvin
Georgia College & State University
Milledgeville, Georgia
Mary Jean Croft
St. Joseph School of Nursing
Providence, Rhode Island
Connie Cupples
Union University
Germantown, Tennessee
Karen Curlis
State University of New York Adirondack
Queensbury, New York
Nancy Cyr
North Georgia College and State University
Dahlonega, Georgia
Carol Danner
Baptist Health Schools Little Rock – School of Nursing
Little Rock, Arkansas
Carolyn DeCicco
Our Lady of Lourdes School of Nursing
Camden, New Jersey
Leona Dempsey, PhD, APNP (ret.), PMHCS-BC
University of Wisconsin Oshkosh
Oshkosh, Wisconsin
Debra J. DeVoe
Our Lady of Lourdes School of Nursing
Camden, New Jersey
Victoria T. Durkee, PhD, APRN
University of Louisiana at Monroe
Monroe, Louisiana
J. Carol Elliott
St. Anselm College
Fairfield, California
viii
Reviewers
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page viii
Reviewers ix
Sandra Farmer
Capital University
Columbus, Ohio
Patricia Freed
Saint Louis University
St. Louis, Missouri
Diane Gardner
University of West Florida
Pensacola, Florida
Maureen Gaynor
Saint Anselm College
Manchester, New Hampshire
Denise Glenore
West Coast University
Riverside, California
Sheilia R. Goodwin
Winston Salem State University
Salem, North Carolina
Janine Graf-Kirk
Trinitas School of Nursing
Elizabeth, New Jersey
Susan B. Grubbs
Francis Marion University
Florence, South Carolina
Elizabeth Gulledge
Jacksonville State University
Jacksonville, Alabama
Kim Gurcan
Columbus Practical School of Nursing
Columbus, Ohio
Patricia Jean Hedrick Young
Washington Hospital School of Nursing
Washington, Pennsylvania
Melinda Hermanns
University of Texas at Tyler
Tyler, Texas
Alison Hewig
Victoria College
Victoria, Texas
Cheryl Hilgenberg
Millikin University
Decatur, Illinois
Lori Hill
Gadsden State Community College
Gadsden, Alabama
Ruby Houldson
Illinois Eastern Community College
Olney, Illinois
Eleanor J. Jefferson
Community College of Denver
Platt College
Metropolitan St. College
Denver, Colorado
Dana Johnson
Mesa State College/Grand Junction Regional Center
Grand Junction, Colorado
Janet Johnson
Fort Berthold Community College
New Town, North Dakota
Nancy Kostin
Madonna University
Livonia, Michigan
Linda Lamberson
University of Southern Maine
Portland, Maine
Irene Lang
Bristol Community College
Fall River, Massachusetts
Rhonda Lansdell
Northeast MS Community College
Baldwyn, Mississippi
Jacqueline Leonard
Franciscan University of Steubenville
Steubenville, Ohio
Judith Lynch-Sauer
University of Michigan
Ann Arbor, Michigan
Glenna Mahoney
University of Saint Mary
Leavenworth, Kansas
Jacqueline Mangnall
Jamestown College
Jamestown, North Dakota
Lori A. Manilla
Hagerstown Community College
Hagerstown, Maryland
Patricia Martin
West Kentucky Community and Technical College
Paducah, Kentucky
Christine Massey
Barton College
Wilson, North Carolina
Joanne Matthews
University of Kentucky
Lexington, Kentucky
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page ix
Joanne McClave
Wayne Community College
Goldsboro, North Carolina
Mary McClay
Walla Walla University
Portland, Oregon
Susan McCormick
Brazosport College
Lake Jackson, Texas
Shawn McGill
Clovis Community College
Clovis, New Mexico
Margaret McIlwain
Gordon College
Barnesville, Georgia
Nancy Miller
Minneapolis Community and Technical College
Minneapolis, Minnesota
Vanessa Miller
California State University Fullerton
Fullerton, California
Mary Mitsui
Emporia State University
Emporia, Kansas
Cheryl Moreland, MS, RN
Western Nevada College
Carson City, Nevada
Daniel Nanguang
El Paso Community College
El Paso, Texas
Susan Newfield
West Virginia University
Morgantown, West Virginia
Dorothy Oakley
Jamestown Community College
Olean, New York
Christie Obritsch
University of Mary
Bismarck, North Dakota
Sharon Opsahl
Western Technical College
La Crosse, Wisconsin
Vicki Paris
Jackson State Community College
Jackson, Tennessee
Lillian Parker
Clayton State University
Morrow, Georgia
JoAnne M. Pearce, MS, RN
Idaho State University
Pocatello, Idaho
Karen Peterson
DeSales University
Center Valley, Pennsylvania
Carol Pool
South Texas College
McAllen, Texas
William S. Pope
Barton College
Wilson, North Carolina
Karen Pounds
Northeastern University
Boston, Massachusetts
Konnie Prince
Victoria College
Victoria, Texas
Cheryl Puntil
Hawaii Community College
Hilo, Hawaii
Larry Purnell
University of Delaware
Newark, Delaware
Susan Reeves
Tennessee Technological University
Cookeville, Tennessee
Debra Riendeau
Saint Joseph’s College of Maine
Lewiston, Maine
Sharon Romer
South Texas College
McAllen, Texas
Lisa Romero
Solano Community College
Fairfield, California
Donna S. Sachse
Union University
Germantown, Tennessee
Betty Salas
Otero Junior College
La Junta, Colorado
Sheryl Samuelson, PhD, RN
Millikin University
Decatur, Illinois
John D. Schaeffer
San Joaquin Delta College
Stockton, California
x Reviewers
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page x
Reviewers xi
Mindy Schaffner
Pacific Lutheran University
Tacoma, Washington
Becky Scott
Mercy College of Northwest Ohio
Toledo, Ohio
Janie Shaw
Clayton State University
Morrow, Georgia
Lori Shaw
Nebraska Methodist College
Omaha, Nebraska
Joyce Shea
Fairfield University
Fairfield, Connecticut
Judith Shindul-Rothschild
Boston College
Chestnut Hill, Massachusetts
Audrey Silveri
UMass Worcester Graduate School of Nursing
Worcester, Massachusetts
Brenda Smith, MSN, RN
North Georgia College and State University
Dahlonega, Georgia
Janet Somlyay
University of Wyoming
Laramie, Wyoming
Charlotte Strahm, DNSc, RN, CNS-PMH
Purdue North Central
Westville, Indiana
Jo Sullivan
Centralia College
Centralia, Washington
Kathleen Sullivan
Boise State University
Boise, Idaho
Judy Traynor
Jefferson Community College
Watertown, New York
Claudia Turner
Temple College
Temple, Texas
Suzanne C. Urban
Mansfield University
Mansfield, Pennsylvania
Dorothy Varchol
Cincinnati State
Cincinnati, Ohio
Connie M. Wallace
Nebraska Methodist College
Omaha, Nebraska
Sandra Wardell
Orange County Community College
Middletown, New York
Susan Warmuskerken
West Shore Community College
Scottville, Michigan
Roberta Weseman
East Central College
Union, Missouri
Margaret A. Wheatley
Case Western Reserve University, FPB School
of Nursing
Cleveland, Ohio
Jeana Wilcox
Graceland University
Independence, Missouri
Jackie E. Williams
Georgia Perimeter College
Clarkston, Georgia
Rita L. Williams, MSN, RN, CCM
Langston University School of Nursing & Health
Professions
Langston, Oklahoma
Rodney A. White
Lewis and Clark Community College
Godfrey, Illinois
Vita Wolinsky
Dominican College
Orangeburg, New York
Marguerite Wordell
Kentucky State University
Frankfort, Kentucky
Jan Zlotnick
City College of San Francisco
San Francisco, California
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xi
xii
Acknowledgments
Amy M. Romano, Content Project Manager, Nursing,
F.A. Davis Company, for all your help and support in
preparing the manuscript for publication.
Sharon Y. Lee, Production Editor, for your support
and competence in the final editing and production
of the manuscript.
The nursing educators, students, and clinicians, who
provide critical information about the usability of the
textbook and offer suggestions for improvements.
Many changes have been made on the basis of your
input.
To those individuals who critiqued the manuscript for
this edition and shared your ideas, opinions, and sug-
gestions for enhancement. I sincerely appreciate your
contributions to the final product.
My husband, Jim, and children and grandchildren,
Kerry and Ryan, Tina and Jonathan, Meghan,
Matthew, and Catherine for showing me what life is
truly all about.
Mary C. Townsend
First of all, sincere thanks to Mary Townsend for hav-
ing the confidence in me to be included in authoring
this exceptional text. I have the utmost respect for
what you have created and for your foresight in rec-
ognizing the most relevant issues in the changing face
of psychiatric mental health nursing care.
My thanks also to Susan Rhyner for the encourage-
ment, humor, and passion that have made this work
enjoyable. Thanks to Amy Romano, Andrea Miller,
and Christine Becker for your expertise and accessi-
bility in preparing the manuscript. I, too, appreciate
all the reviewers who have offered feedback and their
unique expertise. Thanks to Jennifer Feldman, MLIS,
AHIP, for sharing your skills and research assistance.
I have learned just how true it is that it “takes a village”
and I am grateful for each of you.
Special thanks to Erin Barnard, Alan Brunner, Fred
Frese, Emmy Strong, and the others who coura-
geously allowed their stories to be told. Your contri-
butions to student learning and to breaking down the
barriers of stigmatization are immeasurable.
I appreciate each of you more than I can say.
Karyn I. Morgan
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xii
xiii
Contents
UNIT 1
Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing 1
Chapter 1 The Concept of Stress Adaptation 2
Objectives 2
Homework Assignment 2
Stress as a Biological Response 3
Stress as an Environmental Event 5
Stress as a Transaction Between the
Individual and the Environment 7
Stress Management 8
Summary and Key Points 9
Review Questions 10
Chapter 2 Mental Health and Mental Illness:
Historical and Theoretical Concepts 12
Objectives 12
Homework Assignment 12
Historical Overview of Psychiatric Care 13
Mental Health 14
Mental Illness 15
Psychological Adaptation to Stress 16
Mental Health/Mental Illness
Continuum 22
Summary and Key Points 23
Review Questions 23
UNIT 2
Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing 27
Chapter 3 Concepts of Psychobiology 28
Objectives 28
Homework Assignment 28
The Nervous System: An Anatomical
Review 29
Neuroendocrinology 39
Genetics 45
Psychoneuroimmunology 48
Psychopharmacology and the Brain 49
Implications for Nursing 49
Summary and Key Points 50
Review Questions 51
Chapter 4 Psychopharmacology 54
Objectives 54
Homework Assignment 54
Historical Perspectives 55
The Role of the Nurse in
Psychopharmacology 55
How Do Psychotropics Work? 57
Applying the Nursing Process in
Psychopharmacological Therapy 57
Summary and Key Points 82
Review Questions 83
Chapter 5 Ethical and Legal Issues 86
Objectives 86
Homework Assignment 86
Ethical Considerations 88
Legal Considerations 92
Summary and Key Points 101
Review Questions 102
Chapter 6 Cultural and Spiritual Concepts
Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing 105
Objectives 105
Homework Assignment 105
Cultural Concepts 106
How Do Cultures Differ? 106
Application of the Nursing Process 108
Spiritual Concepts 120
Addressing Spiritual and Religious Needs
Through the Nursing Process 123
Summary and Key Points 128
Review Questions 129
UNIT 3
Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric
Nursing Care 133
Chapter 7 Relationship Development 134
Objectives 134
Homework Assignment 134
Role of the Psychiatric Nurse 135
Dynamics of a Therapeutic Nurse-Client
Relationship 136
Conditions Essential to Development
of a Therapeutic Relationship 139
Phases of a Therapeutic Nurse-Client
Relationship 141
Boundaries in the Nurse-Client
Relationship 143
Summary and Key Points 144
Review Questions 145
Chapter 8 Therapeutic Communication 147
Objectives 147
Homework Assignment 147
What Is Communication? 148
The Impact of Preexisting Conditions 148
Nonverbal Communication 150
Therapeutic Communication Techniques 152
Nontherapeutic Communication Techniques 154
Active Listening 154
Motivational Interviewing 156
Process Recordings 157
Feedback 160
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xiii
Summary and Key Points 160
Review Questions 161
Chapter 9 The Nursing Process in
Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 164
Objectives 164
Homework Assignment 164
The Nursing Process 165
Why Nursing Diagnosis? 175
Nursing Case Management 176
Applying the Nursing Process in
the Psychiatric Setting 178
Concept Mapping 179
Documentation of the Nursing Process 179
Summary and Key Points 185
Review Questions 185
Chapter 10 Therapeutic Groups 188
Objectives 188
Homework Assignment 188
Functions of a Group 189
Types of Groups 189
Physical Conditions That Influence Group
Dynamics 190
Therapeutic Factors 191
Phases of Group Development 191
Leadership Styles 192
Member Roles 193
Psychodrama 193
The Role of the Nurse in Therapeutic Groups 194
Summary and Key Points 195
Review Questions 196
Chapter 11 Intervention With Families 199
Objectives 199
Homework Assignment 199
Stages of Family Development 200
Major Variations 202
Family Functioning 204
Therapeutic Modalities With Families 208
The Nursing Process—A Case Study 214
Summary and Key Points 219
Review Questions 220
Chapter 12 Milieu Therapy—The Therapeutic
Community 223
Objectives 223
Homework Assignment 223
Milieu, Defined 224
Current Status of the Therapeutic
Community 224
Basic Assumptions 224
Conditions That Promote a Therapeutic
Community 225
The Program of Therapeutic Community 226
The Role of the Nurse in Milieu Therapy 229
Summary and Key Points 230
Review Questions 231
Chapter 13 Crisis Intervention 234
Objectives 234
Homework Assignment 234
Characteristics of a Crisis 235
Phases in the Development of a Crisis 235
Types of Crises 237
Crisis Intervention 239
Phases of Crisis Intervention: The Role
of the Nurse 239
Disaster Nursing 241
Application of the Nursing Process to
Disaster Nursing 242
Summary and Key Points 249
Review Questions 250
Chapter 14 Assertiveness Training 253
Objectives 253
Homework Assignment 253
Assertive Communication 254
Basic Human Rights 254
Response Patterns 254
Behavioral Components of Assertive
Behavior 256
Techniques That Promote Assertive
Behavior 257
Thought-Stopping Techniques 258
Role of the Nurse in Assertiveness
Training 259
Summary and Key Points 262
Review Questions 263
Chapter 15 Promoting Self-Esteem 266
Objectives 266
Homework Assignment 266
Components of Self-Concept 267
Development of Self-Esteem 268
Manifestations of Low Self-Esteem 270
Boundaries 271
The Nursing Process 273
Summary and Key Points 277
Review Questions 277
Chapter 16 Anger and Aggression Management 280
Objectives 280
Homework Assignment 280
Anger and Aggression, Defined 281
Predisposing Factors to Anger and
Aggression 281
The Nursing Process 283
Summary and Key Points 289
Review Questions 290
Chapter 17 Suicide Prevention 293
Objectives 293
Homework Assignment 293
Historical Perspectives 294
Epidemiological Factors 294
Risk Factors 296
Predisposing Factors: Theories of Suicide 298
Application of the Nursing Process
With the Suicidal Client 299
Summary and Key Points 312
Review Questions 313
Chapter 18 Behavior Therapy 318
Objectives 318
Homework Assignment 318
Classical Conditioning 319
Operant Conditioning 320
Techniques for Modifying Client Behavior 320
Role of the Nurse in Behavior Therapy 322
Summary and Key Points 324
Review Questions 325
xiv Contents
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xiv
Chapter 19 Cognitive Therapy 327
Objectives 327
Homework Assignment 327
Historical Background 328
Indications for Cognitive Therapy 328
Goals and Principles of Cognitive Therapy 328
Basic Concepts 329
Techniques of Cognitive Therapy 331
Role of the Nurse in Cognitive Therapy 333
Summary and Key Points 336
Review Questions 337
Chapter 20 Electroconvulsive Therapy 340
Objectives 340
Homework Assignment 340
Electroconvulsive Therapy, Defined 341
Historical Perspectives 341
Indications 342
Contraindications 342
Mechanism of Action 343
Side Effects 343
Risks Associated With Electroconvulsive
Therapy 343
The Role of the Nurse in Electroconvulsive
Therapy 344
Summary and Key Points 346
Review Questions 347
Chapter 21 The Recovery Model 350
Objectives 350
Homework Assignment 350
What Is Recovery? 351
Guiding Principles of Recovery 351
Models of Recovery 353
Nursing Interventions That Assist
With Recovery 359
Summary and Key Points 360
Review Questions 361
UNIT 4
Nursing Care of Clients With Alterations
in Psychosocial Adaptation 363
Chapter 22 Neurocognitive Disorders 364
Objectives 364
Homework Assignment 364
Delirium 365
Neurocognitive Disorder 366
Application of the Nursing Process 374
Medical Treatment Modalities 386
Summary and Key Points 393
Review Questions 394
Chapter 23 Substance-Related and
Addictive Disorders 399
Objectives 399
Homework Assignment 400
Substance Use Disorder, Defined 400
Substance-Induced Disorders, Defined 401
Predisposing Factors to Substance-
Related Disorders 401
The Dynamics of Substance-Related
Disorders 403
Application of the Nursing Process 425
The Chemically Impaired Nurse 440
Codependency 441
Treatment Modalities for Substance-Related
Disorders 442
Non-Substance Addictions 447
Summary and Key Points 450
Review Questions 451
Chapter 24 Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other
Psychotic Disorders 456
Objectives 456
Homework Assignment 456
Nature of the Disorder 457
Predisposing Factors 458
Other Schizophrenia Spectrum
and Psychotic Disorders 463
Application of the Nursing Process 467
Treatment Modalities for Schizophrenia
and Other Psychotic Disorders 479
Summary and Key Points 488
Review Questions 489
Chapter 25 Depressive Disorders 494
Objectives 494
Homework Assignment 494
Historical Perspective 495
Epidemiology 495
Types of Depressive Disorders 497
Predisposing Factors 500
Developmental Implications 504
Application of the Nursing Process 509
Treatment Modalities for Depression 519
Summary and Key Points 527
Review Questions 527
Chapter 26 Bipolar and Related Disorders 533
Objectives 533
Homework Assignment 533
Historical Perspective 534
Epidemiology 534
Types of Bipolar Disorders 534
Predisposing Factors 537
Developmental Implications 538
Application of the Nursing Process
to Bipolar Disorder (Mania) 540
Treatment Modalities for Bipolar
Disorder (Mania) 547
Summary and Key Points 555
Review Questions 555
Chapter 27 Anxiety, Obsessive-Compulsive,
and Related Disorders 559
Objectives 559
Homework Assignment 559
Historical Aspects 560
Epidemiological Statistics 560
How Much Is Too Much? 562
Application of the Nursing Process—
Assessment 562
Diagnosis and Outcome Identification 571
Planning and Implementation 574
Evaluation 578
Treatment Modalities 580
Summary and Key Points 586
Review Questions 587
Contents xv
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xv
Chapter 28 Trauma- and Stressor-Related
Disorders 591
Objectives 591
Homework Assignment 591
Historical and Epidemiological Data 592
Application of the Nursing Process—
Trauma-Related Disorders 592
Application of the Nursing Process—
Stressor-Related Disorders 600
Treatment Modalities 606
Summary and Key Points 610
Review Questions 611
Chapter 29 Somatic Symptom and Dissociative
Disorders 614
Objectives 614
Homework Assignment 614
Historical Aspects 615
Epidemiological Statistics 616
Application of the Nursing Process 616
Treatment Modalities 632
Summary and Key Points 637
Review Questions 638
Chapter 30 Issues Related to Human
Sexuality and Gender Dysphoria 641
Objectives 641
Homework Assignment 641
Development of Human Sexuality 642
Variations in Sexual Orientation 644
Gender Dysphoria 646
Application of the Nursing Process
to Gender Dysphoria in Children 647
Gender Dysphoria in Adolescents
and Adults 650
Sexual Disorders 652
Application of the Nursing Process
to Sexual Disorders 659
Summary and Key Points 668
Review Questions 668
Chapter 31 Eating Disorders 673
Objectives 673
Homework Assignment 673
Epidemiological Factors 674
Application of the Nursing Process 676
Treatment Modalities 690
Summary and Key Points 693
Review Questions 693
Chapter 32 Personality Disorders 697
Objectives 697
Homework Assignment 697
Historical Aspects 699
Types of Personality Disorders 700
Application of the Nursing Process 707
Treatment Modalities 721
Summary and Key Points 725
Review Questions 726
UNIT 5
Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing
of Special Populations 731
Chapter 33 Children and Adolescents 732
Objectives 732
Homework Assignment 732
Neurodevelopmental Disorders 733
Disruptive Behavior Disorders 754
Anxiety Disorders 763
Quality and Safety Education for
Nurses (QSEN) 765
General Therapeutic Approaches 767
Summary and Key Points 768
Review Questions 769
Chapter 34 The Aging Individual 773
Objectives 773
Homework Assignment 773
How Old is Old? 774
Epidemiological Statistics 775
Theories of Aging 776
The Normal Aging Process 779
Special Concerns of the Elderly Population 785
Application of the Nursing Process 791
Summary and Key Points 798
Review Questions 801
Chapter 35 Survivors of Abuse or Neglect 806
Objectives 806
Homework Assignment 806
Predisposing Factors 807
Application of the Nursing Process 809
Treatment Modalities 822
Summary and Key Points 824
Review Questions 825
Chapter 36 Community Mental Health Nursing 831
Objectives 831
Homework Assignment 831
The Changing Focus of Care 832
The Public Health Model 833
The Community as Client 834
Summary and Key Points 858
Review Questions 858
Chapter 37 The Bereaved Individual 862
Objectives 862
Homework Assignment 862
Theoretical Perspectives on Loss and
Bereavement 863
Length of the Grief Response 867
Anticipatory Grief 867
Maladaptive Responses to Loss 868
Application of the Nursing Process 869
Additional Assistance 875
Summary and Key Points 878
Review Questions 879
xvi Contents
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xvi
Chapter 38 Military Families 883
Objectives 883
Homework Assignment 883
Historical Aspects 884
Epidemiological Statistics 884
Application of the Nursing Process 884
Treatment Modalities 894
Summary and Key Points 897
Review Questions 898
Appendix A Answers to Chapter Review
Questions Appendix-1
Appendix B Examples of Answers to
Communication Exercises Appendix-3
Appendix C Mental Status Assessment Appendix-6
Appendix D DSM-5 Classification: Categories
and Codes Appendix-10
Appendix E Assigning NANDA International
Nursing Diagnoses to Client
Behaviors Appendix-26
Glossary Glossary-1
Index Index-1
Ebook Bonus Chapters
Chapter 39 Complementary and Psychosocial
Therapies 903
Chapter 40 Relaxation Therapy 929
Chapter 41 Theoretical Models of Personality
Development 940
Chapter 42 Forensic Nursing 959
Contents xvii
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xvii
Currently in progress, implementation of the recom-
mendations set forth by the New Freedom Commis-
sion on Mental Health has given enhanced priority
to mental health care in the United States. Moreover,
at the 65th meeting of the World Health Assembly
(WHA) in May 2012, India, Switzerland, and the
United States cosponsored a resolution requesting
that the World Health Organization, in collaboration
with member countries, develop a global mental
health action plan. This resolution was passed at the
66th WHA in May 2013. By their support of this res-
olution, member countries have expressed their
commitment for “promotion of mental health, pre-
vention of mental disorders, and early identification,
care, support, treatment, and recovery of persons
with mental disorders.” With the passage of this res-
olution, mental health services may now be available
for millions who have been without this type of care.
More recently, national initiatives have sought to
address the growing crises of deaths related to sui-
cide and opiate overdoses. Mental health and mental
illness continue to gain attention globally in the wake
of these and other critical issues but much still needs
to be done to reduce stigmatization and premature
loss of life in this population.
Many nurse leaders see this period of mental health-
care reform as an opportunity for nurses to expand
their roles and assume key positions in education, pre-
vention, assessment, and referral. Nurses are, and will
continue to be, in key positions to assist individuals to
attain, maintain, or regain optimal emotional wellness.
As it has been with each new edition of Psychiatric
Mental Health Nursing: Concepts of Care in Evidence-Based
Nursing, the goal of this ninth edition is to bring to prac-
ticing nurses and nursing students the most up-to-date
information related to neurobiology, psychopharmacol-
ogy, and evidence-based nursing interventions. This edi-
tion includes changes associated with the latest( fifth)
edition of the American Psychiatric Association’s Diag-
nostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-5).
Content and Features New to the Ninth
Edition
All content has been updated to reflect the current
state of the discipline of nursing.
All nursing diagnoses are current with the
NANDA-I 2015–2017 Nursing Diagnoses Definitions
and Classifications.
Communication Exercises are included in Chapters
13, Crisis Intervention; 17, Suicide Prevention; 21, The
Recovery Model; 22, Neurocognitive Disorders; 23, Sub-
stance Use and Addictive Disorders; 24, Schizophrenia
Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders; 25, Depres-
sive Disorders; 26, Bipolar and Related Disorders; 27,
Anxiety, Obsessive-Compulsive, and Related Disor-
ders; 30, Issues Related to Human Sexuality; 31, Eating
Disorders; 32, Personality Disorders; 35, Survivors of
Abuse or Neglect; and 37, The Bereaved Individual.
These exercises portray clinical scenarios that allow the
student to practice communication skills with clients.
Examples of answers appear in an appendix at the back
of the book.
A new feature, “Real People, Real Stories,” in-
cludes interviews conducted by one of the authors,
Karyn Morgan, in which individuals discuss their
experience of living with a mental illness and their
thoughts on important information for nurses to
know. These discussions can be used with students
to explore communication issues and interventions
to combat stigmatization and to build empathy
through understanding individuals’ unique experi-
ences. “Real People, Real Stories” interviews are in
Chapters 8, Therapeutic Communication; 17, Sui-
cide Prevention; 23, Substance Use and Addictive
Disorders; 24, Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other
Psychotic Disorders; 25, Depressive Disorders; 30, Issues
Related to Human Sexuality and Gender Dysphoria;
and 38, Military Families.
New QSEN icons (in addition to the existing QSEN
Teaching Strategy boxes) have been added selectively
throughout chapters to highlight content that reflects
application of one or more of the six QSEN compe-
tencies (patient-centered care, evidence-based prac-
tice, teamwork and collaboration, maintaining safety,
quality improvement, and informatics).
Chapter 4, Psychopharmacology, has been moved
from DavisPlus to the textbook. While each class of
psychoactive substances is discussed in this chapter,
lists of commonly used agents have been retained in
the chapters that discuss specific disorders. For exam-
ple, a list of commonly used antipsychotic agents
(along with dosage ranges, half-life, and pregnancy
categories) appears in Chapter 24, Schizophrenia
Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders. These lists
also appear online at DavisPlus.
New content on motivational interviewing appears
in Chapters 8 and 23.
xviii
To the Instructor
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xviii
To the Instructor xix
New content describing the concept of emotional
intelligence is included in Chapter 14, Assertiveness
Training.
New content on RAISE (Recovery After an Initial
Schizophrenia Episode), based on the NIMH initia-
tive is included in Chapter 24.
New content on gender dysphoria and transgender
issues appears in Chapter 21.
Updated and new psychotropic drugs approved
since the publication of the eighth edition are included
in the specific diagnostic chapters to which they apply.
Features That Have Been Retained
in the Ninth Edition
The concept of holistic nursing is retained in the
ninth edition. An attempt has been made to ensure
that the physical aspects of psychiatric-mental health
nursing are not overlooked. In all relevant situations,
the mind/body connection is addressed.
Nursing process is retained in the ninth edition as
the tool for delivery of care to the individual with a psy-
chiatric disorder or to assist in the primary prevention
or exacerbation of mental illness symptoms. The six
steps of the nursing process, as described in the
American Nurses Association Standards of Clinical Nurs-
ing Practice, are used to provide guidelines for the nurse.
These standards of care are included for the DSM-5
diagnoses, as well as those on the aging individual, the
bereaved individual, survivors of abuse and neglect, and
military families, and as examples in several of the ther-
apeutic approaches. The six steps include:
Assessment: Background assessment data, including
a description of symptomatology, provides an ex-
tensive knowledge base from which the nurse may
draw when performing an assessment. Several
assessment tools are also included.
Diagnosis: Nursing diagnoses common to specific
psychiatric disorders are derived from analysis of
assessment data.
Outcome Identification: Outcomes are derived from
the nursing diagnoses and stated as measurable
goals.
Planning: A plan of care is presented with selected
nursing diagnoses for the DSM-5 diagnoses, as well
as for the elderly client, the bereaved individual,
victims of abuse and neglect, military veterans and
their families, the elderly homebound client, and
the primary caregiver of the client with a chronic
mental illness. The planning standard also includes
tables that list topics for educating clients and fam-
ilies about mental illness. Concept map care plans
are included for all major psychiatric diagnoses.
Implementation: The interventions that have been
identified in the plan of care are included along with
rationales for each. Case studies at the end of each
DSM-5 chapter assist the student in the practical
application of theoretical material. Also included as
a part of this particular standard is Unit 3, Therapeu-
tic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care. This
section of the textbook addresses psychiatric nursing
intervention in depth and frequently speaks to the
differentiation in scope of practice between the basic-
level psychiatric nurse and the advanced practice–
level psychiatric nurse.
Evaluation: The evaluation standard includes a set of
questions that the nurse may use to assess whether
the nursing actions have been successful in achiev-
ing the objectives of care.
Following are additional features of this ninth
edition:
■ Internet references for each DSM-5 diagnosis, with
website listings for information related to the
disorder.
■ Tables that list topics for client/family education
(in the clinical chapters).
■ Boxes that include current research studies with
implications for evidence-based nursing practice
(in the clinical chapters).
■ Assigning nursing diagnoses to client behaviors
(diagnostic chapters).
■ Taxonomy and diagnostic criteria from the DSM-5
(2013). Used throughout the text.
■ All references have been updated throughout the
text. Classical references are distinguished from
general references.
■ Boxes with definitions of core concepts appear
throughout the text.
■ Comprehensive glossary.
■ Answers to end-of-chapter review questions
(Appendix A).
■ Answers to communication exercises (Appendix B).
■ Sample client teaching guides (online at www
.davisplus.com).
■ Website. An F.A. Davis/Townsend website that con-
tains additional nursing care plans that do not ap-
pear in the text, links to psychotropic medications,
concept map care plans, and neurobiological con-
tent and illustrations, as well as student resources
including practice test questions, learning activities,
concept map care plans, and client teaching guides.
Additional Educational Resources
Faculty may also find the teaching aids that accompany
this textbook helpful. These Instructor Resources are
located at www.davisplus.com:
■ Multiple choice questions (including new format
questions reflecting the latest NCLEX blueprint).
■ Lecture outlines for all chapters
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xix
■ Learning activities for all chapters (including
answer key)
■ Answers to the Critical Thinking Exercises from the
textbook
■ PowerPoint Presentation to accompany all chapters
in the textbook
■ Answers to the Homework Assignment Questions
from the textbook
■ Case studies for use with student teaching
Additional chapters on Theories of Personality
Development, Relaxation Therapy, Complementary
and Psychosocial Therapies, and Forensic Nursing are
presented online at www.davisplus.com.
It is hoped that the revisions and additions to
this ninth edition continue to satisfy a need within
psychiatric-mental health nursing practice. The mis-
sion of this textbook has been, and continues to be, to
provide both students and clinicians with up-to-date
information about psychiatric-mental health nursing.
The user-friendly format and easy-to-understand lan-
guage, for which we have received many positive com-
ments, have been retained in this edition. We hope that
this ninth edition continues to promote and advance
the commitment to psychiatric/mental health nursing.
Mary C. Townsend
Karyn I. Morgan
xx To the Instructor
6054_FM_i-xx 16/08/17 2:42 pm Page xx
U N I T 1
Basic Concepts in
Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 1
1The Concept of Stress Adaptation
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Stress as a Biological Response
Stress as an Environmental Event
Stress as a Transaction Between the Individual
and the Environment
Stress Management
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
adaptive responses
fight-or-flight syndrome
general adaptation syndrome
maladaptive responses
precipitating event
predisposing factors
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Define adaptation and maladaptation.
2. Identify physiological responses to stress.
3. Explain the relationship between stress and
“diseases of adaptation.”
4. Describe the concept of stress as an environ-
mental event.
5. Explain the concept of stress as a transaction
between the individual and the environment.
6. Discuss adaptive coping strategies in the
management of stress.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. How are the body’s physiological defenses
affected when under sustained stress? Why?
2. In the view of stress as an environmental
event, what aspects are missing when
considering an individual’s response to a
stressful situation?
3. In their study, what event did Miller and
Rahe (1997) find produced the highest
level of stress reaction in their participants?
4. What is the initial step in stress
management?
CORE CONCEPTS
Adaptation
Maladaptation
Stressor
2
Psychologists and others have struggled for many
years to establish an effective definition of the term
stress. This term is used loosely today and still lacks
a definitive explanation. Stress may be viewed as an
individual’s reaction to any change that requires an
adjustment or response, which can be physical, men-
tal, or emotional. Responses directed at stabilizing
internal biological processes and preserving self-
esteem can be viewed as healthy adaptations to
stress.
Roy (1976), a nursing theorist, defined an adaptive
response as behavior that maintains the integrity of
the individual. Adaptation is viewed as positive and is
correlated with a healthy response. When behavior
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 2
disrupts the integrity of the individual, it is perceived
as maladaptive. Maladaptive responses by the individ-
ual are considered to be negative or unhealthy.
Various 20th-century researchers contributed to
several different concepts of stress. Three of these
concepts include stress as a biological response,
stress as an environmental event, and stress as a
transaction between the individual and the environ-
ment. This chapter includes an explanation of each
of these concepts.
Stress as a Biological Response
In 1956, Hans Selye published the results of his re-
search on the physiological response of a biological
system to an imposed change on the system. Since his
initial publication, his definition of stress has evolved
to “the state manifested by a specific syndrome which
consists of all the nonspecifically induced changes
within a biologic system” (Selye, 1976). This combi-
nation of symptoms has come to be known as the
fight-or-flight syndrome. Schematics of these biologi-
cal responses, both initially and with sustained stress,
are presented in Figures 1–1 and 1–2. Selye called this
phenomenon the general adaptation syndrome. He
described three distinct stages of the reaction:
1. Alarm reaction stage: During this stage, the physi-
ological responses of the fight-or-flight syndrome
are initiated.
C H A P T E R 1 ■ The Concept of Stress Adaptation 3
CORE CONCEPT
Stressor
A biological, psychological, social, or chemical factor
that causes physical or emotional tension and may con-
tribute to the development of certain illnesses.
HYPOTHALAMUS
Stimulates
Sympathetic Nervous System
Innervates
Adrenal
medulla
Eye Cardiovascular
system
Lacrimal
glands
Respiratory
system
GI system Liver Urinary
system
Fat
cells
Sweat
glands
Pupils
dilated
Bronchioles
dilated
Respiration
rate increased
Gastric and
intestinal
motility
Secretions
Sphincters
contract
Ureter
motility
Bladder
muscle
contracts
Sphincter
relaxes
Lipolysis
Norepinephrine
and epinephrine
released
Secretion
increased
Force of cardiac
contraction
Cardiac output
Heart rate
Blood pressure
Glycogenolysis
and
gluconeogenesis
Glycogen
synthesis
Secretion
FIGURE 1–1 The fight-or-flight syndrome: The initial stress response.
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 3
2. Stage of resistance: The individual uses the physi-
ological responses of the first stage as a defense in
the attempt to adapt to the stressor. If adaptation
occurs, the third stage is prevented or delayed.
Physiological symptoms may disappear.
3. Stage of exhaustion: This stage occurs when the
body responds to prolonged exposure to a stressor.
The adaptive energy is depleted, and the individual
can no longer draw from the resources for adapta-
tion described in the first two stages. Diseases of
adaptation (e.g., headaches, mental disorders, coro-
nary artery disease, ulcers, colitis) may occur. With-
out intervention for reversal, exhaustion and, in
some cases, even death, ensues (Selye, 1956, 1974).
The fight-or-flight response undoubtedly served
our ancestors well. Those Homo sapiens who had to
face the giant grizzly bear or the saber-toothed tiger
as part of their struggle for survival must have used
these adaptive resources to their advantage. The
response was elicited in emergency situations, used in
the preservation of life, and followed by restoration
of the compensatory mechanisms to the preemergent
condition (homeostasis).
Selye performed his extensive research in a con-
trolled setting with laboratory animals as subjects. He
elicited the physiological responses with physical stim-
uli, such as exposure to heat or extreme cold, electric
shock, injection of toxic agents, restraint, and surgical
injury. Since the publication of his original research,
it has become apparent that the fight-or-flight syn-
drome of symptoms occurs in response to psycholog-
ical or emotional stimuli just as it does to physical
stimuli. Psychological or emotional stressors are
often not resolved as rapidly as physical stressors,
so the body may be depleted of its adaptive energy
more readily than it is from physical stressors. The
fight-or-flight response may be inappropriate or even
4 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
HYPOTHALAMUS
Stimulates
Pituitary Gland
Releases
Adrenocorticotropic hormone
(ACTH)
Growth hormoneVasopressin
(ADH)
Thyrotropic hormone
(TSH)
Gonadotropins
(Initially)
Sex hormones;
later, with
sustained
stress:
Secretion of
sex hormones
Direct effect on
protein, carbohydrate,
and lipid metabolism,
resulting in
increased serum
glucose and free
fatty acids
StimulatesStimulates
Releases
Adrenal cortex
Basal metabolic
rate
Thyroid gland
Glucocorticoids Mineralocorticoids
Gluconeogenesis
Immune
response
Inflammatory
response
Retention
of sodium
and water
Blood pressure
through constriction
of blood
vessels
Fluid
retention
Libido
Impotence
FIGURE 1–2 The fight-or-flight syndrome: The sustained stress response.
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 4
dangerous in our modern lifestyle in which stress
has been described as a pervasive, chronic, and relent-
less psychosocial state. When the stress response
becomes chronic, the body’s existence in the aroused
condition for extended time periods promotes
susceptibility to disease.
Miller and Rahe (1997) have updated the original
Social Readjustment Rating Scale devised by Holmes
and Rahe in 1967 to reflect an increased number of
modern stressors. Just as in the earlier version, numer-
ical values are assigned to various common life events
based on the stress these events create. In their
research, Miller and Rahe found that women react
to life stress events at higher levels than do men, and
unmarried people gave higher scores than married
people for most of the events. Younger participants
rated more events at a higher stress level than did
older participants. A high score on the Recent Life
Changes Questionnaire (RLCQ) places the individual
at greater susceptibility to physical or psychological
illness. The questionnaire may be completed consid-
ering life stressors within a 6-month or 1-year period.
Six-month totals equal to or greater than 300 life
change units (LCUs) or 1-year totals equal to or
greater than 500 LCUs are considered indicative of a
high level of recent life stress, thereby increasing the
individual’s risk of illness. The RLCQ is presented in
Table 1–1.
It is unknown whether stress overload merely pre-
disposes a person to illness or actually precipitates it,
but there does appear to be a link (Amirkhan, 2012).
Individuals differ in their reactions to life events, and
these variations are related to the degree to which
the change is perceived as stressful. Life changes
C H A P T E R 1 ■ The Concept of Stress Adaptation 5
TA B L E 1– 1 The Recent Life Changes Questionnaire
LIFE CHANGE EVENT LCU LIFE CHANGE EVENT LCU
HEALTH
An injury or illness which: 74
Kept you in bed a week or more, or sent
you to the hospital
Was less serious than above 44
Major dental work 26
Major change in eating habits 27
Major change in sleeping habits 26
Major change in your usual type/amount 28
of recreation
WORK
Change to a new type of work 51
Change in your work hours or conditions 35
Change in your responsibilities at work:
More responsibilities 29
Fewer responsibilities 21
Promotion 31
Demotion 42
Transfer 32
Troubles at work:
With your boss 29
With coworkers 35
With persons under your supervision 35
Other work troubles 28
Major business adjustment 60
Retirement 52
Loss of job:
Laid off from work 68
Fired from work 79
Correspondence course to help you in your work 18
PERSONAL AND SOCIAL
Change in personal habits 26
Beginning or ending school or college 38
Change of school or college 35
Change in political beliefs 24
Change in religious beliefs 29
CORE CONCEPT
Adaptation
Adaptation is said to occur when an individual’s physical
or behavioral response to any change in his or her in-
ternal or external environment results in preservation of
individual integrity or timely return to equilibrium.
Stress as an Environmental Event
A second concept defines stress as an “event” that trig-
gers an individual’s adaptive physiological and
psychological responses. The event creates change in
the life pattern of the individual, requires significant
adjustment in lifestyle, and taxes available personal
resources. The change can be either positive, such as
outstanding personal achievement, or negative, such
as being fired from a job. The emphasis here is on
change from the existing steady state of the individ-
ual’s life pattern.
Continued
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 5
6 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 1– 1 The Recent Life Changes Questionnaire—cont’d
LIFE CHANGE EVENT LCU LIFE CHANGE EVENT LCU
Spouse beginning or ending work 46
Child leaving home:
To attend college 41
Due to marriage 41
For other reasons 45
Change in arguments with spouse 50
In-law problems 38
Change in the marital status of your parents:
Divorce 59
Remarriage 50
Separation from spouse:
Due to work 53
Due to marital problems 76
Divorce 96
Birth of grandchild 43
Death of spouse 119
Death of other family member:
Child 123
Brother or sister 102
Parent 100
FINANCIAL
Major change in finances:
Increased income 38
Decreased income 60
Investment and/or credit difficulties 56
Loss or damage of personal property 43
Moderate purchase 20
Major purchase 37
Foreclosure on a mortgage or loan 58
Change in social activities 27
Vacation 24
New, close, personal relationship 37
Engagement to marry 45
Girlfriend or boyfriend problems 39
Sexual difficulties 44
“Falling out” of a close personal relationship 47
An accident 48
Minor violation of the law 20
Being held in jail 75
Death of a close friend 70
Major decision regarding your immediate future 51
Major personal achievement 36
HOME AND FAMILY
Major change in living conditions 42
Change in residence:
Move within the same town or city 25
Move to a different town, city, or state 47
Change in family get-togethers 25
Major change in health or behavior of family 55
member
Marriage 50
Pregnancy 67
Miscarriage or abortion 65
Gain of a new family member:
Birth of a child 66
Adoption of a child 65
A relative moving in with you 59
LCU, life change unit.
SOURCE: Miller, M.A., & Rahe, R.H. (1997). Life changes scaling for the 1990s. Journal of Psychosomatic Research, 43(3), 279-292,
with permission.
questionnaires have been criticized because they do
not consider the individual’s perception of the event.
These types of instruments also fail to consider cul-
tural variations, the individual’s coping strategies,
and available support systems at the time when the
life change occurs. Amirkhan (2012) developed a
tool to assess stress overload that attempts to correct
for these limitations by asking a series of 30 questions
that all begin with “In the past week have you
felt . . .” followed by choices such as calm, inade-
quate, depressed, and others. The emphasis in this
tool is on the individual’s perception of events rather
than on the events themselves. Although the ap-
proaches to assessing for stress and vulnerability vary,
it is clear that positive coping mechanisms and strong
social or familial support can reduce the intensity of
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 6
stressful life changes and promote a more adaptive
response.
Stress as a Transaction Between
the Individual and the Environment
The concept of stress as a transaction between the
individual and the environment emphasizes the
relationship between internal variables (within an indi-
vidual) and external variables (within the environ-
ment). This concept parallels the modern concept
of disease etiology. No longer is causation viewed
solely as an external entity; whether or not illness
occurs depends also on the receiving organism’s sus-
ceptibility. Similarly, to predict psychological stress as
a reaction, the internal characteristics of the person
in relation to the environment must be considered.
Precipitating Event
Lazarus and Folkman’s seminal theory (1984) defines
stress (and potentially illness) as a psychological
phenomenon in which the relationship between the
person and the environment is appraised by the per-
son as taxing or exceeding his or her resources and
endangering his or her well-being. A precipitating
event is a stimulus arising from the internal or exter-
nal environment and perceived by the individual in a
specific manner. Determination of an event as stress-
ful depends on the individual’s cognitive appraisal
of the situation. Cognitive appraisal is an individual’s
evaluation of the personal significance of the event
or occurrence. The event “precipitates” a response on
the part of the individual, and the response is influ-
enced by the individual’s perception of the event. The
cognitive response consists of a primary appraisal and a
secondary appraisal.
Individual’s Perception of the Event
Primary Appraisal
Lazarus and Folkman (1984) identify three types of
primary appraisal: irrelevant, benign-positive, and
stressful. An event is judged irrelevant when the
outcome holds no significance for the individual. A
benign-positive outcome is one that is perceived as pro-
ducing pleasure for the individual. Stress appraisals
include harm or loss, threat, and challenge. Harm
or loss appraisals refer to damage or loss already
experienced by the individual. Appraisals of a threat-
ening nature are perceived as anticipated harms or
losses. When an event is appraised as challenging, the
individual focuses on potential for gain or growth
rather than on risks associated with the event. Chal-
lenge produces stress even though the emotions
associated with it (eagerness and excitement) are
viewed as positive, and coping mechanisms must be
called upon to face the new encounter. Challenge
and threat may occur together when an individual ex-
periences these positive emotions along with fear or
anxiety over possible risks associated with the chal-
lenging event.
When stress is produced in response to harm or
loss, threat, or challenge, a secondary appraisal is
made by the individual.
Secondary Appraisal
The secondary appraisal is an assessment of skills, re-
sources, and knowledge that the person possesses to
deal with the situation. The individual evaluates by
considering the following:
■ Which coping strategies are available to me?
■ Will the option I choose be effective in this situation?
■ Do I have the ability to use that strategy in an effec-
tive manner?
The interaction between the primary appraisal of the
event that has occurred and the secondary appraisal of
available coping strategies determines the quality of the
individual’s adaptation response to stress.
Predisposing Factors
A variety of elements influence how an individual
perceives and responds to a stressful event. These
predisposing factors strongly influence whether the
response is adaptive or maladaptive. Types of predis-
posing factors include genetic influences, past expe-
riences, and existing conditions.
Genetic influences are those circumstances of an
individual’s life that are acquired through heredity.
Examples include family history of physical and psy-
chological conditions (strengths and weaknesses) and
temperament (behavioral characteristics present at
birth that evolve with development).
Past experiences are occurrences that result in
learned patterns that can influence an individual’s
adaptation response. They include previous expo-
sure to the stressor or other stressors, learned coping
responses, and degree of adaptation to previous
stressors.
Existing conditions incorporate vulnerabilities that
influence the adequacy of the individual’s physical,
psychological, and social resources for dealing with
adaptive demands. Examples include current health
status, motivation, developmental maturity, severity
and duration of the stressor, financial and educa-
tional resources, age, existing coping strategies, and
a caring support system. Hobfoll’s conservation of
resources theory (Hobfoll 1989; Hobfoll, Schwarzer,
& Chon, 1998) adds that as existing conditions (loss
or lack of resources) exceed the person’s perception
of adaptive capabilities, the person not only experi-
ence stress in the present but also becomes more
C H A P T E R 1 ■ The Concept of Stress Adaptation 7
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 7
vulnerable to the effects of stress in the future due to
a “weaker resource reservoir to call on to meet future
demand” (Hobfoll et al., 1998, p. 191). All of the pre-
ceding concepts and theories are foundational to the
transactional model of stress and adaptation that
serves as the framework for the process of nursing in
this text. A graphic display of the model is presented
in Figure 1–3.
protect the individual from harm (or additional
harm) or strengthen the individual’s ability to meet
challenging situations. Adaptive responses help
restore homeostasis to the body and impede the
development of diseases of adaptation. Positive
adaptation, particularly in response to adversity, has
also been referred to as resilience.
Responses are considered maladaptive when
the conflict goes unresolved or intensifies. Energy
resources become depleted as the body struggles
to compensate for the chronic physiological and psy-
chological arousal experienced in response to the
stressful event. The effect is a significant vulnerability
to physical or psychological illness. One key to stress
management is to identify factors and practices that
contribute to adaptive coping and resilience.
Adaptive Coping Strategies
Awareness
The initial step in managing stress is awareness—to
become aware of the factors that create stress and the
feelings associated with a stressful response. Stress can
be controlled only when one recognizes the signs that
it is occurring. As an individual becomes aware of
stressors, he or she can choose to omit, avoid, or
accept them.
Relaxation
Individuals experience relaxation in different ways.
Some people relax by engaging in large motor activi-
ties, such as sports, jogging, and physical exercise.
Others use techniques such as breathing exercises
and progressive relaxation. A discussion of relaxation
therapy may be found online at DavisPlus.
Meditation
Meditation has been shown to produce a lasting
reduction in blood pressure and other stress-related
symptoms when practiced for 20 minutes once or
twice a day (Scott, 2016). The practice of mindfulness
meditation is foundational to many psychosocial in-
terventions aimed at reducing anxiety and improving
engagement in problem-solving. Meditation involves
assuming a comfortable position, closing the eyes,
casting off all other thoughts, and concentrating on
a single word, sound, or phrase that has positive
meaning to the individual. It may also involve concen-
trating on one’s breathing or other mindfulness prac-
tices. The technique of meditation is described in
detail online at DavisPlus.
Interpersonal Communication
As previously mentioned, the strength of an individ-
ual’s available support system is an existing condition
that significantly influences his or her adaptation when
coping with stress. Sometimes just “talking the problem
out” with an empathetic individual can interrupt
8 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Precipitating Event
Predisposing Factors
Genetic Influences
Past Experiences
Existing Conditions
Cognitive Appraisal
* Primary *
Irrelevant
No
response
Benign
positive
Pleasurable
response
Stress
appraisals
Harm/
loss Threat
Challenge
* Secondary *
Availability of coping strategies
Perceived effectiveness of coping strategies
Perceived ability to use coping strategies effectively
Quality of Response
Adaptive Maladaptive
FIGURE 1–3 Transactional model of stress and adaptation.
CORE CONCEPT
Maladaptation
Maladaptation occurs when an individual’s physical or
behavioral response to any change in his or her internal
or external environment results in disruption of individual
integrity or in persistent disequilibrium.
Stress Management*
The growth of stress management into a multimillion-
dollar-a-year industry unto itself attests to its impor-
tance in our society. Stress management involves the
use of coping strategies in response to stressful situ-
ations. Coping strategies are adaptive when they
*Some stress management techniques are discussed at greater
length in Unit 3 of this text and in the Complementary and Psy-
chosocial Therapies chapter available online at www.DavisPlus.com.
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 8
escalation of the stress response. Writing about one’s
feelings in a journal or diary can also be therapeutic.
Problem-Solving
Problem-solving is an adaptive coping strategy in
which the individual is able to view the situation ob-
jectively (or to seek assistance from another individual
to accomplish this if the anxiety level is too high to
concentrate) and then apply a problem-solving and
decision-making model such as the following:
■ Assess the facts of the situation.
■ Formulate goals for resolution of the stressful
situation.
■ Study the alternatives for dealing with the situation.
■ Determine the risks and benefits of each alternative.
■ Select an alternative.
■ Implement the alternative selected.
■ Evaluate the outcome of the alternative imple-
mented.
■ If the first choice is ineffective, select and imple-
ment a second option.
Pets
Studies show that those who care for pets, especially
dogs and cats, are better able to cope with the stres-
sors of life (Mayo Clinic, 2015). The physical act
of stroking a dog’s or cat’s fur can be therapeutic,
giving the animal an intuitive sense of being cared
for and providing the individual the calming feeling
of warmth, affection, and interdependence with a re-
liable, trusting being. Studies have also shown that
individuals with companion pets demonstrate im-
provements in heart health, allergies, anxiety, and
mental illnesses such as depression (Casciotti &
Zuckerman, 2016, Donehy, 2015).
Music
It is true that music can “soothe the savage beast.”
Studies have shown multiple benefits of listening to
music, including relieving pain, improving motivation
and performance, improving sleep, enhancing blood
vessel function, reducing stress, relieving symptoms
of depression, improving cognition, and easing recov-
ery in stroke patients (Christ, 2013).
Summary and Key Points
■ Stress has become a chronic and pervasive condi-
tion in the United States.
■ Adaptive behavior is a stress response that main-
tains the integrity of the individual with a timely
return to equilibrium. It is viewed as positive and
is correlated with a healthy response.
■ When behavior disrupts the integrity of the indi-
vidual or results in persistent disequilibrium, it is
perceived as maladaptive. Maladaptive responses
by the individual are unhealthy.
■ A stressor is defined as a biological, psychological,
social, or chemical factor that causes physical or
emotional tension and may be a factor in the etiol-
ogy of certain illnesses.
■ Hans Selye identified the biological changes asso-
ciated with a stressful situation as the fight-or-flight
syndrome.
■ Selye called the general reaction of the body to
stress the “general adaptation syndrome,” which
occurs in three stages: the alarm reaction stage, the
stage of resistance, and the stage of exhaustion.
■ When individuals remain in the aroused response
to stress for an extended period of time, they be-
come susceptible to diseases, including headaches,
mental disorders, coronary artery disease, ulcers,
and colitis.
■ Stress may also be viewed as an environmental event,
which results when a change from the existing
steady state of the individual’s life pattern occurs.
■ When an individual experiences a high level of life
change events, he or she becomes susceptible to
physical or psychological illness.
■ Limitations of the environmental concept of stress
include failure to consider the individual’s percep-
tion of the event, coping strategies, and available
support systems at the time when the life change
occurs.
■ Stress is more appropriately expressed as a transac-
tion between the individual and the environment
that is appraised by the individual as taxing or ex-
ceeding his or her resources and endangering his
or her well-being.
■ The individual makes a cognitive appraisal of the
precipitating event to determine the personal
significance of the event or occurrence.
■ Primary cognitive appraisals may be irrelevant,
benign-positive, or stressful.
■ Secondary cognitive appraisals include assessment
and evaluation by the individual of skills, resources,
and knowledge to deal with the stressful situation.
■ Predisposing factors influence how an individual
perceives and responds to a stressful event. They
include genetic influences, past experiences, and
existing conditions.
■ Stress management involves the use of adaptive
coping strategies in response to stressful situations
in an effort to impede the development of diseases
of adaptation.
■ Examples of adaptive coping strategies include
developing awareness, relaxation, meditation,
interpersonal communication with caring other,
problem-solving, pets, and music.
C H A P T E R 1 ■ The Concept of Stress Adaptation 9
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 9
10 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. Sondra, who lives in Maine, hears on the evening news that 25 people were killed in a tornado in south
Texas. Sondra experiences no anxiety upon hearing of this stressful situation. What is the most likely
reason that Sondra experiences no anxiety?
a. She is selfish and does not care what happens to other people.
b. She appraises the event as irrelevant to her own situation.
c. She assesses that she has the skills to cope with the stressful situation.
d. She uses suppression as her primary defense mechanism.
2. Cindy regularly develops nausea and vomiting when she is faced with a stressful situation. Which of
the following is most likely a predisposing factor to this maladaptive response by Cindy?
a. Cindy inherited her mother’s “nervous” stomach.
b. Cindy is fixed in a lower level of development.
c. Cindy has never been motivated to achieve success.
d. When Cindy was a child, her mother pampered her and kept her home from school when she
was ill.
3. When an individual’s stress response is sustained over a long period, the endocrine system involvement
results in which of the following?
a. Decreased resistance to disease
b. Increased libido
c. Decreased blood pressure
d. Increased inflammatory response
4. Why is stress management extremely important in today’s society?
a. Evolution has diminished the human capability for fight-or-flight responses.
b. The stressors of today tend to be ongoing, resulting in a sustained response.
c. We have stress disorders that did not exist in the days of our ancestors.
d. One never knows when one will have to face a grizzly bear or saber-toothed tiger in today’s society.
5. Elena has just received a promotion on her job. She is very happy and excited about moving up in her
company, but she has been experiencing anxiety since receiving the news. Her primary appraisal is
that she most likely views the situation as which of the following?
a. Benign-positive
b. Irrelevant
c. Challenging
d. Threatening
6. John comes to the mental health clinic with reports of anxiety and depression. According to the trans-
actional model of stress and adaptation, which of the following are important to consider when assess-
ing John’s complaints? (Select all that apply.)
a. John’s perception of precipitating events
b. Past stressors and degree of positive coping abilities
c. Existing social supports
d. Physical strength
e. Pupillary adaptation to light
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 10
References
Amirkhan, J.H. (2012). Stress overload: A new approach to
the assessment of stress. American Journal of Community
Psychology, 49(1-2), 55-71. doi:10.1007/s10464-011-
9438-x
Casciotti, D., & Zuckerman, D. (2016). The benefits of pets for
human health. Retrieved from http://center4research.org/
healthy-living-prevention/pets-and-health-the-impact-of-
companion-animals
Christ, S. (2013). 20 surprising science-backed health benefits of
music. Retrieved from www.usatoday.com/story/news/health/
2013/12/17/health-benefits-music/4053401
Donehy, K. (2015). Pets for depression and health. Retrieved
from www.webmd.com/depression/features/pets-
depression
Mayo Clinic. (2015). Pet therapy: Man’s best friend as healer.
Retrieved from www.mayoclinic.org/healthy-lifestyle/
consumer-health/in-depth/pet-therapy/art-20046342
Scott, E. (2016). Meditation research and benefits. Retrieved
from www.verywell.com/meditation-research-and-benefits-
3144996
Classical References
Hobfoll, S. (1989). Conservation of resources: A new attempt at
conceptualizing stress. American Psychologist 44(3), 513-524.
doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/0003-066X.44.3.513
Hobfoll, S., Schwarzer, R., & Chon, K. (1998). Disentangling the
stress labyrinth: Interpreting the meaning of stress as it is
studied in the health context. Anxiety, Stress, and Coping, 11(3),
181-212. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10615809808248311
Holmes, T., & Rahe, R. (1967). The social readjustment rating
scale. Journal of Psychosomatic Research, 11(2), 213-218.
doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0022-3999(67)90010-4
Lazarus, R.S., & Folkman, S. (1984). Stress, appraisal and coping.
New York: Springer Publishing.
Miller, M.A., & Rahe, R.H. (1997). Life changes scaling for
the 1990s. Journal of Psychosomatic Research, 43(3), 279-292.
doi:10.1016/S0022-3999(97)00118-9
Roy, C. (1976). Introduction to nursing: An adaptation model.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Selye, H. (1956). The stress of life. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Selye, H. (1974). Stress without distress. New York: Signet Books.
Selye, H. (1976). The stress of life (rev. ed.). New York: McGraw Hill.
C H A P T E R 1 ■ The Concept of Stress Adaptation 11
6054_Ch01_001-011 27/07/17 5:24 PM Page 11
2 Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Historical Overview of Psychiatric Care
Mental Health
Mental Illness
Psychological Adaptation to Stress
Mental Health/Mental Illness Continuum
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
anticipatory grieving
bereavement overload
defense mechanisms
compensation
denial
displacement
identification
intellectualization
introjection
isolation
projection
rationalization
reaction formation
regression
repression
sublimation
suppression
undoing
humors
mental health
mental illness
neurosis
psychosis
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Discuss the history of psychiatric care.
2. Define mental health and mental illness.
3. Discuss cultural elements that influence
attitudes toward mental health and mental
illness.
4. Describe psychological adaptation responses
to stress.
5. Correlate adaptive and maladaptive
responses to the mental health/mental
illness continuum.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. Explain the concepts of incomprehensibility
and cultural relativity.
2. Describe some symptoms of panic anxiety.
3. Jane was involved in an automobile accident
in which both her parents were killed. When
you ask her about it, she says she has no
memory of the accident. What ego defense
mechanism is she using?
4. In what stage of the grieving process is the
individual with delayed or inhibited grief fixed?
CORE CONCEPTS
Anxiety
Grief
12
The consideration of mental health and mental ill-
ness has its basis in the cultural beliefs of the society
in which the behavior takes place. Some cultures
are quite liberal in the range of behaviors that are
considered acceptable, whereas others have very little
tolerance for behaviors that deviate from the cultural
norms.
A study of the history of psychiatric care reveals
some shocking truths about past treatment of indi-
viduals with mental illness. Many were kept in control
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 12
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 13
by means that today could be considered less than
humane.
This chapter deals with the evolution of psychiatric
care from ancient times to the present. Mental health
and mental illness are defined, and the psychological
adaptation to stress is explained in terms of the two
major responses: anxiety and grief. Behavioral re-
sponses are conceptualized along the mental health/
mental illness continuum.
Historical Overview of Psychiatric Care
Primitive beliefs regarding mental disturbances took
several views. Some cultures thought that an individual
with mental illness had been dispossessed of his or her
soul and wellness could be achieved only if the soul was
returned. Others believed that evil spirits or supernat-
ural or magical powers had entered the body. The
“cure” for these individuals involved a ritualistic exor-
cism to purge the body of these unwanted forces. This
purging often consisted of brutal beatings, starvation,
or other torturous means. Still other cultures consid-
ered that the individual with mental illness may have
broken a taboo or sinned against another individual
or God, for which ritualistic purification was required
or various types of retribution were demanded. The
correlation of mental illness to demonology led to
some individuals with mental illness being burned at
the stake.
These ancient beliefs evolved with increasing
knowledge about mental illness and changes in cul-
tural, religious, and sociopolitical attitudes. Around
400 BC, the work of Hippocrates was the first to place
mental illness in a physical rather than supernatural
context. Hippocrates theorized that mental illness
was caused by irregularity in the interaction of the
four body fluids: blood, black bile, yellow bile, and
phlegm. He called these body fluids humors and
associated each with a particular disposition. Disequi-
librium among these four humors was often treated
by inducing vomiting and diarrhea with potent cathar-
tic drugs.
During the Middle Ages (AD 500 to 1500), the
association of mental illness with witchcraft and the
supernatural continued to prevail in Europe. During
this period, many people with mental illness were set
to sea alone in sailing boats with little guidance to
search for their lost rationality, a practice from which
the expression “ship of fools” was derived. But in
Middle Eastern countries, a change in attitude began
to occur that led to the perception of mental illness
as a medical problem rather than a result of supernat-
ural forces. This notion gave rise to the establishment
of special units for clients with mental illness within
general hospitals as well as residential institutions
specifically designed for this purpose. They can likely
be considered the first asylums for individuals with
mental illness.
Colonial Americans tended to reflect the attitudes
of the European communities from which they had
emigrated. Particularly in the New England area, in-
dividuals were punished for behavior attributed to
witchcraft. In the 16th and 17th centuries, institutions
for people with mental illness did not exist in the
United States, and care of these individuals became a
family responsibility. Those without family or other
resources became the responsibility of the communi-
ties in which they lived and were incarcerated in
places where they could do no harm to themselves
or others.
The first hospital in America to admit clients
with mental illness was established in Philadelphia
in the middle of the 18th century. Benjamin Rush,
often called the father of American psychiatry,
was a physician at the hospital. He initiated the pro-
vision of humanistic treatment and care for clients
with mental illness. But although he included kind-
ness, exercise, and socialization in his care, he also
employed harsh methods such as bloodletting,
purging, various types of physical restraints, and
extremes of temperatures, reflecting the medical
therapies of that era.
The 19th century brought the establishment of a
system of state asylums, largely the result of the work
of Dorothea Dix, a former New England school-
teacher who lobbied tirelessly on behalf of the men-
tally ill population. She was unfaltering in her belief
that mental illness was curable and that state hospitals
should provide humanistic therapeutic care. This sys-
tem of hospital care for individuals with mental
illness grew, but the mentally ill population grew
faster. The institutions became overcrowded and
understaffed, and conditions deteriorated. Therapeutic
care reverted to custodial care in state hospitals,
which provided the largest resource for individuals
with mental illness until the initiation of the commu-
nity health movement of the 1960s (see Chapter 36,
Community Mental Health Nursing).
The emergence of psychiatric nursing began in
1873 with the graduation of Linda Richards from
the nursing program at the New England Hospital
for Women and Children in Boston. She has come
to be known as the first American psychiatric nurse.
During her career, Richards was instrumental in the
establishment of a number of psychiatric hospitals
and the first school of psychiatric nursing at the
McLean Asylum in Waverly, Massachusetts, in 1882.
This school and others like it provided training in
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 13
custodial care for clients in psychiatric asylums—
training that did not include the study of psychological
concepts. Significant change in psychiatric nursing
education did not occur until 1955, when incorpo-
ration of psychiatric nursing into the curricula be-
came a requirement for all undergraduate schools
of nursing. This new curricula emphasized the impor-
tance of the nurse–patient relationship and therapeu-
tic communication techniques. Nursing intervention
in the somatic therapies (e.g., insulin and electrocon-
vulsive therapy) provided impetus for the incorpora-
tion of these concepts into the profession’s body of
knowledge.
With the increasing need for psychiatric care in
the aftermath of World War II, the government
passed the National Mental Health Act of 1946. This
legislation provided funds for the education of psy-
chiatrists, psychologists, social workers, and psychi-
atric nurses. Graduate-level education in psychiatric
nursing was established during this period. Around
the same time, the introduction of antipsychotic
medications made it possible for clients with psy-
choses to more readily participate in their treatment,
including nursing therapies.
Knowledge of the history of psychiatric-mental
health care contributes to the understanding of
the concepts presented in this chapter and those
in the online chapter (available at www.DavisPlus
.com), which describe the theoretical models of per-
sonality development according to various 19th- and
20th-century leaders in the mental health movement.
Modern American psychiatric care has its roots in
ancient times. A great deal of opportunity exists for
continued advancement of this specialty within the
practice of nursing.
Mental Health
A number of theorists have attempted to define the
concept of mental health. Many of these concepts deal
with various aspects of individual functioning. Maslow
(1970) emphasized an individual’s motivation in the
continuous quest for self-actualization. He identified
a “hierarchy of needs,” with the most basic needs
requiring fulfillment before those at higher levels can
be achieved and with self-actualization defined as ful-
fillment of one’s highest potential. An individual’s
position within the hierarchy may revert from a higher
level to a lower level based on life circumstances.
For example, an individual facing major surgery who
has been working to achieve self-actualization may
become preoccupied, if only temporarily, with the
need for physiological safety. A representation of this
needs hierarchy is presented in Figure 2–1.
Maslow described self-actualization as being “psy-
chologically healthy, fully human, highly evolved, and
fully mature.” He believed that self-actualized individ-
uals possess the following characteristics:
■ An appropriate perception of reality
■ The ability to accept oneself, others, and human
nature
■ The ability to manifest spontaneity
■ The capacity for focusing concentration on problem-
solving
■ A need for detachment and desire for privacy
■ Independence, autonomy, and a resistance to
enculturation
■ An intensity of emotional reaction
■ A frequency of “peak” experiences that validate the
worthwhileness, richness, and beauty of life
■ An identification with humankind
■ The ability to achieve satisfactory interpersonal
relationships
■ A democratic character structure and strong sense
of ethics
■ Creativeness
■ A degree of nonconformance
Jahoda (1958) identified a list of six indicators that
are a reflection of mental health:
1. A positive attitude toward self: This indicator
refers to an objective view of self, including
knowledge and acceptance of strengths and lim-
itations. The individual feels a strong sense of
personal identity and security within his or her
environment.
2. Growth, development, and the ability to achieve
self-actualization: This indicator correlates with
whether the individual successfully achieves the
tasks associated with each level of development
(see Erikson, in the online chapter Theoretical
Models of Personality Development). With success-
ful achievement in each level, the individual gains
motivation for advancement to his or her highest
potential.
3. Integration: The focus of this indicator is on
maintaining equilibrium or balance among vari-
ous life processes. Integration includes the ability
to adaptively respond to the environment and the
development of a philosophy of life, both of
which help the individual maintain a manageable
anxiety level in response to stressful situations.
4. Autonomy: This indicator refers to the individual’s
ability to perform in an independent, self-directed
manner. He or she makes choices and accepts
responsibility for the outcomes.
5. Perception of reality: Accurate reality perception
is a positive indicator of mental health. It includes
14 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 14
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 15
perception of the environment without distor-
tion as well as the capacity for empathy and social
sensitivity—a respect and concern for the wants
and needs of others.
6. Environmental mastery: This indicator suggests
that the individual has achieved a satisfactory role
within the group, society, or environment and is
able to love and accept the love of others. When
faced with life situations, the individual is able to
strategize, make decisions, change, adjust, and
adapt. Life offers satisfaction to the individual who
has achieved environmental mastery.
Black and Andreasen (2014) describe mental
health as a state of being that is relative rather than
absolute but marked by the successful performance
of mental functions such as adapting to change, cop-
ing with stressors, fulfilling relationships with others,
and the accomplishing productive activities.
Robinson (1983) offers the following definition of
mental health:
A dynamic state in which thought, feeling, and behav-
ior that is age-appropriate and congruent with the
local and cultural norms is demonstrated. (p. 74)
For purposes of this text, and in keeping with the
framework of stress and adaptation, a modification
of Robinson’s definition of mental health is consid-
ered. Thus, mental health is viewed as “the successful
adaptation to stressors from the internal or external
environment, evidenced by thoughts, feelings, and
behaviors that are age-appropriate and congruent
with local and cultural norms.”
Mental Illness
Arriving at a universal concept of mental illness is dif-
ficult because of the cultural factors that influence such
(The individual
possesses a
feeling of self-
f u l f i l l m e n t a n d
t h e r e a l i z a t i o n
of his or her
highest potential.)
(The individual seeks self-respect
and respect from others, works to
achieve success and recognition in
work, and desires prestige from
accomplishments.)
(Needs are for giving and receiving of
affection, companionship, satisfactory
interpersonal relationships, and
identification with a group.)
(Needs at this level are for avoiding harm, maintaining
comfort, order, structure, physical safety, freedom from
fear, and protection.)
SELF-
ACTUALIZATION
SELF-ESTEEM
RESPECT OF OTHERS
LOVE AND BELONGING
SAFETY AND SECURITY
PHYSIOLOGICAL NEEDS
(Basic fundamental needs include food, water, air, sleep, exercise,
elimination, shelter, and sexual expression.)
FIGURE 2–1 Maslow’s hierarchy of needs.
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 15
a definition. However, certain elements are associated
with individuals’ perceptions of mental illness, regard-
less of cultural origin. Horwitz (2010) identifies two of
these elements as (1) incomprehensibility and (2) cul-
tural relativity.
Incomprehensibility relates to the inability of the gen-
eral population to understand the motivation behind
an individual’s behavior. When observers are unable
to find meaning or comprehensibility in behavior,
they are likely to label that behavior as mental illness.
Horwitz states, “Observers attribute labels of mental
illness when the rules, conventions, and understand-
ings they use to interpret behavior fail to find any in-
telligible motivation behind an action” (p. 17). The
element of cultural relativity considers that these rules,
conventions, and understandings are conceived within
an individual’s own particular culture. Behavior that
is considered “normal” and “abnormal” is defined by
one’s cultural or societal norms. Horwitz identified a
number of cultural aspects of mental illness, which are
presented in Box 2–1.
The American Psychiatric Association (2013), in its
Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders,
Fifth Edition (DSM-5), defines mental disorder as
a syndrome characterized by clinically significant
disturbance in an individual’s cognitions, emotion
regulation, or behavior that reflects a dysfunction
in the psychological, biological, or developmental
processes underlying mental functioning. Mental dis-
orders are usually associated with significant distress
or disability in social, occupational, or other impor-
tant activities. An expected or culturally approved
response to a common stressor or loss such as the
death of a loved one is not a mental disorder. (p. 20)
For purposes of this text, and in keeping with the
transactional model of stress and adaptation, mental
illness is characterized as “maladaptive responses to
stressors from the internal or external environment,
evidenced by thoughts, feelings, and behaviors that
are incongruent with the local and cultural norms
and that interfere with the individual’s social, occu-
pational, and/or physical functioning.”
Psychological Adaptation to Stress
All individuals exhibit characteristics associated with
both mental health and mental illness at any given
point in time. Chapter 1, The Concept of Stress Adap-
tation, describes how an individual’s response to stress-
ful situations is influenced by physiological factors, his
or her personal perception of the event, and a variety
of predisposing factors such as heredity, temperament,
learned response patterns, developmental maturity,
existing coping strategies, and support systems of caring
others.
16 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
BOX 2–1 Cultural Aspects of Mental Illness
1. Usually, members of the community, not a psychiatric pro-
fessional, initially recognizes that an individual’s behavior
deviates from societal norms.
2. People who are related to an individual or who are of
the same cultural or social group are less likely to label an
individual’s behavior as mentally ill than are people who
are relationally or culturally distant. Relatives and those
who share a culture try to normalize the behavior by look-
ing for an explanation.
3. Often, psychiatrists see a person with mental illness only
when the family members can no longer deny the illness.
Recognition or acknowledgment of possible mental illness
typically occurs when behavior is at its worst as defined
by local or cultural norms.
4. Individuals in lower socio-economic classes usually display
more mental illness symptoms than do people in higher
socio-economic classes. However, they tend to tolerate a
wider range of behaviors that deviate from societal norms
and are less likely to consider these behaviors as indicative
of mental illness. Mental illness labels are most often ap-
plied by psychiatric professionals.
5. The higher the social class, the greater the recognition of
mental illness behaviors. Members of the higher social
classes are likely to be self-labeled or labeled by family
members or friends. Psychiatric assistance is sought near
the first signs of emotional disturbance.
6. The more highly educated the person, the greater the
recognition of mental illness behaviors. However, even
more relevant than the amount of education is the type
of education. Individuals in the more humanistic profes-
sions (lawyers, social workers, artists, teachers, nurses) are
more likely to seek psychiatric assistance than are profes-
sionals such as business executives, computer specialists,
accountants, and engineers.
7. Women are more likely than men to recognize the symp-
toms of mental illness and seek assistance.
8. The greater the cultural distance from the mainstream
of society (i.e., the fewer the ties with conventional
society), the greater the likelihood of negative societal
response to mental illness. For example, immigrants
have a greater distance from the mainstream than the
native born, ethnic minorities greater than the dominant
culture, and “bohemians” greater than the bourgeoisie.
These groups are more likely to be subjected to coercive
treatment, and involuntary psychiatric commitments are
more common.
Adapted from Horwitz, A.V. (2010). The social control of mental illness. Clinton Corners, NY: Percheron Press.
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 16
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 17
Anxiety and grief have been described as two
primary psychological response patterns to stress. A
variety of thoughts, feelings, and behaviors are associ-
ated with each of these response patterns. Adaptation
is determined by the degree to which the thoughts,
feelings, and behaviors interfere with an individual’s
functioning.
Anxiety
Feelings of anxiety are so common in our society that
they are almost considered universal. Anxiety arises
from the chaos and confusion that exists in the world.
Fear of the unknown and conditions of ambiguity
offer a perfect breeding ground for anxiety to take
root and grow. Low levels of anxiety are adaptive and
can provide the motivation required for survival. Anx-
iety becomes problematic when the individual is un-
able to prevent his or her response from escalating to
a level that interferes with the ability to meet basic
needs.
Peplau (1963) described four levels of anxiety: mild,
moderate, severe, and panic. It is important for nurses
to be able to recognize the symptoms associated with
each level to plan for appropriate intervention with
anxious individuals.
■ Mild anxiety: This level of anxiety is seldom a prob-
lem for the individual. It is associated with the
tension experienced in response to the events of
day-to-day living. Mild anxiety prepares people for
action. It sharpens the senses, increases motivation
for productivity, increases the perceptual field, and
results in a heightened awareness of the environ-
ment. Learning is enhanced, and the individual is
able to function at his or her optimal level.
■ Moderate anxiety: As the level of anxiety increases,
the extent of the perceptual field diminishes. The
moderately anxious individual is less alert to events
occurring in the environment. The individual’s
attention span and ability to concentrate decrease,
although he or she may still attend to needs with
direction. Assistance with problem-solving may be
required. Increased muscular tension and restless-
ness are evident.
■ Severe anxiety: The perceptual field of the severely
anxious individual is so greatly diminished that
concentration centers on one particular detail only
or on many extraneous details. Attention span is
extremely limited, and the individual has difficulty
completing even the simplest task. Physical symp-
toms (e.g., headaches, palpitations, insomnia) and
emotional symptoms (e.g., confusion, dread, hor-
ror) may be evident. Discomfort is experienced to
the degree that virtually all overt behavior is aimed
at relieving the anxiety.
■ Panic anxiety: In this most intense state of anxiety, the
individual is unable to focus on even one detail in the
environment. Misperceptions are common, and a loss
of contact with reality may occur. The individual may
experience hallucinations or delusions. Behavior may
be characterized by wild and desperate actions or
extreme withdrawal. Human functioning and com-
munication with others is ineffective. Panic anxiety is
associated with a feeling of terror, and individuals may
be convinced that they have a life-threatening illness
or fear that they are “going crazy,” are losing control,
or are emotionally weak. Prolonged panic anxiety can
lead to physical and emotional exhaustion and can
be a life-threatening situation.
A synopsis of the characteristics associated with each
of the four levels of anxiety is presented in Table 2–1.
Behavioral Adaptation Responses to Anxiety
A variety of behavioral adaptation responses occur at
each level of anxiety. Figure 2–2 depicts these behav-
ioral responses on a continuum of anxiety ranging
from mild to panic.
Mild Anxiety
At the mild level, individuals employ any of a number
of coping behaviors that satisfy their needs for com-
fort. Menninger (1963) described the following types
of coping mechanisms that individuals use to relieve
anxiety in stressful situations:
CORE CONCEPT
Anxiety
A diffuse, vague apprehension that is associated with
feelings of uncertainty and helplessness.
■ Sleeping
■ Yawning
■ Eating
■ Drinking
■ Physical exercise
■ Daydreaming
■ Smoking
■ Laughing
■ Crying
■ Cursing
■ Pacing
■ Nail biting
■ Foot swinging
■ Finger tapping
■ Fidgeting
■ Talking to someone
with whom one feels
comfortable
Undoubtedly, there are many more responses too
numerous to mention here, considering that each
individual develops his or her own unique ways to
relieve mild anxiety. Some of these behaviors are
more adaptive than others.
Mild-to-Moderate Anxiety
Sigmund Freud (1961) identified the ego as the
reality component of the personality, governing
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 17
threat to biological or psychological integrity. Some
of these ego defense mechanisms are more adaptive
than others, but all are used either consciously or
unconsciously as protective devices for the ego in
an effort to relieve mild-to-moderate anxiety. The
mechanisms become maladaptive when used by an
individual to such a degree that there is interfer-
ence with the ability to deal with reality, effective in-
terpersonal relations, or occupational performance.
Maladaptive use of defense mechanisms promotes
disintegration of the ego. The major ego defense
mechanisms identified by Anna Freud are summa-
rized in Table 2–2.
18 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 2 – 1 Levels of Anxiety
PHYSICAL EMOTIONAL AND BEHAVIORAL
LEVEL PERCEPTUAL FIELD ABILITY TO LEARN CHARACTERISTICS CHARACTERISTICS
Mild
Moderate
Severe
Panic
Heightened perception
(e.g., noises may
seem louder; details
within the environ-
ment are clearer)
Increased awareness
Increased alertness
Reduction in perceptual
field
Reduced alertness to
environmental events
(e.g., someone talk-
ing may not be
heard; part of the
room may not be
noticed)
Greatly diminished; only
extraneous details are
perceived, or fixation
on a single detail may
occur
May not take notice of
an event even when
attention is directed
by another
Unable to focus on
even one detail within
the environment
Misperceptions of
the environment
common (e.g., a
perceived detail may
be elaborated and
out of proportion)
Learning is
enhanced
Learning still occurs
but not at optimal
ability
Decreased attention
span
Decreased ability to
concentrate
Extremely limited
attention span
Unable to concen-
trate or problem-
solve
Effective learning
cannot occur
Learning cannot
occur
Unable to concen-
trate
Unable to compre-
hend even simple
directions
Restlessness
Irritability
Increased restlessness
Increased heart and
respiration rates
Increased perspiration
Gastric discomfort
Increased muscular
tension
Increase in speech rate,
volume, and pitch
Headaches
Dizziness
Nausea
Trembling
Insomnia
Palpitations
Tachycardia
Hyperventilation
Urinary frequency
Diarrhea
Dilated pupils
Labored breathing
Severe trembling
Sleeplessness
Palpitations
Diaphoresis and pallor
Muscular incoordination
Immobility or purpose-
less hyperactivity
Incoherence or inability
to verbalize
May remain superficial
with others
Rarely experienced
as distressful
Motivation is increased
A feeling of discontent
May lead to a degree of
impairment in interper-
sonal relationships as
individual begins to
focus on self and the
need to relieve
personal discomfort
Feelings of dread, loathing,
horror
Total focus on self and
intense desire to relieve
the anxiety
Sense of impending
doom
Terror
Bizarre behavior, including
shouting, screaming,
running about wildly,
clinging to anyone or
anything from which a
sense of safety and
security is derived
Hallucinations, delusions
Extreme withdrawal
into self
Mild Moderate Severe Panic
Coping
mechanisms
Ego
defense
mechanisms
Psycho-
neurotic
responses
Psychotic
responses
Psycho-
physiological
responses
FIGURE 2–2 Adaptation responses on a continuum of anxiety.
problem-solving and rational thinking. As the level
of anxiety increases, the strength of the ego is tested,
and energy is mobilized to confront the threat.
Anna Freud (1953) identified a number of defense
mechanisms employed by the ego in the face of
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 18
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 19
TA B L E 2 – 2 Ego Defense Mechanisms
DEFENSE MECHANISM EXAMPLE DEFENSE MECHANISM EXAMPLE
COMPENSATION
Covering up a real or
perceived weakness by
emphasizing a trait one
considers more desirable
DENIAL
Refusing to acknowledge
the existence of a real
situation or the feelings
associated with it
DISPLACEMENT
The transfer of feelings
from one target to another
that is considered less
threatening or that is
neutral
IDENTIFICATION
An attempt to increase
self-worth by acquiring
certain attributes and
characteristics of an
individual one admires
INTELLECTUALIZATION
An attempt to avoid
expressing actual
emotions associated
with a stressful situation
by using the intellectual
processes of logic,
reasoning, and analysis
INTROJECTION
Integrating the beliefs
and values of another
individual into one’s
own ego structure
ISOLATION
Separating a thought
or memory from the
feeling, tone, or emotion
associated with it
PROJECTION
Attributing feelings or
impulses unacceptable
to one’s self to another
person
A physically handicapped
boy is unable to partici-
pate in football, so he
compensates by becom-
ing a great scholar.
A woman drinks alcohol
every day and cannot
stop, failing to acknowl-
edge that she has a
problem.
A client is angry with his
physician, does not ex-
press it, but becomes
verbally abusive with the
nurse.
A teenager who required
lengthy rehabilitation
after an accident decides
to become a physical
therapist as a result of his
experiences.
Sarah’s husband is being
transferred with his job to
a city far away from her
parents. She hides anxiety
by explaining to her par-
ents the advantages asso-
ciated with the move.
Children integrate their
parents’ value system
into the process of con-
science formation. A child
says to a friend, “Don’t
cheat. It’s wrong.”
A young woman de-
scribes being attacked
and raped without
showing any emotion.
Sue feels a strong sexual
attraction to her track
coach and tells her friend,
“He’s coming on to me!”
RATIONALIZATION
Attempting to make
excuses or formulate
logical reasons to justify
unacceptable feelings or
behaviors
REACTION FORMATION
Preventing unacceptable
or undesirable thoughts
or behaviors from being
expressed by exaggerat-
ing opposite thoughts or
types of behaviors
REGRESSION
Retreating in response
to stress to an earlier
level of development
and the comfort mea –
sures associated with
that level of functioning
REPRESSION
Involuntarily blocking
unpleasant feelings and
experiences from one’s
awareness
SUBLIMATION
Rechanneling of drives
or impulses that are
personally or socially
unacceptable into
activities that are
constructive
SUPPRESSION
The voluntary blocking
of unpleasant feelings
and experiences from
one’s awareness
UNDOING
Symbolically negating
or canceling out an
experience that one
finds intolerable
John tells the rehab
nurse, “I drink because
it’s the only way I can
deal with my bad mar-
riage and my worse job.”
Jane hates nursing. She
attended nursing school to
please her parents. During
career day, she speaks
to prospective students
about the excellence of
nursing as a career.
When 2-year-old Jay is
hospitalized for tonsillitis
he will drink only from a
bottle, even though his
mother states he has
been drinking from a
cup for 6 months.
An accident victim can
remember nothing about
his accident.
A mother whose son was
killed by a drunk driver
channels her anger and
energy into being the
president of the local
chapter of Mothers
Against Drunk Driving.
Scarlett says, “I don’t
want to think about that
now. I’ll think about that
tomorrow.”
Joe is nervous about his
new job and yells at his
wife. On his way home
he stops and buys her
some flowers.
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 19
Moderate-to-Severe Anxiety
Anxiety at the moderate-to-severe level that remains
unresolved over an extended period of time can
contribute to a number of physiological disorders.
The DSM-5 (APA, 2013) describes these disorders
under the category “Psychological Factors Affecting
Other Medical Conditions.” The psychological factors
may exacerbate symptoms of, delay recovery from, or
interfere with treatment of the medical condition.
The condition may be initiated or exacerbated by
an environmental situation that the individual per-
ceives as stressful. Measurable pathophysiology can be
demonstrated. It is thought that psychological and
behavioral factors may affect the course of almost
every major category of disease, including but not
limited to cardiovascular, gastrointestinal, neoplastic,
neurological, and pulmonary conditions.
Severe Anxiety
Extended periods of repressed severe anxiety can re-
sult in psychoneurotic behavior patterns. Neurosis is
no longer considered a separate category of mental
disorder. However, the term is still used in the literature
to further describe the symptomatology of certain
disorders and to differentiate from behaviors that
occur at the more serious level of psychosis. Neuroses
are psychiatric disturbances characterized by excessive
anxiety that is expressed directly or altered through de-
fense mechanisms. It appears as a symptom such as an
obsession, a compulsion, a phobia, or a sexual dysfunc-
tion (Sadock, Sadock, & Ruiz, 2015). The following are
common characteristics of people with neuroses:
■ They are aware that they are experiencing distress.
■ They are aware that their behaviors are maladaptive.
■ They are unaware of any possible psychological
causes of the distress.
■ They feel helpless to change their situation.
■ They experience no loss of contact with reality.
The following disorders are examples of psychoneu-
rotic responses to anxiety as they appear in the DSM-5:
■ Anxiety disorders: Disorders in which the character-
istic features are symptoms of anxiety and avoidance
behavior (e.g., phobias, panic disorder, generalized
anxiety disorder, and separation anxiety disorder).
■ Somatic symptom disorders: Disorders in which the
characteristic features are physical symptoms for
which there is no demonstrable organic pathology.
Psychological factors are judged to play a significant
role in the onset, severity, exacerbation, or mainte-
nance of the symptoms (e.g., somatic symptom dis-
order, illness anxiety disorder, conversion disorder,
and factitious disorder).
■ Dissociative disorders: Disorders in which the
characteristic feature is a disruption in the usually
integrated functions of consciousness, memory,
identity, or perception of the environment (e.g.,
dissociative amnesia, dissociative identity disorder,
and depersonalization-derealization disorder).
Panic Anxiety
At this extreme level of anxiety, an individual is not
capable of processing what is happening in the envi-
ronment and may lose contact with reality. Psychosis
is defined as a significant thought disturbance in
which reality testing is impaired, resulting in delu-
sions, hallucinations, disorganized speech, or catatonic
behavior (Black & Andreasen, 2014). The following are
common characteristics of people with psychoses:
■ They exhibit minimal distress (emotional tone is
flat, bland, or inappropriate).
■ They are unaware that their behavior is maladaptive.
■ They are unaware of any psychological problems
(anosognosia).
■ They are exhibiting a flight from reality into a less
stressful world or one in which they are attempting
to adapt.
Examples of psychotic responses to anxiety include
schizophrenic, schizoaffective, and delusional disorders.
20 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
CORE CONCEPT
Grief
Grief is a subjective state of emotional, physical, and
social responses to the loss of a valued entity.
Grief
Most individuals experience intense emotional an-
guish in response to a significant personal loss. A loss
is anything that is perceived as such by the individual.
Losses may be real, in which case they can be substan-
tiated by others (e.g., death of a loved one, loss of per-
sonal possessions), or they may be perceived by the
individual alone, unable to be shared or identified by
others (e.g., loss of the feeling of femininity following
mastectomy). Any situation that creates change for an
individual can be identified as a loss. Failure (either
real or perceived) also can be viewed as a loss.
The loss or anticipated loss of anything of value
to an individual can trigger the grief response. This
period of characteristic emotions and behaviors is
called mourning. The “normal” mourning process is
adaptive and is characterized by feelings of sadness,
guilt, anger, helplessness, hopelessness, and despair.
An absence of mourning after a loss may be consid-
ered maladaptive.
Stages of Grief
Kübler-Ross (1969), in extensive research with termi-
nally ill patients, identified five stages of feelings and
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 20
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 21
behaviors that individuals experience in response to
a real, perceived, or anticipated loss:
Stage 1—Denial: This is a stage of shock and dis –
belief. The response may be one of “No, it can’t
be true!” The reality of the loss is not acknowl-
edged. Denial is a protective mechanism that al-
lows the individual to cope in an immediate time
frame while organizing more effective defense
strategies.
Stage 2—Anger: “Why me?” and “It’s not fair!” are
comments often expressed during the anger
stage. Envy and resentment toward individuals
not affected by the loss are common. Anger may
be directed at the self or displaced on loved ones,
caregivers, and even God. There may be a pre –
occupation with an idealized image of the lost
entity.
Stage 3—Bargaining: During this stage, which is usu-
ally not visible or evident to others, a “bargain” is
made with God in an attempt to reverse or post-
pone the loss: “If God will help me through this, I
promise I will go to church every Sunday and
volunteer my time to help others.” Sometimes the
promise is associated with feelings of guilt for not
having performed satisfactorily, appropriately, or
sufficiently.
Stage 4—Depression: During this stage, the full im-
pact of the loss is experienced. The sense of loss is
intense, and feelings of sadness and depression
prevail. This is a time of quiet desperation and
disengagement from all association with the lost
entity. It differs from pathological depression, which
occurs when an individual becomes fixed in an
earlier stage of the grief process. Rather, stage 4 of
the grief response represents advancement toward
resolution.
Stage 5—Acceptance: The final stage brings a feeling
of peace regarding the loss that has occurred. It is
a time of quiet expectation and resignation. The
focus is on the reality of the loss and its meaning
for the individuals affected by it.
Not all individuals experience each of these stages
in response to a loss, nor do they necessarily experi-
ence them in this order. Some individuals’ grieving
behaviors may fluctuate and even overlap between
stages.
Anticipatory Grief
When a loss is anticipated, individuals often begin
the work of grieving before the actual loss occurs.
Most people reexperience the grieving behaviors
once the loss occurs, but preparing for the loss in
advance can facilitate the process of mourning,
actually decreasing the length and intensity of the
response. Problems arise, particularly in anticipating
the death of a loved one, when family members
experience anticipatory grieving and complete the
mourning process prematurely. They disengage
emotionally from the dying person, who may then
experience feelings of rejection by loved ones at a
time when this psychological support is so necessary.
Resolution
The grief response can last from weeks to years. It
cannot be hurried, and individuals must be allowed
to progress at their own pace. In the loss of a loved
one, grief work usually lasts for at least a year, during
which the grieving person experiences each signifi-
cant anniversary or holiday for the first time without
the loved one present.
Length of the grief process may be prolonged by a
number of factors. If the relationship with the lost
entity was marked by ambivalence or if there had
been an enduring love–hate association, reaction to
the loss may be burdened with guilt. Guilt lengthens
the grief reaction by promoting feelings of anger
toward oneself for having committed a wrongdoing
or behaved in an unacceptable manner toward a lost
loved one. He or she may even feel that the negative
behavior contributed to the loss.
Anticipatory grieving may shorten the grief response
in individuals who are able to work through some of
the feelings before the loss occurs. If the loss is sudden
and unexpected, mourning may take longer than it
would if individuals were able to grieve in anticipation
of the loss.
Length of the grieving process is also affected
by the number of recent losses experienced by
an individual and whether he or she is able to
complete one grieving process before another
loss occurs. This is particularly true for elderly indi-
viduals who may experience numerous losses in
a span of a few years, including spouse, friends,
other relatives, independent functioning, home,
personal possessions, and pets. Grief accumulates
into a bereavement overload, which for some indi-
viduals is perceived as difficult or even impossible
to overcome.
The process of mourning may be considered
resolved when an individual is able to regain a sense
of organization, redefine his or her life in the ab-
sence of the lost person or object, and pursue new
interests and relationships. Disorganization and
emotional pain have been experienced and toler-
ated. Preoccupation with the lost entity has been
replaced with a renewed energy and new resolve
about ways to keep the memory of the lost one alive.
Most grief, however, does not permanently disap-
pear but will reemerge from time to time in re-
sponse to triggers such as anniversary dates (Sadock
et al., 2015).
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 21
Maladaptive Grief Responses
Maladaptive responses to loss occur when an individual
is not able to satisfactorily progress through the stages
of grieving to achieve resolution. These responses
usually occur when an individual becomes fixed in the
denial or anger stage of the grief process. Several types
of grief responses have been identified as pathological,
including those that are prolonged, delayed, inhibited,
or distorted. The prolonged response is characterized
by an intense preoccupation with memories of the lost
entity for many years after the loss has occurred. Behaviors
associated with the stages of denial or anger are mani-
fested, and disorganization of functioning and intense
emotional pain related to the lost entity are evidenced.
In the delayed or inhibited response, the individual
becomes fixed in the denial stage of the grieving
process. The emotional pain associated with the loss
is not experienced, but anxiety disorders (e.g., pho-
bias, somatic symptom disorders) or sleeping and
eating disorders (e.g., insomnia, anorexia) may be
evident. The individual may remain in denial for
many years until the grief response is triggered by a
reminder of the loss or even by an unrelated loss.
The individual who experiences a distorted response
is fixed in the anger stage of grieving. In the distorted
response, all the normal behaviors associated with griev-
ing, such as helplessness, hopelessness, sadness, anger,
and guilt, are exaggerated out of proportion to the
situation. The individual turns the anger inward on the
self, is consumed with overwhelming despair, and is
unable to function in normal activities of daily living.
Pathological depression is a distorted grief response.
Mental Health/Mental Illness Continuum
Anxiety and grief have been described as two primary
responses to stress. In Figure 2–3, both of these re-
sponses are presented on a continuum according to
degree of symptom severity. Disorders as they appear
in the DSM-5 are identified at their appropriate place-
ment along the continuum.
22 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Feelings of
Sadness
Dysthymia
Cyclothymic Disorder
Major Depression
Bipolar Disorder
Life’s Everyday
Disappointments
Neurotic
Responses
Psychotic
Responses
Mild Moderate Severe
Grief Grief
Anxiety Anxiety
Panic
Coping
Mechanisms
Ego Defense
Mechanisms
Psychoneurotic
Responses
Psychotic
Responses
Sleeping
Eating
Yawning
Drinking
Exercise
Smoking
Crying
Pacing
Laughing
Talking it
out with
someone
Compensation
Denial
Displacement
Identification
Isolation
Projection
Rationalization
Regression
Repression
Sublimation
Suppression
Undoing
Headaches
Anorexia
Arthritis
Colitis
Ulcers
Asthma
Pain
Cancer
CHD
Sexual
dysfunction
Phobias
Obsessions
Compulsions
Hypochondriasis
Conversion
disorder
Multiple
personalities
Amnesia
Fugue
Schizophrenia
Schizoaffective
disorder
Delusional
disorders
Mild Moderate Severe
Mental
Health
Mental
Illness
Psychophysiological
Responses
FIGURE 2–3 Conceptualization of anxiety and grief responses along the mental health/mental illness continuum.
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 22
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 23
Summary and Key Points
■ Psychiatric care has its roots in ancient times, when
etiology was based in superstition and ideas related
to the supernatural.
■ Treatments were often inhumane and included
brutal beatings, starvation, or torture.
■ Hippocrates associated insanity and mental illness
with an irregularity in the interaction of the four
body fluids (humors): blood, black bile, yellow bile,
and phlegm.
■ Conditions for care of the mentally ill have im-
proved, largely because of the influence of leaders
such as Benjamin Rush, Dorothea Dix, and Linda
Richards, whose endeavors provided a model for
more humanistic treatment.
■ Maslow identified a hierarchy of needs that individ-
uals seek to fulfill in their quest to self-actualization
(one’s highest potential).
■ For purposes of this text, the definition of mental
health is “the successful adaptation to stressors from
the internal or external environment, evidenced by
thoughts, feelings, and behaviors that are age-
appropriate and congruent with local and cultural
norms.”
■ Most cultures label behavior as mental illness on the
basis of incomprehensibility and cultural relativity.
■ When observers are unable to find meaning or
comprehensibility in behavior, they are likely to
label that behavior as mental illness. The meaning
of behaviors is determined within individual cul-
tures. For purposes of this text, the definition of
mental illness is viewed as “maladaptive responses to
stressors from the internal or external environment,
evidenced by thoughts, feelings, and behaviors that
are incongruent with the local and cultural norms,
and that interfere with the individual’s social, occu-
pational, and/or physical functioning.”
■ Anxiety and grief have been described as two pri-
mary psychological response patterns to stress.
■ Peplau defined anxiety by levels of symptom sever-
ity: mild, moderate, severe, and panic.
■ Behaviors associated with levels of anxiety include
coping mechanisms, ego defense mechanisms,
psychophysiological responses, psychoneurotic
responses, and psychotic responses.
■ Grief is described as a response to loss of a valued
entity. Loss is anything that is perceived as such by
the individual.
■ Kübler-Ross, in extensive research with terminally
ill patients, identified five stages of feelings and
behaviors that individuals experience in response
to a real, perceived, or anticipated loss: denial,
anger, bargaining, depression, and acceptance.
■ Anticipatory grief is grief work that begins and
sometimes ends before the loss occurs.
■ Resolution is thought to occur when an individual
is able to remember and accept both the positive
and negative aspects associated with the lost entity.
■ Grieving is thought to be maladaptive when the
mourning process is prolonged, delayed or inhib-
ited, or becomes distorted and exaggerated out of
proportion to the situation. Pathological depres-
sion is considered to be a distorted reaction.
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. Anna’s dog, Lucky, her pet for 16 years, was killed by a car 3 years ago. Since that time, Anna has lost
weight, rarely leaves her home, and talks excessively about Lucky. Why would Anna’s behavior be
considered maladaptive?
a. It has been more than 3 years since Lucky died.
b. Her grief is too intense over the loss of a dog.
c. Her grief is interfering with her functioning.
d. Cultural norms typically do not comprehend grief over the loss of a pet.
Continued
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:42 am Page 23
24 U N I T 1 ■ Basic Concepts in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
2. Anna states that Lucky was her closest friend, and since his death, there is no one who could ever
replace the relationship they had. According to Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, which level of need is
not being met?
a. Physiological needs
b. Self-esteem needs
c. Safety and security needs
d. Love and belonging needs
3. Anna’s daughter notices that Anna appears to be listening to another voice when just the two of them
are in a room together. When questioned, Anna admits that she hears someone telling her that she
was a horrible caretaker for Lucky and did not deserve to ever have a pet. Which of the following best
describes what Anna is experiencing?
a. Neurosis
b. Psychosis
c. Depression
d. Bereavement
4. Anna, who is 72 years old, is of the age when she may have experienced several losses in a short time.
What is this called?
a. Bereavement overload
b. Normal mourning
c. Isolation
d. Cultural relativity
5. Anna has been grieving the death of Lucky for 3 years. She is unable to take care of her normal activities
because she insists on visiting Lucky’s grave daily. What is the most likely reason that Anna’s daughter
has put off seeking help for Anna?
a. Women are less likely than men to seek help for emotional problems.
b. Relatives often try to normalize behavior rather than label it mental illness.
c. She knows that all older people are expected to be a little depressed.
d. She is afraid that the neighbors will think her mother is “crazy.”
6. Lucky’s accident occurred when he got away from Anna while they were taking a walk. He ran into the
street and was hit by a car. Anna cannot remember the circumstances of his death. This is an example
of what defense mechanism?
a. Rationalization
b. Suppression
c. Denial
d. Repression
7. Lucky sometimes refused to obey Anna’s commands to come back to her, including when he ran into
the street on the day of the accident. But Anna continues to insist, “He was the very best dog. He always
minded me. He always did everything I told him to do.” Which defense mechanism is Anna exhibiting?
a. Sublimation
b. Compensation
c. Reaction formation
d. Undoing
8. Anna has been a widow for 20 years. Her maladaptive grief response to the loss of her dog may be
attributed to which of the following? (Select all that apply.)
a. Unresolved grief over loss of her husband
b. Loss of several relatives and friends over the last few years
c. Repressed feelings of guilt over the way Lucky died
d. Inability to prepare in advance for the loss
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:43 am Page 24
C H A P T E R 2 ■ Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical and Theoretical Concepts 25
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
9. For what reason would Anna’s illness be considered a neurosis rather than a psychosis?
a. She is unaware that her behavior is maladaptive.
b. She exhibits inappropriate affect (emotional tone).
c. She experiences no loss of contact with reality.
d. She tells the nurse, “There is nothing wrong with me!”
10. Which of the following statements by Anna might suggest that she is achieving resolution of her grief
over Lucky’s death?
a. “I don’t cry anymore when I think about Lucky.”
b. “It’s true. Lucky didn’t always mind me. Sometimes he ignored my commands.”
c. “I remember how it happened now. I should have held tighter to his leash!”
d. “I won’t ever have another dog. It’s just too painful to lose them.”
References
American Psychiatric Association. (2013). Diagnostic and statistical
manual of mental disorders (5th ed.). Washington, DC: American
Psychiatric Publishing.
Black, D.W., & Andreasen, N.C. (2014). Introductory textbook of
psychiatry (6th ed.). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric
Publishing.
Horwitz, A.V. (2010). The social control of mental illness. Clinton
Corners, NY: Percheron Press.
Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Synopsis of psychiatry:
Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Classical References
Freud, A. (1953). The ego and mechanisms of defense. New York:
International Universities Press.
Freud, S. (1961). The ego and the id. In Standard edition of the
complete psychological works of Freud (Vol. XIX). London:
Hogarth Press.
Jahoda, M. (1958). Current concepts of positive mental health.
New York: Basic Books.
Kübler-Ross, E. (1969). On death and dying. New York: Macmillan.
Maslow, A. (1970). Motivation and personality (2nd ed.). New York:
Harper & Row.
Menninger, K. (1963). The vital balance. New York: Viking Press.
Peplau, H. (1963). A working definition of anxiety. In S. Burd &
M. Marshall (Eds.), Some clinical approaches to psychiatric
nursing. New York: Macmillan.
Robinson, L. (1983). Psychiatric nursing as a human experience
(3rd ed.). Philadelphia: WB Saunders.
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:43 am Page 25
6054_Ch02_012-026 01/09/17 10:43 am Page 26
U N I T 2
Foundations for
Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:22 PM Page 27
3 Concepts of Psychobiology
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
The Nervous System: An Anatomical Review
Neuroendocrinology
Genetics
Psychoneuroimmunology
Psychopharmacology and the Brain
Implications for Nursing
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
axon
cell body
circadian rhythms
dendrites
genotype
limbic system
neuron
neurotransmitter
phenotype
receptor sites
synapse
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Identify gross anatomical structures of the
brain and describe their functions.
2. Discuss the physiology of neurotransmission
in the central nervous system.
3. Describe the role of neurotransmitters in
human behavior.
4. Discuss the association of endocrine func-
tioning to the development of psychiatric
disorders.
5. Describe the role of genetics in the develop-
ment of psychiatric disorders.
6. Discuss the correlation of altered brain
function to various psychiatric disorders.
7. Identify diagnostic procedures used to detect
alteration in biological functioning that may
contribute to psychiatric disorders.
8. Discuss the influence of psychological
factors on the immune system.
9. Describe the biological mechanisms of
psychoactive drugs at neural synapses.
10. Recognize theorized influences in the devel-
opment of psychiatric disorders, including
brain physiology, genetics, endocrine func-
tion, immune system, and psychosocial
and environmental factors.
11. Discuss the implications of psychobiological
concepts for the practice of psychiatric-
mental health nursing.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. A dramatic reduction in which neurotransmit-
ter is most closely associated with Alzheimer’s
disease?
2. Anorexia nervosa has been associated with
a primary dysfunction of which structure of
the brain?
3. Many psychotropic medications work by
blocking the reuptake of neurotransmitters.
Describe the process of reuptake.
4. What psychiatric disorder may be linked to
chronic hypothyroidism?
CORE CONCEPTS
Genetics
Neuroendocrinology
Psychobiology
Psychoneuroimmunology
Psychopharmacology
28
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:22 PM Page 28
In recent years, increased emphasis has been placed
on the organic basis for psychiatric illness. This “neu-
roscientific revolution” studies the biological basis of
behavior, and several mental illnesses are now consid-
ered physical disorders resulting from malfunctions
and/or malformations of the brain. That some psychi-
atric illnesses and associated behaviors can be traced
to biological factors does not imply that psychosocial
and sociocultural influences are totally discounted.
For example, there is evidence that psychological inter-
ventions have an influence on brain activity that is
similar to that of psychopharmacological intervention
(Flor, 2014; Furmark et al., 2002). Other evidence in-
dicates that lifestyle choices such as marijuana use
can precipitate mental illness (psychosis) in individuals
with genetic vulnerability (National Institutes of
Health, 2017). Ongoing research will build a better
understanding of the complex interplay of neural
activities within the brain and interaction with one’s
environment.
The systems of biology, psychology, and sociology
are not mutually exclusive—they are interacting sys-
tems. This interaction is clearly indicated by the fact
that individuals experience biological changes in
response to environmental events. One or several of
these systems may at various times explain behavioral
phenomena.
This chapter focuses on the role of neurophysiolog-
ical, neurochemical, genetic, and endocrine influences
on psychiatric illness. An introduction to psychophar-
macology is included (discussed in more detail in
Chapter 4, Psychopharmacology), and various diagnos-
tic procedures used to detect alteration in biological
function that may contribute to psychiatric illness are
identified. The implications for psychiatric-mental
health nursing are discussed.
The Nervous System: An Anatomical Review
The Brain
The brain has three major divisions, subdivided into
six major parts:
l. Forebrain
a. Cerebrum
b. Diencephalon
2. Midbrain
a. Mesencephalon
3. Hindbrain
a. Pons
b. Medulla
c. Cerebellum
Each of these structures is discussed individually.
A summary is presented in Table 3–1.
Cerebrum
The cerebrum consists of a right and left hemisphere
and constitutes the largest part of the human brain.
The two hemispheres are separated by a deep groove
and connected to each other by a band of 200 million
axons (nerve fibers) called the corpus callosum. Because
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 29
CORE CONCEPT
Psychobiology
The study of the biological foundations of cognitive,
emotional, and behavioral processes.
TA B L E 3 – 1 Structure and Function of the Brain
STRUCTURE PRIMARY FUNCTION
I. FOREBRAIN
A. Cerebrum
1. Frontal lobes
2. Parietal lobes
3. Temporal lobes
4. Occipital lobes
Composed of two hemispheres connected by a band of nerve tissue that houses a band of
200 million axons called the corpus callosum. The outer layer is called the cerebral cortex.
It is extensively folded and consists of billions of neurons. The left hemisphere appears to
deal with logic and solving problems. The right hemisphere may be called the “creative” brain
and is associated with affect, behavior, and spatial-perceptual functions. Each hemisphere is
divided into four lobes
Voluntary body movement, including movements that permit speaking, thinking and judgment
formation, and expression of feelings
Perception and interpretation of most sensory information (including touch, pain, taste, and
body position)
Hearing, short-term memory, and sense of smell; expression of emotions through connection
with limbic system
Visual reception and interpretation
Continued
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:22 PM Page 29
each hemisphere controls different functions, infor-
mation is processed through the corpus callosum
so that each hemisphere is aware of the activity of
the other.
The surface of the cerebrum consists of gray matter
and is called the cerebral cortex. The gray matter is com-
posed of neuron cell bodies that appear gray to the
eye. These cell bodies are thought to be the actual
“thinking” structures of the brain. The basal ganglia,
four subcortical nuclei of gray matter (the striatum,
the pallidum, the substantia nigra, and the subthalamic
nucleus), are found deep within the cerebral hemi-
spheres. They are responsible for certain subconscious
aspects of voluntary movement, such as swinging the
arms when walking, gesturing while speaking, and reg-
ulating muscle tone (Scanlon & Sanders, 2015).
The cerebral cortex is identified by numerous folds
called gyri and deep grooves between the folds called
sulci. This extensive folding extends the surface area
of the cerebral cortex to permit the presence of mil-
lions more neurons than could not be accommodated
without the folds (as is the case in the brains of some
animals, such as dogs and cats). Each hemisphere of
the cerebral cortex is divided into the frontal lobe,
parietal lobe, temporal lobe, and occipital lobe. These
lobes, which are named for the overlying bones in the
cranium, are identified in Figure 3–1.
The Frontal Lobes
Voluntary body movement is controlled by impulses
through the frontal lobes. The right frontal lobe
controls motor activity on the left side of the body,
and the left frontal lobe controls motor activity on
the right side of the body. The frontal lobe may also
play a role in the emotional experience, as evidenced
by changes in mood and character after damage to
this area. The prefrontal cortex (the front part of
the frontal lobe) plays an essential role in the regu-
lation and adaptation of our emotions to new situa-
tions and may have implications for moral and
spiritual responses (Sadock, Sadock, & Ruiz, 2015).
Neuroimaging tests suggest there may be decreased
activity in the frontal lobes of people with schizo-
phrenia (Butler et al., 2012).
The Parietal Lobes
The parietal lobes manage somatosensory input,
including touch, pain, pressure, taste, temperature,
perception of joint and body position, and visceral
sensations. The parietal lobes also contain association
fibers linked to the primary sensory areas through
which interpretation of sensory-perceptual informa-
tion is made. Language interpretation is associated
with the left hemisphere of the parietal lobe.
The Temporal Lobes
The upper anterior temporal lobe is concerned with
auditory functions, and the lower part is dedicated to
short-term memory. The sense of smell has a connec-
tion to the temporal lobes, as the impulses carried by
the olfactory nerves end in this area of the brain. The
temporal lobes also play a role in the expression of
30 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 3 – 1 Structure and Function of the Brain—cont’d
STRUCTURE PRIMARY FUNCTION
B. Diencephalon
1. Thalamus
2. Hypothalamus
3. Limbic system
II. MIDBRAIN
A. Mesencephalon
III. HINDBRAIN
A. Pons
B. Medulla
C. Cerebellum
Connects cerebrum with lower brain structures
Integrates all sensory input (except smell) on way to cortex; some involvement with emotions
and mood
Regulates anterior and posterior lobes of pituitary gland; exerts control over actions of the auto-
nomic nervous system; regulates appetite and temperature
Consists of medially placed cortical and subcortical structures and the fiber tracts connecting
them with one another and with the hypothalamus. It is sometimes called the “emotional
brain”—associated with feelings of fear and anxiety; anger and aggression; love, joy, and hope;
and with sexuality and social behavior
Responsible for visual, auditory, and balance (“righting”) reflexes
Regulation of respiration and skeletal muscle tone; ascending and descending tracts connect
brainstem with cerebellum and cortex
Pathway for all ascending and descending fiber tracts; contains vital centers that regulate heart rate,
blood pressure, and respiration; reflex centers for swallowing, sneezing, coughing, and vomiting
Regulates muscle tone and coordination and maintains posture and equilibrium
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:22 PM Page 30
emotions through an interconnection with the limbic
system. The left temporal lobe and the left parietal
lobe are involved in language interpretation.
The Occipital Lobes
The occipital lobes are the primary area of visual
reception and interpretation. Visual perception, the
ability to judge spatial relationships such as distance
and to see in three dimensions, is also processed in
this area. Language interpretation is affected by the
visual processing that occurs in the occipital lobes.
Diencephalon
The second part of the forebrain is the diencephalon,
which connects the cerebrum with lower structures of
the brain. The major components of the diencephalon
include the thalamus and the hypothalamus, which are
part of a neuroanatomical loop of structures known as
the limbic system. These structures are identified in
Figures 3–1 and 3–2.
Thalamus
The thalamus integrates all sensory input (except
smell) on its way to the cortex. This integration al-
lows for rapid interpretation of the whole rather than
individual perception of each sensation. The thala-
mus is also involved in temporarily blocking minor
sensations so that an individual can concentrate on
one important event when necessary. For example,
an individual who is studying for an examination may
be unaware of the clock ticking in the room or another
person entering because the thalamus has temporarily
blocked these incoming sensations from the cortex.
The impact of dopamine in the thalamus is associ-
ated with several neuropsychiatric disorders.
Hypothalamus
The hypothalamus is located just below the thalamus
and just above the pituitary gland. It has a number of
diverse functions.
1. Regulation of the pituitary gland: The pituitary
gland consists of two lobes—the posterior lobe and
the anterior lobe.
a. The posterior lobe of the pituitary gland is actually
extended tissue from the hypothalamus. The
posterior lobe stores antidiuretic hormone (which
helps to maintain blood pressure through regu-
lation of water retention) and oxytocin (the
hormone responsible for stimulation of the
uterus during labor and the release of milk from
the mammary glands). Both of these hormones
are produced in the hypothalamus. When the
hypothalamus detects the body’s need for these
hormones, it sends nerve impulses to the poste-
rior pituitary for their release.
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 31
Frontal lobe
Premotor area
Motor area
General sensory area
Sensory association
area
Parietal lobe
Occipital lobe
Visual area
Auditory area
Temporal lobe
Auditory
association
area
Visual association
area
Motor speech area
Cerebellum
Pons Medulla
FIGURE 3–1 Left cerebral hemisphere showing some of the functional areas that have been mapped. (Adapted from Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T.
[2015]. Essentials of anatomy and physiology [7th ed.]. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Company, with permission.)
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 31
b. The anterior lobe of the pituitary gland consists
of glandular tissue that produces a number of
hormones used by the body. These hormones
are regulated by releasing factors from the hypo-
thalamus. When the hormones are required by
the body, the releasing factors stimulate the re-
lease of the hormone from the anterior pitu-
itary, and the hormone in turn stimulates its
target organ to carry out its specific functions.
2. Direct neural control over the actions of the auto-
nomic nervous system: The hypothalamus regulates
the appropriate visceral responses during various
emotional states. The actions of the autonomic
nervous system are described later in this chapter.
3. Regulation of appetite, temperature, blood pres-
sure, thirst, and circadian rhythms: Appetite is reg-
ulated through response to blood nutrient levels.
4. Regulation of temperature: The hypothalamus
senses internal temperature changes in the blood
that flows through the brain. It receives information
through sensory input from the skin about external
temperature changes and uses this information to
promote certain types of responses (e.g., sweating
or shivering) that help maintain body temperature
within the normal range.
Limbic System
The part of the brain known as the limbic system con-
sists of portions of the cerebrum and the dien-
cephalon. Its major components include the medially
placed cortical and subcortical structures and the
fiber tracts connecting them with one another and
with the hypothalamus. The limbic system is a group
of structures including the amygdala, mammillary
body, olfactory tract, hypothalamus, cingulate gyrus,
septum pellucidum, thalamus, hippocampus, and
fornix. This system has been called the “emotional
brain” and is associated with feelings of fear and
anxiety; anger, rage, and aggression; love, joy, and hope;
and sexuality and social behavior. The amygdala seems
32 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Septum
pellucidum
Thalamus
Fornix
HippocampusMammillary body
Pituitary gland
Amygdala
Olfactory
tract
Hypothalamus
Cingulate
gyrus
FIGURE 3–2 Structures of the limbic system. (From Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T. [2011]. Essentials of anatomy and physiology [6th ed.]. Philadelphia:
F.A. Davis Company, with permission.)
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 32
to be a primary gateway for processing emotional
stimuli, particularly responses to fear, anxiety, and
panic.
Mesencephalon
Structures of major importance in the mesencephalon,
or midbrain, include nuclei and fiber tracts. The
mesencephalon extends from the pons to the hypo-
thalamus and is responsible for integration of various
reflexes, including visual reflexes (e.g., automatically
turning away from a dangerous object when it comes
into view), auditory reflexes (e.g., automatically turn-
ing toward a sound that is heard), and righting reflexes
(e.g., automatically keeping the head upright and
maintaining balance).
Pons
The pons is a bulbous structure that lies between the
midbrain and the medulla as part of the brainstem
(Fig. 3–1). It is composed of large bundles of fibers
and forms a major connection between the cerebel-
lum and the brainstem. The pons is a relay station
that transmits messages between various parts of the
nervous system, including the cerebrum and cerebel-
lum. It contains the central connections of cranial
nerves V through VIII and centers for respiration and
skeletal muscle tone. The pons is also associated with
sleep and dreaming.
Medulla
The medulla is the connecting structure between the
spinal cord and the pons, and all of the ascending
and descending fiber tracts pass through it. The vital
centers are contained in the medulla, and it is respon-
sible for regulation of heart rate, blood pressure, and
respiration. The medulla contains reflex centers for
swallowing, sneezing, coughing, and vomiting, as
well as nuclei for cranial nerves IX through XII. The
medulla, pons, and midbrain form the structure
known as the brainstem.
Cerebellum
The cerebellum is separated from the brainstem by
the fourth ventricle but is connected to it through
bundles of fiber tracts (Fig. 3–1). The cerebellum is
associated with involuntary aspects of movement such
as coordination, muscle tone, and the maintenance
of posture and equilibrium.
Nerve Tissue
The tissue of the central nervous system (CNS) con-
sists of nerve cells called neurons that generate and
transmit electrochemical impulses. The structure of
a neuron is composed of a cell body, an axon, and
dendrites. The cell body contains the nucleus and is
essential for the continued life of the neuron. The
dendrites are processes that transmit impulses toward
the cell body, and the axon transmits impulses away
from the cell body. The axons and dendrites are cov-
ered by layers of cells called neuroglia that form a coat-
ing, or “sheath,” of myelin. Myelin is a phospholipid
that provides insulation against short-circuiting of the
neurons during their electrical activity and increases
the velocity of the impulse. The white matter of the
brain and spinal cord is so called because of the
whitish appearance of the myelin sheath over the axons
and dendrites. The gray matter is composed of cell
bodies that contain no myelin.
The three classes of neurons include afferent (sen-
sory), efferent (motor), and interneurons. The affer-
ent neurons carry impulses from receptors in the
internal and external periphery to the CNS, where
they are then interpreted into various sensations. The
efferent neurons carry impulses from the CNS to effectors
in the periphery, such as muscles (that respond by
contracting) and glands (that respond by secreting).
Interneurons exist entirely within the CNS, and
99 percent of all nerve cells belong to this group. They
may carry only sensory or motor impulses, or they may
serve as integrators in the pathways between afferent
and efferent neurons. They account in large part for
thinking, feelings, learning, language, and memory.
Synapses
Information is transmitted through the body from
one neuron to another. Some messages may be
processed through only a few neurons, whereas
others may require thousands of neuronal connec-
tions. The neurons that transmit the impulses do not
actually touch each other. The junction between two
neurons is called a synapse. The small space between
the axon terminals of one neuron and the cell body
or dendrites of another is called the synaptic cleft.
Neurons conducting impulses toward the synapse
are called presynaptic neurons, and those conducting
impulses away are called postsynaptic neurons.
Chemicals that act as neurotransmitters are stored
in the axon terminals of the presynaptic neuron. An
electrical impulse through the neuron causes the
release of this neurotransmitter into the synaptic cleft.
The neurotransmitter then diffuses across the synap-
tic cleft and combines with receptor sites that are
situated on the cell membrane of the postsynaptic
neuron. The type of combination determines whether
or not another electrical impulse is generated. If an
electrical impulse is generated, the result is called an
excitatory response and the electrical impulse moves on
to the next synapse, where the same process recurs.
If an electrical impulse is not generated by the neu-
rotransmitter-receptor site combination, the result is
called an inhibitory response, and synaptic transmission
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 33
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 33
is terminated. Activity at the neural synapse is relevant
in the study of psychiatric disorders because excessive
or deficient activity of neurotransmitters influences a
variety of cognitive and emotional symptoms. The
synapse is also believed to be the primary site of activ-
ity for psychotropic drugs.
The cell body of the postsynaptic neuron also con-
tains a chemical inactivator that is specific to the neuro-
transmitter released by the presynaptic neuron. When
the synaptic transmission has been completed, the
chemical inactivator quickly inactivates the neurotrans-
mitter to prevent unwanted, continuous impulses until
a new impulse from the presynaptic neuron releases
more of the neurotransmitter. Continuous impulses
can result in excessive activity of neurotransmitters
such as dopamine, which is believed to be responsible
for symptoms such as hallucinations and delusions
seen in people with schizophrenia. A schematic repre-
sentation of a synapse is presented in Figure 3–3.
Autonomic Nervous System
The autonomic nervous system (ANS) is considered
part of the peripheral nervous system. Its regulation
is modulated by the hypothalamus, and emotions
exert a great deal of influence over its functioning. For
this reason, the ANS has been implicated in the etiol-
ogy of a number of psychophysiological disorders.
The ANS has two divisions: the sympathetic and
the parasympathetic. The sympathetic division is
dominant in stressful situations and prepares the
body for the fight-or-flight response (discussed in
Chapter 1, The Concept of Stress Adaptation). The
neuronal cell bodies of the sympathetic division orig-
inate in the thoracolumbar region of the spinal cord.
Their axons extend to the chains of sympathetic
ganglia where they synapse with other neurons that
subsequently innervate the visceral effectors. This
results in an increase in heart rate and respiration
and a decrease in digestive secretions and peristalsis.
Blood is shunted to the vital organs and skeletal mus-
cles to ensure adequate oxygenation.
The neuronal cell bodies of the parasympathetic
division originate in the brainstem and the sacral
segments of the spinal cord and extend to the
parasympathetic ganglia where the synapse takes
place either very close to or actually in the visceral
organ being innervated. In this way, a very localized
response is possible. The parasympathetic division
dominates when an individual is in a relaxed, non-
stressful condition. The heart and respirations are
34 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Na+
Na+
Na+
Axon of presynaptic
neuron
Vesicles of neurotransmitter Receptor site
Inactivator
(cholinesterase)
Dendrite of
postsynaptic
neuron
Inactivated
neurotransmitter
Neurotransmitter
(acetylcholine)
Mitochondrion
FIGURE 3–3 Impulse transmission at a synapse. The arrow indicates the direction of electrical impulses. (From Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T. [2015].
Essentials of anatomy and physiology [7th ed.]. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Company, with permission.)
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 34
maintained at a normal rate, and secretions and
peristalsis increase for normal digestion. Elimination
functions are promoted. A schematic representation
of the ANS is presented in Figure 3–4.
Neurotransmitters
Although neurotransmitters were described during
the explanation of synaptic activity, they are discussed
here separately and in detail because of the essential
function they perform in the role of human emotion
and behavior. Neurotransmitters are also central to the
therapeutic action of many psychotropic medications.
Neurotransmitters are chemicals that convey infor-
mation across synaptic clefts to neighboring target cells.
They are stored in small vesicles in the axon terminals
of neurons. When the action potential, or electrical
impulse, reaches this point, the neurotransmitters
are released from the vesicles. They cross the synaptic
cleft and bind with receptor sites on the cell body or
dendrites of the adjacent neuron to allow the impulse
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 35
FIGURE 3–4 The autonomic nervous system. The sympathetic division is shown on the left, and the parasympathetic division is shown on the
right (both divisions are bilateral). (From Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T. [2015]. Essentials of anatomy and physiology [7th ed.]. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Com-
pany, with permission.)
Sympathetic
Eye Ciliary ganglion
Parasympathetic
Salivary
glands
Pons
Otic
ganglion
Vagus nerve
Pterygopalatine
ganglion
Submandibular
ganglion
Midbrain
III
Medulla
VII
IX
Trachea
Preganglionic
neuron
Preganglionic neurons
Postganglionic
neuron
Postganglionic
neurons
Celiac ganglion
Adrenal gland
Chain of
sympathetic
ganglia
Inferior
mesenteric
ganglion
Kidney
Pancreas
Superior
mesenteric
ganglion
Large
intestine
Lung
Heart
Stomach
Small
intestine
Colon
Rectum
Reproductive
organs
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
L1
L2
S2
S3
S4
X
Bladder
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 35
to continue its course or to prevent the impulse from
continuing. After the neurotransmitter has performed
its function in the synapse, it either returns to the vesi-
cles to be stored and used again or is inactivated and
dissolved by enzymes. The process of being stored for
reuse is called reuptake, a function that holds signifi-
cance for understanding the mechanism of action of
certain psychotropic medications.
Many neurotransmitters exist in the central and
peripheral nervous systems, but only a limited number
have implications for psychiatry. Major categories
include cholinergics, monoamines, amino acids, and
neuropeptides. Each of these is discussed separately
and summarized in Table 3–2.
Cholinergics
Acetylcholine
Acetylcholine was the first chemical to be identified
as and proven to be a neurotransmitter. It is a major
effector chemical in the ANS, producing activity
36 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 3 – 2 Neurotransmitters in the Central Nervous System
POSSIBLE IMPLICATIONS FOR MENTAL
NEUROTRANSMITTER LOCATION AND FUNCTION ILLNESS
I. CHOLINERGICS
A. Acetylcholine
II. MONOAMINES
A. Norepinephrine
B. Dopamine
C. Serotonin
D. Histamine
III. AMINO ACIDS
A. Gamma-aminobutyric
acid
B. Glycine
C. Glutamate and aspartate
ANS: Sympathetic and parasympathetic presynaptic
nerve terminals; parasympathetic postsynaptic
nerve terminals
CNS: Cerebral cortex, hippocampus, limbic
structures, and basal ganglia
Functions: Sleep, arousal, pain perception,
movement, memory
ANS: Sympathetic postsynaptic nerve terminals
CNS: Thalamus, hypothalamus, limbic system,
hippocampus, cerebellum, cerebral cortex
Functions: Mood, cognition, perception, locomotion,
cardiovascular functioning, and sleep and arousal
Frontal cortex, limbic system, basal ganglia, thalamus,
posterior pituitary, spinal cord
Functions: Movement and coordination, emotions,
voluntary judgment, release of prolactin
Hypothalamus, thalamus, limbic system, cerebral
cortex, cerebellum, spinal cord
Functions: Sleep and arousal, libido, appetite,
mood, aggression, pain perception, coordination,
judgment
Hypothalamus
Functions: Wakefulness; pain sensation, inflammatory
response
Hypothalamus, hippocampus, cortex, cerebellum,
basal ganglia, spinal cord, retina
Functions: Slowdown of body activity
Spinal cord, brainstem
Functions: Recurrent inhibition of motor neurons
Pyramidal cells of the cortex, cerebellum, and the
primary sensory afferent systems; hippocampus,
thalamus, hypothalamus, spinal cord
Functions: Relay of sensory information and in the
regulation of various motor and spinal reflexes
Glutamate also has a role in memory and learning.
Increased levels: Depression
Decreased levels: Alzheimer’s
disease, Huntington’s disease,
Parkinson’s disease
Decreased levels: Depression
Increased levels: Mania, anxiety
states, schizophrenia
Decreased levels: Parkinson’s
disease and depression
Increased levels: Mania and
schizophrenia
Decreased levels: Depression
Increased levels: Anxiety states
Decreased levels: Depression
Decreased levels: Huntington’s
disease, anxiety disorders,
schizophrenia, and various
forms of epilepsy
Toxic levels: Glycine
encephalopathy
Decreased levels: Correlated
with spastic motor movements
Increased levels: Huntington’s
disease, temporal lobe epilepsy,
spinal cerebellar degeneration,
anxiety disorders, depressive
disorders
Decreased levels: Schizophrenia
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 36
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 37
TA B L E 3 – 2 Neurotransmitters in the Central Nervous System—cont’d
POSSIBLE IMPLICATIONS FOR MENTAL
NEUROTRANSMITTER LOCATION AND FUNCTION ILLNESS
D. D-Serine
IV. NEUROPEPTIDES
A. Endorphins and
enkephalins
B. Substance P
C. Somatostatin
ANS, autonomic nervous system, CNS, central nervous system, NMDA, N-methyl D-aspartate.
Cerebral cortex, forebrain, hippocampus, cerebellum
striatum, thalamus
Functions: Binds at NMDA receptors and, with
glutamate, is a coagonist whose functions include
mediating NMDA receptor transmission, synaptic
plasticity, neurotoxicity
Hypothalamus, thalamus, limbic structures, midbrain,
brainstem; enkephalins are also found in the
gastrointestinal tract
Functions: Modulation of pain and reduced peristalsis
(enkephalins)
Hypothalamus, limbic structures, midbrain, brain-
stem, thalamus, basal ganglia, spinal cord; also
found in gastrointestinal tract and salivary glands
Function: Regulation of pain
Cerebral cortex, hippocampus, thalamus, basal
ganglia, brainstem, spinal cord
Function: Depending on part of the brain affected,
stimulates release of dopamine, serotonin, norep-
inephrine, and acetylcholine, and inhibits release
of norepinephrine, histamine, and glutamate;
also acts as a neuromodulator for serotonin
in the hypothalamus
Decreased levels: Schizophrenia
Modulation of dopamine activity
by opioid peptides may
indicate some link to the
symptoms of schizophrenia
Decreased levels: Huntington’s
disease, Alzheimer’s disease
Increased levels: Depression
Decreased levels: Alzheimer’s
disease
Increased levels: Huntington’s
disease
at all sympathetic and parasympathetic presynaptic
nerve terminals and all parasympathetic postsynap-
tic nerve terminals. It is highly significant in the
neurotransmission that occurs at the junctions
of nerves and muscles. Acetylcholinesterase is the
enzyme that destroys acetylcholine or inhibits its
activity.
In the CNS, acetylcholine neurons innervate the
cerebral cortex, hippocampus, and limbic structures.
The pathways are especially dense through the area
of the basal ganglia in the brain.
Functions of acetylcholine are manifold and include
sleep, arousal, pain perception, the modulation and
coordination of movement, and memory acquisition
and retention. Cholinergic mechanisms may have
some role in certain disorders of motor behavior and
memory, such as Parkinson’s disease, Huntington’s
disease, and Alzheimer’s disease.
Monoamines
Norepinephrine
Norepinephrine is the neurotransmitter that produces
activity at the sympathetic postsynaptic nerve terminals
in the ANS, resulting in fight-or-flight responses in the
effector organs. In the CNS, norepinephrine pathways
originate in the pons and medulla and innervate the
thalamus, dorsal hypothalamus, limbic system, hip-
pocampus, cerebellum, and cerebral cortex. When
norepinephrine is not returned for storage in the
vesicles of the axon terminals, it is metabolized and in-
activated by the enzymes monoamine oxidase (MAO)
and catechol-O-methyl-transferase (COMT).
The functions of norepinephrine include the regu-
lation of mood, cognition, perception, locomotion,
cardiovascular functioning, and sleep and arousal. The
activity of norepinephrine also has been implicated in
certain mood disorders such as depression and mania,
in anxiety states, and in schizophrenia (Sadock et al.,
2015).
Dopamine
Dopamine pathways arise from the midbrain and hypo-
thalamus and terminate in the frontal cortex, limbic
system, basal ganglia, and thalamus. As with norepi-
nephrine, the inactivating enzymes for dopamine are
MAO and COMT.
Dopamine functions include regulation of move-
ments and coordination, emotions, and voluntary
decision-making ability. Because of its influence on
the pituitary gland, it inhibits the release of prolactin
(Sadock et al., 2015). Increased levels of dopamine
are associated with mania and schizophrenia.
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 37
Serotonin
Serotonin pathways originate from cell bodies located
in the pons and medulla and project to areas includ-
ing the hypothalamus, thalamus, limbic system, cere-
bral cortex, cerebellum, and spinal cord. Serotonin
that is not returned to be stored in the axon terminal
vesicles is catabolized by the enzyme MAO.
Serotonin may play a role in sleep and arousal,
libido, appetite, mood, aggression, and pain percep-
tion. The serotoninergic system has been implicated
in the etiology of certain psychopathological condi-
tions including anxiety states, mood disorders, and
schizophrenia (Sadock et al., 2015).
Histamine
The role of histamine in mediating allergic and inflam-
matory reactions has been well documented. Its role
in the CNS as a neurotransmitter has only recently
been confirmed, and the availability of information
on this function is limited. The highest concentrations
of histamine are found within various regions of the
hypothalamus. Histaminic neurons in the posterior
hypothalamus are associated with sustaining wakeful-
ness. The enzyme that catabolizes histamine is MAO.
Although the exact processes mediated by histamine
in the CNS are uncertain, some data suggest that his-
tamine may play a role in depressive illness.
Amino Acids
Inhibitory Amino Acids
Gamma-Aminobutyric Acid Gamma-aminobutyric acid
(GABA) has a widespread distribution in the CNS,
with high concentrations in the hypothalamus, hip-
pocampus, cortex, cerebellum, and basal ganglia of
the brain; in the gray matter of the dorsal horn of the
spinal cord; and in the retina. GABA is catabolized by
the enzyme GABA transaminase.
Inhibitory neurotransmitters such as GABA prevent
postsynaptic excitation, interrupting the progression
of the electrical impulse at the synaptic junction. This
function is significant when slowdown of body activity
is advantageous. Enhancement of the GABA system is
the mechanism of action by which the benzodiazepines
produce their calming effect.
Alterations in the GABA system have been impli-
cated in the etiology of anxiety disorders, movement
disorders (e.g., Huntington’s disease), and various
forms of epilepsy.
Glycine The highest concentrations of glycine in the
CNS are found in the spinal cord and brainstem. Little
is known about the possible enzymatic metabolism of
glycine.
Glycine appears to be the neurotransmitter of
recurrent inhibition of motor neurons within the
spinal cord and is possibly involved in the regulation
of spinal and brainstem reflexes. It has been impli-
cated in the pathogenesis of certain types of spastic
disorders and in glycine encephalopathy, which is known
to occur with toxic accumulation of the neurotrans-
mitter in the brain and cerebrospinal fluid (Van
Hove, Coughlin, & Sharer, 2013).
Excitatory Amino Acids
Glutamate and Aspartate Glutamate and aspartate
appear to be primary excitatory neurotransmitters in
the pyramidal cells of the cortex, the cerebellum, and
the primary sensory afferent systems. They are also
found in the hippocampus, thalamus, hypothalamus,
and spinal cord. Glutamate and aspartate are inacti-
vated by uptake into the tissues and through assimi-
lation in various metabolic pathways.
Glutamate and aspartate function in the relay
of sensory information and in the regulation of
various motor and spinal reflexes. Alteration in
these systems has been implicated in the etiology of
certain neurodegenerative disorders, such as Hunting-
ton’s disease, temporal lobe epilepsy, and spinal cere-
bellar degeneration. Recent studies have implicated
increased levels of glutamate in anxiety and depres-
sive disorders and decreased levels in schizophrenia
(Ouellet-Plamondon & George, 2012). Glutamate also
plays a role in memory and learning. Another amino
acid, D-serine, has been identified as a neurotrans-
mitter that, with glutamate, may act as a coagonist
at NMDA (N-methyl D-aspartate) receptors. Hypofunc-
tion of these neurotransmitters may be associated with
schizophrenia (Balu et al., 2013; Wolosker et al., 2008).
Neuropeptides
Neuropeptides act as signaling molecules in the CNS.
Their activities include regulating processes related to
sex, sleep, stress and pain, emotion, and social cogni-
tion. They may contribute to symptoms and behaviors
associated with psychosis, mood disorders, dementia,
and autism spectrum disorders (Sadock et al., 2015).
Hormonal neuropeptides are discussed in the section
of this chapter on neuroendocrinology.
Opioid Peptides
Opioid peptides, which include the endorphins and
enkephalins, have been widely studied. They are
found in various concentrations in the hypothalamus,
thalamus, limbic structures, midbrain, and brainstem.
Enkephalins are also found in the gastrointestinal tract.
Opioid peptides have natural morphine-like properties
and are thought to have a role in pain modulation.
Released in response to painful stimuli, they may be
responsible for producing the analgesic effect that
results from acupuncture. Opioid peptides alter the
release of dopamine and affect the spontaneous activ-
ity of the dopaminergic neurons. These findings may
38 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 38
have some implication for opioid peptide-dopamine
interaction in the etiology of schizophrenia.
Substance P
Substance P, the first neuropeptide to be discovered, is
present in high concentrations in the hypothalamus,
limbic structures, midbrain, and brainstem. It is also
found in the thalamus, basal ganglia, and spinal cord.
Substance P plays a role in sensory transmission, partic-
ularly in the regulation of pain. Recent studies demon-
strated that people with depression and posttraumatic
stress disorder (PTSD) had elevated levels of substance
P in cerebral spinal fluid (Sadock et al., 2015).
Somatostatin
Somatostatin (also called growth hormone–inhibiting
hormone [GHIH]) is found in the cerebral cortex,
hippocampus, thalamus, basal ganglia, brainstem,
and spinal cord, and has multiple effects on the
CNS. In its function as a neurotransmitter, somato-
statin exerts both stimulatory and inhibitory effects.
Depending on the part of the brain affected, it has
been shown to stimulate dopamine, serotonin, nor-
epinephrine, and acetylcholine and to inhibit norep-
inephrine, histamine, and glutamate. It also acts as a
neuromodulator for serotonin in the hypothalamus,
thereby regulating its release. Somatostatin may serve
this function for other neurotransmitters as well. High
concentrations of somatostatin have been reported in
brain specimens of clients with Huntington’s disease,
and low concentrations have been found in those
with Alzheimer’s disease.
the hormones subject to hypothalamus-pituitary reg-
ulation may have implications for behavioral function-
ing. Discussion of these hormones is summarized in
Table 3–3.
Pituitary Gland
The Posterior Pituitary (Neurohypophysis)
The hypothalamus has direct control over the poste-
rior pituitary through efferent neural pathways. Two
hormones are found in the posterior pituitary: vaso-
pressin (antidiuretic hormone) and oxytocin. They
are actually produced by the hypothalamus and stored
in the posterior pituitary. Their release is mediated by
neural impulses from the hypothalamus (Fig. 3–6).
Antidiuretic Hormone
The main function of antidiuretic hormone (ADH)
is to conserve body water and maintain normal blood
pressure. The release of ADH is stimulated by pain,
emotional stress, dehydration, increased plasma con-
centration, and decreases in blood volume. An alter-
ation in the secretion of this hormone is related to
the polydipsia seen in patients with diabetes. This may
be one of many factors contributing to the polydipsia
and water intoxication (a state of hyperhydration re-
lated to excessive consumption of water) observed in
about 10 to 20 percent of patients with severe mental
illness, particularly those with schizophrenia. Other
factors correlated with this behavior include adverse
effects of psychotropic medications and features of
the behavioral disorder itself. Many factors may influ-
ence excessive intake of water in patients with severe
psychiatric illness. Severe water intoxication can result
in electrolyte imbalance and death (Kohli, Shishir, &
Sharma, 2011). ADH also may play a role in learning
and memory, alteration of the pain response, and
modification of sleep patterns.
Oxytocin
Oxytocin causes contraction of the uterus at the end
of pregnancy and stimulates release of milk from the
mammary glands (Scanlon & Sanders, 2015). It is also
released in response to stress and during sexual
arousal. Oxytocin may promote bonding between
sexes and has been used experimentally with autistic
children to increase socialization (Sadock et al.,
2015). Its role in behavioral functioning is unclear,
although it is possible that oxytocin may stimulate the
release of adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) in
certain situations, thereby playing a key role in the
overall hormonal response to stress.
The Anterior Pituitary (Adenohypophysis)
The hypothalamus produces releasing hormones
that pass through capillaries and veins of the hy-
pophyseal portal system to capillaries in the anterior
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 39
CORE CONCEPTS
Neuroendocrinology
The study of the interaction between the nervous system
and the endocrine system and the effects of various
hormones on cognitive, emotional, and behavioral
functioning.
Neuroendocrinology
Human endocrine functioning has a strong founda-
tion in the CNS under the direction of the hypothala-
mus, which has direct control over the pituitary gland.
The pituitary gland has two major lobes—the interior
lobe (also called the adenohypophysis) and the posterior
lobe (also called the neurohypophysis). The pituitary gland
is only about the size of a pea, but despite its size and
because of the powerful control it exerts over en-
docrine functioning in humans, it is sometimes called
the “master gland.” Figure 3–5 shows the hormones of
the pituitary gland and their target organs. Many of
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 39
40 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Hypothalamus
Kidneys
Posterior pituitary
Uterus
Ovaries
Testes
Thyroid
Breasts
Adrenal
cortex
Bones, organs
Anterior pituitary hormones
Anterior pituitary
Posterior pituitary hormones
A
D
H
Oxytocin
Prolactin
LHFSH
TSH
ACTH
G
H
FIGURE 3–5 Hormones of the pituitary gland and their target organs. (From Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T. [2015]. Essentials of anatomy and physiology
[7th ed.]. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Company, with permission.)
TA B L E 3 – 3 Hormones of the Neuroendocrine System
POSSIBLE BEHAVIORAL
LOCATION AND CORRELATION TO ALTERED
HORMONE STIMULATION OF RELEASE TARGET ORGAN FUNCTION SECRETION
Antidiuretic
hormone (ADH)
Oxytocin
Posterior pituitary; release
stimulated by dehydration,
pain, stress
Posterior pituitary; release
stimulated by end of preg-
nancy; stress; during sexual
arousal
Kidney (causes
increased
reabsorption)
Uterus; breasts
Conservation of body
water; maintenance
of blood pressure
Contraction of the
uterus for labor; re-
lease of breast milk
Polydipsia; altered pain
response; modified
sleep pattern
May perform role in
stress response by
stimulation of ACTH
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 40
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 41
TA B L E 3 – 3 Hormones of the Neuroendocrine System—cont’d
POSSIBLE BEHAVIORAL
LOCATION AND CORRELATION TO ALTERED
HORMONE STIMULATION OF RELEASE TARGET ORGAN FUNCTION SECRETION
Growth
hormone (GH)
Thyroid-stimulating
hormone (TSH)
Adrenocorticotropic
hormone (ACTH)
Prolactin
Gonadotropic
hormones
Melanocyte-
stimulating
hormone (MSH)
Anterior pituitary; release
stimulated by growth
hormone–releasing hor-
mone from hypothalamus
Anterior pituitary; release
stimulated by thyrotropin-
releasing hormone from
hypothalamus
Anterior pituitary; release
stimulated by corticotropin-
releasing hormone from
hypothalamus
Anterior pituitary; release
stimulated by prolactin-
releasing hormone from
hypothalamus
Anterior pituitary;
release stimulated
by gonadotropin-
releasing hormone
from hypothalamus
Anterior pituitary; release
stimulated by onset of
darkness
Bones and
tissues
Thyroid gland
Adrenal cortex
Breasts
Ovaries and
testes
Pineal gland
Growth in children;
protein synthesis in
adults
Stimulation of
secretion of needed
thyroid hormones for
metabolism of food
and regulation of
temperature
Stimulation of secre-
tion of cortisol, which
performs a role in
response to stress
Stimulation of milk
production
Stimulation of
secretion of estro-
gen, progesterone,
and testosterone;
role in ovulation and
sperm production
Stimulation of secre-
tion of melatonin
Anorexia nervosa
Increased levels of
thyroid hormones
(decreased secretion
of TSH): Insomnia,
anxiety, emotional
lability
Decreased levels of
thyroid hormones
(increased secretion
of TSH): Fatigue,
depression
Increased levels: Mood
disorders, psychosis
Decreased levels:
Depression, apathy,
fatigue
Increased levels:
Depression, anxiety,
decreased libido,
irritability
Decreased levels:
Depression, anorexia
nervosa
Increased testosterone:
Increased sexual
behavior and
aggressiveness
Increased levels:
Depression
pituitary, where they stimulate secretion of special-
ized hormones. The hormones of the anterior pituitary
gland regulate multiple body functions and include
growth hormone, thyroid-stimulating hormone, ACTH,
prolactin, gonadotropin-stimulating hormone, and
melanocyte-stimulating hormone. Most of these hor-
mones are regulated by a negative feedback mechanism.
Once the hormone has exerted its effects, the infor-
mation is “fed back” to the anterior pituitary, which
inhibits the release and ultimately decreases the effects
of the stimulating hormones.
Growth Hormone
The release of growth hormone (GH), also called soma-
totropin, is stimulated by growth hormone–releasing
hormone (GHRH) from the hypothalamus. Its release
is inhibited by GHIH, or somatostatin, also from the
hypothalamus. It is responsible for growth in children
and continued protein synthesis throughout life. Dur-
ing periods of fasting, it stimulates the release of fat
from the adipose tissue to increase energy. The release
of GHIH is stimulated in response to periods of hyper-
glycemia. GHRH is stimulated in response to hypo-
glycemia and to stressful situations. During prolonged
stress, GH has a direct effect on protein, carbohydrate,
and lipid metabolism, resulting in increased serum glu-
cose and free fatty acids to be used for increased energy.
GH deficiency has been noted in many patients with
major depressive disorder, and several GH abnormali-
ties have been noted in patients with anorexia nervosa.
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 41
Thyroid-Stimulating Hormone
Thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH) from the hypo-
thalamus stimulates the release of thyroid-stimulating
hormone (TSH), or thyrotropin, from the anterior
pituitary. TSH stimulates the thyroid gland to secrete
triiodothyronine (T3) and thyroxine (T4). Thyroid
hormones are integral to the metabolism of food and
the regulation of temperature.
A correlation between thyroid dysfunction and
altered behavioral functioning has been well docu-
mented. Common symptoms of hyperthyroidism
include irritability, insomnia, anxiety, restlessness,
weight loss, and emotional lability, in some instances
progressing to delirium or psychosis. Symptoms of
fatigue, decreased libido, memory impairment, depres-
sion, and suicidal ideation have been associated with
chronic hypothyroidism. Studies have correlated vari-
ous forms of thyroid dysfunction with mood disorders,
anxiety, eating disorders, schizophrenia, and dementia.
Adrenocorticotropic Hormone
Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH) from the
hypothalamus stimulates the release of ACTH from the
anterior pituitary. ACTH stimulates the adrenal cortex
to secrete cortisol. CRH, ACTH, and cortisol levels all
rise in response to stress. Disorders of the adrenal cor-
tex have been associated with mood disorders, PTSD,
Alzheimer’s dementia, and substance use disorders.
Addison’s disease is the result of hyposecretion
of the hormones of the adrenal cortex. Behavioral
symptoms of hyposecretion include mood changes with
apathy, social withdrawal, impaired sleep, decreased
concentration, and fatigue. Hypersecretion of cortisol
results in Cushing’s disease and is associated with
behaviors that include depression, mania, psychosis,
and suicidal ideation. Cognitive impairments also
have been observed.
Prolactin
Prolactin is mainly involved in reproductive functions
and milk production in the mammary glands during
pregnancy. First-generation antipsychotic medications
increase prolactin levels and may be responsible for
the undesired side effect of lactation. High prolactin
levels are also associated with depression, decreased
libido, anxiety, irritability, and the negative symptoms
of schizophrenia. Prolactin levels in psychotic patients
have been positively correlated with severity of tardive
dyskinesia (Sadock et al., 2015).
Gonadotropic Hormones
The gonadotropic hormones are so called because they
produce an effect on the gonads—the ovaries and the
testes. The gonadotropins include follicle-stimulating
hormone (FSH) and luteinizing hormone (LH). In
women, FSH initiates maturation of ovarian follicles
into ova and stimulates their secretion of estrogen. LH
is responsible for ovulation and the secretion of pro –
gesterone from the corpus luteum. In men, FSH initi-
ates sperm production in the testes, and LH increases
secretion of testosterone by the interstitial cells of the
testes (Scanlon & Sanders, 2015).
Limited evidence exists to correlate gonadotropins
to behavioral functioning, although some observations
42 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Hypothalamus
Hypothalamic-hypophyseal tract
Posterior pituitary
Inferior hypophyseal
artery
Hormones of
posterior
pituitary
Posterior lobe vein
Optic chiasma
Hypothalamus
Releasing hormones
Capillaries in hypothalamus
Hypophyseal portal veins
Capillaries in
anterior pituitary
Hormones of
anterior pituitary
Lateral hypophyseal vein
Superior hypophyseal
arteries
Optic chiasma
FIGURE 3–6 Structural relationships of hypothalamus and pituitary gland. (A) Posterior pituitary stores hormones produced in the hypothalamus.
(B) Releasing hormones of the hypothalamus circulate directly to the anterior pituitary and influence its secretions. Notice the two networks of
capillaries. (From Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T. [2015]. Essentials of anatomy and physiology [7th ed.]. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Company, with permission.)
A B
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 42
have been made that warrant hypothetical considera-
tion. Studies have indicated decreased levels of testos-
terone, LH, and FSH in men who have depression.
Increased sexual behavior and aggressiveness have been
linked to elevated testosterone levels in both men and
women. Decreased plasma levels of LH and FSH com-
monly occur in patients with anorexia nervosa. Supple-
mental estrogen therapy has resulted in improved
mentation and mood in some depressed women.
Melanocyte-Stimulating Hormone
Melanocyte-stimulating hormone (MSH) from the
hypothalamus stimulates the pineal gland to secrete
melatonin. The release of melatonin appears to
depend on the onset of darkness and is suppressed
by light. Studies of this hormone have indicated that
environmental light can affect neuronal activity and
influence circadian rhythms. Correlation between
abnormal secretion of melatonin and symptoms of
depression has led to the implication of melatonin
in the etiology of seasonal affective disorder, in which
individuals become depressed only during the fall and
winter months when the amount of daylight decreases.
Circadian Rhythms
Human biological rhythms are largely determined by
genetic coding, with input from the external environ-
ment influencing the cyclic effects. Circadian rhythms
in humans follow a near-24-hour cycle and may influ-
ence a variety of regulatory functions, including the
sleep–wakefulness cycle, body temperature regulation,
patterns of activity such as eating and drinking, and
hormone secretion. The 24-hour rhythms in humans
are affected to a large degree by the cycles of lightness
and darkness. This occurs because of a “pacemaker”
in the brain that sends messages to other systems in
the body and maintains the 24-hour rhythm. This
endogenous pacemaker appears to be the suprachias-
matic nuclei of the hypothalamus. These nuclei receive
projections of light through the retina and in turn
stimulate electrical impulses to various other systems
in the body, mediating the release of neurotransmit-
ters or hormones that regulate bodily functioning.
Most of the biological rhythms of the body operate
over a period of about 24 hours, but cycles of longer
lengths have been studied. For example, women of
menstruating age show monthly cycles of proges-
terone levels in the saliva, of skin temperature over
the breasts, and of prolactin levels in the plasma of
the blood (Hughes, 1993).
Some rhythms may even last as long as a year.
These circannual rhythms are particularly relevant
to certain medications, such as cyclosporine, which
appears to be more effective at some times than others
during a period of about 12 months (Hughes, 1993).
Clinical studies have shown that administration of
chemotherapy during the appropriate circadian phase
and at the appropriate time of day can significantly
increase the efficacy and decrease the toxic effects of
certain cytotoxic agents (Garlapow, 2016; Lis et al.,
2003).
The Role of Circadian Rhythms in Psychopathology
Circadian rhythms may play a role in psychopathology.
Abnormal circadian rhythms have been associated
with a variety of mental illnesses including depres-
sion, bipolar disorder, and seasonal affective disorder.
Because many hormones have been implicated in
behavioral functioning, it is reasonable to believe that
peak secretion times could be influential in predicting
certain behaviors. The association of depression with
increased secretion of melatonin during darkness hours
has already been discussed. External manipulation of
the light–dark cycle and removal of external time cues
often have beneficial effects on mood disorders.
Symptoms that occur in the premenstrual cycle
have been linked to disruptions in biological rhythms.
A number of the symptoms associated with premen-
strual dysphoric disorder (PMDD) strongly resemble
those attributed to depression, and hormonal changes
have been implicated in the etiology. Some of these
changes include progesterone–estrogen imbalance,
increase in prolactin and mineralocorticoids, high level
of prostaglandins, decrease in endogenous opiates,
changes in metabolism of biogenic amines (serotonin,
dopamine, norepinephrine, acetylcholine), and varia-
tions in secretion of glucocorticoids or melatonin.
Because the sleep–wakefulness cycle is probably
the most fundamental of biological rhythms, and
sleep disturbances are common in both depression
and PMDD, it will be discussed in greater detail. A rep-
resentation of bodily functions affected by 24-hour
biological rhythms is presented in Figure 3–7.
Sleep
The sleep–wakefulness cycle is genetically determined
rather than learned and is established some time after
birth. Even when environmental cues such as the abil-
ity to detect light and darkness are removed, the
human sleep–wakefulness cycle generally develops
about a 25-hour periodicity, which is close to the
24-hour normal circadian rhythm.
Sleep can be measured by the types of brain waves
that occur during various stages of sleep activity.
Dreaming episodes are characterized by rapid eye
movement (REM) and are called REM sleep. The
sleep–wakefulness cycle is represented by six distinct
stages.
Stage 0—Alpha rhythm: This stage of the sleep–
wakefulness cycle is characterized by a relaxed,
waking state with eyes closed. The alpha brain wave
rhythm has a frequency of 8 to 12 cycles per second.
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 43
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 43
Stage 1—Beta rhythm: Stage 1 characterizes the transi-
tion into sleep, a period of dozing in which thoughts
wander and the person drifts in and out of sleep.
Beta brain wave rhythm has a frequency of 18 to
25 cycles per second.
Stage 2—Theta rhythm: This stage comprises about
half of time spent sleeping. Eye movement and
muscular activity are minimal. Theta brain wave
rhythm has a frequency of 4 to 7 cycles per second.
Stage 3—Delta rhythm: This is a period of deep and
restful sleep. Muscles are relaxed, heart rate and
blood pressure fall, and breathing slows. No eye
movement occurs. Delta brain wave rhythm has a
frequency of 1.5 to 3 cycles per second.
Stage 4—Delta rhythm: This is the stage of deepest
sleep. Individuals who suffer from insomnia or
other sleep disorders often do not experience this
stage of sleep. Eye movement and muscular activity
are minimal. Delta waves predominate.
REM sleep—Beta rhythm: The dream cycle occurs
during REM sleep. Eyes dart about beneath closed
eyelids, moving more rapidly than when awake.
44 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
— — — — — — — — — — — —
0800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 0200 0400 0600
(Darkness)
Body
temperature
Pulse
rate
Blood
pressure
Growth
hormone
Cortisol
Thyroid
hormones
Prolactin
Melatonin
Testosterone (males)
Progesterone
(females)**
Estrogen
(Daylight)
▼
▲
▼
▲
▲
▼
▲
▼
▲
▼
▲
▼
▲
▼
▲
▼
▼
▲
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
▼
▼ ▲
▲
Days
(Clock Hours)
* ▼ indicates low point and ▲ indicates peak time of these biological factors within a 24-hour circadian rhythm.
** The female hormones are presented on a monthly rhythm because of their influence on the reproductive cycle.
Daily rhythms of female gonadotropins are difficult to assay and are probably less significant than monthly.
FIGURE 3–7 Circadian biological rhythms.
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 44
The brain wave pattern is similar to that of stage 1
sleep. Heart and respiration rates increase, and
blood pressure may increase or decrease. Muscles
are hypotonic during REM sleep.
Stages 2 through REM repeat themselves through-
out the cycle of sleep. One is more likely to experience
longer periods of stages 3 and 4 sleep early in the cycle
and longer periods of REM sleep later in the sleep
cycle. Most people experience REM sleep about four
to five times during the night. The amount of REM
sleep and deep sleep decreases with age, and the time
spent in drowsy wakefulness and dozing increases.
Neurochemical Influences
A number of neurochemicals have been shown to
influence the sleep–wakefulness cycle. Several studies
have revealed information about the sleep-inducing
characteristics of serotonin. L-Tryptophan, the amino
acid precursor to serotonin, has been used for many
years as an effective sedative-hypnotic to induce sleep
in individuals with sleep-onset disorder. Serotonin
and norepinephrine both appear to be most active
during non-REM sleep, whereas the neurotransmitter
acetylcholine is activated during REM sleep (Skudaev,
2009). The exact role of GABA in sleep facilitation is
unclear, although the sedative effects of drugs that
enhance GABA transmission, such as benzodiazepines,
suggest that this neurotransmitter plays an important
role in regulation of sleep and arousal. Some studies
have suggested that acetylcholine induces and pro-
longs REM sleep, whereas histamine appears to have
an inhibitory effect. Neuroendocrine mechanisms
seem to be more closely tied to circadian rhythms
than to the sleep–wakefulness cycle. One exception
is growth hormone secretion, which increases during
the stage 3 sleep period and may be associated with
slow-wave sleep (Van Cauter & Plat, 1996).
particular genotype are designated by characteristics
that specify a phenotype. Examples of phenotypes
include eye color, height, blood type, sound of voice,
and hair type. As evident by the examples presented,
phenotypes are not only genetic but may also be
acquired (i.e., influenced by the environment) or a
combination of both. It is likely that many psychiatric
disorders are the result of a combination of genetics
and environmental influences.
Investigators who study the etiological implications
for psychiatric illness may explore several risk factors.
Studies to determine if an illness is familial compare
the percentage of family members with the illness to
those in the general population or within a control
group of unrelated individuals. These studies estimate
the prevalence of psychopathology among relatives
and make predictions about the predisposition to an
illness based on familial risk factors. Schizophrenia,
bipolar disorder, major depressive disorder, anorexia
nervosa, panic disorder, somatic symptom disorder,
antisocial personality disorder, and alcoholism are
examples of psychiatric illness in which familial ten-
dencies have been indicated.
Studies that are purely genetic search for a specific
gene that causes a particular illness. A number of dis-
orders exist in which the mutation of a specific gene or
change in the number or structure of chromosomes has
been associated with the etiology. Examples include
Huntington’s disease, cystic fibrosis, phenylketonuria,
Duchenne’s muscular dystrophy, and Down syndrome.
The search for pure genetic links to certain psychi-
atric disorders continues. Risk factors for early-onset
Alzheimer’s disease have been linked to mutations
on chromosomes 21, 14, and 1 (National Institute
on Aging, 2015). Other studies have linked a gene
in the region of chromosome 19 that produces
apolipoprotein E (ApoE) with late-onset Alzheimer’s
disease. One large study (National Institute of Mental
Health, 2013) found similar genetic variations in pa-
tients with five mental disorders that were previously
considered completely distinct. Autism, attention-
deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), bipolar disor-
der, major depression, and schizophrenia all showed
some common gene variations, including differences
in two genes that regulate the flow of calcium into cells.
Although these findings are intriguing, they do not
clearly explain all the genetic risks for mental illness,
the nongenetic risks, or the interaction between the
two. Future research will continue to search for an-
swers with the ultimate goal of improving diagnosis
and treatment and perhaps uncovering keys to pre-
vention of mental illness. In addition to familial and
purely genetic investigations, other types of studies
have been conducted to estimate the existence and
degree of genetic and environmental contributions
to the etiology of certain psychiatric disorders. Twin
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 45
CORE CONCEPT
Genetics
The study of the biological transmission of certain physical
and/or behavioral characteristics from parent to offspring.
Genetics
Human behavioral genetics seeks to understand both
the genetic and environmental contributions to indi-
vidual variations in human behavior. This type of
study is complicated by the fact that behaviors, like all
complex traits, involve multiple genes.
The term genotype refers to the total set of genes
present in an individual and coded in the DNA at the
time of conception. The physical manifestations of a
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 45
studies and adoption studies have been successfully
employed for this purpose.
Twin studies examine the frequency of a disorder in
monozygotic (genetically identical) and dizygotic (not
genetically identical) twins. Twins are called concordant
when both members suffer from the disorder in ques-
tion. Concordance in monozygotic twins is considered
stronger evidence of genetic involvement than it is in
dizygotic (fraternal) twins. Twin studies have supported
genetic vulnerability in the etiology of several mental
illnesses, including adjustment disorders, PTSD, sub-
stance abuse, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, major
depression, obsessive compulsive disorder, risk for
suicide, and others (Sadock et al., 2015).
Adoption studies allow researchers to compare the
influence of genetics versus environment on the de-
velopment of a psychiatric disorder. Knowles (2003)
describes the four types of adoption studies that have
been conducted:
1. The study of adopted children whose biological
parent(s) had a psychiatric disorder but whose
adoptive parent(s) did not.
2. The study of adopted children whose adoptive
parent(s) had a psychiatric disorder but whose
biological parent(s) did not.
3. The study of adoptive and biological relatives
of adopted children who developed a psychiatric
disorder.
4. The study of monozygotic twins reared apart by
different adoptive parents.
Disorders in which adoption studies have suggested
a possible genetic link include alcoholism, schizophre-
nia, major depression, bipolar disorder, suicide risk,
ADHD, and antisocial personality disorder (Sadock
et al., 2015).
A summary of various psychiatric disorders and the
possible biological influences discussed in this chapter
is presented in Table 3–4. Various diagnostic proce-
dures used to detect alteration in biological function-
ing that may contribute to psychiatric disorders are
presented in Table 3–5.
46 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
CORE CONCEPT
Psychoneuroimmunology
The study of the relationship between the immune sys-
tem, the nervous system, and psychological processes
such as thinking and behavior.
TA B L E 3 – 4 Biological Implications of Psychiatric Disorders
ANATOMICAL BRAIN NEUROTRANSMITTER POSSIBLE ENDOCRINE IMPLICATIONS OF
STRUCTURES INVOLVED HYPOTHESIS CORRELATION CIRCADIAN RHYTHMS POSSIBLE GENETIC LINK
SCHIZOPHRENIA
Frontal cortex,
temporal lobes,
limbic system
DEPRESSIVE
DISORDERS
Frontal lobes,
limbic system,
temporal lobes
BIPOLAR DISORDER
Frontal lobes, limbic
system, temporal
lobes
PANIC DISORDER
Limbic system,
midbrain
Dopamine hyperac-
tivity; decreased
glutamate
Decreased levels
of norepinephrine,
dopamine, and
serotonin; increased
glutamate
Increased levels of
norepinephrine and
dopamine in acute
mania
Increased levels of
norepinephrine;
decreased GABA
activity
Decreased prolactin
levels
Increased cortisol
levels; thyroid hor-
mone hyposecre-
tion; increased
melatonin
Some indication of
elevated thyroid
hormones in acute
mania
Elevated levels of
thyroid hormones
May correlate
antipsychotic
medication adminis-
tration to times
of lowest level
DST* used to predict
effectiveness
of antidepressants;
melatonin linked to
depression during
periods of darkness
Abnormal circadian
rhythms have been
associated with
bipolar disorder
May have some
application for
times of medication
administration
Twin, familial, and
adoption studies
suggest genetic link
Twin, familial, and
adoption studies
suggest a genetic link
Twin, familial, and
adoption studies
suggest a genetic link
Twin and familial
studies suggest a
genetic link
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 46
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 47
TA B L E 3 – 4 Biological Implications of Psychiatric Disorders—cont’d
ANATOMICAL BRAIN NEUROTRANSMITTER POSSIBLE ENDOCRINE IMPLICATIONS OF
STRUCTURES INVOLVED HYPOTHESIS CORRELATION CIRCADIAN RHYTHMS POSSIBLE GENETIC LINK
ANOREXIA NERVOSA
Limbic system,
particularly the
hypothalamus
OBSESSIVE-
COMPULSIVE
DISORDER
Limbic system,
basal ganglia
(specifically
caudate nucleus)
ALZHEIMER’S
DISEASE
Temporal, parietal,
and occipital
regions of cerebral
cortex; hippocampus
*DST, dexamethasone suppression test. Dexamethasone is a synthetic glucocorticoid that suppresses cortisol secretion via the feed-
back mechanism. In this test, 1 mg of dexamethasone is administered at 11:30 p.m., and blood samples are drawn at 8:00 a.m.,
4:00 p.m., and 11:00 p.m. on the following day. A plasma value greater than 5 mcg/dL suggests that the individual is not suppressing
cortisol in response to the dose of dexamethasone. This is a positive result for depression and may have implications for other disor-
ders as well.
GABA, gamma-aminobutyric acid.
Decreased levels
of norepinephrine,
serotonin, and
dopamine
Decreased levels
of serotonin
Decreased levels
of acetylcholine,
norepinephrine,
serotonin, and
somatostatin
Decreased levels of
gonadotropins and
growth hormone;
increased cortisol
levels
Increased cortisol
levels
Decreased
corticotropin-
releasing hormone
DST often shows
same results as
in depression
DST often shows
same results as
in depression
Decreased levels of
acetylcholine and
serotonin may
inhibit hypothalamic-
pituitary axis and
interfere with hor-
monal releasing
factors
Twin and familial
studies suggest a
genetic link
Twin studies suggest a
possible genetic link
Familial studies
suggest a genetic
predisposition; late-
onset disorder linked
to marker on chromo-
some 19; early-onset
to chromosomes 21,
14, and 1
TA B L E 3 – 5 Diagnostic Procedures Used to Detect Altered Brain Functioning
EXAMINATION TECHNIQUE USED PURPOSE AND POSSIBLE FINDINGS
Electroencephalography
(EEG)
Computerized EEG
mapping
Computed tomographic
(CT) scan
Electrodes are placed on the scalp in a
standardized position. Amplitude and
frequency of beta, alpha, theta, and delta
brain waves are graphically recorded on
paper by ink markers for multiple areas
of the brain surface.
EEG tracings are summarized by computer-
assisted systems in which various regions
of the brain are identified and functioning is
interpreted by color coding or gray shading.
CT scan may be used with or without
contrast medium. X-rays are taken of
various transverse planes of the brain while
a computerized analysis produces a precise
reconstructed image of each segment.
Measures brain electrical activity; identifies
dysrhythmias, asymmetries, or suppression
of brain rhythms; used in the diagnosis of
epilepsy, neoplasm, stroke, metabolic, or
degenerative disease.
Measures brain electrical activity; used
largely in research to represent statistical
relationships between individuals and
groups or between two populations of
subjects (e.g., patients with schizophrenia
vs. control subjects).
Measures accuracy of brain structure
to detect possible lesions, abscesses,
areas of infarction, or aneurysm. CT has
also identified various anatomical differ-
ences in patients with schizophrenia,
organic mental disorders, and bipolar
disorder.
Continued
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 47
Psychoneuroimmunology
Normal Immune Response
Cells responsible for nonspecific immune reactions
include neutrophils, monocytes, and macrophages.
They work to destroy the invasive organism and initi-
ate and facilitate the healing of damaged tissue. If
these cells do not accomplish a satisfactory healing
response, specific immune mechanisms take over.
Cytokines are one such mechanism. These mole-
cules, which regulate immune and inflammatory re-
sponses, become active when an individual is fighting
an infection and the resultant inflammatory processes.
Recent research has also demonstrated that cytokines
are active in mood disorders such as depression and
bipolar disorder. Current research focuses on the
impact of cytokines as part of an essential and com-
plex system of responses that are crucial for reducing
inflammation and bolstering the immune response.
Studies are also attempting to identify what happens
when inflammation is not resolved and cytokines
remain active or cross the blood-brain barrier. There is
evidence that these maladaptations may be implicated
in a multitude of illnesses (Ratnayake et al., 2013).
Implications of the Immune System in Psychiatric
Illness
Studies of the biological response to stress have hy-
pothesized that individuals become more susceptible
to physical illness following exposure to a stressful
stimulus or life event (see Chapter 1). This response
is thought to be caused by increased glucocorticoid
release from the adrenal cortex following stimulation
from the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis during
stressful situations. The result is a suppression in
lymphocyte proliferation and function.
Studies have shown that nerve endings exist in tis-
sues of the immune system. The CNS has connections
in both bone marrow and the thymus, where immune
system cells are produced, and in the spleen and
lymph nodes, where those cells are stored.
GH, which may be released in response to certain
stressors, may enhance immune functioning, whereas
testosterone is thought to inhibit immune functioning.
Increased production of epinephrine and norepineph-
rine occurs in response to stress and may decrease
immunity. Serotonin has been described as an im-
munomodulator because it has demonstrated both
enhancing and inhibitory effects on inflammation
and immunity (Arreola et al., 2015).
Studies have correlated a decrease in lymphocyte
function with periods of grief, bereavement, and
depression, associating the degree of altered immu-
nity with severity of the depression. A number of re-
search studies have attempted to correlate the onset
of schizophrenia to abnormalities of the immune
system. These studies have considered autoimmune
responses, viral infections, and immunogenetics
(Sadock et al., 2015). The role of these factors in the
onset and course of schizophrenia remains unclear.
Attempts to identify a neurotoxic virus that triggers
the manifestations of schizophrenia have not been
successful; however, there is clear evidence of higher
incidence of schizophrenia following viral epidemics.
48 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 3 – 5 Diagnostic Procedures Used to Detect Altered Brain Functioning—cont’d
EXAMINATION TECHNIQUE USED PURPOSE AND POSSIBLE FINDINGS
Magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI)
Positron emission
tomography (PET)
Single photon emission
computed tomography
(SPECT)
Within a strong magnetic field, the nuclei
of hydrogen atoms absorb and reemit
electromagnetic energy that is computer-
ized and transformed into image informa-
tion. No radiation or contrast medium
is used.
The patient receives an intravenous (IV)
injection of a radioactive substance (type
depends on brain activity to be visualized).
The head is surrounded by detectors that
relay data to a computer that interprets
the signals and produces the image.
The technique is similar to PET, but longer-
acting radioactive substance must be used
to allow time for a gamma-camera to rotate
about the head and gather the data, which
are then computer assembled into a brain
image.
Measures anatomical and biochemical sta-
tus of various segments of the brain; detects
brain edema, ischemia, infection, neoplasm,
trauma, and other changes such as demyeli-
nation. Morphological differences have been
noted in brains of patients with schizophre-
nia as compared with control subjects.
Measures specific brain functioning, such
as glucose metabolism, oxygen utilization,
blood flow, and, of particular interest in
psychiatry, neurotransmitter-receptor
interaction.
Measures various aspects of brain function-
ing, as with PET; has also been used to
image activity of cerebrospinal fluid
circulation.
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 48
Immunological abnormalities have also been inves-
tigated in a number of other psychiatric illnesses,
including alcoholism, autism spectrum disorder, and
neurocognitive disorder.
Evidence exists to support a correlation between
psychosocial stress and the onset of illness. Research
is still required to determine the specific processes
involved in stress-induced modulation of the immune
system.
Psychopharmacology and the Brain
Understanding the brain and the biological processes
involved in thoughts, feelings, and behavior has pos-
itive ramifications beyond better understanding of
psychopharmacological treatment options. As men-
tioned earlier, future research may continue to demon-
strate the impact of psychological interventions on
brain activity and neurotransmitters, which would
open opportunities to hone psychological treatments
and avoid the troubling side effects that accompany
many medications. Furthermore, continued research
in areas such as psychoneuroimmunology may reveal
causes of mental illness, which would provide the
opportunity for primary prevention.
In spite of these opportunities, psychopharmacol-
ogy remains a primary treatment modality for mental
disorders. Understanding, as best we can with cur-
rent evidence, the biological mechanisms at work in
psychoactive drugs is essential to nursing practice.
Figure 3–8 shows the biological mechanism of psy-
choactive drugs at the neural synapse. Psychophar-
macology, the classes of psychoactive drugs, and
relevant nursing implications are discussed in detail
in Chapter 4.
Implications for Nursing
The discipline of psychiatric-mental health nursing
has always championed its role in holistic health care,
but historical review reveals that emphasis has been
placed on treatment approaches that focus on psy-
chological and social factors. Psychiatric nurses must
integrate knowledge of the biological sciences into
their practices if they are to ensure safe and effective
care to people with mental illness. In the hallmark
Surgeon General’s Report on Mental Health (U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services, 1999),
Dr. David Satcher wrote:
The mental health field is far from a complete un-
derstanding of the biological, psychological, and so-
ciocultural bases of development, but development
clearly involves interplay among these influences.
Understanding the process of development requires
knowledge, ranging from the most fundamental
level—that of gene expression and interactions be-
tween molecules and cells—all the way up to the
highest levels of cognition, memory, emotion, and
language. The challenge requires integration of
concepts from many different disciplines. A fuller
understanding of development is not only impor-
tant in its own right, but it is expected to pave the
way for our ultimate understanding of mental
health and mental illness and how different factors
shape their expression at different stages of the life
span. (pp. 61–62)
To ensure a smooth transition from a strictly psy-
chosocial focus to one of biopsychosocial emphasis,
nurses must have a clear understanding of the
following:
■ Neuroanatomy and neurophysiology: The struc-
ture and functioning of the various parts of the
brain and their correlation to human behavior
and psychopathology
■ Neuronal processes: The various functions of the
nerve cells, including the role of neurotransmit-
ters, receptors, synaptic activity, and information
pathways
■ Neuroendocrinology: The interaction of the en-
docrine and nervous systems and the role that the
endocrine glands and their respective hormones
play in behavioral functioning
■ Circadian rhythms: The regulation of biochemical
functioning over periods of rhythmic cycles and its
influence in predicting certain behaviors
■ Genetic influences: The hereditary factors that pre-
dispose individuals to certain psychiatric disorders
■ Psychoneuroimmunology: The influence of stress
on the immune system and its role in the suscepti-
bility to illness
■ Psychopharmacology: The increasing use of psy-
chotropic drugs in the treatment of mental illness,
demanding greater knowledge of psychopharma-
cological principles and nursing interventions
necessary for safe and effective management
■ Diagnostic technology: The importance of keeping
informed about the latest in technological proce-
dures for diagnosing alterations in brain structure
and function
Why are these concepts important to the practice
of psychiatric-mental health nursing? The interrela-
tionship between psychosocial adaptation and phys-
ical functioning has been established. Integrating
biological and behavioral concepts into psychiatric
nursing practice is essential for nurses to meet the
complex needs of clients with mental illness. Psy-
chobiological perspectives must be incorporated
into nursing practice, education, and research to at-
tain the evidence-based outcomes necessary for the
delivery of competent care.
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 49
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 49
50 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Receptors
Neurotransmitter
in the synaptic cleft
Neurotransmitter
in vesicles
Mitochondria
Neurotransmitter
transporter
Neurotransmitter
transporter
FIGURE 3–8 Area of synaptic transmission that is altered by drugs.
The transmission of electrical impulses from the axon terminal of one neuron to the dendrite of another is achieved by the controlled
release of neurotransmitters into the synaptic cleft. Neurotransmitters include serotonin, norepinephrine, acetylcholine, dopamine,
glutamate, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), and histamine, among others. Prior to its release, the neurotransmitter is concentrated
into specialized synaptic vesicles. Once fired, the neurotransmitter is released into the synaptic cleft where it encounters receptors on
the postsynaptic membrane. Each neurotransmitter has receptors specific to it alone. Some neurotransmitters are considered to be
excitatory, whereas others are inhibitory, a feature that determines whether another action potential will occur. In the synaptic cleft,
the neurotransmitter rapidly diffuses, is catabolized by enzymatic action, or is taken up by the neurotransmitter transporters and
returned to vesicles inside the axon terminal to await another action potential.
Psychotropic medications exert their effects in various ways in this area of synaptic transmission. Reuptake inhibitors block
reuptake of the neurotransmitters by the transporter proteins, resulting in elevated levels of extracellular neurotransmitter. Drugs
that inhibit catabolic enzymes promote excess buildup of the neurotransmitter at the synaptic site.
Some drugs cause receptor blockade, resulting in a reduction in transmission and decreased neurotransmitter activity. These drugs
are called antagonists. Drugs that increase neurotransmitter activity by direct stimulation of the specific receptors are called agonists.
Summary and Key Points
■ It is important for nurses to understand the interac-
tion between biological and behavioral factors in the
development and management of mental illness.
■ Psychobiology is the study of the biological foun-
dations of cognitive, emotional, and behavioral
processes.
■ The limbic system has been called the “emotional
brain.” It is associated with feelings of fear and
anxiety; anger, rage, and aggression; love, joy, and
hope; and with sexuality and social behavior.
■ The three classes of neurons include afferent
(sensory), efferent (motor), and interneurons.
The junction between two neurons is called a
synapse.
■ Neurotransmitters are chemicals that convey infor-
mation across synaptic clefts to neighboring target
cells. Many neurotransmitters have implications in
the etiology of emotional disorders and in the
pharmacological treatment of those disorders.
■ Major categories of neurotransmitters include
cholinergics, monoamines, amino acids, and
neuropeptides.
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 50
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 51
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
■ The endocrine system plays an important role in
human behavior through the hypothalamic-pituitary
axis.
■ Hormones and their circadian rhythms of regula-
tion significantly influence a number of physiologi-
cal and psychological life cycle phenomena, such as
moods, sleep and arousal, stress response, appetite,
libido, and fertility.
■ Research continues to validate the role of genetics
in psychiatric illness.
■ Familial, twin, and adoption studies suggest that
genetics may be implicated in the etiology of schiz-
ophrenia, bipolar disorder, depressive disorder,
panic disorder, anorexia nervosa, alcoholism, and
obsessive-compulsive disorder. Genetic studies,
however, fail to entirely explain the complex fac-
tors involved in the development of these illnesses.
■ Psychoneuroimmunology examines the relation-
ship between psychological factors, the immune
system, and the nervous system.
■ Evidence exists to support a link between psy-
chosocial stressors and suppression of the immune
response.
■ Technologies such as magnetic resonance imagery,
computed tomographic scan, positron emission to-
mography, and electroencephalography are used
as diagnostic tools for detecting alterations in psy-
chobiological functioning.
■ Psychotropic medications act at the neural synapse
to affect neurotransmitter activity and have been
associated with improvement in symptoms of many
mental disorders.
■ Integrating knowledge of the expanding biological
focus into psychiatric nursing is essential if nurses are
to meet the changing needs of today’s psychiatric
clients.
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions:
1. Which of the following parts of the brain is associated with multiple feelings and behaviors and is
sometimes referred to as the “emotional brain”?
a. Frontal lobe
b. Thalamus
c. Hypothalamus
d. Limbic system
2. Which of the following parts of the brain is concerned with visual reception and interpretation?
a. Frontal lobe
b. Parietal lobe
c. Temporal lobe
d. Occipital lobe
3. Which of the following parts of the brain is associated with voluntary body movement, thinking and
judgment, and expression of feeling?
a. Frontal lobe
b. Parietal lobe
c. Temporal lobe
d. Occipital lobe
4. Which of the following parts of the brain integrates all sensory input (except smell) on the way to the
cortex?
a. Temporal lobe
b. Thalamus
c. Limbic system
d. Hypothalamus
Continued
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 51
52 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
5. Which of the following parts of the brain deals with sensory perception and interpretation?
a. Hypothalamus
b. Cerebellum
c. Parietal lobe
d. Hippocampus
6. Which of the following parts of the brain is concerned with hearing, short-term memory, and sense
of smell?
a. Temporal lobe
b. Parietal lobe
c. Cerebellum
d. Hypothalamus
7. Which of the following parts of the brain has control over the pituitary gland and autonomic nervous
system, as well as regulation of appetite and temperature?
a. Temporal lobe
b. Parietal lobe
c. Cerebellum
d. Hypothalamus
8. At a synapse, the determination of further impulse transmission is accomplished by means of which
of the following?
a. Potassium ions
b. Interneurons
c. Neurotransmitters
d. The myelin sheath
9. A decrease in which of the following neurotransmitters has been implicated in depression?
a. Gamma-aminobutyric acid, acetylcholine, and aspartate
b. Norepinephrine, serotonin, and dopamine
c. Somatostatin, substance P, and glycine
d. Glutamate, histamine, and opioid peptides
10. Which of the following hormones has been implicated in the etiology of mood disorder with seasonal
pattern?
a. Increased levels of melatonin
b. Decreased levels of oxytocin
c. Decreased levels of prolactin
d. Increased levels of thyrotropin
11. Psychotropic medications may act at the neural synapse to accomplish which of the following? (Select
all that apply)
a. Inhibit the reuptake of certain neurotransmitters, creating more availability
b. Inhibit catabolic enzymes, promoting more availability of a neurotransmitter
c. Block receptors, resulting in less neurotransmitter activity
d. Add synthetic neurotransmitters found in the drug
12. Psychoneuroimmunology is a branch of science that involves which of the following? (Select all that
apply.)
a. The impact of psychoactive medications at the neural synapse
b. The relationships between the immune system, the nervous system, and psychological processes
including mental illness
c. The correlation between psychosocial stress and the onset of illness
d. The potential role of viruses in the onset of schizophrenia
e. The genetic factors that influence prevention of mental illness
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 52
References
Arreola, R., Becerril-Villanueva, E., Cruz-Fuentes, C., Velasco-
Velázquez, M.A., Garcés-Alvarez, M.E., Hurtado-Alvarado, G., . . .
Pavón, L. (2015). Immunomodulatory effects mediated by
serotonin. Journal of Immunology Research. doi:http://dx.doi
.org/10.1155/2015/354957
Balu, D.T., Li, Y., Puhl, M.D., Benneyworth, M.A., Basu, A.C,
Takagi, S., . . . Coyle, J.T. (2013). Multiple risk pathways for
schizophrenia converge in serine racemase knockout mice, a
mouse model of NMDA receptor hypofunction. Proceedings of
the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America,
110(26), E2400-2409. doi:10.1073/pnas.1304308110
Butler, T., Weisholtz, D., Isenberg, N., Harding, E., Epstein, J.,
Stern, E., & Silbersweig, D. (2012). Neuroimaging of frontal-
limbic dysfunction in schizophrenia and epilepsy-related
psychosis: Toward a convergent neurobiology. Epilepsy
Behavior, 23(2), 113-122. doi:10.1016/j.yebeh.2011.11.004
Flor, H. (2014). Psychological pain interventions and neurophysi-
ology: Implications for a mechanism-based approach. American
Psychologist, 69(2), 188-196. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/
a0035254
Furmark, T., Tilfors, M., Martiensdottir, I., Fischer, H., Pissiota, A.,
Långström, B., & Fredrikson, M. (2002). Common changes in
cerebral blood flow in patients with social phobia treated with
citalopram or cognitive behavior therapy. Archives of General
Psychiatry, 59(5), 425-430. doi:10.1001/archpsyc.59.5.425
Garlapow, M. (2016). Timing chemotherapy administration to
circadian rhythm improves drug effectiveness. Oncology Nurse
Advisor. Retrieved from www.oncologynurseadvisor.com/
side-effect-management/chemotherapy-more-effective-
when-synced-with-circadian-rhythm/article/504455
Hughes, M. (1993). Body clock: The effects of time on human health.
New York: Facts on File.
Knowles, J.A. (2003). Genetics. In R.E. Hales & S.C. Yudofsky
(Eds.), Textbook of psychiatry (2th ed.). Washington, DC:
American Psychiatric Publishing.
Kohli, A., Shishir, V., & Sharma, A. (2011). Psychogenic polydip-
sia. Indian Journal of Psychiatry, 53(2),166-167. doi:10.4103/
0019-5545.82554
Lis, C.G., Grutsch, J.F., Wood, P., You, M., Rich, I., & Hrushesky,
W.J. (2003). Circadian timing in cancer treatment: The biolog-
ical foundation for an integrative approach. Integrative Cancer
Therapies, 2(2), 105-111. doi:10.1177/1534735403253766
National Institutes of Health (NIH). (2017). Is there a link
between marijuana use and mental illness? Retrieved from
www.drugabuse.gov/publications/research-reports/
marijuana/there-link-between-marijuana-use-mental-illness
National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH). (2013). Five major
mental disorders share genetic roots. Retrieved from
www.nimh.nih.gov/news/science-news/2013/five-major-
mental-disorders-share-genetic-roots.shtml
National Institute on Aging. (2015). Alzheimer’s disease genetics.
The Alzheimer’s Disease Education and Referral Center.
Retrieved from www.nia.nih.gov/alzheimers/publication/
alzheimers-disease-genetics-fact-sheet
Ouellet-Plamondon, C., & George, T.P. (2012). Glutamate and
psychiatry in 2012—Up, up and away! Psychiatric Times,
29(12), 1-5. doi:10.3389/fphar.2012.00195
Ratnayake, U., Quinn, T., Walker, D.W., & Dickinson, H. (2013).
Cytokines and the neurodevelopmental basis of mental illness.
Frontiers of Neuroscience, 7. doi:10.3389/fnins.2013.00180
Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P.(2015). Synopsis of psychiatry:
Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkens.
Scanlon, V.C., & Sanders, T. (2015). Essentials of anatomy and
physiology (7th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Skudaev, S. (2009). The neurophysiology and neurochemistry of
sleep. Retrieved from www.healthstairs.com/sleep3.php
Van Cauter, E., & Plat, L. (1996). Physiology of growth hormone
secretion during sleep. Journal of Pediatrics,128(5), 32-37.
doi:10.1016/S0022-3476(96)70008-2
Van Hove, J., Coughlin, C., & Sharer, G. (2013). Glycine en-
cephalopathy. GeneReviews. National Library of Medicine.
Retrieved from www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK1357
Wolosker, H., Dumin, E., Balan, L., & Foltyn, V.N. (2008). D-Amino
acids in the brain: D-serine in neurotransmission and neurode-
generation. The FEBS Journal, 275(14), 3514-3526. doi:10.1111/
j.1742-4658.2008.06515.x
Classical References
Sage, D.L. (Producer) (1984). The Brain: Madness. [Television
Broadcast] Washington, DC: Public Broadcasting Company.
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. (1999). Mental
health: A report of the Surgeon General—Executive summary.
Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services.
C H A P T E R 3 ■ Concepts of Psychobiology 53
6054_Ch03_027-053 27/07/17 5:23 PM Page 53
4 Psychopharmacology
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Historical Perspectives
The Role of the Nurse in Psychopharmacology
How Do Psychotropics Work?
Applying the Nursing Process in
Psychopharmacological Therapy
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
agranulocytosis
akathisia
akinesia
amenorrhea
dystonia
extrapyramidal symptoms
gynecomastia
hypertensive crisis
neuroleptic malignant
syndrome
oculogyric crisis
priapism
retrograde ejaculation
serotonin syndrome
tardive dyskinesia
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Discuss historical perspectives related to
psychopharmacology.
2. Describe indications, actions, contraindications,
precautions, side effects, and nursing implica-
tions for the following classifications of drugs:
a. Antianxiety agents
b. Antidepressants
c. Mood-stabilizing agents
d. Antipsychotics
e. Antiparkinsonian agents
f. Sedative-hypnotics
g. Agents for attention-deficit/hyperactivity
disorder
3. Apply the steps of the nursing process to the
administration of psychotropic medications.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. Identify three priority safety concerns for each
class of psychotropic medications.
2. Differentiate primary actions and side effects
for traditional versus atypical antipsychotics.
3. Differentiate primary actions and side effects
for tricyclic versus SSRI antidepressants.
CORE CONCEPTS
Neurotransmitter
Psychotropic
Medication
Receptor
54
The middle of the 20th century identifies a pivotal
period in the treatment of individuals with mental ill-
ness with the introduction of the phenothiazine class
of antipsychotics in the United States. They were pre-
viously used in France as preoperative medications.
As Dr. Henri Laborit (1914–1995) of the Hospital
Boucicaut in Paris stated,
It was our aim to decrease the anxiety of the patients
to prepare them in advance for their postoperative
recovery. With these new drugs, the phenothiazines,
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 54
we were seeing a profound psychic and physical re-
laxation . . . a real indifference to the environment
and to the upcoming operation. It seemed to me
these drugs must have an application in psychiatry.
(Sage, 1984)
As Laborit foresaw, phenothiazines have had a sig-
nificant application in psychiatry. Not only have they
helped many individuals to function effectively, but
they have also provided researchers and clinicians
with information to study the origins and etiologies
of mental illness. Knowledge gained from learning
how these drugs work has promoted advancement in
understanding how behavioral disorders develop.
Dr. Arnold Scheibel, director of the UCLA Brain
Research Institute, stated,
[When these drugs came out] there was a sense of
disbelief that we could actually do something substan-
tive for the patients . . . see them for the first time as
sick individuals and not as something bizarre that we
could literally not talk to. (Sage, 1984)
This chapter explores historical perspectives in the
use of psychotropic medications in the treatment of
mental illness. Seven classifications of medications are
discussed, and their implications for psychiatric nurs-
ing are presented in the context of the steps of the
nursing process.
fulfill their needs, the likelihood of their return to the
family or community diminished.
The early part of the 20th century saw the advent
of the somatic therapies in psychiatry. Individuals with
mental illness were treated with insulin shock therapy,
wet sheet packs, ice baths, electroconvulsive therapy,
and psychosurgery. Before 1950, sedatives and am-
phetamines were the only significant psychotropic
medications available. Even these drugs had limited
use because of their toxicity and addictive effects.
Since the 1950s, the development of psychopharma-
cology has expanded to include widespread use of
antipsychotic, antidepressant, antianxiety, and mood-
stabilizer medications. Research into how these drugs
work has provided an understanding of the biochem-
ical influences in many psychiatric disorders.
Psychotropic medications are not a cure for mental
illness. Most mental health practitioners who prescribe
these medications for their clients use them as an ad-
junct to individual or group psychotherapy. Although
their contribution to psychiatric care cannot be mini-
mized, it must be emphasized that psychotropic med-
ications relieve some physical and behavioral symptoms.
They do not eliminate mental disorders.
The Role of the Nurse
in Psychopharmacology
Ethical and Legal Implications
Nurses must understand the ethical and legal implica-
tions associated with the administration of psychotropic
medications. Laws differ from state to state, but most
adhere to the client’s right to refuse treatment. Excep-
tions exist in emergency situations when it has been
determined that clients are likely to harm themselves
or others. Many states have adopted laws that allow
courts to order outpatient treatment, which may in-
clude medication, in circumstances where an individual
is not seeking treatment and has a history of violent,
aggressive behavior. The original law, called Kendra’s
law, was enacted after a young woman named Kendra
Webdale was pushed in front of a New York City
subway train by a man who lived in the community
but was not seeking treatment for his mental illness
(New York State Office of Mental Health, 2006). This
law is perhaps more developed than those in other
states but also includes a medication grant clause that
provides uninterrupted medication for those transi-
tioning from hospitals or correctional facilities. Some
states do not have similar laws, so nurses must be
informed about local, state, and federal laws when
working in any health-care setting or correctional
facility and providing care to a client with a psychi-
atric disorder.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 55
CORE CONCEPT
Psychotropic Medication
Medication that affects psychic function, behavior, or
experience.
Historical Perspectives
Historically, reaction to and treatment of individuals
with mental illness ranged from benign involvement
to interventions that some would consider inhumane.
Individuals with mental illness were feared because of
common beliefs associating them with demons or the
supernatural. They were looked upon as loathsome
and often were mistreated.
Beginning in the late 18th century, a type of moral
reform in the treatment of persons with mental illness
began to occur. Community and state hospitals con-
cerned with the needs of persons with mental illness
were established. Considered a breakthrough in the
humanization of care, these institutions, however well
intentioned, fostered the concept of custodial care.
Clients were ensured food and shelter but received
little or no hope of change for the future. As they
became increasingly dependent on the institution to
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 55
Assessment
A thorough baseline assessment must be conducted
before a client is placed on a regimen of psy-
chopharmacological therapy. A nursing history
and assessment (see Chapter 9, The Nursing Process
in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing), an ethnocul-
tural assessment (see Table 4–1 for some ethnocul-
tural considerations and Chapter 6, Cultural and
Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing for detailed information), and a com-
prehensive medication assessment (see Box 4–1) are
all essential components of this database.
Medication Administration and Evaluation
The nurse is the key health-care professional in direct
contact with individuals receiving psychotropic med-
ication in inpatient settings, in partial hospitalization
programs, day treatment centers, home health care,
and other settings. Medication administration is fol-
lowed by a careful evaluation, which includes contin-
uous monitoring for side effects and adverse reactions.
The nurse also evaluates the therapeutic effectiveness
of the medication. It is essential for the nurse to have
a thorough knowledge of psychotropic medications to
be able to anticipate potential problems and outcomes
associated with their administration.
Client Education
The information associated with psychotropic med-
ications is copious and complex. An important role
of the nurse is to translate that complex information
into terms that can be easily understood by the
client. Clients must understand why the medication
has been prescribed, when it should be taken, and
what they may expect in terms of side effects and
possible adverse reactions. They must know whom
to contact when they have a question and when it is
important to report to their physician. Medication
education encourages client cooperation and pro-
motes accurate and effective management of the
treatment regimen.
56 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 1 Ethnocultural Considerations in the Assessment and Safe Administration of Psychotropic
Medications
African Americans
Arabs
Chinese
Japanese
Hispanic (Cuban
and Mexican)
Koreans
Vietnamese
SOURCE: Adapted from Purnell, L.D. (2014). Guide to culturally competent health care (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
■ Metabolize alcohol, psychotropic drugs, beta blockers, antihypertensives, and caffeine differently
than European Americans
■ Higher incidence of extrapyramidal side effects with haloperidol decanoate than European Americans
■ Show higher blood levels and faster therapeutic response to tricyclic antidepressants
■ Experience more toxic side effects and are more prone to tricyclic antidepressant delirium
■ Some individuals have difficulty metabolizing antidepressants, neuroleptics, and opioid agents
■ Increased response to antidepressants and neuroleptics at lower doses
■ Increased sensitivity to the effects of alcohol
■ Many are poor metabolizers of mephenytoin (an anticonvulsant) and related medications
■ May be more sensitive to the effects of many psychotropic drugs, alcohol, and some beta blockers
■ Opiates may be less effective and produce more gastrointestinal side effects than among white
populations
■ May require lower doses of antidepressants and experience more intense side effects than non-
Hispanic white populations
■ May require lower doses of psychotropic medications
■ Increased sensitivity to sedative effects of benzodiazepines
■ May require lower doses of tricyclic antidepressants
■ More sensitive to gastrointestinal side effects of analgesics
■ Generally consider American medicine more concentrated than Asian medicine and may be
inclined to reduce the dose from that which is prescribed
CORE CONCEPTS
Neurotransmitter
A chemical that is stored in the axon terminals of
the presynaptic neuron. An electrical impulse through
the neuron stimulates the release of the neurotrans-
mitter into the synaptic cleft, which in turn determines
whether another electrical impulse is generated.
Receptors
Molecules situated on the cell membrane that are binding
sites for neurotransmitters.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 56
How Do Psychotropics Work?
Most psychotropic medications affect the neuronal
synapse, producing changes in neurotransmitter release
and the receptors to which they bind (see Figure 4–1).
Researchers hypothesize that most antidepressants
work by blocking the reuptake of neurotransmitters,
specifically, serotonin and norepinephrine. Reuptake is
the process of neurotransmitter inactivation by which
the neurotransmitter is reabsorbed into the presynap-
tic neuron from which it was released. Blocking the
reuptake process allows more of the neurotransmitter
to be available for neuronal transmission. This mech-
anism of action may also result in undesirable side
effects (see Table 4–2). Some antidepressants also
block receptor sites that are unrelated to their mecha-
nisms of action. These include �-adrenergic, histamin-
ergic, and muscarinic cholinergic receptors. Blocking
these receptors is associated with the development of
certain side effects; for example, this explains why in-
dividuals treated with tricyclic antidepressants are at
risk for developing postural hypotension. The specific
type of receptor that medications bind to is also rele-
vant to its level of antianxiety, antidepressant, and seda-
tive properties (see Table 4–2).
Antipsychotic medications block dopamine recep-
tors, and some affect muscarinic cholinergic, hista-
minergic, and �-adrenergic receptors. The atypical (or
novel) antipsychotics focus primarily on blocking
specific serotonin receptors. Benzodiazepines facilitate
the transmission of the inhibitory neurotransmitter
gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA). Psychostimulants
work by increasing norepinephrine, serotonin, and
dopamine release.
Although each psychotropic medication affects neu-
rotransmission, the specific drugs within each class
have varying neuronal effects. Their exact mechanisms
of action are unknown. Many neuronal effects occur
rapidly; however, therapeutic effects of some medica-
tions, such as antidepressants and atypical antipsy-
chotics, may take weeks. Acute alterations in neuronal
function do not fully explain how these medications
work. Long-term neuropharmacological reactions to
increased norepinephrine and serotonin levels may
better explain their mechanisms of action. Recent re-
search suggests that the therapeutic effects are related
to the nervous system’s adaptation to increased levels
of neurotransmitters. These adaptive changes result
from a homeostatic mechanism, much like a thermo-
stat, that regulates the cell and maintains equilibrium.
Applying the Nursing Process
in Psychopharmacological Therapy
An assessment tool for obtaining a drug history is pro-
vided in Box 4–1. This tool may be adapted for use by
staff nurses admitting clients to the hospital or by
nurse practitioners with prescriptive privileges.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 57
Receptors
Neurotransmitter
in the synaptic cleft
Neurotransmitter
in vesicles
Mitochondria
Neurotransmitter
transporter
Neurotransmitter
transporter
FIGURE 4–1 Area of synaptic transmission that is altered by drugs.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 57
58 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 2 Effects of Psychotropic Medications on Neurotransmitters
ACTION ON NEUROTRANSMITTER
EXAMPLE OF MEDICATION AND/OR RECEPTOR DESIRED EFFECTS SIDE EFFECTS
SSRIs
Tricyclic antidepressants
MAOIs
Trazodone and
nefazodone
SNRIs: venlafaxine,
desvenlafaxine,
duloxetine, and
levomilnacipran
Bupropion
Antipsychotics:
phenothiazines
and haloperidol
Antipsychotics (novel):
aripiprazole, asenapine,
brexpiprazole, cariprazine,
clozapine, iloperidone,
lurasidone, olanzapine,
paliperidone, quetiapine,
risperidone, ziprasidone
Antianxiety: benzodiazepines
Inhibit reuptake of serotonin
(5-HT)
Inhibit reuptake of serotonin
(5-HT)
Inhibit reuptake of NE
Block NE (�1) receptor
Block ACh receptor
Block histamine (H1) receptor
Increase NE and 5-HT by
inhibiting the enzyme that
degrades them (MAO-A)
5-HT reuptake block 5-HT2
receptor antagonism
Adrenergic receptor blockade
Potent inhibitors of serotonin
and norepinephrine
reuptake
Weak inhibitors of dopamine
reuptake
Inhibits reuptake of NE and D
Strong D2 receptor blockades
Weaker blockades of ACh, H1,
�1-adrenergic, and 5-HT2
receptors
Receptor antagonism of 5-HT1
and 5-HT2
D1–D5 (varies with drug)
H1,�1-adrenergic muscarinic
(ACh)
Bind to BZ receptor sites on
the GABAA receptor com-
plex; increase receptor
affinity for GABA
Reduce depression
Control anxiety
Control obsessions
Reduce depression
Relieve severe pain
Prevent panic attacks
Reduce depression
Control anxiety
Reduce depression
Reduce anxiety
Reduce depression
Relieve pain of
neuropathy
(duloxetine)
Relieve anxiety
(venlafaxine)
Reduces depression
Aids in smoking
cessation
Reduces symptoms of
ADHD
Relieve psychosis
Relieve anxiety
(Some) provide relief
from nausea and
vomiting and in-
tractable hiccoughs
Relieve psychosis
(with minimal or
no EPS)
Relieve anxiety
Relieve acute mania
Relieve anxiety
Produce sedation
Nausea, agitation,
headache, sexual
dysfunction
Sexual dysfunction (NE &
5-HT)
Sedation, weight gain (H1)
Dry mouth, constipation,
blurred vision, urinary
retention (ACh)
Postural hypotension and
tachycardia (�1)
Sedation, dizziness
Sexual dysfunction
Hypertensive crisis (interac-
tion with tyramine)
Nausea (5-HT)
Sedation (5-HT2)
Orthostasis (�1)
Priapism (�2)
Nausea (5-HT)
↑ Sweating (NE)
Insomnia (NE)
Tremors (NE)
Sexual dysfunction (5-HT)
Insomnia, dry mouth,
tremor, seizures
Blurred vision, dry mouth,
↓ sweating, constipation,
urinary retention, tachy-
cardia (ACh) EPS (D2)
↑ Plasma prolactin (D2)
Sedation; weight gain (H1)
Ejaculatory difficulty (5-HT2)
Postural hypotension (�; H1)
Potential with some of the
drugs for mild EPS (D2)
Sedation, weight gain (H1)
Orthostasis and dizziness
(�-adrenergic)
Blurred vision, dry mouth,
↓ sweating, constipation,
urinary retention, tachy-
cardia (ACh)
Dependence (with long-
term use)
Confusion, memory
impairment, motor
incoordination
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 58
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 59
One of the Quality and Safety Education for Nurses
(QSEN) criteria culminating from the Institute of
Medicine (IOM) (2003) report on essential com-
petencies for health care professionals stresses that the
patient must be at the center of decisions about treatment
(patient-centered care), and this type of assessment tool
provides an opportunity to actively engage the patient
in describing what medications have been effective or
ineffective and identifying side effects that may impact
willingness to adhere to a medication regimen.
Antianxiety Agents
Background Assessment Data
Indications
Antianxiety drugs are also called anxiolytics and his-
torically were referred to as minor tranquilizers. They
are used in the treatment of anxiety disorders, anxiety
symptoms, acute alcohol withdrawal, skeletal muscle
spasms, convulsive disorders, status epilepticus, and
preoperative sedation. They are most appropriate for
BOX 4–1 Medication Assessment Tool
Date __________________________ Client’s Name __________________________________ Age ______________________
Marital Status ____________________ Children __________________________ Occupation ___________________________
Presenting Symptoms (subjective & objective) _______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Diagnosis (DSM-5) _____________________________________________________________________________________
Current Vital Signs: Blood Pressure: Sitting ________/________ ; Standing __________/__________; Pulse____________ ;
Respirations ____________ Height ___________________ Weight _______________________
CURRENT/PAST USE OF PRESCRIPTION DRUGS (Indicate with “c” or “p” beside name of drug whether current or past use):
Name Dosage How Long Used Why Prescribed By Whom Side Effects/Results
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
CURRENT/PAST USE OF OVER-THE-COUNTER DRUGS (Indicate with “c” or “p” beside name of drug whether current or
past use):
Name Dosage How Long Used Why Prescribed By Whom Side Effects/Results
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
____________ ____________ _______________ _______________ _____________ ___________________
CURRENT/PAST USE OF STREET DRUGS, ALCOHOL, NICOTINE, AND/OR CAFFEINE (Indicate with “c” or “p” beside
name of drug):
Name Amount Used How Often Used When Last Used Effects Produced
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ ______________________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ ______________________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ ______________________
Any allergies to food or drugs?____________________________________________________________________________
Any special diet considerations?___________________________________________________________________________
TA B L E 4 – 2 Effects of Psychotropic Medications on Neurotransmitters—cont’d
ACTION ON NEUROTRANSMITTER
EXAMPLE OF MEDICATION AND/OR RECEPTOR DESIRED EFFECTS SIDE EFFECTS
5-HT1A agonist
D2 agonist
D2 antagonist
Relieves anxiety Nausea, headache, dizziness
Restlessness
Antianxiety: buspirone
5-HT, 5-hydroxytryptamine (serotonin); ACh, acetylcholine; ADHD, attention deficit-hyperactivity disorder; BZ, benzodiazepine; D,
dopamine; EPS, extrapyramidal symptoms; GABA, gamma-aminobutyric acid; H, histamine; MAO, monoamine oxidase; MAO-A,
monoamine oxidase A; MAOI, monoamine oxidase inhibitor; NE, norepinephrine; SNRI, serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor;
SSRI, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor.
Continued
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 59
60 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
the treatment of acute anxiety states rather than long-
term treatment, as their use and efficacy for longer
than 4 months has not been evaluated. For long-term
management of anxiety disorders, antidepressants are
often used as the first line of treatment because they
are not addictive. (A table of current FDA-approved
antianxiety agents, pregnancy categories, half-life, and
daily dosage ranges can be found online at DavisPlus
and in Chapter 27, Anxiety, Obsessive-Compulsive,
and Related Disorders.)
Action
Antianxiety drugs depress subcortical levels of the
central nervous system (CNS), particularly the limbic
system and reticular formation. They may potentiate
the effects of the powerful inhibitory neurotransmitter
GABA in the brain, thereby producing a calming
effect. All levels of CNS depression can be affected,
from mild sedation to hypnosis to coma. The most
commonly prescribed antianxiety agents are benzodi-
azepines, including clonazepam (Klonopin), diazepam
(Valium), and alprazolam (Xanax). Benzodiazepines
are much like alcohol in their effects on GABA recep-
tors, which explains why benzodiazepines may be
used for the management of alcohol withdrawal. Bus-
pirone (BuSpar) is an antianxiety agent but not a ben-
zodiazepine and does not depress the CNS. Although
its action is unknown, the drug is believed to produce
the desired effects through interactions with sero-
tonin, dopamine, and other neurotransmitter recep-
tors. Clients should be instructed that buspirone has
a lag period of 7 to 10 days before full therapeutic
benefits are achieved. It does not have the addiction
potential of the other antianxiety agents and there-
fore may be a better option for clients with anxiety
disorders who have also struggled with substance use
disorders.
Interactions
■ Increased effects of antianxiety agents can occur
when they are taken concomitantly with alcohol,
barbiturates, narcotics, antipsychotics, antidepres-
sants, antihistamines, neuromuscular blocking
agents, cimetidine, or disulfiram.
■ Increased effects can also occur with herbal de-
pressants (e.g., kava, valerian, lemon verbena,
L-tryptophan, melatonin, and chamomile).
■ Decreased effects can be noted with cigarette
smoking and caffeine consumption.
Diagnosis
The following nursing diagnoses may be considered
for clients receiving therapy with antianxiety agents:
■ Risk for injury related to seizures, panic anxiety,
acute agitation from alcohol withdrawal (indica-
tions), abrupt withdrawal from the medication
BOX 4–1 Medication Assessment Tool—cont’d
Do you have (or have you ever had) any of the following? If yes, provide explanation on the back of this sheet.
Yes No Yes No Yes No
Are you pregnant or breast feeding?____________ Date of last menses___________ Type of contraception used________
Describe any restrictions/limitations that might interfere with your use of medication for your current problem. _________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Prescription orders: Patient teaching related to medications prescribed:
Lab work or referrals prescribed:
Nurse’s signature _________________________________ Client’s signature ____________________________________
Difficulty swallowing ___ ___
Delayed wound healing ___ ___
Constipation problems ___ ___
Urination problems ___ ___
Recent change in
elimination patterns ___ ___
Weakness or tremors ___ ___
Seizures ___ ___
Headaches ___ ___
Dizziness ___ ___
High blood pressure ___ ___
Palpitations ___ ___
Chest pain ___ ___
Blood clots/pain in legs ___ ___
Fainting spells ___ ___
Swollen ankles/legs/hands ___ ___
Asthma ___ ___
Varicose veins ___ ___
Numbness/tingling
(location?) ___ ___
Ulcers ___ ___
Nausea/vomiting ___ ___
Problems with diarrhea ___ ___
Shortness of breath ___ ___
Sexual dysfunction ___ ___
Lumps in your breasts ___ ___
Blurred or double vision ___ ___
Ringing in the ears ___ ___
Insomnia ___ ___
Skin rashes ___ ___
Diabetes ___ ___
Hepatitis (or other liver
disease) ___ ___
Kidney disease ___ ___
Glaucoma ___ ___
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 60
after long-term use, or effects of medication intox-
ication or overdose
■ Anxiety (specify) related to threat to physical
integrity or self-concept
■ Risk for activity intolerance related to side effects
of sedation, confusion, and/or lethargy
■ Disturbed sleep pattern related to situational crises,
physical condition, or severe level of anxiety
Safety Issues in Planning and Implementing Care
The IOM (2003) identifies ensuring safety as a
core competency for nursing. Table 4–3 notes
some of the significant safety issues to be con-
sidered for clients taking antianxiety agents. Nursing
interventions related to each side effect are noted in
the right-hand column.
Outcome Criteria and Evaluation
The following criteria may be used for evaluating the
effectiveness of therapy with antianxiety agents.
The client:
■ Demonstrates a reduction in anxiety, tension, and
restless activity
■ Experiences no seizure activity
■ Experiences no physical injury
■ Is able to tolerate usual activities without excessive
sedation
■ Exhibits no evidence of confusion
■ Tolerates the medication without gastrointestinal
distress
■ Verbalizes understanding of the need for, side
effects of, and regimen for self-administration
■ Verbalizes possible consequences of abrupt with-
drawal from the medication
Antidepressants
Sorting out information on antidepressant medica-
tions can be particularly confusing because there are
several types of antidepressant medications, some of
which are also prescribed to treat anxiety disorders.
The first “antidepressant” drug was a monoamine
oxidase inhibitor (MAOI), isoniazid, which was used
to treat tuberculosis. When patients began describ-
ing their increased feelings of well-being on these
drugs, MAOIs were developed specifically for the
treatment of depression. Unfortunately, they were
also potentially deadly for anyone who ate foods
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 61
TA B L E 4 – 3 Safety Issues and Nursing Interventions for Patients Taking Antianxiety Agents
SAFETY ISSUES NURSING INTERVENTIONS
Tolerance and physical dependence may develop. Abrupt
withdrawal can be life threatening (except with buspirone);
signs include sweating, agitation, tremors, nausea and
vomiting, delirium, seizures.
Drowsiness, confusion, and lethargy are the most common
side effects.
Effects of other CNS depressants are increased.
Antianxiety agents may aggravate symptoms of depression.
Orthostatic hypotension may occur.
Paradoxical excitement (opposite from the desired effect)
may occur. Especially the elderly may be at higher risk for
agitation and increased anxiety.
Blood dyscrasias, although rare, can be serious or life
threatening.
Congenital malformations have been associated with
use of these drugs during the first trimester of
pregnancy.
Instruct client not to stop taking the drug abruptly.
Assess the client for signs of developing tolerance (re-
quiring higher doses of medication to achieve effects).
Educate the client about symptoms of withdrawal.
Contact the doctor immediately if symptoms of with-
drawal are assessed.
Instruct client not to drive or operate dangerous machinery
while taking this medication.
Instruct the client not to drink alcohol or take other CNS
depressants, antihistamines, cimetidine, antidepres-
sants, neuromuscular blocking agents, or disulfiram
while taking these drugs.
Assess the client’s mood and assess for suicide risk.
Instruct the client to rise slowly from a sitting to standing
position to minimize risk for falls.
Monitor lying and standing blood pressures to assess for
orthostatic hypotension.
Hold the medication and notify the doctor.
Assess for sore throat, fever, bruising, or unusual bleeding.
Hold medication and report these symptoms immedi-
ately to the doctor.
Instruct the female client who is pregnant or anticipating
pregnancy while on these drugs to explore alternative
treatment options with her physician.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 61
high in tyramine while taking these drugs, and sev-
eral serious interactions occurred with other drugs.
Because MAOIs increase the availability of norepi-
nephrine, researchers focused on developing drugs
that impacted norepinephrine without the need
for food restrictions, leading to introduction of the
tricyclic antidepressants.
Tricyclics were the first line of treatment for
depression for many years but were effective for
only about 70 percent of those treated. In addition,
because all neurotransmitters bind to various recep-
tor sites, increasing the availability of norepineph-
rine with tricyclics also has anticholinergic effects
and increases the potential for postural hypoten-
sion. This created limitations for the elderly and
those with cardiovascular problems.
In the late 1980s and early 1990s, serotonin reup-
take inhibitors (SSRIs) and serotonin-norepinephrine
reuptake inhibitors (SNRIs) were developed in response
to research indicating that serotonin, an antianxiety
hormone and neurotransmitter, could promote
improvement in depression and anxiety without
significant anticholinergic side effects. SSRIs and
SNRIs became the preferred first line of treatment
for depression.
The most recent additions to the pharmacological
treatments for depression and anxiety are actually
atypical antipsychotics that increase the availability
of serotonin and dopamine. These medications are
promoted as adjunctive to antidepressant therapy.
The most popular example is aripiprazole (Abilify).
In a recent large study sponsored by the National
Institute of Mental Health, the combination of Abil-
ify with venlafaxine demonstrated a 44 percent im-
provement in elderly adults who were not responding
to antidepressants alone. This finding is important
for treatment of elderly clients because more than
half of older adults with clinical depression do not
respond to antidepressants alone (Lenze et al., 2015).
Despite these developments and client-subjective
reports of improvement with antidepressant medica-
tions, our understanding of the exact mechanisms
of action remains theoretical because, currently, the
levels of neurotransmitters in the brain cannot be
measured. Further, a large study funded by the Na-
tional Institute of Mental Health (STAR*D) found
that two-thirds of patients with at least moderate
depression on antidepressant medication did not
experience full recovery after initial treatment with
an SSRI (NIMH, 2006).
Research continues with the goal of identifying
more broadly effective antidepressant therapies. Sev-
eral of the newest drugs on the market for treatment
of depression are not significantly different from ex-
isting products. For example, a “new” antidepressant
approved by the FDA in 2016, Oleptro, is a refor-
mulation of trazodone. But new mechanisms are
being explored, and some are in clinical trials.
Drugs that impact specific types of glutamate recep-
tors (N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptors) are
being studied for potential antidepressant effects,
ketamine and midazolam (Versed, a benzodiazepine
with transient effects similar to those of ketamine)
are being explored as potentially faster-acting treat-
ments, drugs that act on melatonin receptors are
currently in clinical trials for use in depression (one
is already approved for use in Europe), and a new
group of antidepressants called triple reuptake inhibitors
that simultaneously block reuptake of serotonin, nor-
epinephrine, and dopamine is in preliminary phases
of research (Tartakovsky, 2016).
Current research also continues to explore genetic
testing to identify factors that may influence whether
an individual is more likely to respond to one type of
antidepressant than another. If reliability is established,
the research will provide a valuable resource for making
decisions about which antidepressant to prescribe first.
Background Assessment Data
Indications
In addition to the obvious indications for antidepres-
sant medications in the treatment of major depressive
and dysthymic disorders, some atypical drugs, such as
the SSRIs, have received FDA approval for the treat-
ment of most anxiety disorders, bulimia nervosa,
premenstrual dysphoric disorder, borderline personal-
ity disorder, obesity, smoking cessation, and alcoholism
A hallmark review of the research on antidepressants
(Fournier et al., 2010) found that the benefits of anti-
depressant therapy for patients with mild to moderate
symptoms of depression may be minimal or nonexis –
tent but that, for clients with severe depression, the
benefits when compared with placebo effects are sub-
stantial. Therefore, these medications are particularly
indicated when an individual is identified as having
severe depression. (A table of current FDA-approved
antidepressants, pregnancy categories, half-life, and
daily dosage ranges can be found online at DavisPlus
and in Chapter 25, Depressive Disorders.)
Action
Antidepressant drugs ultimately work to increase the
concentration of norepinephrine, serotonin, and/or
dopamine in the body. This is accomplished in the
brain by blocking the reuptake of these neurotrans-
mitters by the neurons (tricyclics [TCAs], tetracyclics,
SSRIs, and SNRIs). It also occurs when an enzyme,
monoamine oxidase (MAO), known to inactivate nor-
epinephrine, serotonin, and dopamine, is inhibited at
various sites in the nervous system (MAOIs).
62 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 62
CLINICAL PEARL All antidepressants carry an FDA black-box
warning for increased risk of suicidality in children and
adolescents.
Interactions
Tables 4–4, 4–5, 4–6, and 4–7 identify some of the
significant, dangerous interactions between antidepres-
sant and other drugs or foods. It is important to recog-
nize that new information about drug interactions is
discovered and published frequently. To fully under-
stand safety issues related to medication administration,
nurses need to access the most current, evidence-based
informatics on drug interaction information.
Other Atypical Antidepressants
Other atypical antidepressants include bupropion
(Wellbutrin), mirtazapine (Remeron), and trazodone
(Desyrel). Common SNRIs include desvenlafaxine
(Pristiq), duloxetine (Cymbalta), levomilnacipran
(Fetzima), and venlafaxine (Effexor). Drug interac-
tions vary widely within these groups; following are
several examples.
■ Concomitant use with MAOIs results in serious,
sometimes fatal, effects resembling neuroleptic
malignant syndrome. Coadministration is
contraindicated.
■ Serotonin syndrome may occur when any of the
following are used together: St. John’s wort, suma-
triptan, sibutramine, trazodone, nefazodone,
venlafaxine, duloxetine, levomilnacipran, SSRIs,
5-HT-receptor agonists (triptans).
■ Increased effects of haloperidol, clozapine, and
desipramine may occur with concomitant use of
venlafaxine.
■ Increased effects of levomilnacipran may occur
with concomitant use of CYP3A4 inhibitors.
■ Increased effects of venlafaxine may occur with
concomitant use of cimetidine.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 63
TA B L E 4 – 4 Drug Interactions With SSRIs
INTERACTING DRUGS ADVERSE EFFECTS
Buspirone (BuSpar),
tricyclic antidepressants
(especially clomipramine),
selegiline (Eldepryl),
St. John’s wort
Monoamine oxidase
inhibitors
Warfarin, NSAIDs
Alcohol, benzodiazepines
Antiepileptics
*Serotonin syndrome is a potentially fatal syndrome of serotonin
overstimulation with rapid onset that progresses from diarrhea,
restlessness, agitation, hyperreflexia, fluctuations in vital signs to
later symptoms of myoclonus, seizures, hyperthermia, uncon-
trolled shivering, muscle rigidity, and ultimately can lead to delir-
ium, coma, status epilepticus, cardiovascular collapse, and death.
Immediate cessation of offending drugs and comprehensive sup-
portive intervention is essential (Sadock, Sadock, & Ruiz, 2015).
Serotonin syndrome*
Hypertensive crisis
Increased risk of bleeding
Increased sedation
Lowered seizure threshold
TA B L E 4 – 5 Drug Interactions With Tricyclic
Antidepressants (TCAs)
INTERACTING DRUGS ADVERSE EFFECTS
Monoamine oxidase
inhibitors
St. John’s wort, tramadol
(Ultram)
Clonidine (Catapres),
epinephrine
Acetylcholine blockers
Alcohol and carbamazepine
(Tegretol)
Cimetidine (Tagamet),
bupropion (BuSpar)
High fever, convulsions,
death
Seizures, serotonin
syndrome
Severe hypertension
Paralytic ileus
Blocks antidepressant
action, increases sedation
Increased TCA blood levels
and increased side effects
TA B L E 4 – 6 Drug Interactions With Monoamine
Oxidase Inhibitors (MAOIs)
INTERACTING DRUGS ADVERSE EFFECTS
Selective serotonin reuptake
inhibitor, tricyclic antidepressants,
atomoxetine (Strattera),
duloxetine (Cymbalta),
dextromethorphan (an
ingredient in many cough
syrups), venlafaxine (Effexor),
St. John’s wort, ginkgo biloba
Morphine and other narcotic
pain relievers, antihypertensives
All other antidepressants,
pseudoephedrine,
amphetamines, cocaine
cyclobenzaprine (Flexeril),
dopamine, methyldopa,
levodopa, epinephrine,
buspirone (BuSpar)
Buspirone
Antidiabetics
Tegretol
Serotonin syndrome
Hypotension
Hypertensive crisis
(these side effects
can occur even if
taken within 2 weeks
of stopping MAOIs)
Psychosis, agitation,
seizures
Hypoglycemia
Fever, hypertension,
seizures
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 63
■ Increased effects of duloxetine may occur with con-
comitant use of CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., fluvoxam-
ine, quinolone antibiotics) or CYP2D6 inhibitors
(e.g., fluoxetine, quinidine, paroxetine).
■ Risk of liver injury is increased with concomitant
use of alcohol and duloxetine.
■ Risk of toxicity or adverse effects from drugs exten-
sively metabolized by CYP2D6 (e.g., flecainide,
phenothiazines, propafenone, tricyclic antidepres-
sants, thioridazine) is increased when these drugs are
used concomitantly with duloxetine or bupropion.
■ Decreased effects of bupropion and trazodone may
occur with concomitant use of carbamazepine.
■ The anticoagulant effect of warfarin may be altered
with concomitant use of bupropion, venlafaxine,
desvenlafaxine, duloxetine, levomilnacipran, or
trazodone.
■ Risk of seizures is increased when bupropion is
coadministered with drugs that lower the seizure
threshold (e.g., antidepressants, antipsychotics,
systemic steroids, theophylline, tramadol).
■ Effects of midazolam are decreased with concomi-
tant use of desvenlafaxine.
■ Effects of desvenlafaxine and levomilnacipran are
increased with concomitant use of potent CYP3A4
inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole).
Diagnosis
The following nursing diagnoses may be considered
for clients receiving therapy with antidepressant
medications:
■ Risk for suicide related to depressed mood
■ Risk for injury related to side effects of sedation,
lowered seizure threshold, orthostatic hypotension,
priapism, photosensitivity, arrhythmias, hyperten-
sive crisis, or serotonin syndrome
■ Social isolation related to depressed mood
■ Risk for constipation related to side effects of the
medication
■ Insomnia related to depressed mood and elevated
level of anxiety
Safety Issues in Planning and Implementing Care
Some of the common but manageable side effects of
antidepressant medications include dry mouth, seda-
tion, and nausea. General nursing interventions such
as offering hard candies, ice, and frequent sips of
water are helpful in alleviating dry mouth. Clients
may find that sedation is less bothersome if they take
the daily dose of antidepressant at bedtime; they
should be encouraged to discuss the time of day that
their medication should be taken with the prescribing
physician or nurse practitioner. Taking antidepressant
medication with food may help minimize nausea.
Some patients taking SSRIs or SNRIs complain of
sexual dysfunction. Men may report abnormal ejacu-
lation or impotence, and women may report loss of
orgasm. This side effect sometimes results in clients
stopping the medication abruptly, which may put
them at risk for discontinuation syndrome and
worsen symptoms of depression. Nurses must develop
an open attitude regarding discussion and assessment
of client sexual concerns, and clients who are partic-
ularly troubled by this side effect can be encouraged
to explore alternative medication with their physician
or nurse practitioner.
Other side effects or adverse reactions may be dan-
gerous or even fatal. Many of these are related to
64 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 7 Diet Restrictions for Clients on MAOI Therapy
FOODS CONTAINING TYRAMINE
HIGH TYRAMINE CONTENT (AVOID WHILE
ON MAOI THERAPY)
Aged cheeses (cheddar, Swiss, Camembert, blue
cheese, parmesan, provolone, Romano, brie)
Raisins, fava beans, flat Italian beans, Chinese
pea pods
Red wines (chianti, burgundy, cabernet
sauvignon)
Liqueurs
Smoked and processed meats (salami,
bologna, pepperoni, summer sausage)
Caviar, pickled herring, corned beef, chicken
or beef liver
Soy sauce, brewer’s yeast, meat tenderizer (MSG)
Sauerkraut
SOURCE: Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Synopsis of psychiatry: Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; Vallerand, A.H., Sanoski, C.A., & Deglin, J.H. (2016). Davis drug guide for nurses (15th ed.). Philadelphia:
F.A. Davis.
MODERATE TYRAMINE CONTENT
(MAY EAT OCCASIONALLY WHILE
ON MAOI THERAPY)
Gouda cheese, processed
American cheese, mozzarella
Yogurt, sour cream
Avocados, bananas
Beer, white wine, coffee, colas,
tea, hot chocolate
Meat extracts, such as bouillon
Chocolate
LOW TYRAMINE CONTENT (LIMITED
QUANTITIES PERMISSIBLE WHILE
ON MAOI THERAPY)
Pasteurized cheeses (cream
cheese, cottage cheese, ricotta)
Figs
Distilled spirits (in moderation)
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 64
drug–drug or drug–food interactions, as discussed
previously. Because there is so much information and
new drug development is ongoing, practicing nurses
should assure that they are accessing evidence-based
informatics to keep up to date on side effects as
well. Many health-care organizations provide online
medication resources to employees, and mobile device
applications provide a readily available resource for up-
dated drug information. Some important safety issues
and nursing interventions are listed in Table 4–8.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 65
TA B L E 4 – 8 Safety Issues and Nursing Interventions for Patients Taking Antidepressants
SAFETY ISSUES NURSING INTERVENTIONS
Drug interactions (multiple, as
discussed in the text)
Increased risk for suicide
Sedation
Discontinuation syndrome:
SSRIs—dizziness, lethargy, headache, nausea
TCAs—hypomania, akathisia, cardiac
arrhythmias, gastrointestinal upset,
panic attacks
MAOIs—flu-like symptoms, confusion,
hypomania
Photosensitivity
Orthostatic hypotension (TCAs)
Tachycardia, arrhythmias (TCAs)
Hyponatremia (SSRIs) especially among
the elderly (potentially life threatening)
Blurred vision (TCAs and atypicals)
Constipation
MAOI, monoamine oxidase inhibitor; SSRI, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor; TCA, tricyclic antidepressant.
Instruct clients to inform their physician or nurse practitioner of all med-
ications they are taking, including herbal preparations, over-the-counter
drugs, and any medications they have stopped taking within the previous
2 weeks.
Notify the physician immediately when any symptoms of serotonin
syndrome are assessed. Do not administer the offending agent.
■ Monitor vital signs.
■ Protect from injury secondary to muscle rigidity or change in mental
status.
■ Provide cooling blankets for temperature regulation.
■ Monitor intake and output.
The condition usually resolves when the offending agent is promptly
discontinued but can be fatal without intervention (Cooper & Sejnowski,
2013).
Assess frequently for presence or worsening of suicide ideation.
Initiate suicide precautions as needed.
Monitor clients’ use of medication as prescribed, since these medica-
tions can be lethal in overdose.
Instruct clients not to drive or operate dangerous machinery when experi-
encing sedation.
Instruct clients that all antidepressants have some potential for discontin-
uation syndrome and should not be stopped abruptly but rather tapered
off (Schatzberg, Cole, & DeBattista, 2010).
Instruct clients of their vulnerability to severe sunburn and recommend
sunscreen.
Instruct clients to rise slowly from sitting to standing.
Monitor blood pressure to assess for symptoms.
Monitor vital signs, especially in elderly with preexisting cardiovascular
disorders.
Instruct clients to report any symptoms of nausea, malaise, lethargy,
muscle cramps.
Assess for disorientation or restlessness.
Monitor sodium levels:
■ <120 mEq/L risk for seizure, coma, respiratory arrest
■ Withhold medication, contact physician, restrict water intake
(Jacob & Spinier, 2006)
Instruct clients to avoid driving, and reassure them that this side effect
usually resolves within 3 weeks.
Monitor blood pressure to rule out symptoms of hypertension.
Recommend a high-fiber diet and regular exercise, and instruct clients to
report any symptoms of ongoing difficulty with bowel movements.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 65
CLINICAL PEARL As antidepressant drugs take effect and mood
begins to lift, the individual may have increased energy with
which to implement a suicide plan. Suicide potential may in-
crease as level of depression decreases. The nurse should be
particularly alert to sudden lifts in mood.
Outcome Criteria and Evaluation
The following criteria may be used for evaluating
the effectiveness of therapy with antidepressant
medications.
The client:
■ Has not harmed self
■ Has not experienced injury caused by side effects
■ Exhibits vital signs within normal limits
■ Manifests symptoms of improvement in mood (pre-
sents brighter affect, interacts with others, demon-
strates improved hygiene, expresses clear thought,
conveys hopefulness, shows improved ability to
make decisions)
■ Willingly participates in activities and interacts
appropriately with others
Mood-Stabilizing Agents
Background Assessment Data
For many years, the drug of choice for treatment and
management of bipolar mania was lithium carbonate.
In recent years, several other medications have
demonstrated effectiveness either alone or in combi-
nation with lithium. Most notably are drugs in the
class of anticonvulsant medications, which are now
FDA approved for mood stabilization. Some second-
generation atypical antipsychotics have also demon-
strated benefits for management of this disorder.
Bipolar disorder is characterized by cycles of de-
pression and manic episodes, which may manifest
as grandiose thinking and behavior, rapid thoughts,
hyperactivity, and/or impulsive agitation. The effec-
tive medication treatment for this disorder is one
that reduces the rollercoaster of “ups and downs”
often described by clients; thus, the name “mood
stabilizer” is an apt description of their purpose.
Lithium was first identified as an antimanic but was
also recognized as successful for stabilizing the
mood swings of bipolar disorder.
Lithium is a salt present in mineral springs and
added to spa baths. Although it was also used for
other medicinal purposes, in 1949, Australian physi-
cian John Cade reported using lithium to treat manic
excitement. He found it so successful that some of his
patients became symptom free and were able to be
discharged after years of institutionalization (Shorter,
2009). It remains true that people who respond to
lithium and remain on the medication may show no
evidence of bipolar mood swings. While it is not a
cure, it is often described as “like insulin to a diabetic”
in that proper use and response can reduce or elimi-
nate symptoms. Unfortunately, not everyone responds
with the same degree of success, and too much
lithium can be fatal. Today, however, we are able to
measure the blood levels of lithium and be confident
of its safety when maintained within the specified
therapeutic range (0.6–1.2 mEq/L). The exact mech-
anism of action remains unknown, but it is believed
to have an impact on the same neurotransmitters
(serotonin, norepinephrine, glutamate, GABA, and
dopamine) as previously discussed.
In 1995, the FDA approved valproate (Depakote) as
a mood stabilizer; since then, a great shift toward this
group of anticonvulsant mood stabilizers (including
carbamazepine, clonazepam, topiramate, and lamotrig-
ine) and away from lithium has occurred (Shorter,
2009). The mechanism of action for these drugs as well
as for lithium is unclear. Impact on cellular sodium
transport, GABA modulation, and raising of the seizure
threshold have all been advanced as possible explana-
tions for their effectiveness. Both first-generation and
second-generation antipsychotics have been used alone
or as adjuncts to other medication treatment for bipolar
mania. Since lithium has a lag period of 7 to 10 days,
first-generation antipsychotics such as haloperidol may
be helpful in that their sedative effects are more imme-
diate and may bring relief from manic symptoms before
lithium reaches therapeutic levels. They also increase
the effects of lithium, so monitoring blood serum levels
is especially important in the initial phase of treatment
when these two drugs are used in combination. (A table
of current FDA-approved mood-stabilizer medications,
pregnancy categories, half-life, and daily dosage ranges
can be found online at DavisPlus and in Chapter 26,
Bipolar and Related Disorders.)
Interactions
One of the interesting things about drug interactions
with mood stabilizers is that many drugs either increase
or decrease their effectiveness, as shown in Table 4–9.
Understanding that lithium is a salt is relevant in ex-
plaining some of these interactions. Because lithium
is an imperfect substitute for sodium, anything that de-
pletes sodium will make more receptor sites available
to lithium and increase the risk for lithium toxicity.
This is also the rationale behind maintenance of regu-
lar dietary sodium and fluid intake, because major fluc-
tuations impact lithium levels. For example, significant
increases in dietary sodium intake may reduce the ef-
fectiveness of lithium because sodium will bind at more
receptor sites and lithium will be excreted. Other drugs
that increase serum sodium levels also have an impact
on lithium levels.
66 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 66
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 67
TA B L E 4 – 9 Drug Interactions With Mood-Stabilizing Agents
THE EFFECTS OF: ARE INCREASED BY: ARE DECREASED BY: CONCURRENT USE MAY RESULT IN:
ANTIMANIC:
Lithium
ANTICONVULSANTS:
Clonazepam
Carbamazepine
Valproic acid
Lamotrigine
Topiramate
Oxcarbazepine
Carbamazepine, fluoxe-
tine, haloperidol, loop
diuretics, methyldopa,
NSAIDs, and thiazide
diuretics
CNS depressants,
cimetidine, hormonal
contraceptives, disulfi-
ram, fluoxetine, isoni-
azid, ketoconazole,
metoprolol, propran –
olol, valproic acid,
probenecid
Verapamil, diltiazem,
propoxyphene, erythro-
mycin, clarithromycin,
SSRIs, tricyclic antide-
pressants, cimetidine,
isoniazid, danazol, lam-
otrigine, niacin, aceta-
zolamide, dalfopristin,
valproate, nefazodone
Chlorpromazine, cimet –
idine, erythromycin,
felbamate, salicylates
Valproic acid
Metformin,
hydrochlorothiazide
Acetazolamide, osmotic
diuretics, theophylline,
and urinary alkalinizers
Rifampin, theophylline
(↓ sedative effects),
phenytoin
Cisplatin, doxorubicin,
felbamate, rifampin,
barbiturates, hydan-
toins, primidone,
theophylline
Rifampin, carba-
mazepine, cholestyra-
mine, lamotrigine,
phenobarbital, ethosux-
imide, hydantoins
Primidone, pheno –
barbital, phenytoin,
rifamycin, succinimides,
oral contraceptives,
oxcarbazepine,
carbamazepine,
acetaminophen
Phenytoin, carba-
mazepine, valproic
acid, lamotrigine
Carbamazepine,
phenobarbital, pheny-
toin, valproic acid,
verapamil
Increased effects of neuromuscular
blocking agents and tricyclic antidepres-
sants; decreased pressor sensitivity of
sympathomimetics; neurotoxicity may
occur with phenothiazines or
calcium channel blockers
Increased phenytoin levels; decreased
efficacy of levodopa
Decreased levels of corticosteroids,
doxycycline, quinidine, warfarin,
estrogen-containing contraceptives,
cyclosporine, benzodiazepines,
theophylline, lamotrigine, valproic acid,
bupropion, haloperidol, olanzapine,
tiagabine, topiramate, voriconazole,
ziprasidone, felbamate, levothyroxine,
or antidepressants; increased levels of
lithium; life-threatening hypertensive
reaction with MAOIs
Increased effects of tricyclic antidepres-
sants, carbamazepine, CNS depressants,
ethosuximide, lamotrigine, phenobarbital,
warfarin, zidovudine, hydantoins
Decreased levels of valproic acid;
increased levels of carbamazepine
and topiramate
Increased risk of CNS depression with
alcohol or other CNS depressants;
increased risk of kidney stones with
carbonic anhydrase inhibitors; increased
effects of phenytoin, metformin,
amitriptyline; decreased effects of
oral contraceptives, digoxin, lithium,
risperidone, and valproic acid
Increased concentrations of phenobar-
bital and phenytoin; decreased effects
of oral contraceptives, felodipine,
and lamotrigine
Continued
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 67
68 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 9 Drug Interactions With Mood-Stabilizing Agents—cont’d
THE EFFECTS OF: ARE INCREASED BY: ARE DECREASED BY: CONCURRENT USE MAY RESULT IN:
CALCIUM CHANNEL
BLOCKER:
Verapamil
ANTIPSYCHOTICS:
Olanzapine
Aripiprazole
Chlorpromazine
Quetiapine
Risperidone
Ziprasidone
Amiodarone, beta
blockers, cimetidine,
ranitidine, and grape-
fruit juice
Fluvoxamine and other
CYP1A2 inhibitors, flu-
oxetine
Ketoconazole and
other CYP3A4 in-
hibitors; quinidine, flu-
oxetine, paroxetine, or
other potential CYP2D6
inhibitors
Beta blockers,
paroxetine
Cimetidine; ketocona-
zole, itraconazole,
fluconazole, erythromy-
cin, or other CYP3A4
inhibitors
Clozapine, fluoxetine,
paroxetine, or ritonavir
Ketoconazole and other
CYP3A4 inhibitors
Barbiturates, calcium
salts, hydantoins,
rifampin, and
antineoplastics
Carbamazepine and
other CYP1A2 induc-
ers, omeprazole,
rifampin
Carbamazepine,
famotidine, valproate
Centrally acting
anticholinergics
Phenytoin, thioridazine
Carbamazepine
Carbamazepine
Increased effects of beta blockers,
disopyramide, flecainide, doxorubicin,
benzodiazepines, buspirone, carba-
mazepine, digoxin, dofetilide, ethanol,
imipramine, nondepolarizing muscle
relaxants, prazosin, quinidine, sirolimus,
tacrolimus, and theophylline; altered
serum lithium levels
Decreased effects of levodopa and
dopamine agonists; increased hypoten-
sion with antihypertensives; increased
CNS depression with alcohol or other
CNS depressants
Increased CNS depression with alcohol
or other CNS depressants; increased
hypotension with antihypertensives
Increased effects of beta blockers;
excessive sedation and hypotension
with meperidine; decreased hypoten-
sive effect of guanethidine; decreased
effect of oral anticoagulants; decreased
or increased phenytoin levels; increased
orthostatic hypotension with thiazide
diuretics; increased CNS depression
with alcohol or other CNS depressants;
increased hypotension with antihyper-
tensives; increased anticholinergic
effects with anticholinergic agents
Decreased effects of levodopa and
dopamine agonists; increased CNS
depression with alcohol or other CNS
depressants; increased hypotension
with antihypertensives
Decreased effects of levodopa and
dopamine agonists; increased effects
of clozapine and valproate; increased
CNS depression with alcohol or other
CNS depressants; increased hypoten-
sion with antihypertensives
Life-threatening prolongation of
QT interval with quinidine, dofetilide,
other class Ia and III antiarrhythmics,
pimozide, sotalol, thioridazine, chlorpro-
mazine, pentamidine, arsenic trioxide,
mefloquine, dolasetron, tacrolimus,
droperidol, gatifloxacin, or moxifloxacin;
decreased effects of levodopa and
dopamine agonists; increased CNS
depression with alcohol or other
CNS depressants; increased hypoten-
sion with antihypertensives
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 68
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 69
TA B L E 4 – 9 Drug Interactions With Mood-Stabilizing Agents—cont’d
THE EFFECTS OF: ARE INCREASED BY: ARE DECREASED BY: CONCURRENT USE MAY RESULT IN:
Asenapine
CNS, central nervous system; MAOI, monoamine oxidase inhibitor; SSRI, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor.
Fluvoxamine,
imipramine, valproate
Carbamazepine,
cimetidine, paroxetine
Increased effects of paroxetine and
dextromethorphan; increased CNS
depression with alcohol or other
CNS depressants; increased hypoten-
sion with antihypertensives; additive
effects of QT interval prolongation
with quinidine, dofetilide, other class
Ia and III antiarrhythmics, pimozide,
sotalol, thioridazine, chlorpromazine,
pentamidine, arsenic trioxide, meflo-
quine, dolasetron, tacrolimus, droperi-
dol, gatifloxacin, or moxifloxacin
Diagnosis
The following nursing diagnoses may be considered for
clients receiving therapy with mood-stabilizing agents:
■ Risk for injury related to manic hyperactivity
■ Risk for self-directed or other-directed violence
related to unresolved anger turned inward on the
self or outward on the environment
■ Risk for injury related to lithium toxicity
■ Risk for injury related to adverse effects of mood-
stabilizing drugs
■ Risk for activity intolerance related to side effects
of drowsiness and dizziness
Planning and Implementing Care
One of the primary safety issues with lithium is its
narrow therapeutic range. A description of lithium
toxicity, other safety concerns with mood-stabilizing
agents, and relevant nursing interventions are dis-
cussed in Table 4–10.
Lithium Maintenance
Clients who respond to lithium typically remain on the
medication indefinitely. To assure safe maintenance
and prevent lithium toxicity, client education and reg-
ular monitoring are essential. Monitoring includes but
TA B L E 4 – 10 Safety Issues and Nursing Interventions for Clients Taking Mood Stabilizers
SAFETY ISSUES NURSING INTERVENTIONS
Lithium toxicity (blood levels >1.2 mEq/L) or <1.2 in
elderly or debilitated but most common at 1.5 mEq/L
■ Early signs: vomiting, diarrhea
■ Over 2 mEq/L: tremors, sedation, confusion
■ Levels over 3.5 mEq/L: delirium, seizures, coma,
cardiovascular collapse, death
Chlorpromazine (Thorazine) may mask early signs
of lithium toxicity
(Vallerand, Sanoski, & Deglin, 2016)
Increased risk of suicide for all antiepileptics (FDA, 2008)
Hyponatremia (lithium, carbamazepine)
Stevens-Johnson syndrome (especially with lamotrigine
and carbamazepine)
This toxic skin necrolysis can be life threatening
Instruct clients to report all medications, herbals, and
caffeine use to physician or nurse practitioner to
evaluate for drug interactions.
Encourage clients to maintain fluid intake at
2,000–3,000 ml/day and avoid activities in which
excessive sweating and fluid loss are a risk, since
inadequate fluid intake can impact lithium levels.
Instruct clients about the importance of regular monitoring
of serum lithium levels.
Blood levels should be drawn 12 hours after the last dose.
Assess for suicide risk regularly and inform clients of risks
associated with anticonvulsants.
Instruct clients to maintain usual dietary intake of sodium.
Assess for and educate clients to report any episodes
of nausea, vomiting, headache, muscle weakness,
confusion, seizures, since these may be signs of
hyponatremia.
Assess for and educate clients to report any signs of rash
or unusual skin breakdown.
Continued
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 69
is not limited to evaluating serum lithium levels to
assure that they remain within the therapeutic range.
The usual ranges of therapeutic serum concentrations
differ for initiation of treatment in an acute manic
state and maintenance (Facts and Comparisons
[Firm], 2014; Schatzberg, Cole, & DeBattista, 2010):
■ For acute mania: 1.0 to 1.5 mEq/L
■ For maintenance: 0.6 to 1.2 mEq/L
Serum lithium levels should be monitored once or
twice a week after initial treatment until dosage and
serum levels are stable and then monthly during
maintenance therapy. Blood samples should be
drawn 12 hours after the last dose is taken.
At times, clients complain that they miss the
“high” feeling of being in a manic or hypomanic state
once they begin mood-stabilizer medications. They
may be at risk for self-adjusting medication or discon-
tinuing it all together. Open discussion and explor-
ing the benefits versus disadvantages of medication
treatment promotes patient-centered care and en-
ables the nurse to troubleshoot with the client ways
to minimize risks.
Another generally undesirable side effect of lithium
is weight gain. Clients should be educated about this
potential, and weight should be monitored at regular
intervals. It may be helpful to discuss low-calorie diets
while stressing the importance of not making large
changes in sodium intake because of its impact on
serum blood levels of lithium.
CLINICAL PEARL The U.S. Food and Drug Administration
requires that all antiepileptic (anticonvulsant) drugs carry a
warning label indicating that use of the drugs increases risk
for suicidal thoughts and behaviors. Patients treated with these
medications should be monitored for the emergence or worsen-
ing of depression, suicidal thoughts or behavior, or any unusual
changes in mood or behavior.
Outcome Criteria and Evaluation
The following criteria may be used for evaluating the
effectiveness of therapy with mood stabilizing agents.
The client:
■ Is maintaining stability of mood
■ Has not harmed self or others
■ Has experienced no injury from hyperactivity
■ Is able to participate in activities without excessive
sedation or dizziness
■ Is maintaining appropriate weight
■ Exhibits no signs of lithium toxicity
■ Verbalizes importance of taking medication regu-
larly and reporting for regular laboratory blood tests
Antipsychotic Agents
Background Assessment Data
Antipsychotic medications are also called neuroleptics.
Historically, they have been referred to as major tran-
quilizers and clearly have sedative effects. The term
antipsychotics is most descriptive because the primary
benefit over time is the alleviation of psychotic symp-
toms such as hallucinations and delusions. Antipsy-
chotic agents were introduced into the United States
in the 1950s with the phenothiazines. Other drugs in
this classification soon followed. Unfortunately, this
group of medications was found to have the potential
for side effects that interfere with normal movements,
including acute dystonias (muscle spasms) that can
be life threatening, Parkinson-like symptoms, and
tardive dyskinesia (later-onset involuntary movement
disorders primarily in the tongue, lips, and jaw that
may also involve other movement disturbances).
Some of these side effects can be permanent, contin-
uing even after the drug is discontinued. Since that
discovery, a second generation of medications has
been developed with less potential for extrapyramidal
70 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 10 Safety Issues and Nursing Interventions for Clients Taking Mood Stabilizers—cont’d
SAFETY ISSUES NURSING INTERVENTIONS
Hypotension, arrhythmias (lithium)
Blood dyscrasias (valproic acid, carbamazepine)
Increased risk of birth defects (anticonvulsant mood
stabilizers)
Drowsiness (lithium and all anticonvulsants)
Monitor vital signs and instruct clients to report any
symptoms of dizziness or palpitations.
Educate clients to report infections or other illness while
on these medications.
Ensure that platelet counts and bleeding time are deter-
mined before initiation of therapy. Monitor for sponta-
neous bleeding or bruising.
Inform female clients of the risks of birth defects and
provide education about contraception as desired.
Instruct clients to avoid driving or operating dangerous
machinery when experiencing this side effect.
Assess clients’ mental status for level of alertness.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 70
side effects (EPS) such as those mentioned above.
These drugs have become the first line of treatment for
clients with psychotic disorders such as schizophrenia.
This group of drugs may also be effective for treating
negative symptoms of schizophrenia and alleviating
positive symptoms like hallucinations, delusions, and
agitation. More recently, aripiprazole (Abilify), an
atypical antipsychotic, has been described as a third-
generation antipsychotic because of its unique func-
tional profile with dopamine receptors and minimal
risk for EPS (Brust et al., 2015). The typical antipsy-
chotics include the phenothiazines, haloperidol,
loxapine, pimozide, and thiothixene. The atypical
antipsychotics include aripiprazole, asenapine, cloza –
pine, olanzapine, quetiapine, risperidone, paliperidone,
iloperidone, lurasidone, ziprasidone, brexpiprazole
(Rexulti), cariprazine (Vraylar), and pimavanserin
(Nuplazid) indicated for hallucinatins and delusions
associated with Parkinson’s disease psychosis.
Indications
Antipsychotics are used in the treatment of schizo-
phrenia and other psychotic disorders. Selected
agents are used in the treatment of bipolar mania
(see previous section, “Mood-Stabilizing Agents”).
Others are used as antiemetics (chlorpromazine,
perphenazine, prochlorperazine), in the treatment
of intractable hiccoughs (chlorpromazine), and for
the control of tics and vocal utterances in Tourette’s
disorder (haloperidol, pimozide). Selected atypical
antipsychotics, including aripiprazole (Abilify), are
being identified as adjuncts to the treatment of major
depressive disorders. (A table of current FDA-approved
antipsychotics, pregnancy categories, half-life, and
daily dosage ranges, as well as antiparkinsonian agents
used to treat extrapyramidal side effects of antipsy-
chotic medication, can be found online at DavisPlus
and in Chapter 24, Schizophrenia Spectrum and
Other Psychotic Disorders.)
Action
Typical antipsychotics work by blocking postsynaptic
dopamine receptors in the basal ganglia, hypothala-
mus, limbic system, brainstem, and medulla. They
also demonstrate varying affinity for cholinergic,
alpha1-adrenergic, and histaminic receptors. An-
tipsychotic effects may be related to inhibition of
dopamine-mediated transmission of neural impulses
at the synapses.
Atypical antipsychotics are weaker dopamine recep-
tor antagonists than conventional antipsychotics but
are more potent antagonists of the serotonin type
2A (5HT2A) receptors. They also exhibit antagonism
for cholinergic, histaminic, and adrenergic recep-
tors. As mentioned previously, aripiprazole (Abilify)
is a dopamine receptor antagonist but seems to have
a unique way of accomplishing its action and thus
has a minimal risk of extrapyramidal side effects.
Contraindications and Precautions
Certain individuals may be at greater risk for experi-
encing side effects associated with antipsychotic
agents. The elderly have been identified as an at-risk
population because of accounts of stroke and sudden
death while taking antipsychotic medication. Studies
have indicated that elderly patients with psychosis
related to neurocognitive disorder (NCD) who are
treated with antipsychotic drugs are at increased
risk of death compared with those taking a placebo
(Steinberg & Lyketsos, 2012). Causes of death are
most commonly related to infections or cardiovascu-
lar problems. All antipsychotic drugs now carry black-
box warnings to this effect. They are not approved
for treatment of elderly patients with NCD-related
psychosis.
Typical antipsychotics are contraindicated in clients
with known hypersensitivity (cross-sensitivity may
exist among phenothiazines). They should not be
used in comatose states or when CNS depression is
evident; when blood dyscrasias exist; in clients with
Parkinson’s disease or narrow-angle glaucoma; for
those with liver, renal, or cardiac insufficiency; in
individuals with poorly controlled seizure disorders;
or in elderly clients with dementia-related psychosis.
Caution should be taken in administering these
drugs to clients who are elderly, severely ill, or debil-
itated and to clients with diabetes or with respiratory
insufficiency, prostatic hypertrophy, or intestinal
obstruction.
Atypical antipsychotics are contraindicated in hyper-
sensitivity, comatose or severely depressed patients,
elderly patients with dementia-related psychosis, and
lactation. Ziprasidone, risperidone, paliperidone,
asenapine, and iloperidone are contraindicated in
patients with a history of QT prolongation or cardiac
arrhythmias, recent myocardial infarction (MI), un-
compensated heart failure, and concurrent use with
other drugs that prolong the QT interval. Clozapine
is contraindicated in patients with myeloproliferative
disorders, with a history of clozapine-induced agranu-
locytosis or severe granulocytopenia, and in uncon-
trolled epilepsy. Lurasidone is contraindicated in
concomitant use with strong inhibitors of cytochrome
P450 isozyme 3A4 (CYP3A4) (e.g., ketoconazole, an an-
tifungal) and strong CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., rifampin,
an antitubercular).
Caution should be taken in administering these
drugs to elderly or debilitated patients; patients with
cardiac, hepatic, or renal insufficiency; those with
a history of seizures; patients with diabetes or risk
factors for diabetes; clients exposed to temperature
extremes; pregnant clients and children (safety
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 71
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 71
not established); and under conditions that cause
hypotension (dehydration, hypovolemia, treatment
with antihypertensive medication). The risk for
metabolic disturbances such as weight gain can be
particularly dangerous in the elderly.
Interactions
Table 4–11 highlights some drug interactions that
warrant monitoring and assessment by nurses.
Diagnosis
The following nursing diagnoses may be considered
for clients receiving antipsychotic therapy:
■ Risk for other-directed violence related to panic
anxiety and mistrust of others
■ Risk for injury related to medication side effects of
sedation, photosensitivity, reduction of seizure
threshold, agranulocytosis, extrapyramidal symp-
toms, tardive dyskinesia, neuroleptic malignant
syndrome, and/or QT prolongation
■ Risk for activity intolerance related to medication
side effects of sedation, blurred vision, and/or
weakness
■ Noncompliance with medication regimen related
to suspiciousness and mistrust of others
Safety Issues in Planning and Implementing Care
Table 4–12 discusses some significant safety issues to
consider and relevant nursing interventions for
clients taking antipsychotic medication.
72 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 11 Drug Interactions With
Antipsychotic Medications
DRUG INTERACTION ADVERSE EFFECT
Antihypertensives,
CNS depressants
Epinephrine or
dopamine in
combination with
haloperidol or
phenothiazines
Oral anticoagulants
with phenothiazines
Drugs that prolong
QT intervals
Drugs that trigger
orthostatic hypotension
Drugs with anticholinergic
effects, prescription and
OTC drugs
Additive and potentially
severe hypotension
Less effective anticoagulant
effects
Additive effects
Additive hypotension
Additive anticholinergic effects,
including anticholinergic
toxicity, signs of which are
■ Flushing
■ Dry mouth
■ Mydriasis
■ Altered mental status
■ Tachycardia
■ Urinary retention
■ Tremulousness
■ Hypertension
(Ramnarine & Ahmed,
2015)
TA B L E 4 – 12 Safety Issues and Nursing Interventions for Clients Taking Antipsychotic Medication
SAFETY ISSUES NURSING INTERVENTIONS
Extrapyramidal side effectsa
(see Table 4–13 for relative
risk among specific medications)
Hyperglycemia, weight gain,
and diabetes (more common
with atypical antipsychotic
agents)
Hypotension
Orthostatic hypotension (see
Table 4–13 for level of risk
by specific medications)
Lower seizure threshold
(especially with clozapine)
Instruct client to report any signs of muscle stiffness or spasms. Hold the medication
if this occurs.
Administer antiparkinsonian agents as ordered and immediately when signs of acute
dystonia are present.
Assess the patient for abnormal involuntary movements (see Box 4–2).
(See “Additional Issues for Client Education” for further discussion.)
Assess for history of diabetes.
Evaluate blood sugars.
Instruct the client in these risks and the importance of diet and exercise.
Assess for signs of hyperglycemia including polydipsia, polyphagia, polyuria, and
weakness.
Educate the client about risk for hypotension.
Monitor blood pressure.
Instruct client to rise slowly from sitting to standing.
Monitor blood pressure lying and then standing to assess for postural changes.
Assess client for history of seizure disorder.
Monitor client for evidence of seizure activity and report to prescribing physician or
nurse practitioner.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 72
Additional Issues for Client Education
A comparison of side effects among antipsychotic
agents is presented in Table 4–13. Clients should be
apprised of health risks, including the following:
■ Smoking increases the metabolism of antipsychotics,
requiring an adjustment in dosage to achieve a ther-
apeutic effect. Encourage clients to discuss this issue
with the prescribing physician or nurse practitioner.
■ Body temperature is harder to maintain with this
medication, so clients should be encouraged to
dress warmly in cold weather and avoid extended
exposure to very high or low temperatures.
■ Alcohol and antipsychotic drugs potentiate each
other’s effects, so clients should be advised to avoid
drinking alcohol while on antipsychotic therapy.
■ Many medications contain substances that interact
with antipsychotics in a way that may be harmful.
Clients should avoid taking other medications, in-
cluding over-the-counter products, without the
physician’s approval.
■ A significant number of clients on clozapine report
excessive salivation. Sugar-free gum and medica-
tions (anticholinergic or alpha2-adrenoceptor ago-
nists) may alleviate symptoms. Encourage clients to
discuss these options with the prescribing physician
or nurse practitioner.
■ Safe use of antipsychotics during pregnancy has not
been established. Antipsychotics are thought to read-
ily cross the placental barrier; if so, a fetus could ex-
perience adverse effects of the drug. Clients should
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 73
TA B L E 4 – 12 Safety Issues and Nursing Interventions for Clients Taking Antipsychotic Medication—cont’d
SAFETY ISSUES NURSING INTERVENTIONS
Prolonged QT intervalb
especially ziprasidone, thioridazine,
pimozide, haloperidol, paliperidone,
iloperidone, asenapine, and
clozapine.
Anticholinergic effects (see
Table 4–13 for relative risk
among medications)
Sedation
Photosensitivity
Agranulocytosis (more common
with typical antipsychotics but
especially with the atypical
antipsychotic agent clozapine)
Neuroleptic malignant
syndrome (NMS)c
aAcute dystonias can be life threatening (more common with typical antipsychotic agents).
bPotentially life-threatening.
cRare but potentially life-threatening side effect characterized by muscle rigidity, severe hyperthermia, and cardiac effects that can progress
rapidly over 24–72 hours.
Assess for history of arrhythmias, recent MI, heart failure, and report to prescribing
physician or nurse practitioner because these events are contraindications.
Assess for other medications the client is taking that prolong QT interval (there are
many; online resources such as www.crediblemeds.org provide a composite list
for comparison), but note that erythromycin and clarithromycin are two that are
commonly prescribed.
Instruct client to reported any rapid heartbeat, dizziness, or fainting.
Check baseline EKG before beginning treatment.
Instruct client about additive effects of other anticholinergic drugs in combination
with antipsychotics, and to report any other medications taken including over-the-
counter and herbal remedies.
For minor symptoms such as dry mouth, recommend hard candies, sips of water.
Instruct client regarding the importance of good oral hygiene.
Instruct client to report and assess for any evidence of urinary retention, tachycardia,
tremulousness, or hypertension, which may be signs of anticholinergic toxicity.
Educate client about this side effect and instruct client not to drive or operate
dangerous machinery if experiencing sedation.
Instruct client to use sunblock and sunglasses and to wear protective clothing
when in the sun because of the increased risk for severe sunburn while on
these medications.
Instruct the client receiving clozapine that regular monitoring of white blood cell and
absolute neutrophil counts is essential.
Instruct the client to report any signs of sore throat, fever, or malaise.
(See additional guidelines in the section on Issues in Antipsychotic Maintenance
Therapy.)
Instruct client to report immediately any fever, muscle rigidity, diaphoresis, tachycardia.
Assess vital signs regularly, including temperature.
Assess for deteriorating mental status or any other sign of NMS. Presence of any
of these signs requires holding the medication and contacting the prescribing
physician or nurse practitioner immediately, as well as monitoring vital signs
and intake and output.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 73
74 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 13 Comparison of Side Effects Among Antipsychotic Agents
GENERIC ORTHOSTATIC WEIGHT
CLASS (TRADE) NAME EPS SEDATION ANTICHOLINERGIC HYPOTENSION GAIN
TYPICAL ANTIPSYCHOTIC
AGENTS
ATYPICAL ANTIPSYCHOTIC
AGENTS
Key: 1 = Very low; 2 = Low; 3 = Moderate; 4 = High; 5 = Very high.
*Weight gain occurs, but incidence is unknown.
EPN = extrapyramidal symptoms.
SOURCE: Adapted from Black, D.W., & Andreasen, N.C. (2014). Introductory textbook of psychiatry (6th ed.). Washington, DC: American
Psychiatric Publishing; Facts and Comparisons (Firm) & Wolters Kluwer Health. (2014). Drug facts and comparisons. St. Louis, MO: Wolters
Kluwer; Schatzberg, A.F., Cole, J.O., & DeBattista, C. (2010). Manual of clinical psychopharmacology (7th ed.). Washington, DC: American
Psychiatric Publishing.
Chlorpromazine 3 4 3 4 *
Fluphenazine 5 2 2 2
Haloperidol (Haldol) 5 2 2 2
Loxapine 3 2 2 2 *
Perphenazine 4 2 2 2 *
Pimozide (Orap) 4 2 2 2 *
Prochlorperazine 3 2 2 2 *
Thioridazine 2 4 4 4 *
Thiothixene (Navane) 4 2 2 2 *
Trifluoperazine 4 2 2 2 *
Aripiprazole (Abilify) 1 2 1 3 2
Asenapine (Saphris) 1 3 1 3 4
Clozapine (Clozaril) 1 5 5 4 5
Iloperidone (Fanapt) 1 3 2 3 3
Lurasidone (Latuda) 1 3 1 3 3
Olanzapine (Zyprexa) 1 3 2 2 5
Paliperidone (Invega) 1 2 1 3 2
Quetiapine (Seroquel) 1 3 1 3 4
Risperidone (Risperdal) 1 2 1 3 4
Ziprasidone (Geodon) 1 3 1 2 2
be aware of the possible risks and should inform the
physician immediately if pregnancy occurs, is sus-
pected, or is planned.
Issues in Antipsychotic Maintenance Therapy
The nurse must understand the management of side
effects associated with antipsychotic medication in
order to conduct a thorough assessment and mini-
mize risks. In addition, some of these side effects can
be difficult for clients to manage or understand, par-
ticularly when they are struggling with impaired men-
tal status including psychosis and cognitive deficits.
Three of these are discussed below.
Clozaril and the Risk for Agranulocytosis Agranulocytosis
is a potentially fatal blood disorder in which the
client’s white blood cell (WBC) count can drop to
extremely low levels. A baseline WBC count and ab-
solute neutrophil count (ANC) must be taken before
initiation of treatment with clozapine and weekly for
the first 6 months of treatment. Only a 1-week supply
of medication is dispensed at one time. If the counts
remain within the acceptable levels (i.e., WBC count
at least 3,500/mm3 and ANC at least 2,000/mm3)
during the 6-month period, blood counts may be
monitored biweekly and a 2-week supply of medica-
tion may be dispensed. If the counts remain within
the acceptable level for the biweekly period (6 months),
counts may then be monitored every 4 weeks. When
the medication is discontinued, weekly WBC counts
are continued for an additional 4 weeks.
While the benefits of clozapine can be profound,
this medication is typically used when clients fail to
respond to other antipsychotics because of the strict
protocols for adherence. If the client agrees to this
option, the nurse can be a vital link in assuring that
support services, both professional and personal
(such as family members or peers), are engaged to
assist the client with follow-through as needed.
Extrapyramidal Side Effects (See Table 4–13 for differ-
ences between typical and atypical antipsychotics.)
To conduct a thorough assessment, the nurse must be
familiar with the several distinct types of extrapyrami-
dal side effects:
■ Pseudoparkinsonism: Symptoms of pseudoparkin-
sonism—tremor, shuffling gait, drooling, rigidity—
may appear 1 to 5 days following initiation of
antipsychotic medication. This side effect occurs
most often in women, the elderly, and dehydrated
clients.
■ Akinesia: Absence or impairment in voluntary
movement.
■ Akathisia: Continuous restlessness and fidgeting,
or akathisia, occurs most often in women and
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 74
may manifest 50 to 60 days after therapy begins.
Combining second generation antipsychotics has
demonstrated a three-fold risk for developing
akathisia as compared to monotherapy with a
single second generation antipsychotic (Berna
et al., 2015)
■ Dystonia: This side effect—involuntary muscle
spasms in the face, arms, legs, and neck—occurs
most often in men and those younger than age 25.
Dystonia should be treated as an emergency situa-
tion because laryngospasm follows these symptoms
and can be fatal. The physician should be contacted,
and intravenous or intramuscular benztropine me-
sylate (Cogentin) is commonly administered (see
Table 4–13 for a list of antiparkinsonian agents
used to treat extrapyramidal symptoms). Stay
with the client and offer reassurance and support
during this frightening time.
■ Oculogyric crisis: Uncontrolled rolling back of
the eyes, or oculogyric crisis, is a symptom of acute
dystonia and can be mistaken for seizure activity.
As with other symptoms of acute dystonia, this side
effect should be treated as a medical emergency.
■ Tardive dyskinesia: This extrapyramidal side effect
involves bizarre face and tongue movements, stiff
neck, and difficulty swallowing. It may occur with
all classifications but most commonly takes place
with typical antipsychotics. All clients receiving anti –
psychotic therapy for months or years are at risk.
Symptoms are potentially irreversible. Nurses should
immediately report to the prescribing physician or
nurse practitioner earliest signs of tardive dyskinesia
(usually vermiform movements of the tongue) as the
drug is often discontinued, changed to a different
antipsychotic, or the dosage is altered. In 2017 the
FDA approved the first drug for treating tardive
dyskinesia; valbenazine (Ingrezza). It is hoped that
this novel drug will effectively reduce this troubling
condition and its sometimes stigmatizing effects
(FDA, 2017). The involuntary movements associated
with tardive dyskinesia can be measured by the
Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS),
developed in the 1970s by the National Institute of
Mental Health. AIMS aids in early detection of move-
ment disorders and provides means for ongoing
surveillance. AIMS is featured in Box 4–2.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 75
BOX 4–2 Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS)
NAME _________________________ RATER NAME ______________________ DATE ___________________
INSTRUCTIONS: Complete the examination procedure before making ratings. For movement ratings, circle the highest severity
observed. Rate movements that occur upon activation one less than those observed spontaneously. Circle movement as
well as code number that applies.
Code: 0 = None
1 = Minimal, may be normal
2 = Mild
3 = Moderate
4 = Severe
Facial and Oral Movements
Extremity Movements
Trunk Movements
Global Judgments
1. Muscles of Facial Expression
(e.g., movements of forehead, eyebrows, periorbital area, cheeks,
including frowning, blinking, smiling, grimacing)
2. Lips and Perioral Area
(e.g., puckering, pouting, smacking)
3. Jaw
(e.g., biting, clenching, chewing, mouth opening, lateral movement)
4. Tongue
(Rate only increases in movement both in and out of mouth.
NOT inability to sustain movement. Darting in and out of mouth.)
5. Upper (arms, wrists, hands, fingers)
Include choreic movements (i.e., rapid, objectively purposeless,
irregular, spontaneous) and athetoid movements (i.e., slow, irreg-
ular, complex serpentine). Do not include tremor (i.e., repetitive,
regular, rhythmic)
6. Lower (legs, knees, ankles, toes)
(e.g., lateral knee movement, foot tapping, heel dropping, foot
squirming, inversion and eversion of foot)
7. Neck, shoulders, hips
(e.g., rocking, twisting, squirming, pelvic gyrations)
8. Severity of abnormal movements overall
9. Incapacitation due to abnormal movements
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
Continued
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 75
76 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
BOX 4–2 Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS)—cont’d
Dental Status
10. Patient’s awareness of abnormal movements
(Rate only the client’s report)
No awareness
Aware, no distress
Aware, mild distress
Aware, moderate distress
Aware, severe distress
11. Current problems with teeth and/or dentures?
12. Are dentures usually worn?
13. Edentia?
14. Do movements disappear in sleep?
0
1
2
3
4
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
AIMS EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
Either before or after completing the Examination Procedure, observe the client unobtrusively, at rest (e.g., in waiting room).
The chair to be used in this examination should be a hard, firm one without arms.
1. Ask client to remove shoes and socks.
2. Ask client whether there is anything in his/her mouth (i.e., gum, candy, etc.), and if there is, to remove it.
3. Ask client about the current condition of his/her teeth. Ask client if he/she wears dentures. Do teeth or dentures bother
client now?
4. Ask client whether he/she notices any movements in mouth, face, hands, or feet. If yes, ask to describe and to what
extent they currently bother client or interfere with his/her activities.
5. Have client sit in chair with both hands on knees, legs slightly apart, and feet flat on floor. (Look at entire body for move-
ments while in this position.)
6. Ask client to sit with hands hanging unsupported. If male, between legs, if female and wearing a dress, hanging over
knees. (Observe hands and other body areas.)
7. Ask client to open mouth. (Observe tongue at rest within mouth.) Do this twice.
8. Ask client to protrude tongue. (Observe abnormalities of tongue movement.) Do this twice.
9. Ask client to tap thumb with each finger as rapidly as possible for 10 to 15 seconds; separately with right hand, then
with left hand. (Observe facial and leg movements.)
10. Flex and extend client’s left and right arms (one at a time). (Note any rigidity.)
11. Ask client to stand up. (Observe in profile. Observe all body areas again, hips included.)
12. Ask client to extend both arms outstretched in front with palms down. (Observe trunk, legs, and mouth.)
13. Have client walk a few paces, turn, and walk back to chair. (Observe hands and gait.) Do this twice.
INTERPRETATION OF AIMS SCORE
Add client scores and note areas of difficulty.
Score of:
• 0 to 1 = Low risk
• 2 in only ONE of the areas assessed = borderline/observe closely
• 2 in TWO or more of the areas assessed or 3 to 4 in ONLY ONE area = indicative of TD
From U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Available for use in the public domain.
Some extrapyramidal side effects can be life-
threatening, and those that are not can sometimes be
permanent. The abnormal movements in the tongue
and lips are sometimes very visible and severe enough
to interfere with a person’s ability to speak or swallow.
The nurse’s empathic approach in listening to
the client’s wishes with regard to medication
and advocating for exploring other options for
management of symptoms is one way to promote
patient-centered care, an essential nursing competency,
(IOM, 2003) and to promote a recovery model that
empowers the client to make decisions about manage-
ment of the illness. There is evidence that remaining
on antipsychotic medication can reduce the frequency
of hospitalization, so educating the client about this
fact is important in assisting him or her to make an
informed decision about medication treatment.
Hormonal Side Effects These may occur with all clas-
sifications but are more common with typical an-
tipsychotics. Sexual side effects that may accompany
these medications include decreased libido, retro-
grade ejaculation, and gynecomastia in men and
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 76
amenorrhea in women. These side effects can be
troubling for anyone, but for a client struggling with
thought disturbances, they can become the founda-
tion for delusions. A male client with gynecomastia,
for example, might begin to believe that external
forces are taking over his body and turning him into
a woman. An amenorrheic woman may begin to be-
lieve that she has been divinely impregnated. It is
important for the nurse to be clear that these are
side effects of the medication and offer reassurance
that they are reversible. Women with amenorrhea
should be instructed that this side effect does not
indicate cessation of ovulation, so contraception use
should continue as usual. Clients should be encour-
aged to explore alternative treatment if these side
effects are deemed intolerable.
Current Developments in Psychopharmacological
Treatment of Schizophrenia
One of the identified limitations of medication treat-
ments available for schizophrenia is the cognitive
deficits that are core symptoms of this illness, includ-
ing deficits in working memory and long-term mem-
ory, reduced processing speed, limited verbal fluency,
and impaired executive functions. Some atypical
antipsychotics have demonstrated efficacy in lessening
cognitive deficits but do not eliminate residual effects.
A drug recently approved by the FDA, cariprazine
(Vraylor), has demonstrated efficacy in treating
the negative symptoms of schizophrenia, including
flat affect, social withdrawal, and apathy (Harrison,
2015). Although the atypical antipsychotics have
been identified as better than typical antipsychotics
in treating these symptoms, no drugs have yet been
shown to eliminate them. Ongoing evaluation is
needed to determine the effectiveness of cariprazine
in this regard.
Outcome Criteria and Evaluation
The following criteria may be used for evaluating the
effectiveness of therapy with antipsychotic medications.
The client:
■ Has not harmed self or others
■ Has not experienced injury caused by side effects
of lowered seizure threshold or photosensitivity
■ Maintains a WBC count within normal limits
■ Exhibits no symptoms of extrapyramidal side effects,
tardive dyskinesia, neuroleptic malignant syndrome,
or hyperglycemia
■ Maintains weight within normal limits
■ Tolerates activity unaltered by the effects of seda-
tion or weakness
■ Takes medication willingly
■ Verbalizes understanding of medication regimen
and the importance of regular administration
Sedative-Hypnotics
Background Assessment Data
Indications
Sedative-hypnotics are used in the short-term man-
agement of various anxiety states and to treat insom-
nia. Selected agents are used as anticonvulsants
(pentobarbital, phenobarbital) and preoperative
sedatives (pentobarbital, secobarbital) and to reduce
anxiety associated with alcohol withdrawal (chloral
hydrate). (A table of current FDA-approved sedative-
hypnotics, pregnancy categories, half-life, and daily
dosage ranges can be found online at DavisPlus.)
Examples of commonly used sedative-hypnotics are
presented in Table 4–14.
Action
Sedative-hypnotics cause generalized CNS depres-
sion. They may produce tolerance with chronic use
and have the potential for psychological or physical
dependence.
EXCEPTION: Ramelteon (Rozerem) is not a con-
trolled substance. It does not produce tolerance or
physical dependence. Sleep-promoting properties
are the result of ramelteon’s agonist activity on
selective melatonin receptors.
Contraindications and Precautions
Sedative-hypnotics are contraindicated in individuals
with hypersensitivity to the drug or to any drug
within the chemical class; in pregnancy (exceptions
may be made in certain cases based on benefit-to-
risk ratio); during lactation; in severe hepatic, cardiac,
respiratory, or renal disease; and in children younger
than age 15 for flurazepam and those younger than
age 18 for estazolam, quazepam, temazepam, triazo-
lam. Triazolam is contraindicated in concurrent use
with ketoconazole, itraconazole, or nefazodone,
medications that impair the metabolism of triazolam
by cytochrome P4503A (CYP3A). Ramelteon is con-
traindicated in concurrent use with fluvoxamine.
Zolpidem, zaleplon, eszopiclone, and ramelteon
are contraindicated in children. Chloral hydrate is
contraindicated in persons with esophagitis, gastritis,
or peptic ulcer disease and in those with hepatic,
renal, or cardiac impairment.
Caution should be used in administering these
drugs to clients with cardiac, hepatic, renal, or respi-
ratory insufficiency. They should be used with caution
in clients who may be suicidal or who previously may
have been addicted to drugs. Hypnotic use should be
short term. Elderly clients may be more sensitive to
CNS depressant effects, and dosage reduction may be
required. Chloral hydrate should be used with caution
in clients susceptible to acute intermittent porphyria.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 77
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 77
Interactions
Barbiturates The effects of barbiturates are increased
with concomitant use of alcohol, other CNS depres-
sants, MAOIs, or valproic acid. The effects of barbi-
turates may be decreased with rifampin. Possible
decreased effects of the following drugs may occur
when used concomitantly with barbiturates: anticoag-
ulants, beta blockers, carbamazepine, clonazepam,
oral contraceptives, corticosteroids, digitoxin, dox-
orubicin, doxycycline, felodipine, fenoprofen, grise-
ofulvin, metronidazole, phenylbutazone, quinidine,
theophylline, or verapamil. Concomitant use with
methoxyflurane may enhance renal toxicity.
Benzodiazepines The effects of the benzodiazepine
hypnotics are increased with concomitant use of alco-
hol or other CNS depressants, cimetidine, oral con-
traceptives, disulfiram, isoniazid, or probenecid. The
effects of the benzodiazepine hypnotics are decreased
with concomitant use of rifampin, theophylline, car-
bamazepine, or St. John’s wort and with cigarette
smoking. The effects of digoxin or phenytoin are in-
creased when used concomitantly with benzodi-
azepines. Bioavailability of triazolam is increased with
concurrent use of macrolides.
Eszopiclone Additive effects of eszopiclone occur
with alcohol or other CNS depressants. Decreased
effects of eszopiclone occur with CYP3A4 inducers
(e.g., rifampin, phenytoin, carbamazepine, phenobar-
bital), with lorazepam, or following a high-fat or heavy
meal. Increased effects of eszopiclone occur with
CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole, clarithromycin,
nefazodone, ritonavir). There are decreased effects
of lorazepam with concomitant use.
Zaleplon Additive effects of zaleplon occur with alco-
hol or other CNS depressants. Decreased effects of
zaleplon occur with CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., rifampin,
phenytoin, carbamazepine, phenobarbital) or follow-
ing a high-fat or heavy meal. There are increased
effects of zaleplon with cimetidine.
Zolpidem Increased effects of zolpidem occur with
alcohol or other CNS depressants, azole antifungals,
ritonavir, or SSRIs. Decreased effects of zolpidem
occur with flumazenil, rifampin, and with food. There
is a risk of life-threatening cardiac arrhythmias with
concomitant use of amiodarone.
Ramelteon Increased effects of ramelteon occur with
alcohol, ketoconazole (and other CYP3A4 inhibitors),
or fluvoxamine (and other CYP1A2 inhibitors).
Decreased effects of ramelteon occur with rifampin
(and other CYP3A4 inducers) and following a heavy or
high-fat meal.
Diagnosis
The following nursing diagnoses may be considered
for clients receiving therapy with sedative hypnotics:
■ Risk for injury related to abrupt withdrawal from
long-term use or decreased mental alertness caused
by residual sedation
78 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
TA B L E 4 – 14 Sedative-Hypnotic Agents
PREGNANCY
CONTROLLED CATEGORIES/ DAILY DOSAGE
CHEMICAL CLASS GENERIC (TRADE) NAME CATEGORIES HALF-LIFE (hr) RANGE (mg)
Barbiturates Amobarbital CII D/16–40 60–200
Butabarbital (Butisol) CIII D/66–140 45–120
Pentobarbital (Nembutal) CII D/15–50 150–200
Phenobarbital (Luminal; Solfoton) CIV D/53–118 30–200
Secobarbital (Seconal) CII D/15–40 100 (hypnotic) 200–300
(preoperative sedation)
Benzodiazepines Estazolam CIV X/8–28 1–2
Flurazepam CIV X/2–3 (active 15–30
metabolite: 47–100)
Quazepam (Doral) CIV X/39 (active 7.5–15 mg
metabolite: 73)
Temazepam (Restoril) CIV X/9–15 15–30 mg
Triazolam (Halcion) CIV X/1.5–5.5 0.125–0.5
Miscellaneous Chloral hydrate CIV C/7–10 500–1,000
Eszopiclone (Lunesta) CIV C/6 1–3
Ramelteon (Rozerem) C/1–2.6 8
Zaleplon (Sonata) CIV C/1 5–20
Zolpidem (Ambien) CIV C/2–3 5–10 (immediate release),
12.5 (extended release)
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 78
■ Disturbed sleep pattern and/or insomnia related
to situational crises, physical condition, or severe
level of anxiety
■ Risk for activity intolerance related to side effects
of lethargy, drowsiness, and dizziness
■ Risk for acute confusion related to action of the
medication on the CNS
Safety Issues in Planning and Implementing Care
Refer to the earlier discussion of safety issues in the
section “Antianxiety Agents.” In addition to the side
effects listed in that section, abnormal thinking and
behavioral changes, including aggressiveness, hallu-
cinations, and suicidal ideation, have also been noted
in some individuals taking sedative-hypnotics. Certain
complex behaviors, such as sleep-driving, preparing
and eating food, and making phone calls, with amne-
sia for the behavior, have occurred. Although a direct
correlation to the behavior with the use of sedative-
hypnotics cannot be made, the emergence of any new
behavioral sign or symptom of concern requires care-
ful and immediate evaluation.
Outcome Criteria and Evaluation
The following criteria may be used for evaluating
the effectiveness of therapy with sedative-hypnotic
medications.
The client:
■ Demonstrates a reduction in anxiety, tension, and
restless activity
■ Falls asleep within 30 minutes of taking the med-
ication and remains asleep for 6 to 8 hours without
interruption
■ Is able to participate in usual activities without
residual sedation
■ Experiences no physical injury
■ Exhibits no evidence of confusion
■ Verbalizes understanding of taking the medication
on a short-term basis
■ Verbalizes understanding of potential for devel-
opment of tolerance and dependence with long-
term use
Agents for Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity
Disorder (ADHD)
Background Assessment Data
Indications
The medications in this section are used for ADHD in
children and adults. Amphetamines are also used in the
treatment of narcolepsy and exogenous obesity. Bupro-
pion is used in the treatment of major depression and
for smoking cessation (Zyban only). Clonidine and
guanfacine are used to treat hypertension. (A table of
current FDA-approved agents for ADHD, pregnancy
categories, half-life, and daily dosage ranges can be
found online at DavisPlus and in Chapter 33, Children
and Adolescents.)
Action
CNS stimulants increase levels of neurotransmitters
(probably norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin)
in the CNS. They produce CNS and respiratory stim-
ulation, dilated pupils, increased motor activity and
mental alertness, diminished sense of fatigue, and
brighter spirits. The CNS stimulants discussed in this
section include dextroamphetamine sulfate, metham-
phetamine, lisdexamfetamine, amphetamine mix-
tures, methylphenidate, and dexmethylphenidate.
Action in the treatment of ADHD is unclear. However,
recent research indicates that their effectiveness in the
treatment of hyperactivity disorders is based on the
activation of dopamine D4 receptors in the basal gan-
glia and thalamus, which depress rather than enhance
motor activity (Erlij et al., 2012).
Atomoxetine inhibits the reuptake of norepineph-
rine, and bupropion blocks the neuronal uptake of
serotonin, norepinephrine, and dopamine. Clonidine
and guanfacine stimulate central alpha-adrenergic re-
ceptors in the brain, resulting in reduced sympathetic
outflow from the CNS. The exact mechanism by which
these nonstimulant drugs produce the therapeutic
effect in ADHD is unclear.
Contraindications and Precautions
CNS stimulants are contraindicated in individuals
with hypersensitivity to sympathomimetic amines.
They should not be used in patients with advanced
arteriosclerosis, cardiovascular disease, hypertension,
hyperthyroidism, glaucoma, or agitated or hyperex-
citability states; in clients with a history of drug abuse;
during or within 14 days of receiving therapy with
MAOIs; in children younger than age 3; or in preg-
nancy and lactation. Atomoxetine and bupropion are
contraindicated in clients with hypersensitivity to the
drugs or their components, in lactation, and in con-
comitant use with or within 2 weeks of using MAOIs.
Atomoxetine is contraindicated in clients with narrow-
angle glaucoma. Bupropion is contraindicated in
individuals with known or suspected seizure disorder,
in the acute phase of MI, and in clients with bulimia
or anorexia nervosa. Alpha agonists are contraindi-
cated in clients with known hypersensitivity to the
drugs.
Caution is advised in using CNS stimulants in chil-
dren with psychosis; in Tourette’s disorder; in clients
with anorexia or insomnia; in elderly, debilitated, or
asthenic clients; and in clients with a history of suicidal
or homicidal tendencies. Prolonged use may result in
tolerance and physical or psychological dependence.
Use atomoxetine and bupropion cautiously in clients
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 79
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 79
with urinary retention, hypertension, or hepatic,
renal, or cardiovascular disease; in suicidal clients; dur-
ing pregnancy; and in elderly and debilitated clients.
Alpha agonists should be used with caution in clients
with coronary insufficiency, recent MI, or cerebrovas-
cular disease; in chronic renal or hepatic failure; in
the elderly; and in pregnancy and lactation.
Interactions
CNS Stimulants (Amphetamines) Effects of ampheta-
mines are increased with furazolidone or urinary
alkalinizers. Hypertensive crisis may occur with con-
comitant use of (and up to several weeks after discon-
tinuing) MAOIs. Increased risk of serotonin syndrome
occurs with coadministration of SSRIs. Decreased
effects of amphetamines occur with urinary acidifiers,
and decreased hypotensive effects of guanethidine
occur with amphetamines.
Dexmethylphenidate and Methylphenidate Effects of
antihypertensive agents and pressor agents (e.g.,
dopamine, epinephrine, phenylephrine) are de-
creased with concomitant use of the methylphenidates.
Effects of coumarin anticoagulants, anticonvulsants
(e.g., phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone), tricyclic
antidepressants, and SSRIs are increased with the
methylphenidates. Hypertensive crisis may occur with
coadministration of MAOIs.
Atomoxetine Effects of atomoxetine are increased
with concomitant use of CYP2D6 inhibitors (e.g.,
paroxetine, fluoxetine, quinidine). Potentially fatal
reactions may occur with concurrent use of (or within
2 weeks of discontinuation of) MAOIs. Risk of cardio-
vascular effects is increased with concomitant use of
albuterol or vasopressors.
Bupropion Effects of bupropion are increased with aman-
tadine, levodopa, or ritonavir. Effects of bupropion
are decreased with carbamazepine. There is increased
risk of acute toxicity with MAOIs. Increased risk of
hypertension may occur with nicotine replacement
agents, and adverse neuropsychiatric events may occur
with alcohol. Increased anticoagulant effects of warfarin
and increased effects of drugs metabolized by CYP2D6
(e.g., nortriptyline, imipramine, desipramine, paroxe-
tine, fluoxetine, sertraline, haloperidol, risperidone,
thioridazine, metoprolol, propafenone, and flecainide)
occur with concomitant use.
Alpha Agonists Synergistic pharmacologic and toxic
effects, possibly causing atrioventricular block, brady-
cardia, and severe hypotension, may occur with
concomitant use of calcium channel blockers or
beta-blockers. Additive sedation occurs with CNS
depressants, including alcohol, antihistamines, opi-
oid analgesics, and sedative-hypnotics. Effects of
clonidine may be decreased with concomitant use
of tricyclic antidepressants and prazosin. Decreased
effects of levodopa may occur with clonidine, and
effects of guanfacine are decreased with barbitu-
rates or phenytoin.
Diagnosis
The following nursing diagnoses may be considered
for clients receiving therapy with agents for ADHD:
■ Risk for injury related to overstimulation and
hyperactivity (CNS stimulants) or seizures (possible
side effect of bupropion)
■ Risk for suicide secondary to major depression
related to abrupt withdrawal after extended use
(CNS stimulants)
■ Risk for suicide (children and adolescents) as a
side effect of atomoxetine and bupropion (black-
box warning)
■ Imbalanced nutrition, less than body requirements,
related to side effects of anorexia and weight loss
(CNS stimulants)
■ Insomnia related to side effects of overstimulation
■ Nausea related to side effects of atomoxetine or
bupropion
■ Pain related to side effect of abdominal pain (atom-
oxetine, bupropion) or headache (all agents)
■ Risk for activity intolerance related to side effects
of sedation and dizziness with atomoxetine or
bupropion
Planning and Implementation
The plan of care should include monitoring for the
following side effects from agents for ADHD. Nursing
implications related to each side effect are designated
by an asterisk (*).
■ Overstimulation, restlessness, insomnia (CNS stim-
ulants)
*Assess mental status for changes in mood, level of
activity, degree of stimulation, and aggressiveness.
*Ensure that the client is protected from injury.
*Keep stimuli low and environment as quiet as pos-
sible to discourage overstimulation.
*To prevent insomnia, administer the last dose
at least 6 hours before bedtime. Administer
sustained-release forms in the morning.
■ Palpitations, tachycardia (CNS stimulants, atomox-
etine, bupropion, clonidine), or bradycardia (cloni-
dine, guanfacine)
*Monitor and record vital signs at regular inter-
vals (two or three times a day) throughout ther-
apy. Report significant changes to the physician
immediately.
NOTE: The FDA has issued warnings associ-
ated with CNS stimulants and atomoxetine of
the risk for sudden death in patients who have
80 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 80
cardiovascular disease. A careful personal and
family history of heart disease, heart defects, or
hypertension should be obtained before these
medications are prescribed. Careful monitor-
ing of cardiovascular function during adminis-
tration must be ongoing.
■ Anorexia, weight loss (CNS stimulants, atomoxe-
tine, bupropion)
*To reduce anorexia, the medication may be
administered immediately after meals.
*The client should be weighed regularly (at least
weekly) when receiving therapy with CNS stimu-
lants, atomoxetine, or bupropion because of the
potential for anorexia and weight loss and tempo-
rary interruption of growth and development.
■ Tolerance, physical and psychological dependence
(CNS stimulants)
*In children with ADHD, a drug “holiday” should
be attempted periodically under direction of the
physician to determine the effectiveness of the
medication and the need for continuation.
*The drug should not be withdrawn abruptly.
To do so could initiate a syndrome of symptoms
with nausea, vomiting, abdominal cramping,
headache, fatigue, weakness, mental depression,
suicidal ideation, increased dreaming, and psy-
chotic behavior.
■ Nausea and vomiting (atomoxetine and bupropion)
*Recommend taking medication with food to min-
imize gastrointestinal upset.
■ Constipation (atomoxetine, bupropion, clonidine,
guanfacine)
*Recommend increasing fiber and fluid in diet if
not contraindicated.
■ Dry mouth (clonidine and guanfacine)
*Offer the client sugarless candy, ice, frequent sips
of water.
*Strict oral hygiene is very important.
■ Sedation (clonidine and guanfacine)
*Warn the client that this effect is increased by con-
comitant use of alcohol and other CNS drugs.
*Warn the client to refrain from driving or per-
forming hazardous tasks until response has been
established.
■ Potential for seizures (bupropion)
*Protect the client from injury if seizure should
occur.
*Instruct family and significant others of clients on
bupropion therapy how to protect the client dur-
ing a seizure if one should occur.
*Ensure that doses of the immediate-release med-
ication are administered at least 4 to 6 hours apart
and doses of the sustained-release medication at
least 8 hours apart.
■ Severe liver damage (with atomoxetine)
*Monitor for the following side effects and report
to physician immediately: itching, dark urine,
right upper quadrant pain, yellow skin or eyes,
sore throat, fever, malaise.
■ New or worsened psychiatric symptoms (with CNS
stimulants and atomoxetine)
*Monitor for psychotic symptoms (e.g., hearing
voices, paranoid behaviors, delusions).
*Monitor for manic symptoms, including aggres-
sive and hostile behaviors.
■ Rebound syndrome (with clonidine and guanfacine)
*The client should be instructed not to discon-
tinue therapy abruptly. To do so may result in
symptoms of nervousness, agitation, headache,
tremor, and a rapid rise in blood pressure. In
addition, sudden withdrawal from stimulants may
increase the risk for depression and suicide.
Dosage should be tapered gradually under the
supervision of the physician.
Client and Family Education
Instruct the client and/or family that the client should:
■ Use caution when driving or operating dangerous
machinery. Drowsiness, dizziness, and blurred
vision can occur.
■ Not stop taking CNS stimulants abruptly. To do so
could produce serious withdrawal symptoms.
■ Avoid taking CNS stimulants late in the day to
prevent insomnia. Take medication no later than
6 hours before bedtime.
■ Not take other medications (including over-the-
counter drugs) without physician’s approval. Many
medications contain substances that, in combina-
tion with agents for ADHD, can be harmful.
■ Monitor blood sugar two or three times a day or as
instructed by the physician if the client is diabetic.
Be aware of the need for possible alteration in
insulin requirements because of changes in food
intake, weight, and activity.
■ Avoid consumption of large amounts of caffeinated
products (coffee, tea, colas, chocolate), as they may
enhance the CNS stimulant effect.
■ Notify physician if restlessness, insomnia, anorexia,
or dry mouth becomes severe or if rapid, pounding
heartbeat becomes evident.
■ Report any of the following side effects to the physi-
cian immediately: shortness of breath, chest pain,
jaw/left arm pain, fainting, seizures, sudden vision
changes, weakness on one side of the body, slurred
speech, confusion, itching, dark urine, right-upper
quadrant pain, yellow skin or eyes, sore throat,
fever, malaise, increased hyperactivity, believing
things that are not true, or hearing voices.
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 81
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 81
■ Be aware of possible risks of taking agents for
ADHD during pregnancy. Safe use during preg-
nancy and lactation has not been established. In-
form the physician immediately if pregnancy is
suspected or planned.
■ Be aware of potential side effects of agents for
ADHD. Refer to written materials furnished by
health-care providers for safe self-administration.
■ Carry a card or other identification at all times
describing medications being taken.
Outcome Criteria and Evaluation
The following criteria may be used for evaluating the
effectiveness of therapy with agents for ADHD.
The client:
■ Does not exhibit excessive hyperactivity
■ Has not experienced injury
■ Is maintaining expected parameters of growth and
development
■ Verbalizes understanding of safe self-administration
and the importance of not withdrawing medication
abruptly
Summary and Key Points
■ Psychotropic medications are intended to be
used as adjunctive therapy to individual or group
psychotherapy.
■ Antianxiety agents are used in the treatment of anx-
iety disorders and to alleviate acute anxiety symp-
toms. Benzodiazepines are the most commonly
used group. They are CNS depressants and have
a potential for physical and psychological depen –
dence. They should not be discontinued abruptly
following long-term use because they can produce
a life-threatening withdrawal syndrome. The most
common side effects are drowsiness, confusion,
and lethargy.
■ Antidepressants elevate mood and alleviate other
symptoms associated with moderate-to-severe de-
pression. These drugs work to increase the concen-
tration of norepinephrine and serotonin in the
body.
■ The tricyclics and related drugs accomplish their
effect by blocking the reuptake of norepinephrine
by the neurons.
■ Another group of antidepressants inhibits MAO,
an enzyme that is known to inactivate norepineph-
rine and serotonin. They are called MAOIs.
■ A third category of drugs blocks neuronal reuptake
of serotonin and has minimal or no effect on reup-
take of norepinephrine or dopamine. SSRIs.
■ Antidepressant medications may take up to 2 weeks
before desired effects are noticed and may take up
to 4 weeks to produce full therapeutic benefits.
The most common side effects are anticholinergic
effects, sedation, and orthostatic hypotension. They
can also reduce the seizure threshold. MAOIs can
cause hypertensive crisis if products containing tyra-
mine are consumed while taking these medications.
■ Lithium carbonate is widely used as a mood-stabilizing
agent. Its mechanism of action is not fully under-
stood, but it is thought to enhance the reuptake of
norepinephrine and serotonin in the brain, thereby
lowering the levels in the body, resulting in decreased
hyperactivity. The most common side effects are dry
mouth, gastrointestinal upset, polyuria, and weight
gain.
■ There is a very narrow margin between the thera-
peutic and toxic levels of lithium. Serum levels
must be drawn regularly to monitor for toxicity.
Symptoms of lithium toxicity begin to appear at
serum levels of approximately 1.5 mEq/L. If left
untreated, lithium toxicity can be life threatening.
■ Several other medications are used as mood-
stabilizing agents. Two groups, anticonvulsants
(carbamazepine, clonazepam, valproic acid, lam-
otrigine, oxcarbazepine, and topiramate) and the
calcium channel blocker verapamil, have been
used with some effectiveness. Their action in the
treatment of bipolar mania is not well understood.
■ Most recently, several atypical antipsychotic med-
ications have been used with success in the treat-
ment of bipolar mania. These include olanzapine,
aripiprazole, quetiapine, risperidone, asenapine,
and ziprasidone. The phenothiazine chlorpro-
mazine has also been used effectively. The action
of antipsychotics in the treatment of bipolar mania
is not understood.
■ Antipsychotic drugs are used in the treatment of acute
and chronic psychoses. The action of phenothi –
azines is caused by blocking postsynaptic dopamine
receptors in the basal ganglia. Their most common
side effects include anticholinergic effects, seda-
tion, weight gain, reduction in seizure threshold,
photosensitivity, and extrapyramidal symptoms. A
newer generation of antipsychotic medications,
which includes clozapine, risperidone, paliperi-
done, olanzapine, quetiapine, aripiprazole, asena –
pine, iloperidone, lurasidone, and ziprasidone, may
have an effect on dopamine, serotonin, and other
neurotransmitters. They show promise of greater
efficacy with fewer side effects.
■ Antiparkinsonian agents are used to counteract the ex-
trapyramidal symptoms associated with antipsychotic
medications. Antiparkinsonian drugs work to restore
the natural balance of acetylcholine and dopamine
in the brain. The most common side effects of these
drugs are the anticholinergic effects. They may also
cause sedation and orthostatic hypotension.
82 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 82
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 83
■ Sedative-hypnotics are used in the management of
anxiety states and to treat insomnia. These CNS
depressants (except ramelteon) have the potential
for physical and psychological dependence. They
are indicated for short-term use only. Side effects and
nursing implications are similar to those described
for antianxiety medications.
■ Several medications have been designated as agents
for treatment of ADHD. These include CNS stimulants,
which have the potential for physical and psycholog-
ical dependence. Tolerance develops quickly with
CNS stimulants, and they should not be withdrawn
abruptly because they can produce serious with-
drawal symptoms. The most common side effects
are restlessness, anorexia, and insomnia. Other
medications that have shown to be effective with
ADHD include atomoxetine, bupropion, and the
�-adrenergic agonists clonidine and guanfacine.
Their mechanism of action in the treatment of
ADHD is not clear.
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. How do antianxiety medications, such as benzodiazepines, produce a calming effect?
a. Depressing the CNS
b. Decreasing levels of norepinephrine and serotonin in the brain
c. Decreasing levels of dopamine in the brain
d. Inhibiting production of the enzyme MAO
2. Tam has a new diagnosis of panic disorder. Dr. S has written a prn order for alprazolam (Xanax)
for when Tam is feeling anxious. She says to the nurse, “Dr. S prescribed buspirone for my friend’s
anxiety. Why did he order something different for me?” The nurse’s answer is based on which of the
following?
a. Buspirone is not an antianxiety medication.
b. Alprazolam and buspirone are essentially the same medication, so either one is appropriate.
c. Buspirone has delayed onset of action and cannot be used on a prn basis.
d. Alprazolam is the only medication that really works for panic disorder.
3. Education for the client who is taking MAOIs should include which of the following?
a. Fluid and sodium replacement when appropriate, frequent drug blood levels, signs and symptoms
of toxicity
b. Lifetime of continuous use, possible tardive dyskinesia, advantages of an injection every 2 to 4 weeks
c. Short-term use, possible tolerance to beneficial effects, careful tapering of the drug at end of
treatment
d. Tyramine-restricted diet, prohibitive concurrent use of over-the-counter medications without physi-
cian notification
4. There is a very narrow margin between the therapeutic and toxic levels of lithium carbonate. Symptoms
of toxicity are most likely to appear if the serum levels exceed:
a. 0.15 mEq/L
b. 1.5 mEq/L
c. 15.0 mEq/L
d. 150 mEq/L
5. Initial symptoms of lithium toxicity include:
a. Constipation, dry mouth
b. Dizziness, thirst
c. Vomiting, diarrhea
d. Anuria, arrhythmias
Continued
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 83
84 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
6. Antipsychotic medications are thought to decrease psychotic symptoms by:
a. Blocking reuptake of norepinephrine and serotonin
b. Blocking the action of dopamine in the brain
c. Inhibiting production of the enzyme MAO
d. Depressing the CNS
7. Part of the nurse’s continual assessment of the client taking antipsychotic medications is to observe
for extrapyramidal symptoms. Which of the following are examples of extrapyramidal symptoms?
a. Muscular weakness, rigidity, tremors, facial spasms
b. Dry mouth, blurred vision, urinary retention, orthostatic hypotension
c. Amenorrhea, gynecomastia, retrograde ejaculation
d. Elevated blood pressure, severe occipital headache, stiff neck
8. If the foregoing extrapyramidal symptoms should occur, which of the following would be a priority
nursing intervention?
a. Notify the physician immediately.
b. Administer prn trihexyphenidyl (Artane).
c. Withhold the next dose of antipsychotic medication.
d. Explain to the client that these symptoms are only temporary and will disappear shortly.
9. A concern with children on long-term therapy with CNS stimulants for ADHD is:
a. Addiction
b. Weight gain
c. Substance abuse
d. Growth suppression
10. Doses of bupropion should be administered at least 4 to 6 hours apart and never doubled when a
dose is missed in order to prevent:
a. Orthostatic hypotension
b. Seizures
c. Hypertensive crisis
d. Extrapyramidal symptoms
References
Berna, F., Misdrahi, D., Boyer, L., Aouizerate, B., Brunel, L.,
Capdevielle, D., Liorca, P.M. (2015). Prevalence and risk
factors in a community dwelling sample of patients with
Schizophrenia. Results from the FACE-SZ dataset.
Schizophrenia Research, 169(1-3), 255-261.
Black, D.W., & Andreasen, N.C. (2014). Introductory textbook of
psychiatry (6th ed.). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric
Publishing.
Brust, T.F., Hayes, M.P., Roman, D.L., & Watts, V.J. (2015).
New functional activity of aripiprazole revealed: Robust
antagonism of D2 dopamine receptor-stimulated Gβγ
signaling. Biochemical Pharmacology, 93(1), 85-91.
doi:10.1016/j.bcp.2014.10.014
Cooper, B.E., & Sejnowski, C.A. (2013). Serotonin syndrome:
Recognition and treatment. AACN Advanced Critical Care,
24(1), 15-20. doi:10.1097/NCI.0b013e31827eecc6
Erlij, D., Acosta-Garcia, J., Rojas-Marquez, M., Gonzalez-
Hernandez, B., Escartin-Perez, E., Aceves, J., & Floran, B.
(2012). Dopamine D4 receptor stimulation in GABAergic
projections of the globus pallidus to the reticular thalamic
nucleus and the substantia nigra reticulata of the rat
decreases locomotor activity. Neuropharmacology, 62(2),
1111-1118. doi:10.1016/j.neuropharm.2011.11.001
Facts and Comparisons (Firm) & Wolters Kluwer Health.
(2014). Drug facts and comparisons. St. Louis, MO:
Wolters Kluwer.
FDA (Food and Drug Administration). (2017). FDA approves first
drug to treat tardive dyskinesia. Retrieved from https://www.
fda.gov/NewsEvents/Newsroom/PressAnnouncements/
ucm552418.htm
FDA (U.S. Food and Drug Administration). (2008). FDA requires
warnings about risk of suicidal thoughts and behavior for
antiepileptic medications. Retrieved from https://www.fda
.gov/Drugs/DrugSafety/PostmarketDrugSafetyInformation
forPatientsandProviders/ucm100197.htm
Fournier, J.C., DeRubeis, R.J., Hollon, S.D., Dimidjian, S.,
Amsterdam, J.D., Shelton, R.C., & Fawcett, J. (2010).
Antidepressant drug effects and depression severity: A
patient-level meta-analysis. Journal of the American Medical
Association, 303(1), 47-53. doi:10.1001/jama.2009.1943
Harrison, P. (2015). Novel drug first to treat negative symptoms
in schizophrenia. Retrieved from www.medscape.com/
viewarticle/850701
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 84
C H A P T E R 4 ■ Psychopharmacology 85
Institute of Medicine. (2003). Health professions education: A bridge
to quality. Washington, DC: Author.
Jacob, S., & Spinier, S.A. (2006). Hyponatremia associated with
selective serotonin-inhibitors in older adults. Annals of
Pharmacotherapy, 40(9), 1618-1622. doi:10.1345/aph.1G293
Lenze, E.J., Mulsant, B.H., Blumberger, D.M., Karp, J.F., Newcomer,
J.W., Anderson, S.J., . . . Reynolds, C.F. (2015). Efficacy, safety,
and tolerability of augmentation pharmacotherapy with
aripiprazole for treatment resistant depression in late life:
A randomized placebo-controlled study. Lancet, 386(10011),
2404-2412. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/So140-6736(15)
00308-6
National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH). (2006). Questions
and answers about the NIMH sequenced treatment alternatives to
relieve depression (STAR*D) study—all medication levels. Retrieved
from https://www.nimh.nih.gov/funding/clinical-research/
practical/stard/allmedicationlevels.shtml
New York State Office of Mental Health. (2006). An explanation
of Kendra’s law. Retrieved from https://www.omh.ny.gov/
omhweb/Kendra_web/Ksummary.htm
Purnell, L.D. (2014). Guide to culturally competent health care
(3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Ramnarine, M., & Ahmed, D. (2015). Anticholinergic toxicity.
Retrieved from http://emedicine.medscape.com/article/
812644-overview
Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Synopsis of psychiatry:
Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Sage, D.L. (Producer). (1984). The brain: Madness [television
broadcast]. Washington, DC: Public Broadcasting Company.
Schatzberg, A.F., Cole, J.O., & DeBattista, C. (2010). Manual
of clinical psychopharmacology (7th ed.). Washington, DC:
American Psychiatric Publishing.
Shorter, E. (2009). The history of lithium therapy. Bipolar Disorders,
11(Suppl. 2), 4-9. doi:10.1111/j.1399-5618.2009.00706.x
Steinberg, M., & Lyketsos, C.G. (2012). Atypical antipsychotic
use in patients with dementia: Managing safety concerns.
American Journal of Psychiatry, 169(9), 900-906. doi:10.1176/
appi.aip.2012.12030342
Tartakovsky, M. (2016). Depression: New medications on the horizon.
Retrieved from https://psychcentral.com/lib/depression-
new-medications-on-the-horizon/
Vallerand, A.H., Sanoski, C.A., & Deglin, J.H. (2016). Davis drug
guide for nurses (15th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
6054_Ch04_054-085 11/09/17 10:10 AM Page 85
5 Ethical and Legal Issues
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Ethical Considerations
Legal Considerations
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
advocacy
assault
autonomy
battery
beneficence
bioethics
Christian ethics
civil law
common law
criminal law
defamation of character
ethical dilemma
ethical egoism
ethics
false imprisonment
informed consent
justice
Kantianism
libel
malpractice
moral behavior
natural law theory
negligence
nonmaleficence
privileged communication
right
slander
statutory law
tort
utilitarianism
values
values clarification
veracity
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Differentiate among ethics, morals, values,
and rights.
2. Discuss ethical theories, including utilitarian-
ism, Kantianism, Christian ethics, natural law
theories, and ethical egoism.
3. Define ethical dilemma.
4. Discuss the ethical principles of autonomy,
beneficence, nonmaleficence, justice, and
veracity.
5. Use an ethical decision-making model to
make an ethical decision.
6. Describe ethical issues relevant to psychiatric-
mental health nursing.
7. Define statutory law and common law.
8. Differentiate between civil law and criminal law.
9. Discuss legal issues relevant to psychiatric-
mental health nursing.
10. Differentiate between malpractice and
negligence.
11. Identify behaviors relevant to the psychiatric-
mental health setting for which specific
malpractice action could be taken.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. Malpractice and negligence are examples of
what kind of law?
2. What charges may be brought against a
nurse for confining a client against his or her
wishes (outside of an emergency situation)?
3. Which ethical theory espouses that what is
right and good is what is best for the individ-
ual making the decision?
4. Name the three major elements of informed
consent.
CORE CONCEPTS
Bioethics
Ethics
Moral Behavior
Right
Values
Values Clarification
86
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 86
Nurses are constantly faced with the challenge of
making difficult decisions regarding good and evil
or life and death. Complex situations frequently
arise in caring for individuals with mental illness,
and nurses are held to the highest level of legal and
ethical accountability in their professional practice.
This chapter presents basic ethical and legal con-
cepts and their relationship to psychiatric-mental
health nursing. A discussion of ethical theory is pre-
sented as a foundation upon which ethical decisions
may be made. The American Nurses Association
(ANA) (2015) has established a code of ethics for
nurses to use as a framework within which to make
ethical choices and decisions (Box 5–1). These re-
cently revised provisions and interpretive guidelines
have been expanded to address some of the com-
plexities of the current health-care environment and
include ethical principles regarding the nurse’s duty
not only to the patient but also to himself or herself
and all people with whom he or she interacts. All
relationships should be conducted within a culture
of respect and civility.
The ANA Code of Ethics interpretive guidelines
include a discussion of the importance of team-
work and collaboration, which is consistent with
one of the recommendations of the Institute of Medi-
cine (IOM) (2003) for improving the future of health
care and has become one of the Quality and Safety
in Education for Nurses (QSEN) standards.
The ANA, in cooperation with the American Psy-
chiatric Nurses Association and the International
Society of Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurses (2014),
has published a scope and standards of practice
manual specifically for psychiatric-mental health
nursing. It maintains consistency with the ANA code
of ethics and applies those provisions to psychiatric-
mental health nursing issues. Knowledge about the
Code of Ethics for Nurses (ANA, 2015) and Psychiatric-
Mental Health Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice
(ANA et al., 2014) are essential for guiding practice
because they clarify the accepted expectations of
the nurse in this field.
Because legislation determines what is right or good
within a society, legal issues pertaining to psychiatric-
mental health nursing are also discussed in this chap-
ter. Definitions are presented along with rights of
psychiatric clients of which nurses must be aware.
Nursing competency and client care accountability
are compromised when the nurse has inadequate
knowledge about the laws that regulate the practice
of nursing.
Knowledge of the legal and ethical concepts pre-
sented in this chapter will enhance the quality of care
the nurse provides in his or her psychiatric-mental
health nursing practice and will also protect the nurse
within the parameters of legal accountability. The
right to practice nursing carries with it the responsi-
bility to maintain a specific level of competency and
to practice in accordance with certain ethical and
legal standards of care.
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 87
BOX 5–1 American Nurses Association Code
of Ethics for Nurses
1. The nurse practices with compassion and respect for
the inherent dignity, worth, and unique attributes of
every person.
2. The nurse’s primary commitment is to the patient
whether an individual, family, group, community, or
population.
3. The nurse promotes, advocates for, and strives to protect
the health, safety, and rights of the patient.
4. The nurse has authority, accountability, and responsibility
for nursing practice; makes decisions; and takes action
consistent with the obligation to promote health and to
provide optimal care.
5. The nurse owes the same duties to self as to others, in-
cluding the responsibility to promote health and safety,
preserve wholeness of character and integrity, maintain
competence, and continue personal and professional
growth.
6. The nurse, through individual and collective effort, es-
tablishes, maintains, and improves the ethical environ-
ment of the work setting and conditions of employment
that are conducive to safe, quality health care.
7. The nurse, in all roles and settings, advances the profes-
sion through research and scholarly inquiry, professional
standards development, and the generation of both
nursing and health policy.
8. The nurse collaborates with other health professionals
and the public to protect human rights, promote health
diplomacy, and reduce health disparities.
9. The profession of nursing, collectively through its pro-
fessional organizations, must articulate nursing values,
maintain the integrity of the profession and integrate
principles of social justice into nursing and health
policy.
Reprinted with permission from American Nurses Association (ANA). (2015).
Code of Ethics for Nurses with Interpretive Statements. Silver Spring, MD:
ANA. © 2015.
CORE CONCEPTS
Ethics is a branch of philosophy that deals with sys-
tematic approaches to distinguishing right from wrong
behavior (Butts & Rich, 2016). Bioethics is the term
applied to these principles when they refer to concepts
within the scope of medicine, nursing, and allied
health.
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 87
Ethical Considerations
Theoretical Perspectives
An ethical theory is a moral principle or a set of moral
principles that can be used in assessing what is
morally right or morally wrong (Ellis & Hartley,
2012). These principles provide frameworks for ethi-
cal decision-making.
Utilitarianism
The basis of utilitarianism is the “greatest-happiness
principle.” This principle holds that actions are right
to the degree that they tend to promote happiness
and are wrong as they tend to produce the reverse of
happiness. Thus, the good is happiness and the right
is that which promotes the good. Conversely, the
wrongness of an action is determined by its tendency
to bring about unhappiness. An ethical decision
based on the utilitarian view looks at the end results
of the decision. Action is taken on the basis of the end
results that will produce the most good (happiness)
for the most people.
Kantianism
Named for philosopher Immanuel Kant, Kantianism
is directly opposed to utilitarianism. Kant argued that
it is not the consequences or end results that make an
action right or wrong; rather it is the principle or
motivation on which the action is based that is the
morally decisive factor. Kantianism suggests that
our actions are bound by a sense of duty. This the-
ory is often called deontology (from the Greek word
deon, which means “that which is binding; duty”).
Kantian-directed ethical decisions are made out of
respect for moral law. For example, “I make this
choice because it is morally right and my duty to
do so” (not because of consideration for a possible
outcome).
Christian Ethics
This approach to ethical decision-making is focused
on the way of life and teachings of Jesus Christ. It
advances the importance of virtues such as love, for-
giveness, and honesty. One basic principle often as-
sociated with Christian ethics is known as the golden
rule: “Do unto others as you would have them do
unto you.” The imperative demand of Christian
ethics is that all decisions about right and wrong
should be centered in love for God and in treating
others with the same respect and dignity with which
we would expect to be treated.
Natural Law Theory
Natural law theory is based on the writings of
St. Thomas Aquinas. It advances the idea that deci-
sions about right versus wrong are self-evident and
determined by human nature. The theory espouses
that, as rational human beings, we inherently know
the difference between good and evil (believed to be
knowledge that is given to man from God), and this
knowledge directs our decision-making.
Ethical Egoism
Ethical egoism espouses that what is right and good
is what is best for the individual making the decision.
An individual’s actions are determined by what is to
his or her own advantage. The action may not be best
for anyone else involved, but consideration is only for
the individual making the decision.
Ethical Dilemmas
An ethical dilemma in nursing is a situation that
requires the nurse to make a choice between two
equally unfavorable alternatives (Catalano, 2015).
Evidence exists to support both moral “rightness”
and moral “wrongness” related to a certain action.
The individual who must make the choice experi-
ences conscious conflict regarding the decision.
Not all ethical issues are dilemmas. An ethical
dilemma arises when there is no clear reason to
choose one action over another. Ethical dilemmas
generally create a great deal of emotion. Often, the
reasons supporting each side of the argument for
88 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Moral behavior is conduct that results from serious
critical thinking about how individuals ought to treat
others. Moral behavior reflects the way a person inter-
prets basic respect for other persons, such as the
respect for autonomy, freedom, justice, honesty, and
confidentiality.
Values are personal beliefs about what is important
and desirable (Butts & Rich, 2016). Values clarification
is a process of self-exploration through which individu-
als identify and rank their own personal values. This
process increases awareness about why individuals
behave in certain ways. Values clarification is important
in nursing to increase understanding about why certain
choices and decisions are made over others and how
values affect nursing outcomes.
A right is “a valid, legally recognized claim or entitle-
ment, encompassing both freedom from government
interference or discriminatory treatment and an entitle-
ment to a benefit or service” (Levy & Rubenstein, 1996).
A right is absolute when there is no restriction whatso-
ever on the individual’s entitlement. A legal right is one
on which the society has agreed and formalized into
law. Both the National League for Nursing (NLN) and
the American Hospital Association (AHA) have estab-
lished guidelines of patients’ rights. Although these are
not considered legal documents, nurses and hospitals
are responsible for upholding these patients’ rights.
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 88
action are logical and appropriate. The actions
associated with both sides are desirable in some re-
spects and undesirable in others. In most situations,
taking no action is considered an action taken. For
example, consider a patient who refuses to take
a prescribed cardiac medication, claiming that
he does not believe it is necessary. Although each
patient has the right to refuse medication under or-
dinary circumstances, if the same patient is known
to be depressed and suicidal, might he be intending
self-harm by his refusal to take such a medication?
And, if so, what is the best course of action? Many
health-care settings have established guidelines for
how to proceed should an ethical question or
dilemma arise. Hospitals typically have a formal
committee to explore and analyze ethical issues
from several vantage points. Nurses can improve
their critical-thinking and clinical judgment skills
by identifying such issues and seeking clarification
through collaborative exploration with others and
through ethics committee involvement.
Ethical Principles
Ethical principles are fundamental guidelines that
influence decision-making. The ethical principles of
autonomy, beneficence, nonmaleficence, veracity,
and justice are helpful and are used frequently by
health-care workers to assist with ethical decision-
making.
Autonomy
The principle of autonomy arises from the Kantian view
of persons as autonomous moral agents whose right to
determine their destinies should always be respected.
This presumes that individuals are always capable of
making their own independent choices. Health-care
workers know this is not always the case. Children, com-
atose individuals, and people with serious mental illness
are incapable of making informed choices. In these
instances, a representative of the individual is usually
asked to intervene and give consent. However, health-
care workers must ensure that respect for an individ-
ual’s autonomy is not disregarded in favor of what
another person may view as best for the client.
Beneficence
Beneficence refers to one’s duty to benefit or pro-
mote the good of others. Health-care workers who act
in their clients’ interests are beneficent, provided
their actions really do serve the client’s best interest.
In fact, some duties do take preference over other
duties. For example, the duty to respect the autonomy
of an individual may be overridden when that individ-
ual has been deemed harmful to self or others.
“Doing good” for the patient should not be confused
with “doing whatever the patient wants” (What do I
do now?, 2013). Good care must include a holistic
focus that considers the patient’s beliefs, feelings, and
wishes; the wishes of the family and significant others;
and considerations about competent nursing care
(Catalano, 2015). Despite the above-mentioned
guidelines, it is not always clear which action is in the
best interest of the client. When such dilemmas occur,
nurses should reach out to available resources, such
as an ethics committee or a supervisor, to build con-
fidence that their decisions have explored the neces-
sary vantage points.
Peplau (1991) recognized client advocacy as
an essential role for the psychiatric nurse. The term
advocacy means acting in another’s behalf as a sup-
porter or defender. Being a client advocate in psy-
chiatric nursing means helping clients fulfill needs
that, without assistance and because of their illness,
may go unfulfilled. Individuals with mental illness
are not always able to speak for themselves. Nurses
serve in this manner to protect clients’ rights and
interests. Strategies include educating clients and
their families about their legal rights, ensuring that
clients have sufficient information to make informed
decisions or to give informed consent, assisting clients
to consider alternatives, and supporting them in
the decisions they make. Additionally, nurses may
act as advocates by speaking on behalf of individuals
with mental illness to secure essential mental health
services.
Nonmaleficence
Nonmaleficence is the requirement that health-care
providers do no harm to their clients, either inten-
tionally or unintentionally. Some philosophers sug-
gest that this principle is more important than
beneficence; that is, they support the notion that it is
more important to avoid doing harm than it is to do
good. In any event, ethical dilemmas arise when a
conflict exists between an individual’s rights and what
is thought to best represent the welfare of the indi-
vidual. An example of this conflict might occur when
a psychiatric client refuses antipsychotic medication
(consistent with his or her rights), and the nurse must
then decide how to maintain client safety while psy-
chotic symptoms continue.
Justice
The principle of justice has been referred to as the
“justice as fairness” principle. It is sometimes called
distributive justice, and its basic premise lies with the
right of individuals to be treated equally and fairly
regardless of race, gender, marital status, medical
diagnosis, social standing, economic level, or reli-
gious belief (Catalano, 2015). When applied to
health care, the principle of justice suggests that all
resources (including health-care services) ought to
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 89
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 89
be distributed equally to all people. Thus, according
to this principle, the vast disparity in the quality
of care dispensed to the various socioeconomic
classes within our society would be considered un-
just. Retribution or restorative justice refers to the rules
for responding when expectations for fairness are
violated. Social justice can be summarized as the prin-
ciple that rules for both distribution and rules for
retribution should be fair and people should play by
the rules (Maiese, 2013). It is important for nurses
to recognize that in the latest revision of the Code of
Ethics for Nurses (ANA, 2015), a new focus in one of
the provisions states that nursing should integrate
principles of social justice both in practice and in
developing health policy.
Veracity
The principle of veracity refers to one’s duty to
always be truthful. Catalano (2015) states that verac-
ity “requires the health-care provider to tell the
truth and not intentionally deceive or mislead
clients” (p. 126). There are times when limitations
must be placed on this principle, such as when the
truth would knowingly produce harm or interfere
with the recovery process. Being honest is not always
easy, but rarely is lying justified. Clients have the
right to know about their diagnosis, treatment, and
prognosis.
A Model for Making Ethical Decisions
The following steps may be used in making an ethical
decision. These steps closely resemble the steps of the
nursing process.
1. Assessment: Gather the subjective and objective
data about a situation. Consider personal values as
well as values of others involved in the ethical
dilemma.
2. Problem identification: Identify the conflict between
two or more alternative actions.
3. Planning:
a. Explore the benefits and consequences of each
alternative.
b. Consider principles of ethical theories.
c. Select an alternative.
4. Implementation: Act on the decision made, and
communicate the decision to others.
5. Evaluation: Evaluate outcomes.
A schematic of this model is presented in Figure 5–1.
A case study using this decision-making model is
presented in Box 5–2. If the outcome is acceptable,
action continues in the manner selected. If the out-
come is unacceptable, benefits and consequences
of the remaining alternatives are reexamined, and
steps 3 through 7 in Box 5–2 are repeated.
Ethical and Legal Issues in Psychiatric-
Mental Health Nursing
The Right to Treatment
Anyone who is admitted to the hospital has the right
to treatment. Consequently, a psychiatric patient can-
not legally be hospitalized and then denied appropri-
ate treatment. The American Hospital Association
(AHA) has also identified the rights of hospitalized
patients. The AHA patient bill of rights was originally
written with an emphasis on protecting the patient
from a breach of reasonable standards while hospital-
ized. These guidelines were revised in 2003 to create
an emphasis on the importance of the collaborative
relationship between the client and the hospital
health-care team. Titled “The Patient Care Partner-
ship,” this document informs patients of their rights
to high-quality care while hospitalized, to a clean and
safe environment, to be involved in their own care, to
have their privacy protected, to get help when leaving
the hospital, and to get help with their billing claims
(AHA, 2003). Nurses practicing in hospital settings
need to be aware of and adhere to legal statutes,
90 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Assessment of a
Situation
A problem that
requires action
is identified.
Conflict exists between alternatives.
Action BAction A
Ethical
conflict
exists
BenefitsConsequences ConsequencesBenefits
Consider principles of ethical theories.
1. To bring the greatest pleasure to the most people2. To perform one’s duty:– Duty to respect the patient’s autonomy
– Duty to promote good
– Duty to do no harm
– Duty to treat all people equally and fairly
3. To do unto others as you would have them do unto you
4. To promote the natural laws of God
5. To consider that which is best for the decision maker
Select an alternative.
ake action and communicate.T
Evaluate the outcome.
Acceptable Unacceptable
– Duty to always be truthful
FIGURE 5–1 Ethical decision-making model.
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 90
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 91
BOX 5–2 Ethical Decision-Making—A Case Study
STEP 1. ASSESSMENT
Tonja is a 17-year-old girl who is currently on the psychiatric
unit with a diagnosis of conduct disorder. Tonja reports that
she has been sexually active since she was 14. She had an
abortion when she was 15 and a second one just 6 weeks
ago. She states that her mother told her she has “had her
last abortion” and that she has to start taking birth control
pills. She asks her nurse, Kimberly, to give her some infor-
mation about the pills and to tell her how to go about
getting some. Kimberly believes Tonja desperately needs
information about birth control pills and other types of
contraceptives, but the psychiatric unit is part of a Catholic
hospital, and hospital policy prohibits distributing this type
of information.
STEP 2. PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION
A conflict exists between the client’s need for information, the
nurse’s desire to provide that information, and the institution’s
policy prohibiting the provision of that information.
STEP 3. ALTERNATIVES—BENEFITS
AND CONSEQUENCES
Alternative 1: Give the client information and risk losing job.
Alternative 2: Do not give client information and compromise
own values of holistic nursing.
Alternative 3: Refer client to another source outside the
hospital and risk reprimand from supervisor.
STEP 4. CONSIDER PRINCIPLES OF ETHICAL
THEORIES
Alternative 1: Giving the client information would certainly
respect the client’s autonomy and would benefit the client
by decreasing her chances of becoming pregnant again. It
would not be to the best advantage of Kimberly in that
she would likely lose her job. According to the beliefs
of the Catholic hospital, the natural laws of God would be
violated.
Alternative 2: Withholding information restricts the client’s
autonomy. It has the potential for doing harm in that with-
out the use of contraceptives, the client may become
pregnant again (and she implies that this is not what
she wants). Kimberly’s Christian ethic is violated in that
this action is not what she would want “done unto her.”
Alternative 3: A referral would respect the client’s autonomy,
would promote good, would do no harm (except perhaps
to Kimberly’s ego from the possible reprimand), and
would comply with Kimberly’s Christian ethic.
STEP 5. SELECT AN ALTERNATIVE
Alternative 3 is selected on the basis of the ethical theories
of utilitarianism (does the most good for the greatest number
of people), Christian ethics (Kimberly’s belief of “Do unto
others as you would have others do unto you”), and
Kantianism (to perform one’s duty) and on the basis of
the ethical principles of autonomy, beneficence, and non-
maleficence. The success of this decision depends on the
client’s follow-through with the referral and compliance with
use of the contraceptives.
STEP 6. TAKE ACTION AND COMMUNICATE
Taking action involves providing information in writing for
Tonja or perhaps making a phone call to set up an appoint-
ment for her with Planned Parenthood. Communicating
suggests sharing the information with Tonja’s mother. The
referral should be documented in the client’s chart.
STEP 7. EVALUATE THE OUTCOME
An acceptable outcome might indicate that Tonja kept her
appointment at Planned Parenthood and is complying with
the prescribed contraceptive regimen. It might also include
Kimberly’s input into the change process in her institution
to implement these types of referrals to other clients who
request them.
An unacceptable outcome might be indicated by Tonja’s
lack of follow-through with the appointment at Planned
Parenthood or lack of compliance in using the contracep-
tives, resulting in another pregnancy. Kimberly may also view
a reprimand from her supervisor as an unacceptable out-
come, particularly if she is told that she must select other
alternatives should this situation arise in the future.
Kimberly’s disagreement with the institution’s policy may
motivate her to make another decision—that of seeking
employment in an institution that supports a philosophy
more consistent with her own.
accepted standards of practice, and organizational
policies with regard to a client’s rights during hospital
treatment.
The Right to Refuse Treatment (Including Medication)
Legally, patients have the right to refuse treatment
unless immediate intervention is required to prevent
death or serious harm to the patient or another
person (Sadock, Sadock, & Ruiz, 2015). The U.S.
Constitution and several of its amendments affirm
this right (e.g., the First Amendment, which ad-
dresses the rights of speech, thought, and expres-
sion; the Eighth Amendment, which grants the right
to freedom from cruel and unusual punishment;
and the Fifth and Fourteenth Amendments, which
grant due process of law and equal protection for
all). In psychiatry, however, both ethical and legal
issues must be considered. Sometimes patients are
involuntarily hospitalized because they are at risk of
harm to themselves or others and do not recognize
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 91
the severity of their symptoms. In emergency cases,
sedative medication may be administered without
the patients’ consent in order to protect them from
harming themselves or others. Because laws vary
from state to state, nurses must know the laws that
pertain in their local jurisdictions. Organizational
policies in the nurse’s practice setting should also
guide decision-making.
Although many courts support a client’s right to
refuse medications in the psychiatric area, exceptions
do exist. Regarding decision-making about forced
medication, Weiss-Kaffie and Purtell (2001) stated:
The treatment team must determine that three
criteria be met to force medication without client
consent. The client must exhibit behavior that is
dangerous to self or others; the medication ordered
by the physician must have a reasonable chance of
providing help to the client; and clients who refuse
medication must be judged incompetent to evalu-
ate the benefits of the treatment in question.
(p. 361)
More recently, some states have adopted laws that
allow a court to mandate outpatient treatment for
people with mental illness who have a history of
violent behavior. In New York City, this law, known as
Kendra’s law, also includes a provision for ordering
an individual to take medication as part of the treat-
ment plan.
The Right to the Least-Restrictive Treatment
Alternative
The right to the least-restrictive treatment alternative
means that clients who can be adequately treated in
an outpatient setting should not be hospitalized, and
if they are hospitalized, they should not be sedated,
restrained, or secluded unless less restrictive measures
were unsuccessful. In other words, the client has a
right to whatever level of treatment is effective and
least restricts his or her freedom. The restrictiveness
of psychiatric therapy can be described in the context
of a continuum based on severity of illness. Clients
may be treated on an outpatient basis, in day hospitals,
or through voluntary or involuntary hospitalization.
Symptoms may be treated with verbal rehabilitative
techniques and move successively to behavioral tech-
niques, chemical interventions, mechanical restraints,
or electroconvulsive therapy. However, ethical issues
arise in selecting the least-restrictive means among
involuntary chemical intervention, seclusion, and
mechanical restraints. Sadock and associates (2015)
state:
Distinguishing among these interventions on the
basis of restrictiveness proves to be a purely subjec-
tive exercise fraught with personal bias. Moreover,
each of these three interventions is both more and
less restrictive than each of the other two. Neverthe-
less, the effort should be made to think in terms of
restrictiveness when deciding how to treat patients.
(p. 1386)
While the right to the least restrictive treatment may
seem reasonable and expected, it is important to rec-
ognize that clients with mental illness have historically
been hospitalized against their will simply because they
had a mental illness. In the case of O’Connor v. Donald-
son (1976), the Supreme Court ruled that harmless
mentally ill individuals cannot be confined against
their will if they are able to remain safe outside of a
hospital setting. They must be considered dangerous
to themselves or others or be so unable to care for
themselves that their safety and survival are at risk. In
1981, the case of Roger v. Oken culminated in the ruling
that all patients, even those involuntarily hospitalized,
are competent to refuse treatment, but a legal
guardian may authorize treatment (Sadock et al.,
2015). These laws and policies have better attempted
to protect the rights of clients with mental illness while
still recognizing that, at times, an individual with acute
mental illness may be unable to make decisions in the
interest of his or her safety and survival.
Ideally, a person recognizes his or her need for
treatment and agrees voluntarily to be hospitalized if
this measure is recommended by the health-care
provider. The client who is voluntarily hospitalized
typically signs a consent to treatment upon admission,
but it remains the client’s right as a voluntary patient
to revoke that consent and to be discharged from the
hospital if he or she so choose.
Legal Considerations
The Patient Self-Determination Act, as part of the
Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1990, went
into effect on December 1, 1991. Cady (2010) states:
The Patient Self-determination Act requires health-
care facilities to provide clear written information for
every patient concerning his/her legal rights to make
healthcare decisions, including the right to accept or
refuse treatment. (p. 118)
Box 5–3 lists the rights of patients affirmed by
this law.
Nurse Practice Acts
The legal parameters of professional and practical
nursing are defined within each state by the state’s
nurse practice act. These documents are passed by
the state legislature and in general are concerned
with provisions such as
■ The definition of important terms, including nurs-
ing itself and the various types of nurses.
92 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 92
■ A statement of the education and other training or
requirements for licensure and reciprocity.
■ Broad statements that describe the scope of prac-
tice for various levels of nursing (APN, RN, LPN).
■ Conditions under which a nurse’s license may be
suspended or revoked and instructions for appeal.
■ The general authority and powers of the state
board of nursing.
Most nurse practice acts are general in their termi-
nology and do not provide specific guidelines for
practice. Nurses must understand the scope of prac-
tice protected by their license and should seek assis-
tance from legal counsel if they are unsure about the
proper interpretation of a nurse practice act.
Types of Law
The two general categories of law that are of most
concern to nurses are statutory law and common law.
These laws are identified by their source or origin.
Statutory Law
A statutory law is a law that has been enacted by a
legislative body, such as a county or city council, state
legislature, or the U.S. Congress. An example of
statutory law is the nurse practice acts.
Common Law
Common laws are derived from decisions made in
previous cases. These laws apply to a body of princi-
ples that evolve from court decisions resolving various
controversies. Because common law in the United
States has been developed on a state basis, the law
on specific subjects may differ from state to state. An
example of a common law might be how different
states deal with a nurse’s refusal to provide care for a
specific client.
Classifications Within Statutory
and Common Law
Broadly speaking, there are two kinds of unlawful
acts: civil and criminal. Both statutory law and com-
mon law have civil and criminal components.
Civil Law
Civil law protects the private and property rights
of individuals and businesses. Private individuals or
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 93
BOX 5–3 Patient Self-Determination Act—Patient Rights
1. The right to appropriate treatment and related services in
a setting and under conditions that are the most support-
ive of such person’s personal liability and that restrict such
liberty only to the extent necessary consistent with such
person’s treatment needs, applicable requirements of law,
and applicable judicial orders.
2. The right to an individualized, written treatment or service
plan (such plan to be developed promptly after admission
of such person), the right to treatment based on such
plan, the right to periodic review and reassessment of
treatment and related service needs, and the right to ap-
propriate revision of such plan, including any revision nec-
essary to provide a description of mental health services
that may be needed after such person is discharged from
such program or facility.
3. The right to ongoing participation, in a manner appropriate
to a person’s capabilities, in the planning of mental health
services to be provided (including the right to participate
in the development and periodic revision of the plan).
4. The right to be provided, in terms and language appropri-
ate to a person’s condition and ability to understand, a
reasonable explanation of the person’s general mental
and physical (if appropriate) condition, the objectives
of treatment, the nature and significant possible adverse
effects of recommended treatment, the reasons a partic-
ular treatment is considered appropriate, the reasons ac-
cess to certain visitors may not be appropriate, and any
appropriate and available alternative treatments, services,
and types of providers of mental health services.
5. The right not to receive a mode or course of treatment
in the absence of informed, voluntary, written consent to
treatment except during an emergency situation or as
permitted by law when the person is being treated as a
result of a court order.
6. The right not to participate in experimentation in the
absence of informed, voluntary, written consent (includes
human subject protection).
7. The right to freedom from restraint or seclusion, other
than as a mode or course of treatment or restraint or
seclusion during an emergency situation with a written
order by a responsible mental health professional.
8. The right to a humane treatment environment that
affords reasonable protection from harm and appropriate
privacy with regard to personal needs.
9. The right to access, on request, to such person’s mental
health-care records.
10. The right, in the case of a person admitted on a resi-
dential or inpatient care basis, to converse with others
privately, to have convenient and reasonable access
to the telephone and mail, and to see visitors during
regularly scheduled hours. (For treatment purposes,
specific individuals may be excluded.)
11. The right to be informed promptly and in writing at the
time of admission of these rights.
12. The right to assert grievances with respect to infringe-
ment of these rights.
13. The right to exercise these rights without reprisal.
14. The right of referral to other providers upon discharge.
Adapted from the U.S. Code, Title 42, Section 10841, The Public Health and Welfare, 1991.
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 93
groups may bring a legal action to court for breach
of civil law. These legal actions are of two basic types:
torts and contracts.
Torts
A tort is a violation of a civil law in which an individ-
ual has been wronged. In a tort action, one party
asserts that wrongful conduct on the part of the other
has caused harm and seeks compensation. A tort may
be intentional or unintentional. Examples of uninten-
tional torts are malpractice and negligence actions.
An example of an intentional tort is the touching of
another person without that person’s consent. Inten-
tional touching (e.g., a medical treatment) without
the client’s consent can result in a charge of battery,
an intentional tort.
Contracts
In a contract action, one party asserts that the other
party, in failing to fulfill an obligation, has breached
the contract, and either compensation or perfor –
mance of the obligation is sought as remedy. An
example is an action by a mental health professional
whose clinical privileges have been reduced or ter-
minated in violation of an implied contract between
the professional and a hospital.
Criminal Law
Criminal law provides protection from conduct
deemed injurious to the public welfare. It provides for
punishment of those found to have engaged in such
conduct, which commonly includes imprisonment,
parole conditions, a loss of privilege (such as a license),
a fine, or any combination of these (Ellis & Hartley,
2012). An example of a violation of criminal law is the
theft by a hospital employee of supplies or drugs.
Legal Issues in Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing
Confidentiality and Right to Privacy
The Fourth, Fifth, and Fourteenth Amendments to
the U.S. Constitution protect an individual’s privacy.
Most states have statutes protecting the confidential-
ity of client records and communications. Nurses
must recognize that the only individuals who have a
right to observe a client or have access to medical in-
formation are those involved in the client’s medical
care. The client must provide written consent for
health-care information to be shared with anyone
outside the current treatment team.
HIPAA
Until 1996, client confidentiality in medical records
was not protected by federal law. In August 1996, Pres-
ident Clinton signed the Health Insurance Portability
and Accountability Act (HIPAA) into law. This federal
privacy rule pertains to data that is called protected
health information (PHI) and applies to most individu-
als and institutions involved in health care. PHI is
individually identifiable health information indicators
that “relate to past, present, or future physical or
mental health or condition of the individual, or the
past, present, or future payment for the provision of
health care to an individual; and (1) that identifies
the individual; or (2) with respect to which there is a
reasonable basis to believe the information can be
used to identify the individual” (U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services, 2003). These specific
identifiers are listed in Box 5–4.
Under HIPAA, individuals have the rights to access
their medical records, to have corrections made to
their medical records, and to decide with whom their
medical information may be shared. The actual docu-
ment belongs to the facility or the therapist, but the
information contained therein belongs to the client.
The passage of HIPAA increased the level of control
clients have over the information maintained in their
94 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
BOX 5–4 Protected Health Information (PHI):
Individually Identifiable Indicators
1. Names
2. Postal address information (except state), including
street address, city, county, precinct, and zip code
3. All elements of dates (except year) for dates directly
related to an individual, including birth date, admis-
sion date, discharge date, date of death; and all ages
over 89 and all elements of dates (including year)
indicative of such age, except that such ages and
elements may be aggregated into a single category
of age 90 or older
4. Telephone numbers
5. Fax numbers
6. Electronic mail addresses
7. Social Security numbers
8. Medical record numbers
9. Health plan beneficiary numbers
10. Account numbers
11. Certificate/license numbers
12. Vehicle identifiers and serial numbers, including license
plate numbers
13. Device identifiers and serial numbers
14. Web Universal Resource Locators (URLs)
15. Internet protocol (IP) address numbers
16. Biometric identifiers, including finger and voice prints
17. Full face photographic images and any comparable
images
18. Any other unique identifying number, characteristic,
or code
From U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (HHS). (2003).
Standards for privacy of individually identifiable health information.
Washington, DC: HHS.
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 94
medical records. Notice of privacy policies must be pro-
vided to clients upon entry into the health-care system.
In 2013, HIPAA privacy and security rules were
again expanded to afford more rights to patients with
regard to their medical information and to assure
greater security of a person’s health information. In
some cases, such as when paying out of pocket for
care, patients can tell a provider that they do not want
treatment information shared with their health insur-
ance plan (U.S. Department of Health &Human Serv-
ices, 2013). Nurses in any practice setting need to be
aware of these HIPAA laws and any new provisions in
law that will impact the conduct of their practice.
Pertinent medical information may be released
without consent in a life-threatening situation. If in-
formation is released in an emergency, the following
information must be recorded in the client’s record:
date of disclosure, person to whom information was
disclosed, reason for disclosure, reason written con-
sent could not be obtained, and the specific informa-
tion disclosed.
Most states have statutes that pertain to the doc-
trine of privileged communication. Although the
codes differ markedly from state to state, most grant
certain professionals privileges under which they may
refuse to reveal information about and communica-
tions with clients. In most states, the doctrine of priv-
ileged communication applies to psychiatrists and
attorneys; in some instances, psychologists, clergy, and
nurses are also included.
In certain instances, nurses may be called on to
testify in cases in which the medical record is used as
evidence. In most states, the right to privacy of these
records is exempted in civil or criminal proceedings.
Therefore, it is important that nurses document with
these possibilities in mind. Strict recordkeeping using
objective and nonjudgmental statements, care plans
that are specific in their prescriptive interventions, and
documentation that describes those interventions and
their subsequent evaluation, all serve the best interests
of the client, the nurse, and the institution should
questions regarding care arise. Documentation very
often weighs heavily in malpractice case decisions.
The right to confidentiality is a basic one, espe-
cially in psychiatry. Although societal attitudes are
improving, individuals have experienced discrimina-
tion in the past for no other reason than a history of
mental illness. Nurses working in psychiatric-mental
health nursing must guard the privacy of their clients
with great diligence.
Exception: A Duty to Warn (Protection
of a Third Party)
There are exceptions to the laws of privacy and con-
fidentiality. One of these exceptions stems from the
1974 case of Tarasoff v. Regents of the University of Cali-
fornia. The incident from which this case evolved
came about in the late 1960s. A young man from
Bengal, India (Mr. P.), who was a graduate student at
the University of California (UC), Berkeley, fell in
love with another university student (Ms. Tarasoff).
Because she was not interested in an exclusive rela-
tionship with Mr. P., he became resentful and angry.
He began to stalk her and record some of their con-
versations in an effort to determine why she did not
love him. He soon became very depressed and ne –
glected his health, appearance, and studies.
Ms. Tarasoff spent the summer of 1969 in South
America. During this time, Mr. P. entered therapy
with a psychologist at UC. He confided in the psychol-
ogist that he intended to kill his former girlfriend
(identifying Ms. Tarasoff by name) when she returned
from vacation. The psychologist recommended civil
commitment for Mr. P., claiming he was suffering
from acute and severe paranoid schizophrenia. Mr. P.
was picked up by the campus police but released a
short time later because he appeared rational and
promised to stay away from Ms. Tarasoff. Neither
Ms. Tarasoff nor her parents received any warning of
Mr. P.’s stated intention to kill her.
When Ms. Tarasoff returned to campus in October
1969, Mr. P. resumed his stalking behavior and even-
tually stabbed her to death. Ms. Tarasoff’s parents
sued the psychologist, several psychiatrists, and the
university for failure to warn the family of the danger.
The case was referred to the California Supreme
Court, which ruled that a mental health professional
has a duty not only to a client but also to individuals
who are being threatened by that client. The Court
stated:
Once a therapist does in fact determine, or under
applicable professional standards should have deter-
mined, that a patient poses a serious danger of vio-
lence to others, he bears a duty to exercise reasonable
care to protect the foreseeable victim of that danger.
While the discharge of this duty of due care will nec-
essarily vary with the facts of each case, in each in-
stance the adequacy of the therapist’s conduct must
be measured against the traditional negligence stan-
dard of reasonable care under the circumstances.
(Tarasoff v. Regents of University of California, 1974a)
The defendants argued that warning the woman
or her family would have breached professional
ethics and violated the client’s right to privacy. But
the court ruled that “the confidential character of
patient-psychotherapist communications must yield
to the extent that disclosure is essential to avert dan-
ger to others. The protective privilege ends where
the public peril begins” (Tarasoff v. Regents of Univer-
sity of California, 1974b).
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 95
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 95
In 1976, the California Supreme Court expanded
the original case ruling (now referred to as Tarasoff I).
The second ruling (known as Tarasoff II) broadened
the ruling of “duty to warn” to include “duty to pro-
tect.” It stated that under certain circumstances,
a therapist might be required to warn an individual,
notify police, or take whatever steps are necessary to
protect the intended victim from harm. This duty to
protect can also occur in instances when patients
must be protected by health-care providers because
they are vulnerable due to their inability to identify
harmful situations (Guido, 2014).
The Tarasoff rulings created a great deal of contro-
versy in the psychiatric community regarding breach
of confidentiality and the subsequent negative impact
on the client-therapist relationship. However, most
states now recognize that therapists have ethical and
legal obligations to prevent their clients from harm-
ing themselves or others. Many states have passed
their own variations on the original “protect and
warn” legislation, but in most cases, courts have out-
lined the following guidelines for therapists to follow
in determining their obligation to take protective
measures:
1. Assessment of a threat of violence by a client
toward another individual
2. Identification of the intended victim
3. Ability to intervene in a feasible, meaningful way
to protect the intended victim
When these guidelines apply to a specific situation,
it is reasonable for the therapist to notify the victim,
law enforcement authorities, and/or relatives of
the intended victim. They may also consider initiating
voluntary or involuntary commitment of the client in
an effort to prevent potential violence.
Implications for Nursing While the original decision
in the Tarasoff ruling was directed toward psy-
chotherapists, it has since been more broadly ap-
plied. Not all states identify registered nurses as
having a duty to warn, but other statutes include a
duty to warn for nurses at all levels, from licensed
practical nurses to advanced practice nurses. As of
2015, three states (Maine, Nevada, and North
Dakota) have not yet addressed the issue of duty to
warn. One state (North Carolina) does not recog-
nize the duty to warn (National Conference of State
Legislatures, 2016). But even in states that do not
recognize a duty to warn, practitioners still need to
make a decision about warning a potential victim.
Every nurse, not just those practicing in psychiatric
nursing, should be informed about the laws in his or
her state regarding duty to warn. As Henderson
(2015) notes, emergency nurses are often the front-
line health-care workers and thus are in a position
to identify persons at risk for violence and to protect
the safety of the patient and others. In psychiatric-
mental health nursing practice, if a client confides
in the nurse about the potential for harm to an
intended victim, it is the nurse’s duty to report this
information to the psychiatrist and to other team
members. This is not a breach of confidentiality, and
the nurse may be considered negligent for failure to
report. All members of the treatment team must be
made aware of the potential danger that the client
poses to self or others. Detailed written documenta-
tion of the situation is also required.
Exception: Suspected Child or Elder Abuse
Every state requires that health-care professionals—
and in many jurisdictions, every citizen—report sus-
picion of child abuse to legal authorities (Hartsell &
Bernstein, 2013). Many jurisdictions also have statutes
requiring that suspected elder abuse or neglect be
reported. At times, health-care professionals may be
reluctant to report, fearing that they may be liable for
false allegations, but reporting statutes generally
grant immunity to anyone making a good faith report
about a reasonable suspicion. In addition, in some
jurisdictions, it is a criminal act not to report, “so
declining to report should not be considered an
option” (Hartsell& Bernstein, 2013, p. 170).
Implications for Nursing There is often an element of
clinical judgment about whether a patient’s commu-
nication raises a reasonable suspicion of abuse. For
example, when a person is experiencing hallucina-
tions or delusions, his or her perception about events
may be distorted. The nurse has a responsibility to ex-
plore all patient perceptions of abuse or mistreatment
and discuss these with other health-care team mem-
bers to identify the most appropriate decision with
consideration of all legal, ethical, and clinical factors.
Informed Consent
According to law, all individuals have the right to de-
cide whether to accept or reject medical treatment. A
health-care provider can be charged with assault and
battery for providing life-sustaining treatment to a
client when the client has not agreed to the treat-
ment. The rationale for the doctrine of informed con-
sent is the preservation and protection of individual
autonomy in determining what will and will not hap-
pen to a person’s body (Guido, 2014).
Informed consent is permission granted by a client
for a physician to perform a therapeutic procedure.
Before the procedure, the client is presented written
information about the treatment and given ade-
quate time to consider the pros and cons. The client
should receive information such as what treatment
alternatives are available; why the physician believes
this treatment is most appropriate; the possible out-
comes, risks, and adverse effects; the possible outcome
96 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 96
should the client select another treatment alternative;
and the possible outcome should the client choose to
decline all treatment. An example of a psychiatric
treatment that requires informed consent is electro-
convulsive therapy.
Under some conditions, treatment may be per-
formed without obtaining informed consent. A client’s
refusal to accept treatment may be challenged under
the following circumstances (Guido, 2014; Levy &
Rubenstein, 1996):
1. When a client is mentally incompetent to make a
decision and treatment is necessary to preserve life
or avoid serious harm
2. When refusing treatment endangers the life or
health of another
3. During an emergency in which a client is in no
condition to exercise judgment
4. When the client is a child (consent is obtained
from parent or surrogate)
5. In the case of therapeutic privilege, information
about a treatment may be withheld if the physician
can show that full disclosure would
a. hinder or complicate necessary treatment,
b. cause severe psychological harm, or
c. be so upsetting as to render a rational decision
by the client impossible
Although most clients in psychiatric-mental
health facilities are competent and capable of giving
informed consent, those with severe psychiatric
illness do not possess the cognitive ability to do so. If
an individual has been legally determined mentally
incompetent, consent is obtained from the legal
guardian. Difficulty arises when no legal determina-
tion has been made, but the individual’s current men-
tal state prohibits informed decision-making (e.g., a
person who is psychotic, unconscious, or inebriated).
In these instances, informed consent is usually ob-
tained from the individual’s nearest relative, or if
none exist and time permits, the physician may ask
the court to appoint a conservator or guardian. When
time does not permit court intervention, permission
may be sought from the hospital administrator.
A client or guardian always has the right to with-
draw consent after it has been given. When this
occurs, the physician should inform (or reinform)
the client about the consequences of refusing treat-
ment. If treatment has already been initiated, the
physician should terminate treatment in a way least
likely to cause injury to the client and inform the
client or guardian of the risks associated with inter-
rupted treatment (Guido, 2014).
The nurse’s role in obtaining informed consent is
usually defined by agency policy. A nurse may sign the
consent form as witness for the client’s signature.
However, legal liability for informed consent lies with
the physician. The nurse acts as client advocate,
ensuring that the following three major elements of
informed consent have been addressed:
1. Knowledge: The client has received adequate
information on which to base his or her decision.
2. Competency: The individual’s cognition is not
impaired to an extent that would interfere
with decision-making, or he or she has a legal
representative.
3. Free will: The individual has given consent volun-
tarily without pressure or coercion from others.
Restraints and Seclusion
An individual’s privacy and personal security are pro-
tected by the Patient Self-Determination Act of 1991.
This legislation includes a set of patient rights, includ-
ing an individual’s right to freedom from restraint or
seclusion except in an emergency. The use of seclu-
sion and restraint as a therapeutic intervention for
psychiatric patients has long been controversial. Many
efforts have been made through federal and state reg-
ulations and through standards set forth by accredit-
ing bodies to minimize or eliminate the use of this
type of intervention.
In addition, there is an element of moral decision-
making when any kind of treatment is coerced, as
is often the case with seclusion and restraint.
Landeweer, Abma, and Widdershoven (2011) point
out that although coercion may sometimes be nec-
essary, it can be detrimental to the patient, as it may
produce trauma and mistrust. One advantage of
using a forum such as a hospital-based ethics com-
mittee to guide moral decision-making is that by
exploring issues such as the use of seclusion and
restraint with a diverse group of people who have
different vantage points, alternative treatments can
be identified and explored.
Because injuries and deaths have been associated
with restraint and seclusion, this treatment requires
careful attention whenever it is deemed necessary.
Further, the laws, regulations, accreditation stan-
dards, and hospital policies are frequently revised, so
anyone practicing in inpatient psychiatric settings
must be well informed in each of these areas.
In psychiatry, the term restraints generally refers to
a set of leather straps used to restrain the extremities
of an individual whose behavior is out of control and
who poses an immediate risk to the physical safety
and psychological well-being of himself or herself
and others. It is important to note that the currently
accepted definition of restraint refers not only to
leather restraints but also to any manual method or
medication used to restrict a person’s freedom of
movement. Restraints are never to be used as punish-
ment or for the convenience of staff. Other measures
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 97
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 97
to decrease agitation, such as “talking down” (verbal
intervention) and chemical restraints (tranquilizing
medication), are usually tried first. If these interven-
tions are ineffective, mechanical restraints may be
instituted (although some controversy exists as to
whether chemical restraints are indeed less restrictive
than mechanical restraints). Seclusion is another type
of physical restraint in which the client is confined
alone in a room from which he or she is unable to
leave. The room is usually minimally furnished with
items to promote the client’s comfort and safety.
The Joint Commission, an association that accred-
its health-care organizations, has established stan-
dards regarding the use of seclusion and restraint.
Some examples of current standards include the
following (The Joint Commission, 2015):
1. Seclusion or restraint is discontinued as soon as
possible regardless of when the order is scheduled
to expire.
2. Unless state law is more restrictive, orders for re-
straint or seclusion must be renewed every 4 hours
for adults ages 18 and older, every 2 hours for chil-
dren and adolescents ages 9 to 17, and every hour
for children younger than 9 years. Orders may be
renewed according to these time limits for a max-
imum of 24 consecutive hours.
3. An in-person evaluation (by a physician, clinical
psychologist, or other licensed independent prac-
titioner responsible for the care of the patient)
must be conducted within 1 hour of initiating
restraint or seclusion. Appropriately trained regis-
tered nurses and physician assistants may also con-
duct this assessment, but they must consult with
the physician.
4. Patients who are simultaneously restrained and
secluded must be continuously monitored by
trained staff, either in person or through audio or
video equipment positioned near the patient.
5. Staff who are involved in restraining and secluding
patients are trained to monitor the physical and
psychological well-being of the patient including
but not limited to respiratory and circulatory
status, skin integrity, and vital signs.
The laws, regulations, accreditation standards, and
hospital policies pertaining to restraint and seclusion
share a common priority of maintaining patient safety
for a procedure that has the potential to incur injury
or death. The importance of close and careful moni-
toring cannot be overstated.
False imprisonment is the deliberate and unautho-
rized confinement of a person within fixed limits by
the use of verbal or physical means (Ellis & Hartley,
2012). Health-care workers may be charged with
false imprisonment for restraining or secluding—
against the wishes of the client—anyone admitted to
the hospital voluntarily. Should a voluntarily admit-
ted client decompensate to a point that restraint or
seclusion for protection of self or others is necessary,
court intervention to determine competency and in-
voluntary commitment is required to preserve the
client’s rights to privacy and freedom.
Hospitalization
Voluntary Admissions
Each year, more than 1 million people are admitted
to health-care facilities for psychiatric treatment; of
these admissions, approximately two-thirds are con-
sidered voluntary. To be admitted voluntarily, an
individual makes direct application to the institution
for services and may stay as long as treatment is
deemed necessary. He or she may sign out of the hos-
pital at any time unless the health-care professional
determines that the client may be harmful to self
or others following a mental status examination and
recommends that admission status be changed from
voluntary to involuntary. Even when an admission is
considered voluntary, it is important to ensure that
the individual comprehends the meaning of his or
her actions, has not been coerced in any manner, and
is willing to proceed with admission.
Involuntary Commitment
Although the term involuntary hospitalization is pre-
ferred by some over the term involuntary commitment,
this process needs to be conducted with respect to
state and federal law. Because involuntary hospital-
ization results in substantial restrictions of the rights
of an individual, the admission process is subject to
the guarantee of the Fourteenth Amendment to the
U.S. Constitution that provides citizens protection
against loss of liberty and ensures due process rights
(Weiss-Kaffie & Purtell, 2001). Involuntary hospital-
izations may be made for various reasons. Most states
commonly cite the following criteria:
■ The person is imminently dangerous to himself or
herself (i.e., suicidal intent).
■ The person is a danger to others (i.e., physically ag-
gressive, violent, or homicidal).
■ The person is unable to take care of basic personal
needs (the “gravely disabled”).
Under the Fourth Amendment, individuals are
protected from unlawful searches and seizures with-
out probable cause. Therefore, the individual rec-
ommending involuntary hospitalization must show
probable cause why the client should be hospital-
ized against his or her wishes; that is, the person
must show that there is cause to believe that the
client would be dangerous to self or others, is men-
tally ill and in need of treatment, or is gravely
disabled.
98 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 98
Emergency Commitments
Emergency commitments are sought when an individ-
ual manifests behavior that is clearly and imminently
dangerous to self or others. These admissions are usu-
ally instigated by relatives or friends of the individual
or by police officers, the court, or health-care profes-
sionals. Emergency commitments are time-limited,
and a court hearing for the individual is scheduled,
usually within 72 hours. At that time, the court may
decide that the client may be discharged or, if deemed
necessary and voluntary admission is refused by the
client, an additional period of involuntary hospitaliza-
tion may be ordered. In most instances, another
hearing is scheduled for a specified time (usually in
7 to 21 days).
The Mentally Ill Person in Need of Treatment
A second type of involuntary commitment is for the
observation and treatment of mentally ill persons in
need of treatment. These commitments typically last
longer than emergency commitments. Most states
have established definitions of what constitutes “men-
tally ill” for purposes of state involuntary admission
statutes. Some examples include individuals who,
because of severe mental illness, are
■ Unable to make informed decisions concerning
treatment.
■ Likely to cause harm to self or others.
■ Unable to fulfill basic personal needs necessary for
health and safety.
In determining whether commitment is required,
the court looks for substantial evidence of abnormal
conduct—evidence that cannot be explained by a
physical cause. There must be “clear and convincing
evidence” as well as probable cause to substantiate
the need for involuntary hospitalization to ensure
that an individual’s constitutional rights are pro-
tected. As mentioned earlier, the U.S. Supreme
Court, in O’Connor v. Donaldson, held that the exis-
tence of mental illness alone does not justify involun-
tary hospitalization. State standards require a specific
impact or consequence caused by mental illness that
involves danger or an inability to care for one’s own
needs. These clients are entitled to court hearings
with representation, at which time determination
of commitment and length of stay are considered.
Legislative statutes governing involuntary commit-
ments vary among states.
Involuntary Outpatient Commitment
Involuntary outpatient commitment (IOC) is a court-
ordered mechanism used to compel a person with
mental illness to submit to treatment on an outpatient
basis. A number of eligibility criteria for commitment
to outpatient treatment have been cited (Appelbaum,
2001; Csere, 2013; Maloy, 1996; Torrey & Zdanowicz,
2001). Some of these include
■ A history of repeated decompensation requiring
involuntary hospitalization.
■ Likelihood that without treatment the individual
will deteriorate to the point of requiring inpatient
commitment.
■ Presence of severe and persistent mental illness
(e.g., schizophrenia or bipolar disorder) and lim-
ited awareness of the illness or need for treatment.
■ The presence of severe and persistent mental ill-
ness contributing to a risk of becoming homeless,
incarcerated, or violent, or of committing suicide.
■ The existence of an individualized treatment plan
likely to be effective and a service provider who has
agreed to provide the treatment.
■ A danger to self or others. Although this is also a
criterion for inpatient commitment, the American
Psychiatric Association recommends outpatient
commitment as an option when there is an accept-
able treatment plan and access to a community
provider (Harvard Health, 2008).
■ The risk for relapse and hospitalization related to
noncompliance with treatment.
Most states have already enacted IOC legislation
or currently have agenda resolutions that speak to
this topic. Most commonly, clients who are commit-
ted into the IOC programs are those with severe and
persistent mental illness such as schizophrenia. The
rationale behind the legislation is to improve preven-
tive care and reduce the number of readmissions and
lengths of hospital stays for these clients. The need
for this kind of legislation arose after it was recog-
nized that patients with schizophrenia who did not
meet criteria for involuntary hospital treatment were
in some cases ultimately dangerous to themselves
or others. In New York, public attention to this need
arose after a man with schizophrenia who had stopped
taking his medication pushed a young woman into the
path of a subway train. He would not have met criteria
for involuntary hospitalization until he was deemed
dangerous to others, but advocates for this legislation
argued that there should be provisions to prevent
violence rather than waiting until it happens. The sub-
sequent law governing IOC in New York became known
as Kendra’s law in reference to the woman who was
pushed to her death. Opponents of this legislation fear
that it may violate the individual rights of psychiatric
clients without significant improvement in outcomes.
Some research studies have attempted to evaluate
whether IOC (sometimes abbreviated as OPC, which
refers simply to outpatient commitment) improves
care, reduces lengths of stay in the hospital, and/or
reduces episodes of violence. Most studies have shown
positive outcomes, including a decrease in hospital
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 99
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 99
readmissions, with IOC (Swartz & Swanson, 2008).
Continuing research is required to determine whether
IOC will ultimately improve treatment compliance
and enhance quality of life in the community for indi-
viduals with severe and persistent mental illness.
The Gravely Disabled Client
A number of states have statutes that specifically
define the “gravely disabled” client. For those that do
not use this label, the description of the individual
who is unable to take care of basic personal needs
because of mental illness is very similar.
Gravely disabled is generally defined as a condition
in which an individual, as a result of mental illness,
is in danger of serious physical harm resulting from
inability to provide for basic needs such as food,
clothing, shelter, medical care, and personal safety.
Inability to care for oneself cannot be established by
showing that an individual lacks the resources to
provide the necessities of life. Rather, it is the inabil-
ity to make use of available resources.
Should it be determined that an individual is
gravely disabled, a guardian, conservator, or commit-
tee will be appointed by the court to ensure the man-
agement of the person and his or her estate. To legally
restore competency requires another court hearing to
reverse the previous ruling. The individual whose
competency is being determined has the right to be
represented by an attorney.
Nursing Liability
Mental health practitioners—psychiatrists, psycholo-
gists, psychiatric nurses, and social workers—have a
duty to provide appropriate care based on the stan-
dards of their professions and the standards set by law.
The standards of care for psychiatric-mental health
nursing are presented in Chapter 9, The Nursing
Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing.
Malpractice and Negligence
The terms malpractice and negligence are often used
interchangeably. Negligence has been defined as
the failure to exercise the standard of care that a
reasonably prudent person would have exercised in
a similar situation; any conduct that falls below the
legal standard established to protect others against
unreasonable risk of harm, except for conduct that
is intentionally, wantonly, or willfully disregardful of
others’ rights. (Garner, 2014)
Any person may be negligent. In contrast, mal-
practice is a specialized form of negligence caused
only by professionals. Black’s Law Dictionary defines
malpractice as
an instance of negligence or incompetence on the
part of a professional. To succeed in a malpractice
claim, a plaintiff must also prove proximate cause and
damages. (Garner, 2014)
In the absence of state statutes, common law is the
basis of liability for injuries to clients caused by acts
of malpractice and negligence by individual practi-
tioners. In other words, most decisions of negligence
in the professional setting are based on legal prece-
dent (decisions that have been made previously about
similar cases) rather than on any specific action taken
by the legislature.
To summarize, when a breach of duty is character-
ized as malpractice, the action is weighed against the
professional standard. When it is brought forth as
negligence, the action is contrasted with what a
reasonably prudent professional would have done in
the same or similar circumstances.
Austin (2011) cites the following basic elements of
a nursing malpractice lawsuit:
1. A duty to the patient existed, based on the recog-
nized standard of care.
2. A breach of duty occurred, meaning that the care
rendered was not consistent with the recognized
standard of care.
3. The client was injured.
4. The injury was directly caused by the breach of a
standard of care.
For the client to prevail in a malpractice claim,
each of these elements must be proven. Jury deci-
sions are generally based on the testimony of expert
witnesses because members of the jury are laypeople
who cannot be expected to know what nursing inter-
ventions should have taken place. Without the testi-
mony of expert witnesses, a favorable verdict usually
goes to the defendant nurse.
Types of Lawsuits That Occur in Psychiatric Nursing
Most malpractice suits against nurses are civil actions,
which means they are considered breach of conduct
actions on the part of the professional for which com-
pensation is sought. The nurse in a psychiatric setting
should be aware of the types of behavior that may
result in malpractice charges.
The hospitalized psychiatric client has a basic right
to confidentiality and privacy. A nurse may be charged
with breach of confidentiality for revealing aspects about
a client’s case or even for revealing that an individual
has been hospitalized if the client can show that mak-
ing this information known resulted in harm.
When shared information is detrimental to the
client’s reputation, the person sharing the informa-
tion may be liable for defamation of character. When
the information is in writing, the action is called libel.
Oral defamation is called slander. Defamation of
character involves communication that is malicious
and false (Ellis & Hartley, 2012). Occasionally, libel
100 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 100
arises out of critical, judgmental statements written in
the client’s medical record. Nurses need to be very
objective in their charting, backing up all statements
with factual evidence.
Invasion of privacy is a charge that may result when
a client is searched without probable cause. Many
institutions conduct body searches on clients with
mental illness as a routine intervention. In these
cases, there should be a physician’s order and written
rationale showing probable cause for the interven-
tion. Many institutions are reexamining their policies
regarding this procedure.
Assault is an act that results in a person’s genuine
fear and apprehension that he or she will be touched
without consent. Battery is the unconsented touching
of another person. These charges can result when a
treatment is administered to a client against his or her
wishes and outside of an emergency situation. Harm
or injury need not have occurred for these charges to
be legitimate.
For confining a client against his or her wishes
outside of an emergency situation, the nurse may
be charged with false imprisonment. Examples of
actions that may invoke these charges include lock-
ing an individual in a room, taking a client’s clothes
for purposes of detainment against his or her will,
and restraining a competent voluntary client who
demands to be released.
Avoiding Liability
Catalano (2015) suggests the following proactive
nursing actions in an effort to avoid nursing malprac-
tice and the risk of lawsuits:
1. Effective communication with patients and other care-
givers. The SBAR model of reporting information,
which stands for situation, background, assess-
ment, and recommendations, has been identified
as a useful tool for effective communication with
caregivers. Establishing rapport with clients en-
courages open and honest communication.
2. Accurate and complete documentation in the medical
record.
The electronic health record (EHR) has been
identified as the best way to document and
share this information. The use of best infor-
matics sources is identified as an essential nursing
competency (Institute of Medicine, 2003) and an
important standard for quality and safety in nursing
education (QSEN Institute, 2013).
3. Complying with standards of care, including those
established within the profession (such as ANA
standards) and those identified by specific hospital
policies.
4. Knowing the client, which includes helping the
client become involved in his or her care as well as
understanding and responding to aspects of care
in which the client is dissatisfied.
5. Practicing within the nurse’s level of competence and scope
of practice, which includes not only adhering to pro-
fessional standards (those of the ANA and state
boards of nursing) but also keeping knowledge and
nursing skills current through evidence-based liter-
ature, in-services, and continuing education.
Some clients appear to be more “suit prone” than
others. Suit-prone clients are often very critical, com-
plaining, uncooperative, and even hostile. A natural
staff response to these clients is to become defensive
or withdrawn. Either of these behaviors increases the
likelihood of a lawsuit should an unfavorable event
occur (Ellis & Hartley, 2012). No matter how high the
nurse’s technical competence and skill, his or her in-
sensitivity to a client’s complaints and failure to meet
the client’s emotional needs often influence whether
or not a lawsuit is generated. A great deal depends on
the psychosocial skills of the health-care professional.
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 101
CLINICAL PEARLS
• Always put the client’s rights and welfare first.
• Develop and maintain a good interpersonal relationship with
each client and his or her family.
Summary and Key Points
■ Ethics is a branch of philosophy that addresses
methods for determining the rightness or wrong-
ness of one’s actions.
■ Bioethics is the term applied to these principles
when they refer to concepts within the scopes of
medicine, nursing, and allied health.
■ Moral behavior is conduct that results from serious
critical thinking about how individuals ought to
treat others.
■ Values are personal beliefs about what is important
or desirable
■ A right is “a valid, legally recognized claim or enti-
tlement, encompassing both freedom from govern-
ment interference or discriminatory treatment and
an entitlement to a benefit or service” (Levy &
Rubenstein, 1996).
■ The ethical theory of utilitarianism is based on the
premise that what is right and good is that which
produces the most happiness for the most people.
■ The ethical theory of Kantianism suggests that ac-
tions are bound by a sense of duty and that ethical
decisions are made out of respect for moral law.
■ The code of Christian ethics is that all decisions
about right and wrong should be centered in love for
God and in treating others with the same respect and
dignity with which we would expect to be treated.
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 101
■ The moral precept of the natural law theory is “do
good and avoid evil.” Good is viewed as that which
is inscribed by God into the nature of things. Evil
acts are never condoned, even if they are intended
to advance the noblest of ends.
■ Ethical egoism espouses that what is right and good
is what is best for the individual making the decision.
■ Ethical principles include autonomy, beneficence,
nonmaleficence, veracity, and justice.
■ An ethical dilemma is a situation that requires an
individual to make a choice between two equally
unfavorable alternatives.
■ Ethical issues may arise in psychiatric-mental health
nursing around the client’s right to refuse medica-
tion and right to the least-restrictive treatment
alternative.
■ Statutory laws are those that have been enacted by
legislative bodies, and common laws are derived
from decisions made in previous cases. Both types
of laws have civil and criminal components.
■ Civil law protects the private and property rights of
individuals and businesses, and criminal law pro-
vides protection from conduct deemed injurious
to the public welfare.
■ Legal issues in psychiatric-mental health nursing
center around confidentiality and the right to
privacy, informed consent, restraints and seclusion,
and commitment issues.
■ Nurses are accountable for their own actions in
relation to legal issues, and violation can result
in malpractice lawsuits against the physician, the
hospital, and the nurse.
■ Developing and maintaining a good interpersonal
relationship with the client and his or her family
appears to be a positive factor when the question
of malpractice is being considered.
102 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. The nurse decides to go against family wishes and tell the client of his terminal status because that is
what she would want if she were the client. Which of the following ethical theories is considered in
this decision?
a. Kantianism
b. Christian ethics
c. Natural law theories
d. Ethical egoism
2. The nurse decides to respect family wishes and not tell the client of his terminal status because that
would bring the most happiness to the most people. Which of the following ethical theories is consid-
ered in this decision?
a. Utilitarianism
b. Kantianism
c. Christian ethics
d. Ethical egoism
3. The nurse decides to tell the client of his terminal status because she believes it is her duty to do so.
Which of the following ethical theories is considered in this decision?
a. Natural law theories
b. Ethical egoism
c. Kantianism
d. Utilitarianism
4. The nurse assists the physician with electroconvulsive therapy on a client who has refused to give consent.
With which of the following legal actions might the nurse be charged because of this nursing action?
a. Assault
b. Battery
c. False imprisonment
d. Breach of confidentiality
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 102
C H A P T E R 5 ■ Ethical and Legal Issues 103
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
5. A competent, voluntary client has stated he wants to leave the hospital. The nurse hides his clothes
in an effort to keep him from leaving. With which of the following legal actions might the nurse be
charged because of this nursing action?
a. Assault
b. Battery
c. False imprisonment
d. Breach of confidentiality
6. Joe is very restless and is pacing the room. The nurse says to Joe, “If you don’t sit down in the chair
and be still, I’m going to put you in restraints!” With which of the following legal actions might the
nurse be charged because of this nursing action?
a. Defamation of character
b. Battery
c. Breach of confidentiality
d. Assault
7. An individual may be considered gravely disabled for which of the following reasons? (Select all that
apply.)
a. A person, because of mental illness, cannot fulfill basic needs.
b. A mentally ill person is in danger of physical harm based on inability to care for himself or herself.
c. A mentally ill person lacks the resources to provide the necessities of life.
d. A mentally ill person is unable to make use of available resources to meet daily living requirements.
8. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the use of restraints? (Select all that apply.)
a. Restraints may never be initiated without a physician’s order.
b. Orders for restraints must be reissued by a physician every 2 hours for children and adolescents.
c. Clients in restraints must be observed and assessed every hour for issues regarding circulation, nu-
trition, respiration, hydration, and elimination.
d. An in-person evaluation must be conducted within 1 hour of initiating restraints.
9. Guidelines relating to “duty to warn” state that a therapist should consider taking action to warn a
third party when his or her client does which of the following? (Select all that apply.)
a. Threatens violence toward another individual
b. Identifies a specific intended victim
c. Is having command hallucinations
d. Reveals paranoid delusions about another individual
10. Attempting to calm an angry client by using “talk therapy” is an example of which of the following
clients’ rights?
a. The right to privacy
b. The right to refuse medication
c. The right to the least-restrictive treatment alternative
d. The right to confidentiality
11. The Quality and Safety Education for Nurses guidelines identify that student nurses need to be well
schooled on informatics. This most directly refers to which of the following?
a. Learning how to effectively communicate information using electronic health records
b. Learning the SBAR method of reporting information
c. Learning guidelines for preventing lawsuits
d. Learning information about new treatments to keep nursing skills current
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 103
References
American Hospital Association (AHA). (2003). The patient care
partnership: Understanding expectations, rights, and respon-
sibilities. Retrieved from www.aha.org/advocacy-issues/
communicatingpts/pt-care-partnership.shtml
American Nurses Association (ANA). (2015). Code of ethics for
nurses with interpretive statements. Silver Spring, MD: ANA.
American Nurses Association (ANA), American Psychiatric Nurses
Association, & International Society of Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nurses. (2014). Psychiatric–mental health nursing: Scope
and standards of practice (2nd ed.). Silver Spring, MD: ANA.
Appelbaum, P.S. (2001). Thinking carefully about outpatient
commitment. Psychiatric Services, 52(3), 347-350. doi:10.1176/
appi.ps.52.3.347
Austin, S. (2011). Stay out of court with proper documentation.
Nursing2011, 41(4), 25-29. doi:10.1097/01.NURSE.
0000395202.86451.d4
Butts, J., & Rich, K. (2016). Nursing ethics: Across the curriculum
and into practice (4th ed.). Burlington, MA: Jones & Bartlett.
Cady, R.F. (2010). A review of basic patient rights in psychiatric
care. JONA’s Healthcare Law, Ethics, and Regulation, 12(4),
117-125. doi:10.1097/NHL.0b013e3181f4d357
Catalano, J.T. (2015). Nursing now! Today’s issues, tomorrow’s trends
(7th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Csere, M. (2013). Updated report: involuntary outpatient mental
health treatment laws. OLR Research Report. Retrieved from
https://www.cga.ct.gov/2013/rpt/2013-R-0105.htm
Ellis, J.R., & Hartley, C.L. (2012). Nursing in today’s world: Challenges,
issues, and trends (10th ed.). Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer
Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Garner, B.A. (Ed.). (2014). Black’s law dictionary (10th ed.).
St. Paul, MN: Thompson West.
Guido, G.W. (2014). Legal and ethical issues in nursing (6th ed.).
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
Hartsell, T.L., & Bernstein, B.E. (2013). The portable lawyer for
mental health professionals: An A-Z guide to protecting your clients,
your practice, and yourself (3rd ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley & Sons.
Henderson, E. (2015). Potentially dangerous patients: A review
of the duty to warn. Journal of Emergency Nursing, 41(3),
193-200. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jen.2014.08.012
Institute of Medicine. (2003). Health professions education: A bridge
to quality. Washington, DC: Institute of Medicine.
Landeweer, E., Abma, T.A., & Widdershoven, G. (2011). Moral
margins concerning the use of coercion in psychiatry. Nursing
Ethics, 18(3), 304-316. doi:10.1177/0969733011400301
Maiese, M. (2013 [originally posted July 2003]). Principles of
justice and fairness. Beyond intractability. Eds. C. Burgess &
H. Burgess. Conflict Information Consortium, University of
Colorado, Boulder. Retrieved from www.beyondintractability.
org/essay/principles-of-justice
Maloy, K.A. (1996). Does involuntary outpatient commitment
work? In B.D. Sales & S.A. Shah (Eds.), Mental health and law:
Research, policy and services (pp. 41-74). Durham, NC: Carolina
Academic Press.
National Conference of State Legislatures. (2016). Mental health
professionals’ duty to warn. Retrieved from www.ncsl.org/
research/health/mental-health-professionals-duty-to-warn.aspx
QSEN Institute. (2013). Competencies. Retrieved from http://
qsen.org/competencies/
Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Synopsis of psychiatry:
Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia,
PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Swartz, M.S., & Swanson, J.W. (2008). Outpatient commitment:
When it improves patient outcomes. Current Psychiatry,
7(4), 25-35. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1176/appi.ps.52.3.325
Tarasoff v. Regents of University of California et al. (1974a), 551
P.d 345.
Tarasoff v. Regents of University of California et al. (1974b), 554
P.d 347.
The Joint Commission. (2015). The comprehensive accreditation
manual for hospitals (CAMH). Oakbrook Terrace, IL: Joint
Commission Resources.
Torrey, E.F., & Zdanowicz, M. (2001). Outpatient commitment:
What, why, and for whom. Psychiatric Services, 52(3), 337-341.
doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1176/appi.ps.52.3.337
U.S. Code, Title 42, Section 10841, The Public Health and
Welfare, 1991.
U.S. Department of Health & Human Services (HHS). (2003).
Standards for privacy of individually identifiable health information.
Washington, DC: HHS.
U.S. Department of Health & Human Services (HHS). (2013,
Jan. 17). New rule protects patient privacy, secures health
information [press release]. Retrieved from www.hhs.gov/
news/press/2013pres/01/20130117b.html
Weiss-Kaffie, C.J., & Purtell, N.E. (2001). Psychiatric nursing.
In M.E. O’Keefe (Ed.), Nursing practice and the law: Avoiding
malpractice and other legal risks (pp. 352-371). Philadelphia:
F.A. Davis.
What do I do now? Ethical dilemmas in nursing and health care.
(2013). ISNA Bulletin, 13(2), 5-12.
Classical References
Levy, R.M., & Rubenstein, L.S. (1996). The rights of people with
mental disabilities. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press.
Patient Self-Determination Act—Patient Rights. (1991). U.S.
Code, Title 42, Section 10841, The Public Health and
Welfare.
Peplau, H.E. (1991). Interpersonal relations in nursing: A conceptual
frame of reference for psychodynamic nursing. New York: Springer.
104 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch05_086-104 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 104
6
Cultural and Spiritual Concepts
Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental
Health Nursing
CORE CONCEPTS
Culture
Ethnicity
Religion
Spirituality
105
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Cultural Concepts
How Do Cultures Differ?
Application of the Nursing Process
Spiritual Concepts
Addressing Spiritual and Religious Needs
Through the Nursing Process
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
acculturate
assimilate
collectivist culture
culture
cultural syndromes
curandera
curandero
density
distance
enculturation
ethnicity
folk medicine
individualist culture
religion
shaman
spirituality
stereotyping
territoriality
yin and yang
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Define and differentiate between culture,
race, and ethnicity.
2. Identify cultural differences based on six
characteristic phenomena.
3. Describe cultural variances, based on the six
phenomena, for the following:
a. Northern European Americans
b. African Americans
c. American Indian and Alaska Natives
d. Asian and Pacific Islander Americans
e. Latino Americans
f. Western European Americans
g. Arab Americans
h. Jewish Americans
4. Apply the nursing process in the care of indi-
viduals from various cultural groups.
5. Define and differentiate between spirituality
and religion.
6. Identify clients’ spiritual and religious needs.
7. Apply the six steps of the nursing process to
individuals with spiritual and religious needs.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions.
1. Which cultural group may use a medicine
man (or woman) called a shaman?
2. Restoring a balance between opposite forces
is a fundamental concept of Asian health
practices. What is this called?
3. Name five types of human spiritual needs.
4. What is the largest ethnic minority group in
the United States?
5. What is the perception of mental illness in
the Arab culture?
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 105
106 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Cultural Concepts
What is culture? What is race? How does it differ from
ethnicity? Why are these questions important? The
answers lie in the changing face of America. Immigra-
tion is not new in the United States. Most U.S. citizens
are either immigrants or descendants of immigrants,
and the number of foreign-born residents in this
country continues to grow each year. This pattern
persists because of the many individuals who want
to take advantage of the technological growth and
upward mobility that exists in this country.
or her preferences with regard to cultural and spiritual
practices.
Race is a controversial term because of its associa-
tion with racism or prejudicial views about a group
of people based on their appearance. Some scientists
argue that no group of individuals is genetically pure
enough to define race as a set of biological distinc-
tions. Other scientists argue the benefit of under-
standing racial differences in determining response
to treatments such as medications (see Chapter 4,
Psychopharmacology, for a discussion of this topic).
The U.S. Census Bureau collects data on racial de-
mographics, and they clarify that the data is based on
self-reported, self-identified affiliations (U.S. Census
Bureau, 2013). In 2000, the Census Bureau also
began including a category that allows for individuals
to identify with two or more races. A breakdown of
these demographics is presented in Figure 6–1.
This chapter explores the ways in which various
cultures differ. The nursing process is applied to the
delivery of psychiatric-mental health nursing care for
individuals from the following cultural groups:
Northern European Americans, African Americans,
American Indian and Alaska Natives, Asian and
Pacific Islander Americans, Latino Americans, Arab
Americans, and Jewish Americans.
How Do Cultures Differ?
It is difficult to generalize about any specific group in
a country that is known for its heterogeneity. Within
CORE CONCEPTS
Culture describes a particular society’s entire way of
living, encompassing shared patterns of belief, feeling,
and knowledge that guide people’s conduct and are
passed down from generation to generation. Ethnicity
relates to groups of people who identify with each other
because of a shared social and cultural heritage passed
on to each successive generation (Giger, 2017). Race
may be understood as a more biological term, describ-
ing a group of people who share similar inherited char-
acteristics such as skin color, facial features, and blood
groups.
Knowledge related to culture and ethnicity is impor-
tant because these influences affect human behavior,
its interpretation, and the response to it. Therefore,
it is essential for nurses to understand the effects of cul-
tural influences if they are to work effectively with the
diverse population. Generalizations about a cultural
group in this context can be beneficial. As Sue and Sue
(2016) state, “Generalizations are necessary for us;
without them we would become inefficient creatures.
However, they are guidelines for our behaviors, to be
tentatively applied in new situations, and they should
be open to change and challenge” (p. 245). Caution
must be taken, however, not to assume that all individ-
uals who share a culture or ethnic group are identical
or exhibit behaviors perceived as characteristic of the
group. Such assumptions constitute stereotyping and
must be avoided.
Many variations and subcultures occur within a cul-
ture. These differences may be related to status, ethnic
background, residence, religion, education, or other
factors. People of many different cultures reside in the
United States. Some maintain traditional cultural
practices, whereas others acculturate to dominant cul-
tural practices (give up cultural practices or values as
a result of contact with another group) and assimilate
by incorporating practices and values of the dominant
culture. Every individual must be appreciated for his
or her uniqueness and assessed carefully to identify his
White
(62.9%)
Hispanic or Latino
of any race (Mexican,
Puerto Rican,
Cuban, Other)
(16.9%)
African American
(12.2%)
American Indian and
Alaska Native
(0.7%)
Other
(0.2%)Asian
(4.9%)
Native Hawaiian and
Other Pacific Islander
(0.2%)
Two or
more races
(2.1%)
FIGURE 6–1 U.S. Census Bureau report on racial demographics. (From
U.S. Census Bureau, 2010–2014 American Community Survey 5-Year
estimates [2016].)
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 106
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 107
our American “melting pot,” any or all characteristics
could apply to individuals within any or all of the
cultural groups represented. As these differences con-
tinue to be integrated, one American culture will
eventually emerge. This integration is already evident
in some regions of the country today, particularly
in the urban coastal areas. However, some differences
still exist, and it is important for nurses to be aware
of cultural influences that may affect individuals’
behaviors and beliefs, particularly as they apply to
health care.
Giger (2017) describes six cultural phenomena that
vary with application and use yet are evidenced among
all cultural groups: (1) communication, (2) space,
(3) social organization, (4) time, (5) environmental
control, and (6) biological variations.
Communication
All verbal and nonverbal behavior in connection
with another individual is communication. Thera-
peutic communication has always been considered
an essential part of the nursing process and repre-
sents a critical element in most nursing school
curricula. Communication has its roots in culture.
Cultural mores, norms, ideas, and customs provide
the basis for our way of thinking. Cultural values are
learned and differ from society to society. Commu-
nication is expressed through language (the spoken
and written word), paralanguage (the voice quality,
intonation, rhythm, and speed of the spoken word),
and gestures (touch, facial expression, eye move-
ments, body posture, and physical appearance). The
nurse who is planning care must have an under-
standing of the client’s needs and expectations as
they are being communicated. As a third party, an
interpreter often complicates matters but may be
necessary when the client does not speak the same
language as the nurse. Interpreting is a very complex
process, however, that requires a keen sensitivity to
cultural nuances and not just translating words into
another language. Technology has facilitated access
to interpreters through such devices as telephone
services, video remote interpretation, and Internet
document translation, but these technologies do
not negate the importance of culturally sensitive,
respectful nursing care. Tips for facilitating the com-
munication process when using an interpreter are
presented in Box 6–1.
Space
Spatial determinants relate to the place where the
communication occurs and encompass the concepts
of territoriality, density, and distance. Territoriality is the
innate tendency to own space. The need for territori-
ality is met only if the individual has control of a
space, can establish rules for that space, and is able to
defend the space against invasion or misuse by others.
Density, which refers to the number of people within
a given environmental space, can influence interper-
sonal interaction. Distance is the means by which
various cultures use space to communicate. Hall
(1966) identified three primary dimensions of space
in interpersonal interactions in the Western culture:
the intimate zone (0 to 18 inches), the personal zone
(18 inches to 3 feet), and the social zone (3 to 6 feet).
Social Organization
Cultural behavior is socially acquired through a
process called enculturation, also called socialization,
which involves acquiring knowledge and internalizing
values of the group (Giger, 2017). Children are encul-
turated by observing adults within their social organi-
zations. Social organizations include, among others,
families, religious groups, and ethnic groups.
BOX 6–1 Using an Interpreter
When using an interpreter, keep the following points
in mind:
• Whenever possible, use a certified interpreter with a back-
ground in health care. Avoid using relatives or children as
interpreters because they may not be objective or may
have difficulty relaying information about sensitive topics.
• Address the client directly and maintain eye contact with
the client (rather than the interpreter) to engage the client
in interaction with the health-care provider.
• Do not interrupt or rush the client and the interpreter.
Allow time for interpretation and response before asking
another question.
• Ask the interpreter to give you verbatim translations so
that you can assess and document exactly what the client
has stated in response to questions.
• Avoid using medical jargon or colloquialisms that the
interpreter or client may not understand.
• Avoid talking separately with the interpreter at length; the
client may feel left out and distrustful.
• Always ask permission to discuss emotional or sensitive
topics first, and prepare the interpreter for the content of
the interview.
• When possible, allow the client and the interpreter to
meet each other before the interview, and if possible, try
to use the same interpreter for all subsequent interviews
with the client.
• If possible, request an interpreter of the same gender as
the client and of similar age or older.
• Discuss the interview questions with the interpreter ahead
of time to facilitate flow of the interview.
SOURCES: Gorman, L.M., & Sultan, D. (2008). Psychosocial nursing for
general patient care. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis; Purnell, L.D. (2013).
Transcultural health care: A culturally competent approach (4th ed.).
Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 107
108 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Time
An awareness of the concept of time is a gradual
learning process. Some cultures place great impor-
tance on values measured by clock time. Punctuality
and efficiency are highly valued in the United States,
whereas some cultures are actually scornful of clock
time. For example, some rural people in Algeria
label the clock as the “devil’s mill” and therefore
have no notion of scheduled appointment times or
meal times (Giger, 2017). They are indifferent to the
passage of clock time and despise haste in all human
endeavors. Other cultural implications regarding
time have to do with perception of time orientation.
Whether individuals are present oriented or future
oriented in their perception of time influences many
aspects of their lives.
Environmental Control
The variable of environmental control has to do with
the degree to which individuals perceive that they
have control over their environments. Cultural beliefs
and practices influence how an individual responds
to his or her environment during periods of wellness
and illness. To provide culturally appropriate care,
the nurse should not only respect the individual’s
unique beliefs, but also have an understanding of how
these beliefs can be used to promote optimal health
in the client’s environment.
Biological Variations
Biological differences exist among people in various
racial groups. These differences include body structure
(both size and shape), skin color, physiological re-
sponses to medication, electrocardiographic patterns,
susceptibility to disease, and nutritional preferences
and deficiencies. Giger (2017) suggests that nurses who
provide care for diverse cultural groups need to be
aware of basic biological differences to give nonharm-
ful, competent, and culturally appropriate care.
Application of the Nursing Process
Background Assessment Data
A cultural assessment tool for gathering information
related to culture and ethnicity that is important in
the planning of client care is provided in Box 6–2.
Northern European Americans
Northern European Americans include people who
originate from England, Ireland, Iceland, Wales, Fin-
land, Sweden, Norway, Denmark, and the Baltic states
of Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania. English is the pri-
mary language for those living in the United States.
Their language may also include words and phrases
that reflect the influence of the languages spoken in
the countries of their heritages. The descendants of
these immigrants comprise the dominant cultural
BOX 6–2 Cultural Assessment Tool
Client’s name ________________________________________ Ethnic origin _____________________________________
Address _____________________________________________ Birthdate _______________________________________
Name of significant other ______________________________ Relationship _____________________________________
Primary language spoken ______________________________ Second language spoken __________________________
How does client usually communicate with people who speak a different language? _______________________________
Is an interpreter required? ______________________________ Available? _______________________________________
Highest level of education achieved: _____________________ Occupation: _____________________________________
Presenting problem: ___________________________________________________________________________________
Has this problem ever occurred before? ___________________________________________________________________
If so, in what manner was it handled previously? ____________________________________________________________
What is the client’s usual manner of coping with stress? ______________________________________________________
Who is (are) the client’s main support system(s)? ___________________________________________________________
Describe the family living arrangements: ___________________________________________________________________
Who is the major decision maker in the family? _____________________________________________________________
Describe client’s/family members’ roles within the family. _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Describe religious beliefs and practices: ___________________________________________________________________
Are there any religious requirements or restrictions that place limitations on the client’s care? ______________________
If so, describe: ______________________________________________________________________________________
Who in the family takes responsibility for health concerns? ____________________________________________________
Describe any special health beliefs and practices: ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
From whom does family usually seek help in addressing health care concerns when needed? _______________________
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 108
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 109
BOX 6–2 Cultural Assessment Tool—cont’d
Describe client’s usual emotional/behavioral response to:
Anxiety: ____________________________________________________________________________________________
Anger: _____________________________________________________________________________________________
Loss/change/failure: _________________________________________________________________________________
Pain: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Fear: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Describe any topics that are particularly sensitive or that the client is unwilling to discuss (because of cultural taboos):
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Describe any activities in which the client is unwilling to participate (because of cultural customs or taboos):
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
What are the client’s personal feelings regarding touch? _______________________________________________________
What are the client’s personal feelings regarding eye contact? __________________________________________________
What is the client’s personal orientation to time? (past, present, future) __________________________________________
What are the client’s practices regarding punctuality and scheduled appointment times? ____________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Describe any particular illnesses to which the client may be biologically susceptible (e.g., hypertension and sickle cell anemia
in African Americans):
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Describe any nutritional deficiencies to which the client may be biologically susceptible (e.g., lactose intolerance in Native
and Asian Americans) __________________________________________________________________________________
Describe client’s favorite foods: __________________________________________________________________________
Are there any foods the client requests or refuses because of cultural beliefs related to this illness (e.g., “hot” and “cold”
foods for Latino Americans and Asian Americans)? If so, please describe: ________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
What does the client typically do to balance his or her diet? ___________________________________________________
Describe client’s perception of the problem and expectations of health care: _____________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
group in the United States today. Specific dialects and
rate of speech are common to various regions of the
country. All cultures can be described on a contin-
uum from individualistic to collectivistic, which de-
scribes, in part, the degree of focus on self versus
group. Individualistic cultures stress independence,
self-reliance, and freedom, and traditional European
American culture in the United States is a highly
individualistic culture (Purnell, 2013). Northern
European Americans value territory. Personal space
preference is about 18 inches to 3 feet.
Data collected on the U.S. population can be re-
vealing about cultural values and trends, which influ-
ence perceptions about American culture both within
and outside the country. Data on marriage and di-
vorce in the United States show that about half of first
marriages end in divorce (Centers for Disease Con-
trol and Prevention [CDC], 2015a). The CDC also
identifies that the marriage rate has steadily declined
over the past 14 years, from 8.2 per 1000 population
in 2000 to 6.9 per 1000 in 2014.
The value that was once placed on religion and the
organized church also seems to be diminishing in the
American culture. According to Gallup polls, over the
last four decades there has been a steady decline in
Americans’ confidence in religion. The organized
church reached an all-time low confidence rating
of 42 percent in 2015 (Gallup, 2015). A 2012 Pew
Research poll noted that church attendance has also
shown a similar decline but that some individuals still
report a religious affiliation even though they do not
attend church. Among the variables cited for lack of
church attendance were disagreements with the
church and being too busy (Lipka, 2013). Although
the majority of Americans still identify as affiliated with
some branch of Christianity, the percentage declined
from 78.4 percent in 2014 to 70.6 percent in 2014.
The number of Americans identifying as agnostic,
atheist, or “nothing in particular” increased from
16.1 percent to 22.8 percent over the same time pe-
riod (Pew Research Center, 2015). These findings sug-
gest that while a majority of Americans may still value
faith and worship, their mechanisms for expressing
those values are undergoing cultural change.
Northern European Americans, particularly those
who achieve middle-class socioeconomic status,
value preventive medicine and primary health care.
This value follows with the socioeconomic group’s
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 109
educational level, successful achievement, and finan-
cial capability to maintain a healthy lifestyle. Most
recognize the importance of regular physical exer-
cise. Punctuality and efficiency are valued aspects of
mainstream American work ethic, and in general, in-
dividual needs are considered subservient to the
needs of the organization (Purnell, 2013). However,
as Purnell points out, in the current postmodern
movement with its lack of adherence to truths as
“absolute” and an emphasis on worldviews based on
perception and social context, the face of main-
stream American culture is changing.
A typical diet for many Northern European
Americans is high in fats and cholesterol and low in
fiber. Americans, in general, are learning about the
health benefits of reducing fats and increasing nutri-
ents in their diet. However, they still enjoy fast food,
which conforms to their fast-paced lifestyles.
Changing Trends in Dominant American Culture
and Nurse Self-Awareness
Nurses who identify with the dominant culture will
benefit from reflecting on the values and practices
considered important within this context. Much
attention is placed on understanding values and prac-
tices of people of different cultures, but self-awareness
is vitally important as well. Asking clients to describe
their expectations for health-care provision and the
role of the nurse can begin to lay the groundwork for
discussing differences in cultural values and interact-
ing as individuals within a culturally sensitive context.
For example, a nurse who identifies with the domi-
nant, individualistic culture may have the belief that
people should take responsibility for themselves and
do what they want to do independent of the opinions
of family and community. If the nurse communicates
this expectation to someone from a collectivist cul-
tural framework, the nurse and client may encounter
difficulty establishing a working relationship because
their basic values are at odds with one another.
The United States, viewed as a melting pot of
multiple worldwide ethnic groups, has its own unique
blended culture that impacts the health and care of
individuals. It is important that the nurse is aware—
and self-aware of these conscious and unconscious at-
titudes and values within the U.S. culture when caring
for clients and understands how these characteristics
can impact mental health and mental illness. Charac-
teristics common to the U.S. culture are presented in
Box 6–3.
African Americans
The African American or black population in the
United States numbers 46.3 million according to the
most recent US Census data. Of those, 2.2 million are
110 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
BOX 6–3 American Culture
General: The United States is the third-largest country and
one of the most culturally diverse. The vast majority of
Americans speak and understand at least some English.
The majority (83%) identify as being of the Christian faith,
and the second-largest group (13%) identifies as having
no religious affiliation. Judaism is the second-largest re-
ligion (1.7%), and Islam is the third (0.6%). Football and
baseball are identified as favorite pastimes. Marketing
products to people in their homes and other countries
now constitutes one of the biggest industries.
Work and economy: Equality and economic mobility are
valued, and several laws protect equality rights, but there
is still evidence of stratification and segregation (e.g.,
urban versus suburban neighborhoods). Most Americans
are not opposed to social security benefits, but welfare
for the poor is controversial. Work and competition are
valued; being “on the go” is more valued than idle time.
Time and orientation: Making the best use of time is im-
portant and may be connected to work ethics (e.g., “time
is money”). Being on time for meetings is expected.
Most Americans are future oriented; from a young age,
children are taught to focus on what they “want to be”
when they grow up.
Individuality: Developing one’s own goals and not relying
too heavily on others is valued. Independent achieve-
ments are rewarded.
Privacy: Privacy and having some “alone time” are valued.
Personal thoughts and feelings are considered by most
to be private. It is often considered rude to ask about
someone’s finances or their age.
Informality: Casual lifestyle is common. Greetings and
farewells are usually short and friendly but superficial;
friendships are often casual (e.g., easily developed and
easily ended).
Social: Personal restraint of one’s body is common; phys-
ical distance is common in interaction, especially among
men. Breastfeeding, yawning, and expelling gas in public
are considered rude.
Death: Most Americans are uncomfortable with their own
mortality. Death is considered difficult to talk about, and
funerals are typically sad and solemn occasions.
SOURCES: Beane, M. (no date). An adventure in American culture and values.
International Student Guide to the United States of America. Retrieved
from www.internationalstudentguidetotheusa.com/articles/culture.htm;
Countries & Their Cultures Forum. (2017). United States of America. Re-
trieved from www.everyculture.com/To-Z/United-States-of-America.html;
Zimmerman, K.A. (2015). American culture: Traditions and customs of
the United States. Live Science. Retrieved from www.livescience.com/
28945-american-culture.html.
military veterans, and 84.7% over the age of 25 hold a
high school diploma or higher level of education. De-
spite these favorable statistics, the US Census also re-
ports that 25.4% of the US black population remains
below the poverty level.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 110
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 111
Despite decades of civil rights advances, patterns
of discrimination against African Americans con-
tinue, and evidence of segregation still exists, usually
in the form of predominantly black neighborhoods,
churches, and schools, which are still visible in most
U.S. cities. Some African Americans find it difficult to
assimilate into the mainstream culture and choose to
remain within their own social organization.
The most recent survey by the U.S. Census
Bureau revealed that 40.4 percent of African American
family households were headed by a woman (U.S.
Census Bureau, 2015). Social support systems may
be large and include sisters, brothers, aunts, uncles,
cousins, boyfriends, girlfriends, neighbors, and
friends. Many African Americans have a strong reli-
gious orientation, with the vast majority practicing
some form of Protestantism. However, the declining
rate of those who identify themselves as Christians
and the concurrent rise in numbers who identify
themselves as having no affiliation with organized
religion is similar among many demographic
groups, including African Americans (Pew Research
Center, 2015).
African Americans who have assimilated into
the dominant culture are likely to be well educated,
professional, and future oriented. Some who have not
become assimilated may believe that planning for the
future is hopeless, a belief based on their previous ex-
periences and encounters with racism and discrimi-
nation (Cherry & Giger, 2013). Among this group,
some may be unemployed or have low-paying jobs
with little expectation for improvement.
Some African Americans, particularly those from
lower socio-economic groups, may have limited access
to primary care services, and may be more receptive
to folk medicine practices as an alternative. Incorpo-
rated into the system of folk medicine is the belief
that health is a gift from God, whereas illness is a pun-
ishment from God or a retribution for sin and evil.
Historically, African Americans have sometimes pur-
sued folk medicine remedies because the cost of
mainstream medical treatment was prohibitive, or be-
cause of the insensitive treatment by caregivers in the
health-care delivery system.
Hypertension occurs more frequently and sickle cell
disease occurs predominantly in African Americans.
Hypertension carries a strong hereditary risk factor,
and sickle cell disease is genetically derived. Alcoholism
is a serious problem among members of the black com-
munity, leading to a high incidence of alcohol-related
illness and death (Cherry & Giger, 2013).
American Indian and Alaska Natives
The federal government currently recognizes 566
American Indian (AI) tribes and Alaska Native (AN)
groups. Approximately 200 tribal languages are still
spoken, some by only a few individuals and others by
many (Bureau of Indian Affairs, 2016). Fewer than
half of these individuals still live on reservations, but
many return regularly to participate in family and
tribal life and sometimes to retire. American Indians
and Alaska Natives are often grouped together in
statistical reporting about Native Americans, but they
are a diverse group, and some Alaska Natives prefer
not to be referred to as Native Americans (Purnell,
2014). The AI/AN group is described as a collectivist
culture, which stresses their close dependence on and
interconnectedness with family and tribe.
Touch is an aspect of communication that is not
the same among AI/AN groups as in the dominant
American culture. Some AI/AN groups view the tra-
ditional handshake as somewhat aggressive. Instead,
if a hand is offered to another, it may be accepted
with a light touch or just a passing of hands. Some
AI/AN groups will not touch a dead person (Hanley,
2017).
American Indians and Alaska Natives may appear
silent and reserved. They may be uncomfortable ex-
pressing emotions because the culture encourages
keeping private thoughts to oneself. In conversation,
most prefer a distance of greater than 2 feet, and for
some it may be up to 6 feet, so it is important to pay
attention to cues from the client (Purnell, 2014).
The concept of space is very concrete to AI/AN
culture. Living space is often crowded with members
of both nuclear and extended families. A large net-
work of kin is very important to American Indians and
Alaska Natives. However, a need for extended space
exists, as demonstrated by a distance of many miles
between individual homes or camps.
The primary social organizations of AI/AN groups
are the family and the tribe. From infancy, AI/AN
children are taught the importance of these units.
Traditions are passed down by the elders, and chil-
dren are taught to respect tradition and to honor
wisdom.
Most AI/AN individuals are present-time ori-
ented. The concept of time is very casual, and tasks
are accomplished not with the notion of a particular
time in mind but in a present-oriented time frame.
AI/AN individuals typically are not ruled by the
clock, and some do not even own clocks.
Religion and health practices are intertwined in the
AI/AN culture. The medicine man (or woman), gen-
erally called the shaman (although some tribes prefer
different terms) may use a variety of methods in his or
her practice. Some use crystals to diagnose illness,
some sing and perform healing ceremonies, and some
use herbs and other plants or roots to create remedies
with healing properties. The American Indian healers
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 111
and U.S. Indian Health Service have worked together
with mutual respect for many years. Hanley (2017)
relates that an AI/AN healer may confer with a physi-
cian regarding the care of a client in the hospital.
Research studies have continued to show the impor-
tance of each of these health-care approaches and
collaborative practice in the overall wellness of AI/AN
client (Hanley, 2017).
The risks of illness and premature death from
alcoholism, diabetes, tuberculosis, heart disease, acci-
dents, homicide, suicide, pneumonia, and influenza
are dramatically higher for American Indians and
Alaska Natives than for the U.S. population as a
whole. The Indian Health Service (2015) reports that
American Indians and Alaska Natives are “more likely
to report past-year alcohol and substance use disorders
than any other race, and suicide rates are 1.7 times
higher than the U.S. all-races rate.” Domestic violence,
too, is a significant behavioral health concern in this
group, with 39 percent of women experiencing inti-
mate partner violence. Nutritional deficiencies are
not uncommon among tribal AI/AN populations.
Fruits and green vegetables are often scarce in many
of the federally defined Indian geographical regions.
Meat and corn products are identified as preferred
foods. Fiber intake is relatively low, while fat intake is
often of the saturated variety. Approximately 276 of
the tribes recognized by the federal or state govern-
ment receive commodity foods supplied by the U.S.
Department of Agriculture’s food distribution program
(U.S. Department of Agriculture, 2015).
Asian Pacific Islander Americans
Asian Americans comprise 4.9 percent of the U.S.
population. The Asian American culture includes
peoples (and their descendants) from Japan, China,
Vietnam, the Philippines, Thailand, Cambodia,
Korea, Laos, India, and the Pacific Islands. Although
this discussion relates to this population as a single
culture, it is important to keep in mind that a multi-
plicity of differences regarding attitudes, beliefs, val-
ues, religious practices, and language exist among
these subcultures.
Many Asian Americans, particularly Japanese, are
third- and even fourth-generation Americans. These
individuals are likely to be acculturated to the U.S.
culture. Kuo and Roysircar-Sodowsky (2000) describe
three patterns common to Asian Americans in their
attempt to adjust to the American culture. Some
older-generation Asians tend to hold on to the tradi-
tional values and practices of their native culture.
They have strong, internalized Asian values. Primary
allegiance is to their biological family. Frequently,
members of the younger generation may reject the
traditional values of their ancestral culture, and to-
tally embrace Western culture. Finally, some Asian
Americans strike a balance, incorporating traditional
values and beliefs with Western values and beliefs.
They are—or become—integrated into the American
culture while maintaining a connection with their
ancestral culture.
The languages and dialects of Asian Americans
are very diverse. In general, they share a similar be-
lief in harmonious interaction. To raise one’s voice
is likely to be interpreted as a sign of loss of control.
The English language is very difficult to master, and
even bilingual Asian Americans who are recent im-
migrants may encounter communication problems
because of the differences in meaning assigned to
nonverbal cues such as facial gestures, verbal into-
nation and speed, and body movements. In Asian
cultures, touching during communication has his-
torically been considered unacceptable. However,
with the advent of Western acculturation, younger gen-
erations of Asian Americans accept touching as more
appropriate than did their ancestors. Acceptable per-
sonal and social spaces are larger than in the domi-
nant American culture. Some Asian Americans have
a great deal of difficulty expressing emotions. Because
of their reserved public demeanor, Asian Americans
may be misperceived as shy, cold, or uninterested.
The family is the ultimate social organization in
traditional Asian American culture, and loyalty to
family is emphasized above all else. Children are ex-
pected to obey and honor their parents. Misbehavior
is perceived as bringing dishonor to the entire family.
Filial piety (one’s social obligation or duty to one’s
parents) is held in high regard. Failure to fulfill these
obligations can create a great deal of guilt and shame
in an individual. A chronological hierarchy exists with
the elderly maintaining positions of authority. Several
generations or even extended families may share a
single household.
Although education is highly valued among tradi-
tional Asian Americans, many remain undereducated.
Religious beliefs and practices are diverse and exhibit
influences of Taoism, Buddhism, Confucianism, Islam,
Hinduism, and Christianity.
Many Asian Americans value both a past and a
present orientation. Emphasis is placed on the wishes
of one’s ancestors while adjusting to demands of the
present. Prompt adherence to schedules or rigid stan-
dards of activities may or may not be valued.
Restoring the balance of yin and yang is the funda-
mental concept of Asian health practices. Yin and
yang represent opposite forces of energy, such as
112 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 112
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 113
negative/positive, dark/light, cold/hot, hard/soft,
and feminine/masculine. The belief is that illness
occurs when there is a disruption in the balance of
these energy forces. In medicine, the opposites are
expressed as “hot” and “cold,” and health is the result
of a balance between hot and cold elements (Chang,
2017). Food, medicines, and herbs are classified
according to their hot and cold properties and are
used to restore balance between yin and yang (cold
and hot), thereby restoring health.
Rice, vegetables, and fish were the traditional
main staple foods of many Asian diets. Milk is seldom
consumed because a large majority of Asian Ameri-
cans experience lactose intolerance. With Western
acculturation, their diet is changing, and unfortu-
nately, the percentage of fat in the diet is increasing
as more meat is consumed.
Some Asian cultures believe that psychiatric illness
is merely behavior that is out of control. They view
this as a great shame to the individual and the family.
They often attempt to manage the ill person on their
own until they can no longer handle the situation. It
is not uncommon for Asian Americans to somaticize.
Expressing mental distress through various physical
ailments may be viewed as more acceptable than ex-
pressing true emotions.
The incidence of alcohol dependence is low among
Asians. This may be a result of a possible genetic
intolerance of the substance. Some Asians develop un-
pleasant symptoms, such as flushing, headaches, and
palpitations, from drinking alcohol. Research indi-
cates that this is due to an isoenzyme variant that
quickly converts alcohol to acetaldehyde and the ab-
sence of an isoenzyme that is needed to oxidize ac-
etaldehyde. This results in a rapid accumulation of
acetaldehyde that produces the unpleasant symptoms
(Wall et al., 1997).
Latino Americans
Latino Americans are the fastest-growing group of
people in the United States, comprising 16.9 percent
of the population (U.S. Census Bureau, 2016). They
represent the largest ethnic minority group. Recent
presidential debates highlighted public confusion
about the correct terminology to describe different
groups (Garcia-Navarro, 2015). The U.S. Census
Bureau clarifies that Latino or Hispanic peoples com-
prise many different races. It would not be correct,
for example, to refer to someone as a member of the
Latin race, since there are a variety of races among
Latin American countries. Latin Americans are those
who currently reside in Latin American countries.
Latino Americans are those who come from Latin
American countries but currently reside in the United
States. Latino American is often shortened to Latino,
but individual preferences about this term vary. The
term Hispanic is used to refer to people who share the
common language of Spanish. Brazilian people, for
example, would be offended by being referred to as
Hispanic, since their primary language is Portuguese
(Garcia-Navarro, 2015). Preferences as to what consti-
tutes appropriate descriptive terms can vary depending
on geographic location. Asking clients how they would
describe their cultural identity is in the interest of avert-
ing an unintentional insult and demonstrates cultural
sensitivity.
Latino Americans trace their ancestry to countries
such as Mexico, Spain, Puerto Rico, Cuba, and other
countries of Central and South America. Touch is a
common form of communication among Latinos;
however, they can also be very modest and are likely
to withdraw from any infringement on their modesty.
Traditional Latino Americans, as a collectivist cul-
ture, are very group oriented and often interact with
large groups of relatives. Touching and embracing
are common modes of communication. The family is
the primary social organization and includes nuclear
family members as well as numerous extended family
members. The traditional nuclear family is male dom-
inated, and the father possesses ultimate authority.
Latino Americans tend to be focused on the pres-
ent time. The concept of being punctual and giving
attention to activities that concern the future are per-
ceived as less important than activities in the present.
Roman Catholicism is the predominant religion
among Latino Americans. Most Latinos identify with
the Roman Catholic Church, even if they do not at-
tend services. Religious beliefs and practices are likely
to be strong influences in their lives. Especially in
times of crisis, such as in cases of illness and hospital-
ization, Latino Americans rely on priests and the fam-
ily to carry out important religious rituals, such as
promise making, offering candles, visiting shrines,
and offering prayers (Spector, 2013).
Folk beliefs regarding health are a combination of
elements incorporating views of Roman Catholicism
and Indian and Spanish beliefs. The folk healer is
called a curandero (male) or curandera (female).
Among traditional Latino Americans, the curandero is
believed to have a gift from God for healing the sick
and is often the first contact made when illness is en-
countered. Treatments used include massage, diet,
rest, suggestions, practical advice, indigenous herbs,
prayers, magic, and supernatural rituals (McMurry
et al., 2017). Many Latino Americans still subscribe to
the “hot and cold theory” of disease. This concept is
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 113
similar to the Asian perception of yin and yang dis-
cussed earlier in this chapter. Diseases and the foods
and medicines used to treat them are classified as
“hot” or “cold,” and the intention is to restore the
body to a balanced state.
National studies have revealed that the lifetime
prevalence for selected psychiatric disorders is higher
for U.S.-born Latinos (52.5%) than for Latino immi-
grants (30.9%), suggesting that there may be a pro-
tective context associated with living in their country
of origin before immigrating (Alegria et al., 2008;
Alegria et al., 2007). This has been referred to as the
“immigration paradox” (Alegria et al., 2008), since
the stresses of immigration might seem to confer
more risk of mental disorders, while the reverse is
actually true. The contributing factors are not well
understood, and there is variation among some
Latino subgroups. Among Mexicans, the immigration
paradox holds true for mood, anxiety, and substance
disorders, but among Cubans and other Latino sub-
groups, it holds true only for substance disorders.
This paradox does not hold true for migrant versus
U.S.-born Puerto Ricans (Alegria et al., 2008). In gen-
eral, Latino Americans have demonstrated a lower
lifetime prevalence of mental disorders than their
non-Hispanic white counterparts, but it should be
noted that the CDC (2015b) reports that the risk for
suicide attempts among teenage girls is higher
among Latino girls (15.1%) than non-Hispanic
white teenage girls (9.8%). As this cultural group,
and particularly U.S.-born Latino Americans, contin-
ues to grow in number, mental health professionals
will need to develop awareness of risks for illness and
sensitivity to the cultural values that may impact
seeking treatment.
Arab Americans*
Arab Americans trace their ancestry and traditions to
the nomadic desert tribes of the Arabian Peninsula.
The Arab countries include Algeria, Bahrain, Comoros,
Djibouti, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Libya,
Mauritania, Morocco, Oman, Palestine, Qatar, Saudi
Arabia, Somalia, Sudan, Syria, Tunisia, United Arab
Emirates, and Yemen.
First-wave immigrants, primarily Christians, came
to the United States between 1887 and 1913 seeking
economic opportunity. These immigrants and their
descendants typically resided in urban centers of the
Northeast. Second-wave immigrants entered the
United States after World War II. Most are refugees
from nations beset by war and political instability. This
group includes a large number of professionals and
individuals seeking educational degrees who have
subsequently remained in the United States. Most are
Muslims and favor professional occupations.
Arabic is the official language of the Arab world.
Although English is a common second language, lan-
guage and communication can pose formidable prob-
lems in health-care settings. Communication is highly
contextual, where unspoken expectations are more
important than the actual spoken words. While con-
versing, individuals stand close together, maintain
steady eye contact, and touch (only between members
of the same gender) the other’s hand or shoulder.
Speech may be loud and expressive and character-
ized by repetition and gesturing, particularly when in
serious discussion. Observers witnessing impassioned
communication may incorrectly assume that mem-
bers of this culture are argumentative, confronta-
tional, or aggressive. Privacy is valued, and many resist
disclosure of personal information to strangers, espe-
cially when it relates to familial disease conditions.
Among friends and relatives, Arabs express feelings
freely. Devout Muslim men may not shake hands
with women. When an Arab man is introduced to an
Arab woman, the man may wait for the woman to ex-
tend her hand.
Gender roles are often clearly defined. The man is
traditionally the head of the household, and women
are subordinate to men. Men are traditionally bread-
winners, protectors, and decision makers, and women
traditionally are responsible for the care and educa-
tion of children and for the maintenance of a success-
ful marriage by tending to their husbands’ needs.
The family is the primary social organization, and
children are loved and indulged. The father is the dis-
ciplinarian, and the mother is an ally and mediator.
Loyalty to one’s family takes precedence over per-
sonal needs. Sons are responsible for supporting
elderly parents.
Women value modesty, especially devout Muslims,
for whom modesty is expressed with attire. Many
Muslim women view the practice of hijab, covering the
body except for one’s face and hands, offering them
protection in situations in which the genders mix.
Sickle cell disease and the thalassemias (a type of
inherited blood disorder) are common in the eastern
Mediterranean. Sedentary lifestyle and high fat intake
among Arab Americans place them at higher risk for
cardiovascular diseases. The rates of cholesterol test-
ing, colorectal cancer screening, and uterine cancer
114 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
*This section on Arab Americans is adapted from Kulwicki, A.D.,
& Ballout, S. (2013). People of Arab heritage. In L.D. Purnell
(Ed.), Transcultural health care: A culturally competent approach
(4th ed.). © F.A. Davis. Used with permission.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 114
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 115
screening are low; however, in recent years, the rate
of mammography screening has increased.
Arab cooking shares many general characteristics.
Spices and herbs include cinnamon, allspice, cloves,
ginger, cumin, mint, parsley, bay leaves, garlic, and
onions. Bread accompanies every meal and is viewed
as a gift from God. Lamb and chicken are the most
popular meats. Muslims are prohibited from eating
pork and pork products. Food is eaten with the right
hand because it is regarded as clean. Eating and
drinking at the same time is viewed as unhealthy. Eat-
ing properly, consuming nutritious foods, and fasting
are believed to cure disease. Gastrointestinal com-
plaints are the most frequent reason for seeking
health care. Lactose intolerance is common.
Most Arabs are Muslims. Islam is the religion of
most Arab countries, and in Islam there is no sepa-
ration of church and state; a certain amount of reli-
gious participation is obligatory. Many Muslims
believe in combining spiritual medicine, performing
daily prayers, and reading or listening to the Qur’an
with conventional medical treatment. The devout
client may request that his or her chair or bed be
turned to face Mecca and that a basin of water be
provided for ritual washing or ablution before pray-
ing. Sometimes illness is considered punishment for
one’s sins.
Mental illness is a major social stigma. Psychiatric
symptoms may be denied or attributed to “bad
nerves” or evil spirits. When individuals suffering
from mental distress seek medical care, they are
likely to present with a variety of vague complaints
such as abdominal pain, lassitude, anorexia, and
shortness of breath. Clients often expect and may
insist on somatic treatment, often vitamins and ton-
ics. When mental illness is accepted as a diagnosis,
treatment with medications rather than counseling
is preferred.
Jewish Americans
To be Jewish is to belong to a specific group of people
and a specific religion. The term Jewish does not refer
to a race. The Jewish people came to the United
States mostly from Spain, Portugal, Germany, and
Eastern Europe (Bralock & Padgham, 2017). More
than 5 million Jewish Americans live in the United
States, primarily in the larger urban areas.
Four main Jewish religious groups exist today:
Orthodox, Reform, Conservative, and Reconstruc-
tionist. Orthodox Jews adhere to strict interpretation
and application of Jewish laws and ethics. They
believe that the laws outlined in the Torah (the five
books of Moses) are divine, eternal, and unalterable.
Reform Judaism is the largest Jewish religious group
in the United States. The Reform group believes in
the autonomy of the individual in interpreting the
Jewish code of law, and a more liberal interpretation
is followed. Conservative Jews also accept a less strict
interpretation. They believe that the code of laws
come from God, but they accept flexibility and adap-
tation of those laws to absorb aspects of the culture
while remaining true to Judaism’s values. The Recon-
structionists have modern views that generally over-
ride traditional Jewish laws. They do not believe that
Jews are God’s chosen people and reject the notion
of divine intervention. Reconstructionists are gener-
ally accepting of interfaith marriage.
The primary language of Jewish Americans is English.
Hebrew, the official language of Israel and the Torah,
is used for prayers and taught in Jewish religious
education. Early Jewish immigrants spoke a Judeo-
German dialect called Yiddish, and some of those
words have become part of American English (e.g.,
klutz, kosher, tush, chutzpah, mazel tov).
Although traditional Jewish law is clearly male
oriented, with acculturation, little difference is seen
today with regard to gender roles. Formal education
is a highly respected value among the Jewish people.
Over one-third of Jewish Americans hold advanced
degrees and are employed as professionals (e.g., sci-
ence, medicine, law, education), more than any other
group within the U.S. white population.
Although most Jewish people live for today and
plan for and worry about tomorrow, they are raised
with stories of their past, especially of the Holocaust.
They are warned to “never forget” lest history be re-
peated. Therefore, their time orientation is simulta-
neously to the past, the present, and the future
(Selekman, 2013).
Children are considered blessings and valued
treasures, treated with respect, and deeply loved.
They play an active role in most holiday celebrations
and services. Respecting and honoring one’s parents
is one of the Ten Commandments. Children are ex-
pected to be forever grateful to their parents for giv-
ing them the gift of life (Selekman, 2013). The rite of
passage into adulthood occurs during a religious cer-
emony called a bar or bat mitzvah (son or daughter of
the commandment) and is usually commemorated by
a family celebration.
Because of the respect afforded physicians and the
emphasis on keeping the body and mind healthy,
Jewish Americans tend to be health conscious. In gen-
eral, they practice preventive health care, with routine
physical, dental, and vision screening. Circumcision
for male infants is both a medical procedure and a
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 115
religious rite and is performed on the eighth day of
life. The procedure is usually performed at home and
is considered a family festivity.
A number of genetic diseases are more common
in the Jewish than among other populations, includ-
ing Tay-Sachs disease, Gaucher’s disease, and familial
dysautonomia. Other conditions that occur with in-
creased incidence in the Jewish population include
inflammatory bowel disease (ulcerative colitis and
Crohn’s disease), colorectal cancer, and breast and
ovarian cancer. Jewish people have a higher rate of
side effects from the antipsychotic clozapine. About
20 percent develop agranulocytosis, the cause of
which has been attributed to a specific genetic haplo-
type (Selekman, 2013).
Alcohol, especially wine, is an essential part of
religious holidays and festive occasions. It is viewed
as appropriate and acceptable as long as it is used
in moderation. For Jewish people who follow the
dietary laws, a tremendous amount of attention is
given to the slaughter of livestock and the prepara-
tion and consumption of food. Religious laws dic-
tate which foods are permissible. The term kosher
means “fit to eat,” and following these guidelines is
considered a commandment of God. Meat may
be eaten only if the permitted animal has been
slaughtered, cooked, and served following kosher
guidelines. Pigs are considered unclean, and pork
and pork products are forbidden. Dairy products
and meat may not be mixed together in cooking,
serving, or eating.
Judaism opposes discrimination against people
with physical, mental, and developmental conditions.
The maintenance of one’s mental health is consid-
ered just as important as the maintenance of one’s
physical health. Mental incapacity has always been
recognized as grounds for exemption from all obliga-
tions under Jewish law (Selekman, 2013).
A summary of information related to the six cul-
tural phenomena as they apply to the cultural groups
discussed here is presented in Table 6–1.
Cultural Syndromes
Cultural syndromes are those that are specific to a
cultural group and do not share an exact correlation
to any diagnostic categories listed in the Diagnostic
and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition
(DSM-5) (Sue & Sue, 2016). These syndromes have his-
torically been described as culture-bound syndromes,
but as Sadock, Sadock, and Ruiz (2015) point out,
“The clear implication was that Western psychiatric
categories were not culture bound . . . [when in fact]
culture suffuses all forms of psychological distress,
the familiar as well as the unfamiliar” (p. 145). It
is important for nurses to understand the physical
and behavioral manifestations of these cultural syn-
dromes. Ataques de nervios (attack of nerves), a Latin
American cultural syndrome, may sound similar to
the DSM-5 category of panic attacks, but it is a distinct
syndrome with distinct treatment implications (Sue
& Sue, 2016). Examples of cultural syndromes are
presented in Table 6–2.
Diagnosis and Outcome Identification
Nursing diagnoses are selected on the basis of infor-
mation gathered during the assessment process. With
background knowledge of cultural variables and
information uniquely related to the individual, the
following nursing diagnoses may be appropriate:
■ Impaired verbal communication related to cultural
differences, evidenced by inability to speak the
dominant language
■ Anxiety (moderate to severe) related to entry into
an unfamiliar health-care system and separation
from support systems, evidenced by apprehension
and suspicion, restlessness, and trembling
■ Imbalanced nutrition, less than body require-
ments, related to refusal to eat unfamiliar foods
provided in the health-care setting, evidenced by
loss of weight
■ Spiritual distress related to inability to participate
in usual religious practices because of hospitaliza-
tion, evidenced by alterations in mood (e.g., anger,
crying, withdrawal, preoccupation, anxiety, hostil-
ity, apathy)
Outcome criteria related to these nursing diag-
noses may include the following:
The client:
1. Has all basic needs fulfilled
2. Communicates with staff through an interpreter
3. Maintains anxiety at a manageable level by having
family members stay with him or her during
hospitalization
4. Maintains weight by eating foods that he or she
likes brought to the hospital by family members
5. Has restored spiritual strength through use of cul-
tural rituals and beliefs and visits from a spiritual
leader
Planning and Implementation
The following interventions have special cultural im-
plications for nursing:
■ Use an interpreter, if necessary, to ensure that
there are no barriers to communication. Be careful
with nonverbal communication because it may be
116 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 116
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 117
TA
B
L
E
6
–
1
Su
m
m
ar
y
of
S
ix
C
ul
tu
ra
l P
he
no
m
en
a
in
C
om
pa
ri
so
n
of
V
ar
io
us
C
ul
tu
ra
l G
ro
up
s
CU
LT
U
RA
L
G
RO
U
P
AN
D
SO
CI
AL
EN
VI
RO
N
M
EN
TA
L
BI
O
LO
G
IC
AL
CO
U
N
TR
IE
S
O
F
O
RI
G
IN
CO
M
M
U
N
IC
AT
IO
N
SP
AC
E
O
RG
AN
IZ
AT
IO
N
TI
M
E
CO
N
TR
O
L
VA
RI
AT
IO
N
S
N
o
rt
h
er
n
E
u
ro
p
ea
n
A
m
er
ic
an
s
(E
n
gl
an
d
, I
re
la
n
d
,
an
d
o
th
er
s)
A
fr
ic
an
A
m
er
ic
an
s
(L
ar
ge
ly
d
es
ce
n
d
an
ts
o
f
A
fr
ic
an
s
b
ro
u
gh
t
fo
rc
ib
ly
t
o
A
m
er
ic
a.
as
s
la
ve
s)
. T
h
er
e
ar
e
cu
ltu
ra
l d
iff
er
–
en
ce
s
b
et
w
ee
n
lo
n
g-
st
an
d
in
g
A
fr
ic
an
A
m
er
ic
an
s
an
d
t
h
o
se
re
ce
n
tly
im
m
ig
ra
tin
g
fo
rm
A
fr
ic
a.
A
m
er
ic
an
I
n
d
ia
n
s
an
d
A
la
sk
a
N
at
iv
es
(N
o
rt
h
A
m
er
ic
a,
A
la
sk
a,
A
le
u
tia
n
Is
la
n
d
s)
A
si
an
/P
ac
ifi
c
Is
la
n
d
er
A
m
er
ic
an
s
(J
ap
an
, C
h
in
a,
K
o
re
a,
Vi
et
n
am
, P
h
ili
p
p
in
es
,
Th
ai
la
n
d
, C
am
b
o
d
ia
,
La
o
s,
P
ac
ifi
c
Is
la
n
d
s,
o
th
er
s)
N
at
io
n
al
la
n
gu
ag
es
(a
lth
o
u
gh
m
an
y
le
ar
n
E
n
gl
is
h
ve
ry
q
u
ic
kl
y)
D
ia
le
ct
s
(o
ft
en
re
gi
o
n
al
)
En
gl
is
h
M
o
re
v
er
b
al
t
h
an
n
o
n
ve
rb
al
N
at
io
n
al
la
n
gu
ag
es
P
rim
ar
y
la
n
gu
ag
e
is
E
n
gl
is
h
H
ig
h
ly
v
er
b
al
a
n
d
n
o
n
ve
rb
al
2
0
0
t
rib
al
la
n
gu
ag
es
re
co
gn
iz
ed
C
o
m
fo
rt
ab
le
w
ith
si
le
n
ce
M
o
re
t
h
an
3
0
d
iff
er
en
t
la
n
gu
ag
es
sp
o
ke
n
C
o
m
fo
rt
ab
le
w
ith
si
le
n
ce
N
o
n
ve
rb
al
c
o
n
n
o
–
ta
tio
n
s
m
ay
b
e
m
is
u
n
d
er
st
o
o
d
Te
rr
ito
ry
v
al
u
ed
Pe
rs
o
n
al
s
p
ac
e:
1
8
in
ch
es
t
o
3
f
ee
t
U
n
co
m
fo
rt
ab
le
w
ith
p
er
so
n
al
co
n
ta
ct
a
n
d
to
u
ch
C
lo
se
p
er
so
n
al
sp
ac
e
C
o
m
fo
rt
ab
le
w
ith
to
u
ch
La
rg
e,
e
xt
en
d
ed
sp
ac
e
im
p
o
rt
an
t
U
n
co
m
fo
rt
ab
le
w
ith
t
o
u
ch
La
rg
e
p
er
so
n
al
sp
ac
e
U
n
co
m
fo
rt
ab
le
w
ith
t
o
u
ch
Fa
m
ili
es
:
N
u
cl
ea
r
an
d
e
xt
en
d
ed
R
el
ig
io
n
s:
J
ew
is
h
an
d
C
h
ris
tia
n
O
rg
an
iz
at
io
n
s:
So
ci
al
c
o
m
m
u
n
ity
La
rg
e,
e
xt
en
d
ed
fa
m
ili
es
M
an
y
fe
m
al
e-
h
ea
d
ed
h
o
u
se
h
o
ld
s
Tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
ly
s
tr
o
n
g
re
lig
io
u
s
o
rie
n
ta
–
tio
n
, m
o
st
ly
P
ro
te
st
an
t
C
o
m
m
u
n
ity
s
o
ci
al
o
rg
an
iz
at
io
n
s
Fa
m
ili
es
:
N
u
cl
ea
r
an
d
e
xt
en
d
ed
C
h
ild
re
n
t
au
gh
t
im
p
o
rt
an
ce
o
f
tr
ad
iti
o
n
So
ci
al
o
rg
an
iz
at
io
n
s:
Tr
ib
e
an
d
f
am
ily
m
o
st
im
p
o
rt
an
t
Fa
m
ili
es
:
N
u
cl
ea
r
an
d
e
xt
en
d
ed
C
h
ild
re
n
t
au
gh
t
im
p
o
rt
an
ce
o
f
fa
m
ily
lo
ya
lty
an
d
t
ra
d
iti
o
n
M
an
y
re
lig
io
n
s:
Ta
o
is
m
,
B
u
d
d
h
is
m
,
Is
la
m
, H
in
d
u
is
m
,
C
h
ris
tia
n
ity
C
o
m
m
u
n
ity
s
o
ci
al
o
rg
an
iz
at
io
n
s
Fu
tu
re
o
rie
n
te
d
P
re
se
n
t-
tim
e
o
rie
n
te
d
P
re
se
n
t-
tim
e
o
rie
n
te
d
P
re
se
n
t-
tim
e
o
rie
n
te
d
Pa
st
is
im
p
o
r-
ta
n
t
an
d
va
lu
ed
M
o
st
v
al
u
e
p
re
ve
n
–
tiv
e
m
ed
ic
in
e
an
d
p
rim
ar
y
h
ea
lth
ca
re
t
h
ro
u
gh
tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
h
ea
lth
–
ca
re
d
el
iv
er
y
sy
st
em
A
lte
rn
at
iv
e
m
et
h
o
d
s
o
n
t
h
e
in
cr
ea
se
Tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
h
ea
lth
–
ca
re
d
el
iv
er
y
sy
st
em
So
m
e
in
d
iv
id
u
al
s
p
re
fe
r
to
u
se
fo
lk
p
ra
ct
iti
o
n
er
H
o
m
e
re
m
ed
ie
s
R
el
ig
io
n
a
n
d
h
ea
lth
p
ra
ct
ic
es
in
te
rt
w
in
ed
N
o
n
tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
h
ea
le
r
(s
h
am
an
)
u
se
s
fo
lk
p
ra
ct
ic
es
t
o
h
ea
l
Sh
am
an
m
ay
w
o
rk
w
ith
m
o
d
er
n
m
ed
ic
al
p
ra
ct
iti
o
n
er
Tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
h
ea
lth
–
ca
re
d
el
iv
er
y
sy
st
em
So
m
e
p
re
fe
r
to
u
se
fo
lk
p
ra
ct
ic
es
(
e.
g.
,
yi
n
a
n
d
y
an
g,
h
er
b
al
m
ed
ic
in
e,
an
d
m
o
xi
b
u
st
io
n
)
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
C
ar
d
io
va
sc
u
la
r
d
is
ea
se
C
an
ce
r
D
ia
b
et
es
m
el
lit
u
s
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
C
ar
d
io
va
sc
u
la
r
d
is
ea
se
H
yp
er
te
n
si
o
n
Si
ck
le
c
el
l d
is
ea
se
D
ia
b
et
es
m
el
lit
u
s
La
ct
o
se
in
to
le
ra
n
ce
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
A
lc
o
h
o
lis
m
Tu
b
er
cu
lo
si
s
A
cc
id
en
ts
D
ia
b
et
es
m
el
lit
u
s
H
ea
rt
d
is
ea
se
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
H
yp
er
te
n
si
o
n
C
an
ce
r
D
ia
b
et
es
m
el
lit
u
s
Th
al
as
se
m
ia
La
ct
o
se
in
to
le
ra
n
ce
C
o
n
tin
u
ed
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 117
118 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Sp
an
is
h
, w
ith
m
an
y
d
ia
le
ct
s
A
ra
b
ic
En
gl
is
h
En
gl
is
h
, H
eb
re
w
,
Yi
d
d
is
h
C
lo
se
p
er
so
n
al
sp
ac
e
Lo
ts
o
f
to
u
ch
in
g
an
d
e
m
b
ra
ci
n
g
Ve
ry
g
ro
u
p
o
rie
n
te
d
La
rg
e
p
er
so
n
al
sp
ac
e
b
et
w
ee
n
m
em
b
er
s
o
f
th
e
o
p
p
o
si
te
g
en
d
er
o
u
ts
id
e
o
f
th
e
fa
m
ily
To
u
ch
in
g
co
m
m
o
n
b
et
w
ee
n
m
em
b
er
s
o
f
sa
m
e
ge
n
d
er
To
u
ch
f
o
rb
id
d
en
b
et
w
ee
n
o
p
p
o
si
te
g
en
–
d
er
s
in
t
h
e
O
rt
h
o
d
o
x
tr
ad
iti
o
n
C
lo
se
r
p
er
so
n
al
sp
ac
e
co
m
m
o
n
am
o
n
g
n
o
n
–
O
rt
h
o
d
o
x
Je
w
s
Fa
m
ili
es
:
N
u
cl
ea
r
an
d
la
rg
e
ex
–
te
n
d
ed
f
am
ili
es
St
ro
n
g
tie
s
to
R
o
m
an
C
at
h
o
lic
is
m
C
o
m
m
u
n
ity
s
o
ci
al
o
rg
an
iz
at
io
n
s
Fa
m
ili
es
:
N
u
cl
ea
r
an
d
e
xt
en
d
ed
R
el
ig
io
n
:
M
u
sl
im
an
d
C
h
ris
tia
n
ity
Fa
m
ili
es
:
N
u
cl
ea
r
an
d
e
xt
en
d
ed
C
o
m
m
u
n
ity
s
o
ci
al
o
rg
an
iz
at
io
n
s
P
re
se
n
t-
tim
e
o
rie
n
te
d
Pa
st
a
n
d
p
re
se
n
t-
tim
e
o
rie
n
te
d
Pa
st
, p
re
se
n
t-
tim
e,
a
n
d
fu
tu
re
o
rie
n
te
d
Tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
h
ea
lth
–
ca
re
d
el
iv
er
y
sy
st
em
So
m
e
p
re
fe
r
to
u
se
fo
lk
p
ra
ct
iti
o
n
er
,
ca
lle
d
c
u
ra
n
d
er
o
o
r
cu
ra
n
d
er
a
Fo
lk
p
ra
ct
ic
es
in
–
cl
u
d
e
h
o
t
an
d
co
ld
h
er
b
al
re
m
ed
ie
s
Tr
ad
iti
o
n
al
h
ea
lth
–
ca
re
d
el
iv
er
y
sy
st
em
A
u
th
o
rit
y
o
f
p
h
ys
i-
ci
an
is
s
el
d
o
m
ch
al
le
n
ge
d
o
r
q
u
es
tio
n
ed
A
d
ve
rs
e
o
u
tc
o
m
es
ar
e
at
tr
ib
u
te
d
t
o
G
o
d
’s
w
ill
M
en
ta
l i
lln
es
s
m
ay
b
e
vi
ew
ed
a
s
a
so
ci
al
s
tig
m
a
G
re
at
r
es
p
ec
t
fo
r
p
h
ys
ic
ia
n
s
Em
p
h
as
is
o
n
k
ee
p
–
in
g
b
o
d
y
an
d
m
in
d
h
ea
lth
y
P
ra
ct
ic
e
p
re
ve
n
tiv
e
h
ea
lth
c
ar
e
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
H
ea
rt
d
is
ea
se
C
an
ce
r
D
ia
b
et
es
m
el
lit
u
s
A
cc
id
en
ts
La
ct
o
se
in
to
le
ra
n
ce
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
Si
ck
le
c
el
l d
is
ea
se
Th
al
as
se
m
ia
C
ar
d
io
va
sc
u
la
r
d
is
ea
se
C
an
ce
r
H
ea
lth
c
o
n
ce
rn
s:
Ta
y-
Sa
ch
s
d
is
ea
se
G
au
ch
er
’s
d
is
ea
se
Fa
m
ili
al
d
ys
au
to
n
o
m
ia
U
lc
er
at
iv
e
co
lit
is
C
ro
h
n
’s
d
is
ea
se
C
o
lo
re
ct
al
c
an
ce
r
B
re
as
t
ca
n
ce
r
O
va
ria
n
c
an
ce
r
La
ti
n
o
A
m
er
ic
an
s
(M
ex
ic
o
, S
p
ai
n
, C
u
b
a,
P
u
er
to
R
ic
o
, o
th
er
co
u
n
tr
ie
s
o
f
C
en
tr
al
an
d
S
o
u
th
A
m
er
ic
a)
A
ra
b
A
m
er
ic
an
s
(A
lg
er
ia
, B
ah
ra
in
,
C
o
m
o
ro
s,
D
jib
o
u
ti,
Eg
yp
t,
Ira
q
, J
o
rd
an
,
K
u
w
ai
t,
Le
b
an
o
n
,
Li
b
ya
, M
au
rit
an
ia
,
M
o
ro
cc
o
, O
m
an
,
Pa
le
st
in
e,
Q
at
ar
,
Sa
u
d
i A
ra
b
ia
,
So
m
al
ia
, S
u
d
an
,
Sy
ria
, T
u
n
is
ia
,
U
n
ite
d
A
ra
b
Em
ira
te
s,
Y
em
en
)
Je
w
is
h
A
m
er
ic
an
s
(S
p
ai
n
, P
o
rt
u
ga
l,
G
er
m
an
y,
E
as
te
rn
Eu
ro
p
e)
SO
U
R
C
ES
:
G
ig
er
, J
.N
. (
2
0
1
7
).
T
ra
n
sc
u
ltu
ra
l n
u
rs
in
g
:
A
ss
es
sm
en
t
a
n
d
in
te
rv
en
tio
n
(7
th
e
d
.)
. S
t.
Lo
u
is
, M
O
:
M
o
sb
y;
M
u
rr
ay
, R
.B
.,
Ze
n
tn
er
, J
.P
.,
&
Y
ak
im
o
, R
. (
2
0
0
9
).
H
ea
lth
p
ro
m
o
tio
n
s
tr
a
te
g
ie
s
th
ro
u
g
h
t
h
e
lif
e
sp
a
n
(8
th
e
d
.)
. U
p
p
er
S
ad
d
le
R
iv
er
, N
J:
P
re
n
tic
e
H
al
l;
P
u
rn
el
l,
L.
D
. (
2
0
1
3
).
T
ra
n
sc
u
ltu
ra
l h
ea
lth
c
a
re
:
A
c
u
ltu
ra
lly
c
o
m
p
et
en
t
a
p
p
ro
a
ch
(
4
th
e
d
.)
. P
h
ila
d
el
p
h
ia
:
F.
A
. D
av
is
;
P
u
rn
el
l,
L.
D
.
(2
0
1
4
).
G
u
id
e
to
c
u
ltu
ra
lly
c
o
m
p
et
en
t
h
ea
lth
c
a
re
(3
rd
e
d
.)
. P
h
ila
d
el
p
h
ia
:
F.
A
. D
av
is
;
Sp
ec
to
r,
R
.E
. (
2
0
1
3
).
C
u
ltu
ra
l d
iv
er
si
ty
in
h
ea
lth
a
n
d
il
ln
es
s
(8
th
e
d
.)
. U
p
p
er
S
ad
d
le
R
iv
er
:
P
re
n
tic
e
H
al
l.
TA
B
L
E
6
–
1
Su
m
m
ar
y
of
S
ix
C
ul
tu
ra
l P
he
no
m
en
a
in
C
om
pa
ri
so
n
of
V
ar
io
us
C
ul
tu
ra
l G
ro
up
s—
co
nt
’d
CU
LT
U
RA
L
G
RO
U
P
AN
D
SO
CI
AL
EN
VI
RO
N
M
EN
TA
L
BI
O
LO
G
IC
AL
CO
U
N
TR
IE
S
O
F
O
RI
G
IN
CO
M
M
U
N
IC
AT
IO
N
SP
AC
E
O
RG
AN
IZ
AT
IO
N
TI
M
E
CO
N
TR
O
L
VA
RI
AT
IO
N
S
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 118
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 119
TA B L E 6 – 2 Examples of Cultural Syndromes
SYNDROME CULTURE SYMPTOMS
Amok
Ataque de nervios
Brain fag
Ghost sickness
Hwa-byung
Koro
Pibloktoq
Shenjing Shuairuo
(neurasthenia)
Shen-k’uei or Shenkui
Susto
Taijin kyofusho
SOURCES: Giger, J.N. (2017). Transcultural nursing: Assessment and intervention (7th ed.). St. Louis, MO: Mosby; Purnell, L.D. (2013).
Transcultural health care: A culturally competent approach (4th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis; Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015).
Synopsis of psychiatry: Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; Spector, R.E. (2013).
Cultural diversity in health and illness (8th ed.). Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall; Sue, D.W., & Sue, D. (2016). Counseling the culturally
diverse (7th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Malaysia, Laos, Philip-
pines, Polynesia, Papua
New Guinea, Puerto Rico,
and among the Navajo
(may be precipitated by
the perception that they
have been insulted in
some way)
Latin America, Latin
Caribbean, and Mediter-
ranean (often occurs in
response to a stressful
family event such as
death or divorce)
West Africa (usually occur-
ring in high school or
university students during
periods of academic
stress)
American Indian tribes
Korea (often attributed to
suppression of anger)
Southern and Eastern Asia
Eskimo cultures
China
Taiwan, China
Latin America
Japan
A state of depression followed by violent or homicidal
behavior and ending with a period of exhaustion,
somnolence, and amnesia; persecutory ideas are also
common
Uncontrollable shouting, crying, trembling, verbal or physi-
cal aggression, sometimes accompanied by dissocia-
tive experiences, seizure-like or fainting episodes, and
suicidal gestures
Difficulty concentrating, poor memory retention, pain and
pressure around head and neck, blurred vision; stu-
dents often complain of “brain fatigue”
Preoccupation with death and the deceased; symptoms
include anxiety, confusion, weakness, feelings of dan-
ger, anorexia, and bad dreams; sometimes associated
with witchcraft
Symptoms closely related to those of depression, includ-
ing insomnia, fatigue, indigestion, dysphoria, anorexia,
bodily aches, and loss of interest
Intense anxiety associated with fear that the penis
(in males) or the vulva and nipples (in females) will
retract into the body and cause the person to die
Sometimes called arctic hysteria, an abrupt episode of
extreme excitement, preceded by withdrawal or mild
irritability, and followed by seizure activity and coma.
During the attack the individual engages in aberrant
and bizarre verbal and motor behavior; afterward,
usually reports complete amnesia for the attack
Weakness, emotional excitement, nervous symptoms,
and sleep disturbances; this condition is featured in
the Chinese Classification of Mental Disorders under a
section called “other neuroses”
Panic anxiety and somatic symptoms; sexual dysfunctions
are common but without identified physical cause.
Attributed to fear of excessive semen loss related to
frequent sexual activity; semen is considered part of
one’s vital essence
Appetite and sleep disturbances, sadness, pains,
headache, stomachache, and diarrhea. The soul is
thought to leave the body (during dreams or following
a traumatic event), resulting in unhappiness and illness
Intense anxiety and fear about possibly offending others,
particularly with their body functions, appearance, or odor
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 119
interpreted differently by different cultures (e.g.,
Asians and American Indians may be uncomfort-
able with touch, whereas Latinos and Western
Europeans perceive touch as a sign of caring).
■ Make allowances for individuals from other
cultures to have family members around them
and even to participate in their care. Large num-
bers of extended family members are very impor-
tant to African Americans, American Indians,
Asian Americans, Latino Americans, and Western
European Americans. To deny access to these
family support systems could interfere with the
healing process.
■ Ensure that the individual’s spiritual needs are being
met. Religion is an important source of support for
many individuals, and the nurse must be tolerant of
various rituals that may be connected with different
cultural beliefs about health and illness.
■ Be aware of the differences in concept of time
among the various cultures. Most members of the
dominant American culture are future oriented
and place a high value on punctuality and effi-
ciency. Other cultures may be more present-time
oriented. Nurses must be aware that such individ-
uals may not share the value of punctuality. They
may be late to appointments and appear to be in-
different to some aspects of their therapy. Nurses
must be accepting of these differences and refrain
from allowing existing attitudes to interfere with
delivery of care.
■ Be aware of different beliefs about health care
among the various cultures, and recognize the
importance of these beliefs to the healing process.
If an individual from another culture has been
receiving health care from a spiritualist, curandero,
or other nontraditional healer, it is important for
the nurse to listen to what has been done in the
past and even to consult with these cultural healers
about the care being given to the client.
■ Follow the health-care practices the client views as
essential, provided they do no harm and do not
interfere with the healing process. For example,
the concepts of yin and yang and the hot and cold
theory of disease are very important to the well-
being of some Asians and Latinos, respectively.
Try to ensure that a balance of these foods are in-
cluded in the diet as an important reinforcement
for traditional medical care.
■ Be aware of favorite foods of individuals from differ-
ent cultures. The health-care setting may seem
strange and somewhat isolated, and for some indi-
viduals, it feels good to have anything around them
that is familiar. They may even refuse to eat unfamil-
iar foods. If it does not interfere with his or her care,
allow family members to provide favorite foods for
the client.
■ The nurse working in psychiatry must realize that
psychiatric illness is stigmatized in some cultures.
Individuals who believe that expressing emotions
is unacceptable will present unique problems as
clients in a psychiatric setting. Nurses must have
patience and work slowly to establish trust in
order to provide these individuals with the assis-
tance they require.
Evaluation
Evaluation of nursing actions is directed at achieve-
ment of the established outcomes. Part of the evalua-
tion process is continuous reassessment to ensure that
the selected actions are appropriate and the goals
and outcomes are realistic. Including the family and
extended support systems in the evaluation process is
essential if cultural implications of nursing care are
to be measured. Modifications to the plan of care are
made as the need is determined.
Spiritual Concepts
CORE CONCEPT
Spirituality
The human quality that gives meaning and sense of
purpose to an individual’s existence. Spirituality exists
within each individual regardless of belief system and
serves as a force for interconnectedness between the
self and others, the environment, and a higher power.
Spirituality is difficult to describe. Historically, it
has had distinctly religious connections, with a spiri-
tual person being described as “someone with whom
the Spirit of God dwelt.” Koenig (2012) describes
spirituality as distinguished by its connection to that
which is considered sacred and transcendent. He
identifies spirituality as connected to the supernatu-
ral, the mystical, and to organized religion but ex-
tending beyond and beginning before organized
religion. In other words, spirituality may be consid-
ered a quest for the transcendent that might lead to
staunch belief or nonbelief.
In the treatment of mental illness, some of the
earliest practices focused on spiritual treatment be-
cause insanity was considered a disruption of mind
and spirit (Reeves & Reynolds, 2009). However, Freud
(often described as a forefather of psychiatric treat-
ment) believed that religion had a negative effect on
mental health and that it was linked to a host of psy-
chiatric symptoms. Thus, religion and spiritually
have been avoided rather than embraced as a valu-
able aspect of treatment. More recently, the focus is
changing once again. Reeves and Reynolds (2009)
note that the large volume of contemporary research
120 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 120
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 121
(more than 60 studies) demonstrating the value
of spirituality for both medical and psychiatric pa-
tients is influencing this change. Nursing has em-
braced this new focus by the inclusion of nursing
responsibility for spiritual care in the International
Council of Nurses Code of Ethics and in the American
Holistic Nurses Association Standards for Holistic Nurs-
ing Practice. The inclusion of spiritual care is also
evidenced by two current NANDA International
nursing diagnoses: Spiritual distress and Readiness
for enhanced spiritual well-being (Herdman &
Kamitsuru, 2014).
Smucker (2001) stated:
Spirituality is the recognition or experience of a
dimension of life that is invisible, and both within us
and yet beyond our material world, providing a sense
of connectedness and interrelatedness with the uni-
verse. (p. 5)
Smucker (2001) identified the following five fac-
tors as types of spiritual needs associated with human
beings:
1. Meaning and purpose in life
2. Faith or trust in someone or something beyond
ourselves
3. Hope
4. Love
5. Forgiveness
Spiritual Needs
Meaning and Purpose in Life
Humans by nature appreciate order and structure in
their lives. Having a purpose in life gives one a sense
of control and the feeling that life is worth living.
Each nurse’s exploration of his or her own spirituality
and efforts to grow spiritually are foundational to
being responsive to those needs in others. Walsh
(1999) describes seven perennial practices that he
believes promote enlightenment, aid in transforma-
tion, and encourage spiritual growth:
1. Transform your motivation: Reduce craving and
find your soul’s desire.
2. Cultivate emotional wisdom: Heal your heart and
learn to love.
3. Live ethically: Feel good by doing good.
4. Concentrate and calm your mind: Accept the chal-
lenge of mastering attention and mindfulness.
5. Awaken your spiritual vision: See clearly and rec-
ognize the sacred in all things.
6. Cultivate spiritual intelligence: Develop wisdom
and understand life.
7. Express spirit in action: Embrace generosity and
the joy of service. (p. 14)
In the final analysis, each individual must deter-
mine his or her own perception of what is important
and what gives meaning to life. Throughout one’s ex-
istence, the meaning of life will undoubtedly be chal-
lenged many times. A solid spiritual foundation may
help an individual confront the challenges that result
from life’s experiences.
Faith
Faith is often thought of as the acceptance of a belief
in the absence of physical or empirical evidence.
Smucker (2001) stated:
For all people, faith is an important concept. From
childhood on, our psychological health depends on
having faith or trust in something or someone to help
meet our needs. (p. 7)
Having faith requires that individuals rise above
that which they can experience only through the five
senses. Faith transcends the appearance of the physi-
cal world. An increasing amount of medical and sci-
entific research is showing that what individuals
believe exists can have as powerful an impact as what
actually exists. Karren and associates (2010) stated:
[There is a] growing appreciation of the healing
power of faith among members of the medical com-
munity. Belief strongly impacts health outcomes, and
belief of a large majority of Americans is connected
to their religious commitments. Seventy-five percent
of Americans say that their religious faith forms the
foundation for their approach to life. Seventy-three
percent of Americans say that prayer is an important
part of their daily life. Religious belief provides power
for an individual. With such beliefs so prevalent, it is
no surprise that religious faith plays a significant role
in healing. (p. 360)
Evidence suggests that faith, combined with con-
ventional treatment and an optimistic attitude, can
be a very powerful element in the healing process.
Hope
Hope has been defined as a special kind of positive ex-
pectation (Karren, Smith, & Gordon, 2013). With
hope, individuals look at a situation, and no matter
how negative, find something positive on which to
focus. Hope functions as an energizing force. In addi-
tion, research indicates that hope may promote heal-
ing, facilitate coping, and enhance quality of life
(Enayati, 2013; Nekolaichuk, Jevne, & Maguire, 1999).
Kübler-Ross (1969), in her classic study of dying pa-
tients, stressed the importance of hope. She suggested
that even though these patients could not hope for a
cure, they could hope for additional time to live, to
be with loved ones, for freedom from pain, or for a
peaceful death with dignity. She found hope to be a
satisfaction unto itself, whether or not it was fulfilled.
She stated, “If a patient stops expressing hope, it is
usually a sign of imminent death” (p. 140).
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 121
Researchers in the field of psychoneuroimmunol-
ogy have found that the attitudes we have and the
emotions we experience have a definite effect on
the body. An optimistic feeling of hope is not just a
mental state. Hope and optimism produce positive
physical changes in the body that can influence the
immune system and the functioning of specific body
organs. The medical literature abounds with count-
less examples of individuals with terminal conditions
who suddenly improve when they find something
to live for. Conversely, there are many accounts of
patients whose conditions deteriorate when they
lose hope.
Love
Love may be identified as a projection of one’s own
good feelings onto others. To love others, one must
first experience love of self and then be able and will-
ing to project that warmth and affectionate concern
for others (Karren et al., 2013).
Smucker (2001) stated:
Love, in its purest unconditional form, is probably
life’s most powerful force and our greatest spiritual
need. Not only is it important to receive love, but
equally important to give love to others. Thinking
about and caring for the needs of others keeps us
from being too absorbed with ourselves and our
needs to the exclusion of others. We all have experi-
enced the good feelings that come from caring for
and loving others. (p. 10)
Love may be a very important key in the healing
process. Thaik, a cardiologist, states that love, as one
of many strong human emotions, releases a cascade
of hundreds or thousands of neuropeptides and hor-
mones that can affect physical and mental health
(2013). Among the beneficial effects, Thaik reports:
1. Love counteracts the fight-or-flight syndrome
and decreases production of the stress hormone
cortisol.
2. Love encourages the production of oxytocin, the
“feel good” hormone, which can reduce cardiovas-
cular stress and improve the immune system.
3. Love increases the production of norepinephrine
and dopamine and may stave off depression.
4. Love decreases inflammation, which affects im-
mune function and pain relief.
Some researchers suggest that love has a positive
effect on the immune system. This has been shown to
be true in adults and children and also in animals
(Fox & Fox, 1988; Ornish, 1998; Pace et al., 2009).
The giving and receiving of love may also result in
higher levels of endorphins, thereby contributing to
a sense of euphoria and helping to reduce pain.
In a classic long-term study, researchers Werner
and Smith (1992) studied children who were reared
in impoverished environments. Their homes were
troubled by discord, desertion, or divorce or were
marred by parental alcoholism or mental illness. The
participants were studied at birth, childhood, adoles-
cence, and adulthood. Two out of three of these high-
risk children had developed serious learning and/or
behavioral problems by age 10 or had a record of
delinquencies, mental health problems, or pregnan-
cies by age 18. A quarter of them had developed
“very serious” physical and psychosocial problems. By
the time they reached adulthood, more than three-
fourths of them suffered from profound psychologi-
cal and behavioral problems, and even more were in
poor physical health. But of particular interest to the
researchers were the 15 to 20 percent who remained
resilient and well despite their impoverished and dif-
ficult existence. These children had experienced a
warm and loving relationship with another person
during their first year of life, whereas the children
who developed serious psychological and physical
problems did not. This research indicates that the ear-
lier people have the benefit of a strong, loving rela-
tionship, the better they seem able to resist the effects
of a deleterious lifestyle.
Forgiveness
Forgiveness has been defined as the letting go of re-
sentments and thoughts of revenge (Mayo Clinic,
2014). Feelings of bitterness and resentment take a
physical toll on an individual by generating stress
hormones, which, when maintained for long periods,
can have a detrimental effect on health. Forgiveness
enables a person to cast off resentment and begin
the pathway to healing. Owen, as cited by Harrison
(2011), conducted research with patients who were
HIV positive to study the effects of forgiveness on the
immune system and found that forgiveness was cor-
related with improvements in immune function.
Forgiveness is not easy. Individuals often have great
difficulty when called upon to forgive others and even
greater difficulty in attempting to forgive themselves.
Many people carry throughout their lives a sense of
guilt for having committed a mistake for which they
do not believe they have been forgiven or for which
they have not forgiven themselves.
To forgive is not necessarily to condone or excuse
one’s own or someone else’s inappropriate behavior.
Karren and associates (2013) suggest that forgiveness
is an attitude of owning responsibility for one’s own
perceptions in order to move beyond the perception
of being a helpless victim to the perception of being
empowered in choosing one’s own responses to hurts
and offenses.
Holding on to grievances causes pain, suffering,
and conflict. Forgiveness (of self and others) is a
gift to oneself. It offers freedom and peace of mind.
122 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 122
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 123
Current research supports that spiritual issues such
as love and forgiveness are important to address not
only because of their impact on psychological and
spiritual healing but also because they are deeply
connected to neuroendocrine and immune system
healing.
It is important for nurses to be able to assess the
spiritual needs of their clients. Nurses need not serve
the role of professional counselor or spiritual guide,
but because of the closeness of their relationship with
clients, nurses may be the part of the health-care team
to whom clients may reveal the most intimate details
of their lives. Smucker (2001) stated:
Just as answering a patient’s question honestly and
with accurate information and responding to his
needs in a timely and sensitive manner communi-
cates caring, so also does high-quality professional
nursing care reach beyond the physical body or the
illness to that part of the person where identity, self-
worth, and spirit lie. In this sense, good nursing care
is also good spiritual care. (pp. 11–12)
Religion
Religion is one way an individual’s spirituality may
be expressed. There are more than 6500 religions in
the world (Bronson, 2005). Some individuals seek
out various religions in an attempt to find answers to
fundamental questions that they have about life and,
indeed, about their very existence. Others, although
they may regard themselves as spiritual, choose not
to affiliate with an organized religious group. In
either situation, however, it is inevitable that questions
related to life and the human condition arise during
the progression of spiritual maturation.
Brodd (2015) suggested that all religious traditions
manifest seven dimensions: experiential, mythic, doc-
trinal, ethical, ritual, social, and material. He explains
that these seven dimensions are intertwined and com-
plementary. Depending on the particular religion,
certain dimensions are emphasized more than others.
For example, Zen Buddhism has a strong experiential
dimension but says little about doctrines. Roman
Catholicism is strong in both ritual and doctrine. The
social dimension is a significant aspect of religion, as
it provides a sense of community from belonging to a
group such as a parish or a congregation, which is
empowering for some individuals.
Evidence supports that affiliation with a religious
group is a health-enhancing endeavor (Karren et al.,
2013). A number of studies indicate a correlation
between religious faith/church attendance and in-
creased chance of survival following serious illness,
fewer instances of depression and mental illness,
longer life, and overall better physical and mental
health. In an extensive review of the literature, Levin
(2010) concludes that the weight of the evidence
across studies suggests that religious involvement is
a generally protective factor for mental illness and
psychological distress.
It is unknown how religious participation protects
health and promotes well-being. Some churches
actively promote healthy lifestyles and discourage
behavior that would be harmful to health or would
interfere with treatment of disease. Graham and
Crown (2014) conducted a study to identify what
aspects of religion most contributed to happiness and
a sense of well-being. They found that those who
sought religion for social purpose (as opposed to so-
cial interaction) were happiest regardless of religious
affiliation or service attendance. Certainly, participa-
tion in religious activities also provides opportunities
for social interaction. Despite these findings, confi-
dence in organized religion and church attendance,
as previously discussed, has been showing a steady
decline in American society.
Addressing Spiritual and Religious Needs
Through the Nursing Process
Assessment
It is important for nurses to consider spiritual and
religious needs when planning care for their clients.
The Joint Commission requires that nurses address
the psychosocial, spiritual, and cultural variables that
influence the perception of illness. Dossey (1998) has
developed a spiritual assessment tool (Box 6–4) about
which she stated,
The Spiritual Assessment Tool provides reflective
questions for assessing, evaluating, and increasing
awareness of spirituality in patients and their signifi-
cant others. The tool’s reflective questions can facili-
tate healing because they stimulate spontaneous,
independent, meaningful initiatives to improve the
patient’s capacity for recovery and healing. (p. 45)
Assessing the spiritual needs of a client with a
psychotic disorder can pose some additional chal-
lenges. Approximately 25 percent of people with
schizophrenia and 15 to 22 percent of people with
bipolar disorder have religious delusions (Koenig,
2012). Sometimes these delusions can be difficult to
differentiate from general religious or cultural be-
liefs, but nonpsychotic religious activity may actually
CORE CONCEPT
Religion
A set of beliefs, values, rites, and rituals adopted by a
group of people. The practices are usually grounded in
the teachings of a spiritual leader.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 123
124 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
BOX 6–4 Spiritual Assessment Tool
The following reflective questions may assist you in assess-
ing, evaluating, and increasing awareness of spirituality in
yourself and others.
MEANING AND PURPOSE
These questions assess a person’s ability to seek meaning
and fulfillment in life, manifest hope, and accept ambiguity
and uncertainty.
• What gives your life meaning?
• Describe your sense of purpose in life.
• How does your illness affect your life goals?
• How hopeful are you about obtaining a better degree of
health?
• How would you describe your role in maintaining your
health?
• What kind of changes will you be able to make in your life
to maintain your health?
• Describe your level of motivation to get well.
• What is the most important or powerful thing in your life?
INNER STRENGTHS
These questions assess a person’s ability to manifest joy and
recognize strengths, choices, goals, and faith.
• What brings you joy and peace in your life?
• What can you do to feel alive and full of spirit?
• What traits do you like about yourself?
• What are your personal strengths?
• What choices are available to you to enhance your
healing?
• What life goals have you set for yourself?
• What do you think is the role of stress, if any, in your
illness?
• How aware were you of your body before you became
sick?
• What do you believe in?
• How has your illness influenced your faith?
• How important is faith in your overall health and sense of
well-being?
INTERCONNECTIONS
These questions assess a person’s positive self-concept, self-
esteem, and sense of self; sense of belonging in the world
with others; capacity to pursue personal interests; and ability
to demonstrate love of self and self-forgiveness.
• How do you feel about yourself right now?
• How do you feel when you have a true sense of
yourself?
• Describe any activities of personal interest that you
pursue.
• What do you do to show love for yourself?
• Can you forgive yourself?
• What do you do to heal your spirit?
RELATIONSHIPS
These questions assess a person’s ability to connect in
life-giving ways with family, friends, and social groups and to
engage in the forgiveness of others.
• Who are the significant people in your life?
• Who are your readily available, nearby, support people?
• Who are the people to whom you are closest?
• Describe any groups in which you are an active participant.
• How comfortable are you with asking people for help when
you need it?
• How comfortable are you with sharing your feelings with
others?
• What are some of the most loving things that others have
done for you?
• What are the loving things that you do for other people?
• What are your thoughts about forgiving others?
BEHAVIOR AND ACTIVITIES
These questions assess a person’s capacity for finding mean-
ing in worship or religious activities and a connectedness
with a divinity.
• How important is worship to you?
• What do you consider the most significant act of worship
in your life?
• Describe any religious activities in which you are an active
participant.
• Describe any spiritual activities, if any, that you find
meaningful.
• Do you find prayer meaningful?
• To whom do you turn for support?
• Describe any activities in which you engage for coping
and support.
• Describe any activities in which you have previously
engaged and have not found helpful.
ENVIRONMENT
These questions assess a person’s ability to experience a
sense of connection with life and nature, an awareness of
the effects of the environment on life and well-being, and a
capacity or concern for the health of the environment.
• How does your environment have an impact on your state
of well-being?
• What are your environmental stressors at work and at
home?
• What strategies reduce your environmental stressors?
• Do you have any concerns for the state of your immediate
environment?
• Are you involved with environmental issues such as recy-
cling environmental resources at home, work, or in your
community?
• Are you concerned about the survival of the planet?
SOURCES: Burkhardt, M.A. (1989). Spirituality: An analysis of the concept. Holistic Nursing Practice, 3(3), 69-77; Dossey, B.M., & American Holistic Nurses’
Association. (1995). Holistic nursing: A handbook for practice (2nd ed.). Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen. From Dossey, B.M. (1998). Holistic modalities and
healing moments, American Journal of Nursing, 98(6), 44-47, with permission.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 124
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 125
improve long-term prognosis in patients with psy-
chotic disorders (Koenig, 2012). Engaging family
members and significant others in the assessment
process can be a great help in determining which
religious beliefs and activities have been beneficial
to the patient and which have been detrimental to
their progress.
Diagnoses and Outcome Identification
Nursing diagnoses that may be used when addressing
spiritual and religious needs of clients include the
following:
■ Risk for spiritual distress
■ Spiritual distress
■ Readiness for enhanced spiritual well-being
■ Risk for impaired religiosity
■ Impaired religiosity
■ Readiness for enhanced religiosity
The following outcomes may be used as guidelines
for care and to evaluate effectiveness of the nursing
interventions.
The client:
■ Identifies meaning and purpose in life that rein-
force hope, peace, and contentment
■ Verbalizes acceptance of self as a worthwhile
human being
■ Accepts and incorporates change into life in a
healthy manner
■ Expresses understanding of relationship between
difficulties in current life situation and interrup-
tion in previous religious beliefs and activities
■ Discusses beliefs and values about spiritual and
religious issues
■ Expresses desire and ability to participate in beliefs
and activities of desired religion
Planning and Implementation
NANDA International information related to the
diagnoses Risk for spiritual distress and Risk for
impaired religiosity is provided in the subsections that
follow.
Risk for Spiritual Distress
Definition “Vulnerable to an impaired ability to expe-
rience and integrate meaning and purpose in life
through connectedness within self, literature, nature,
and/or a power greater than oneself which may
compromise health” (Herdman & Kamitsuru, 2014,
p. 374).
Risk factors
Physical: Physical/chronic illness; substance abuse
Psychosocial: Low self-esteem; depression; anxiety;
stress; poor relationships; separate from support
systems; blocks to experiencing love; inability to
forgive; loss; racial or cultural conflict; change in
religious rituals; change in spiritual practices
Developmental: Life changes
Environmental: Environmental changes; natural
disasters
Risk for Impaired Religiosity
Definition “Vulnerable to impaired ability to exercise
reliance on religious beliefs and/or participate
in rituals of a particular faith tradition which may
compromise health” (Herdman & Kamitsuru, 2014,
p. 371).
Risk factors
Physical: Illness/hospitalization; pain
Psychological: Ineffective support, coping, caregiving;
depression; lack of security
Sociocultural: Lack of social interaction; cultural
barrier to practicing religion; social isolation
Spiritual: Suffering
Environmental: Lack of transportation; environmen-
tal barriers to practicing religion
Developmental: Life transitions
A plan of care addressing client’s spiritual and/or
religious needs is presented in Table 6–3. Selected
nursing diagnoses are presented along with appro-
priate nursing interventions and rationales for
each.
Evaluation
Evaluation of nursing actions is directed at achieve-
ment of the established outcomes. Part of the evalua-
tion process is continuous reassessment to ensure that
the selected actions are appropriate and the goals and
outcomes are realistic. Including the family and
extended support systems in the evaluation process is
essential if spiritual and religious implications of nurs-
ing care are to be measured. Modifications to the plan
of care are made as the need is determined.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 125
126 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Table 6–3 | CARE PLAN FOR THE CLIENT WITH SPIRITUAL AND RELIGIOUS NEEDS*
NURSING DIAGNOSIS: RISK FOR SPIRITUAL DISTRESS
RELATED TO: Life changes; environmental changes; stress; anxiety; depression
OUTCOME CRITERIA NURSING INTERVENTIONS RATIONALE
Client identifies meaning
and purpose in life that rein-
force hope, peace, content-
ment, and self-satisfaction.
1. Assess current situation.
2. Listen to client’s expressions of
anger, concern, self-blame.
3. Note reason for living and
whether it is directly related to
situation.
4. Determine client’s religious
and/or spiritual orientation, cur-
rent involvement, and presence
of conflicts, especially in current
circumstances.
5. Assess sense of self-concept,
worth, ability to enter into loving
relationships.
6. Observe behavior indicative of
poor relationships with others.
7. Determine support systems avail-
able to and used by client and
significant others.
8. Assess substance use/abuse.
9. Establish an environment that
promotes free expression of feel-
ings and concerns.
10. Have client identify and prioritize
current/immediate needs.
11. Discuss philosophical issues
related to impact of current
situation on spiritual beliefs and
values.
12. Use therapeutic communication
skills of reflection and active
listening.
13. Review coping skills used and
their effectiveness in current
situation.
14. Provide a role model (e.g., nurse,
individual experiencing similar
situation).
1–8. Thorough assessment is neces-
sary to develop an accurate care
plan for the client.
9. Trust is the basis of a therapeutic
nurse-client relationship.
10. Helps client focus on what needs
to be done and identify manage-
able steps to take.
11. Helps client to understand that
certain life experiences can cause
individuals to question personal
values and that this response is
not uncommon.
12. Helps client find own solutions to
concerns.
13. Identifies strengths to incorporate
into plan and techniques that
need revision.
14. Sharing of experiences and hope
assists client to deal with reality.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 126
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 127
Continued
Table 6–3 | CARE PLAN FOR THE CLIENT WITH SPIRITUAL AND RELIGIOUS NEEDS*—cont’d
OUTCOME CRITERIA NURSING INTERVENTIONS RATIONALE
NURSING DIAGNOSIS: RISK FOR IMPAIRED RELIGIOSITY
RELATED TO: Suffering; depression; illness; life transitions
OUTCOME CRITERIA NURSING INTERVENTIONS RATIONALE
Client expresses achieve-
ment of support and
personal satisfaction from
spiritual and/or religious
practices.
15. Suggest use of journaling.
16. Discuss client’s interest in the
arts, music, literature.
17. Role-play new coping techniques.
Discuss possibilities of taking
classes, becoming involved in
discussion groups, cultural
activities of client’s choice.
18. Refer client to appropriate
resources for help.
15. Journaling can assist in clarifying
beliefs and values and in recog-
nizing and resolving feelings
about current life situation.
16. Provides insight into meaning of
these issues and how they are
integrated into an individual’s life.
17. These activities will help to
enhance integration of new skills
and necessary changes in client’s
lifestyle.
18. Client may require additional
assistance with an individual
who specializes in these types
of concerns.
1. Assess current situation (e.g., ill-
ness, hospitalization, prognosis of
death, presence of support sys-
tems, financial concerns).
2. Listen nonjudgmentally to client’s
expressions of anger and possible
belief that illness or condition may
be a result of lack of faith.
3. Determine client’s usual religious
and/or spiritual beliefs, current
involvement in specific church
activities.
4. Note quality of relationships with
significant others and friends.
5. Assess substance use/abuse.
6. Develop nurse-client relationship
in which individual can express
feelings and concerns freely.
7. Use therapeutic communication
skills of active listening, reflection,
and “I” messages.
1. This information identifies prob-
lems client is dealing with in the
moment that is affecting desire to
be involved with religious activities.
2. Individuals often blame themselves
for what has happened and
reject previous religious beliefs
and/or God.
3. This information is important back-
ground for establishing a database.
4. Individual may withdraw from
others in relation to the stress
of illness, pain, and suffering.
5. When in distress, individuals often
turn to use of various substances,
which can affect the ability to
deal with problems in a positive
manner.
6. Trust is the basis for a therapeutic
nurse-client relationship.
7. Helps client to find own solutions
to problems and concerns and
promotes sense of control.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 127
128 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Table 6–3 | CARE PLAN FOR THE CLIENT WITH SPIRITUAL AND RELIGIOUS NEEDS*—cont’d
OUTCOME CRITERIA NURSING INTERVENTIONS RATIONALE
8. Be accepting and nonjudgmental
when client expresses anger and
bitterness toward God. Stay with
the client.
9. Encourage client to discuss previ-
ous religious practices and how
these practices provided support
in the past.
10. Allow the client to take the lead in
initiating participation in religious
activities, such as prayer.
11. Contact spiritual leader of client’s
choice, if he or she requests.
8. The nurse’s presence and non-
judgmental attitude increase the
client’s feelings of self-worth and
promote trust in the relationship.
9. A nonjudgmental discussion of
previous sources of support may
help the client work through
current rejection of them as
potential sources of support.
10. Client may be vulnerable in
current situation and needs to
be allowed to decide own
resumption of these actions.
11. These individuals serve to provide
relief from spiritual distress and
often can do so when other
support persons cannot.
Summary and Key Points
■ Culture encompasses shared patterns of belief,
feeling, and knowledge that guide people’s con-
duct and are passed down from generation to
generation.
■ Some cultures, such as the dominant culture in
the United States, are described as individualistic
cultures and value independence, personal respon-
sibility, and freedom.
■ Cultures such as Latin American, Asian, and AI/AN
groups can be described as collectivistic cultures in
that they place a high value on interconnectedness
and interreliance on family, community, and/or
tribal affiliation.
■ Ethnic groups are tied together by a shared
heritage.
■ Cultural groups differ in terms of communication,
space, social organization, time, environmental
control, and biological variations.
■ America is often described as the melting pot of
cultural diversity. People of many different cultures
reside in the United States; some maintain tradi-
tional cultural practices, whereas others acculturate
to dominant cultural practices (give up cultural
practices or values as a result of contact with
another group) and assimilate by incorporating
practices and values of the dominant culture.
■ Northern European Americans are the descen-
dants of the first immigrants to the United States
and make up the current dominant cultural group.
They value punctuality, work responsibility, and a
healthy lifestyle.
■ Some African Americans trace their roots in the
United States to the days of slavery. Most have
large support systems and a strong religious ori-
entation. Many have assimilated into and have
many of the same characteristics as the dominant
culture.
■ Many American Indians and Alaska Natives still
live on reservations. They speak many different
languages and dialects. They often appear silent
and reserved, and many are uncomfortable with
touch and expressing emotions. Health care may
be delivered by a healer called a shaman.
■ Asian American languages are very diverse.
Touching during communication has historically
been considered unacceptable. Asian Americans
may have difficulty expressing emotions and ap-
pear cold and aloof. Family loyalty is empha-
sized. Psychiatric illness is viewed as behavior
that is out of control and brings shame on the
family.
■ Latino Americans are those who have origins in
Latin American countries but now reside in the
United States. Many can be referred to as Hispanic,
*The interventions for this care plan were adapted from Doenges, M.E., Moorhouse, M.F., & Murr, A.C. (2013). Nursing diagnosis manual:
Planning, individualizing, and documenting client care (4th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 128
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 129
which implies their primary language is Spanish.
Large family groups are important, and touch is
a common form of communication. The predomi-
nant religion is Roman Catholicism, and the church
is often a source of strength in times of crisis. Health
care may be delivered by a folk healer called a
curandero or a curandera, who uses various forms of
treatment to restore the body to a balanced state.
■ Arab Americans trace their ancestry and traditions
to the nomadic desert tribes of the Arabian Penin-
sula. Arabic is the official language of the Arab
world, and the dominant religion is Islam. Mental
illness is considered a social stigma, and symptoms
are often somaticized.
■ The Jewish people came to the United States pre-
dominantly from Spain, Portugal, Germany, and
Eastern Europe. Four main Jewish religious groups
exist today: Orthodox, Reform, Conservative, and
Reconstructionist. The primary language is English.
A high value is placed on education. Jewish
Americans are very health conscious and practice
preventive health care. The maintenance of one’s
mental health is considered just as important as
the maintenance of one’s physical health.
■ Cultural syndromes are clusters of physical and
behavioral symptoms considered as illnesses or
“afflictions” by specific cultures that do not read-
ily fit into the Western conventional diagnostic
categories.
■ Spirituality is the human quality that gives meaning
and sense of purpose to an individual’s existence.
■ Individuals possess a number of spiritual needs that
include meaning and purpose in life, faith or trust
in someone or something beyond themselves,
hope, love, and forgiveness.
■ Religion is a set of beliefs, values, rites, and rituals
adopted by a group of people.
■ Religion is one way in which an individual’s spiri-
tuality may be expressed.
■ Affiliation with a religious group has been shown
to be a health-enhancing endeavor.
■ Nurses must consider cultural, spiritual, and
religious needs when planning care for their
clients.
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. Miss Lee is an Asian American on the psychiatric unit. She tells the nurse, “I must have the hot ginger
root for my headache. It is the only thing that will help.” What cultural belief is likely associated with
Miss Lee’s request?
a. She is being obstinate and wants control over her care.
b. She believes that ginger root has magical qualities.
c. She subscribes to the restoration of health through the balance of yin and yang.
d. Asian Americans refuse to take traditional medicine for pain.
2. Miss Lee, an Asian American on the psychiatric unit, says she is afraid that no one from her family will
visit her. On what belief does Miss Lee base her statement?
a. Many Asian Americans do not believe in hospitals.
b. Many Asian Americans do not have close family support systems.
c. Many Asian Americans believe the body will heal itself if left alone.
d. Many Asian Americans view psychiatric problems as bringing shame to the family.
3. Joe, an American Indian, appears at the community health clinic with an oozing stasis ulcer on his
lower right leg. It is obviously infected, and he tells the nurse that the shaman has been treating it
with herbs. The nurse determines that Joe needs emergency care, but Joe states he will not go to the
emergency department (ED) unless the shaman is allowed to help treat him. How should the nurse
handle this situation?
a. Contact the shaman and have him meet them at the ED to consult with the attending physician.
b. Tell Joe that the shaman is not allowed in the ED.
c. Explain to Joe that the shaman is at fault for his leg being in the condition it is in now.
d. Have the shaman try to talk Joe into going to the ED without him.
Continued
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 129
130 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
4. Joe, an American Indian, goes to the emergency department (ED) because he has an oozing stasis
ulcer on his leg. He is accompanied by the tribal shaman, who has been treating Joe on the reservation.
As a greeting, the physician extends his hand to the shaman, who lightly touches the physician’s hand,
then quickly moves away. What cultural norm among American Indians most likely explains the
shaman’s behavior?
a. The shaman is snubbing the physician.
b. The shaman is angry at Joe for wanting to go to the ED.
c. The shaman does not believe in traditional medicine.
d. The shaman does not feel comfortable with touch.
5. Sarah is an African American woman who receives a visit from the psychiatric home health nurse. A referral
for a mental health assessment was made by the public health nurse, who noticed that Sarah was becoming
exceedingly withdrawn. When the psychiatric nurse arrives, Sarah says to her, “No one can help me. I was
an evil person in my youth, and now I must pay.” How might the nurse assess this statement?
a. Sarah is having delusions of persecution.
b. Some African Americans believe illness is God’s punishment for their sins.
c. Sarah is depressed and just wants to be left alone.
d. African Americans do not believe in psychiatric help.
6. Frank is a Latino American who has an appointment at the community health center for 1 p.m. The
nurse is angry when Frank shows up at 3:30 p.m. stating, “I was visiting with my brother.” How must
the nurse interpret this behavior?
a. Frank is being passive-aggressive by showing up late.
b. This is Frank’s way of defying authority.
c. Frank is a member of a cultural group that is present-time oriented.
d. Frank is a member of a cultural group that rejects traditional medicine.
7. The nurse must give Frank, a Latino American, a physical examination. She asks him to remove his
clothing and put on an examination gown. Frank refuses. What cultural norm among Latino Americans
most likely explains Frank’s response?
a. Frank does not believe in taking orders from a woman.
b. Frank is modest and embarrassed to remove his clothes.
c. Frank does not understand why he must remove his clothes.
d. Frank does not think he needs a physical examination.
8. Maria is an Italian American who is in the hospital after having suffered a miscarriage at 5 months’
gestation. Her room is filled with relatives who have brought a variety of foods and gifts for Maria.
They are all talking, seemingly at the same time, and some, including Maria, are crying. They repeatedly
touch and hug Maria and each other. How should the nurse handle this situation?
a. Explain to the family that Maria needs her rest and they must all leave.
b. Allow the family to remain and continue their activity as described, as long as they do not disturb
other clients.
c. Explain that Maria will not get over her loss if they keep bringing it up and causing her to cry so much.
d. Call the family priest to come and take charge of this family situation.
9. Mark, who has come to the mental health clinic with symptoms of depression, says to the nurse,
“My father is dying. I have always hated my father. He physically abused me when I was a child. We
haven’t spoken for many years. He wants to see me now, but I don’t know if I want to see him.” With
which spiritual need is Joe struggling?
a. Forgiveness
b. Faith
c. Hope
d. Meaning and purpose in life
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 130
C H A P T E R 6 ■ Cultural and Spiritual Concepts Relevant to Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 131
References
Alegria, M., Canino, G,. Shrout, P.E., Woo, M. Duan, N., Vila, D.,
& Meng, X.L. (2008). Prevalence of mental illness in immi-
grant and non-immigrant U.S. Latino groups. American
Journal of Psychiatry, 165(3), 359-369. doi:10.1176/appi.ajp.
2007.07040704
Alegria, M., Mulvaney-Day, N., Torres, M., Polo, A., Cao, Z., &
Canino, G. (2007). Prevalence of psychiatric disorders across
Latino subgroups in the United States. American Journal of
Public Health, 97(1), 68-75. doi:10.2105/AJPH.2006.087205
Beane, M. (no date). An adventure in American culture and
values. International Student Guide to the United States of America.
Retrieved from www.internationalstudentguidetotheusa.com/
articles/culture.htm
Bralock, A.R., & Padgham, C.S. (2017). Jewish Americans. In J.N.
Giger (Ed.), Transcultural nursing: Assessment & intervention
(7th ed., pp. 511-533). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Brodd, J. (2015). World religions: A voyage of discovery (4th ed.).
Winona, MN: Saint Mary’s Press.
Bronson, M. (2005). Why are there so many religions? Retrieved
from www.biblehelp.org/relig.htm
Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA). (2016). Who we are. Retrieved
from www.indianaffairs.gov/WhoWeAre/index.htm
Burkhardt, M.A. (1989). Spirituality: An analysis of the concept.
Holistic Nursing Practice, 3(3), 69-77.
Centers for Disease Control (CDC). (2015a). National marriage
and divorce rates and trends. Retrieved from www.cdc.gov/
nchs/nvss/marriage_divorce_tables.htm
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). (2015b).
High school youth risk behavior survey data (1991–2015).
Retrieved from http://nccd.cdc.gov/youthonline
Chang, K. (2017). Chinese Americans. In J.N. Giger (Ed.),
Transcultural nursing: Assessment and intervention (7th ed.,
pp. 388-407). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Cherry, B., & Giger, J.N. (2013). African-Americans. In J.N. Giger
(Ed.), Transcultural nursing: Assessment and intervention
(6th ed., pp. 162-206). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Countries & Their Cultures Forum. (2017). United States of
America. Retrieved from www.everyculture.com/To-Z/
United-States-of-America.html
Doenges, M.E., Moorhouse, M.F., & Murr, A.C. (2013). Nursing
diagnosis manual: Planning, individualizing, and documenting
client care (4th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Dossey, B.M. (1998). Holistic modalities and healing moments.
American Journal of Nursing, 98(6), 44-47.
Dossey, B.M., & American Holistic Nurses’ Association. (1995).
Holistic nursing: A handbook for practice (2nd ed.). Gaithersburg,
MD: Aspen.
Enayati, A. (2013). How hope can help you heal. Retrieved from
www.cnn.com/2013/04/11/health/hope-healing-enayati
Gallup. (2015). Religion. Retrieved from www.gallup.com/poll/
1690/religion.aspx
Garcia-Navarro, L. (2015). Hispanic or Latino? A guide for the
U.S. presidential campaign. Retrieved from www.npr.org/
sections/parallels/2015/08/27/434584260/hispanic-or-
latino-a-guide-for-the-u-s-presidential-campaign
Giger, J.N. (2017). Transcultural nursing: Assessment and interven-
tion (7th ed.). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Gorman, L. M., & Sultan, D. (2008). Psychosocial nursing for general
patient care, Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Graham, C., & Crown, S. (2014). Religion and well-being around
the world: Social purpose, social time, or social insurance?
International Journal of Well-Being, 4(1), 1-27. doi:10.5502/
ijw.v4i1.1
Hanley, C.E. (2017). Navajos. In J.N. Giger (Ed.), Transcultural
nursing: Assessment and intervention (7th ed., pp. 242-261).
St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Harrison, P. (2011). Forgiveness can improve immune function.
Retrieved from www.medscape.com/viewarticle/742198
Herdman, T.H., & Kamitsuru, S. (Eds.). (2014). NANDA-I nursing
diagnoses: Definitions and classification, 2015–2017. Oxford:
Wiley Blackwell.
Indian Health Service (IHS). (2015). Behavioral health. Re-
trieved from https://www.ihs.gov/newsroom/factsheets/
behavioralhealth
Karren, K.J., Hafen, B.Q., Smith, N.L., & Jenkins, K.J. (2010).
Mind/body health: The effects of attitudes, emotions, and relation-
ships (4th ed.). San Francisco, CA: Benjamin Cummings.
Karren, K.J., Smith, N.L., & Gordon, K. (2013). Mind/body health:
The effects of attitudes, emotions, and relationships (5th ed.). San
Francisco: Pearson.
Koenig, H.G. (2012). Religion, spirituality, and health: The
research and clinical implications. International Scholarly
Research Notices, 2012. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.5402/2012/
278730
Kulwicki, A.D., & Ballout, S. (2013). People of Arab heritage. In
L.D. Purnell (Ed.), Transcultural health care: A culturally compe-
tent approach (4th ed., pp. 159-177). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Kuo, P.Y., & Roysircar-Sodowsky, G. (2000). Political ethnic
identity versus cultural ethnic identity: An understanding
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
10. As a child, Joe was physically abused by his father. The father is now dying and has expressed a desire
to see his son before he dies. Joe is depressed and says to the mental health nurse, “I’m so angry!
Why did God have to give me a father like this? I feel cheated of a father! I’ve always been a good
person. I deserved better. I hate God!” From this subjective data, which nursing diagnosis might the
nurse apply to Joe?
a. Readiness for enhanced religiosity
b. Risk for impaired religiosity
c. Readiness for enhanced spiritual well-being
d. Spiritual distress
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 131
132 U N I T 2 ■ Foundations for Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
of research on Asian Americans. In D.S. Sandhu (Ed.),
Asian and Pacific Islander Americans: Issues and concerns for
counseling and psychotherapy. Hauppauge, NY: Nova Science
Publishers.
Levin, J. (2010). Religion and mental health: Theory and re-
search. International Journal of Applied Psychoanalytic Studies.
doi:10.1002/aps.240
Lipka, M. (2013). What surveys say about worship attendance—
And why some stay home. Retrieved from www.pewresearch.
org/fact-tank/2013/09/13/what-surveys-say-about-worship-
attendance-and-why-some-stay-home
Mayo Clinic. (2014). Forgiveness: Letting go of grudges and
bitterness. Retrieved from www.mayoclinic.org/healthy-
lifestyle/adult-health/in-depth/forgiveness/art-20047692
McMurry, L., Song, H., Owen, D.C., Gonzalez, E.W., & Esperat,
C.R. (2017). Mexican Americans. In J.N. Giger (Ed.).
Transcultural nursing: Assessment and intervention (6th ed.,
pp. 208-241). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Murray, R.B., Zentner, J.P., & Yakimo, R. (2009). Health promotion
strategies through the life span (8th ed.). Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Prentice Hall.
Pace, T.W., Negi, T.L., Adame, D.D., Cole, S.P., Sivilli, T.I.,
Brown, T.D., . . . Raison, C.L. (2009). Effect of compassion
meditation on neuroendocrine, innate immune and behav-
ioral responses to psychosocial stress. Psychoneuroendocrinology,
34(1), 87-98. doi:10.1016/j.psyneuen.2008.08.011
Pew Research Center. (2015). America’s changing religious land-
scape. Retrieved from www.pewforum.org/2015/05/12/
americas-changing-religious-landscape
Purnell, L.D. (2013). Transcultural health care: A culturally competent
approach (4th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Purnell, L.D. (2014). Guide to culturally competent health care
(3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Reeves, R., & Reynolds, M. (2009). What is the role of spirituality
in mental health treatment. Journal of Psychosocial Nursing,
54(5), 8-9. doi:10.3928/02793695-20090301-05
Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Synopsis of psychiatry:
Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Selekman, J. (2013). People of Jewish heritage. In L.D. Purnell
(Ed.), Transcultural health care: A culturally competent approach
(4th ed., pp. 339-356). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Smucker, C.J. (2001). Overview of nursing the spirit. In D.L.
Wilt & C.J. Smucker (Eds.), Nursing the spirit: The art and
science of applying spiritual care (pp. 1-18). Washington, DC:
American Nurses Publishing.
Spector, R.E. (2013). Cultural diversity in health and illness
(8th ed.). Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Sue, D.W., & Sue, D. (2016). Counseling the culturally diverse
(7th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Thaik, C. (2013). Love heals! Retrieved from www.huffingtonpost.
om/dr-cynthia-thaik/love-health-benefits_b_3131370.html
U.S. Census Bureau. (2013). Race. Retrieved from www.
census.gov/topics/population/race/about.html
U.S. Census Bureau. (2015). American families and living
arrangements: 2015: Households. Retrieved from www.
census.gov/hhes/families/data/cps2015H.html
U.S. Census Bureau. (2016). 2010–2014 American Community
Survey 5-year estimates. Retrieved from http://factfinder.
census.gov/faces/tableservices/jsf/pages/productview.
xhtml?pid=ACS_14_5YR_DP05&src=pt
U.S. Department of Agriculture. (2015). Food distribution
program on Indian reservations. Retrieved from www.fns.
usda.gov/fdd/programs/fdpir/about_fdpir.htm
Zimmerman, K.A. (2015). American culture: Traditions and
customs of the United States. Live Science. Retrieved from
www.livescience.com/28945-american-culture.html
Classical References
Fox, A. & Fox, B. (1988). Wake up! You’re alive. Deerfield Beach,
FL: Health Communications.
Hall, E.T. (1966). The hidden dimension. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.
Kübler-Ross, E. (1969). On death and dying. New York: Macmillan.
Nekolaichuk, C.L., Jevne, R.F., & Maguire, T.O. (1999). Structur-
ing the meaning of hope in health and illness. Social Science
and Medicine, 48(5), 591-605. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/
S0277-9536(98)00348-7
Ornish, D. (1998). Love and survival: Eight pathways to intimacy and
health. New York: Harper Perennial.
Wall, T.L., Peterson, C.M., Peterson, K.P., Johnson, M.L.,
Thomasson, H.R., Cole, M., & Ehlers, C.L. (1997). Alcohol
metabolism in Asian-American men with genetic polymor-
phisms of aldehyde dehydrogenase. Annals of Internal
Medicine, 127:376-379.
Walsh, R. (1999). Essential spirituality. New York: Wiley.
Werner, E.E., & Smith, R.S. (1992). Overcoming the odds: High risk
children from birth to adulthood. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University
Press.
6054_Ch06_105-132 11/09/17 10:07 AM Page 132
U N I T 3
Therapeutic
Approaches
in Psychiatric
Nursing Care
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 133
7 Relationship Development
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Role of the Psychiatric Nurse
Dynamics of a Therapeutic Nurse-Client
Relationship
Conditions Essential to Development of a
Therapeutic Relationship
Phases of a Therapeutic Nurse-Client
Relationship
Boundaries in the Nurse-Client Relationship
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
attitude
belief
concrete thinking
confidentiality
countertransference
empathy
genuineness
rapport
sympathy
transference
unconditional positive regard
values
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Describe the relevance of a therapeutic
nurse-client relationship.
2. Discuss the dynamics of a therapeutic nurse-
client relationship.
3. Discuss the importance of self-awareness in
the nurse-client relationship.
4. Identify goals of the nurse-client relationship.
5. Identify and discuss essential conditions for a
therapeutic relationship to occur.
6. Describe the phases of relationship develop-
ment and the tasks associated with each
phase.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. When the nurse’s verbal and nonverbal inter-
actions are congruent, he or she is thought
to be expressing which characteristic of a
therapeutic relationship?
2. During which phase of the nurse-client rela-
tionship do each of the following occur:
a. The nurse may become angry and anxious
in the presence of the client.
b. A plan of action for dealing with stress is
established.
c. The nurse examines personal feelings
about working with the client.
d. Nurse and client establish goals of care.
3. What is the goal of using the Johari Window?
4. How do sympathy and empathy differ?
5. Write a one-page journal entry reflecting on
patterns you notice in your relationships with
others. How might you use this awareness in
developing therapeutic relationship skills?
CORE CONCEPTS
Therapeutic
Relationship
134
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 134
The nurse-client relationship is the foundation on
which psychiatric nursing is established. It is a rela-
tionship in which both participants must recognize
each other as unique and important human beings.
It is also a relationship in which mutual learning
occurs. In today’s health-care environment, patient-
centered care is promoted as central to quality and
safety, and the therapeutic relationship remains
at the foundation of this tenet. Concepts that were
advanced over 60 years ago (by Hildegard Peplau in
1952) and have been the core of nursing practice to
the present day are now recognized by the larger
medical community as not only still relevant but crit-
ical to improving quality and safety in the future of
health care. Peplau (1991) stated:
Shall a nurse do things for a patient or can participant
relationships be emphasized so that a nurse comes to
do things with a patient as her share of an agenda of
work to be accomplished in reaching a goal—health.
It is likely that the nursing process is educative and thera-
peutic when nurse and patient can come to know and to
respect each other, as persons who are alike, and yet, different,
as persons who share in the solution of problems. (p. 9,
emphasis in original)
This chapter examines the role of the psychiatric
nurse and the use of self as the therapeutic tool in
the nursing care of clients with mental illness. Phases
of the therapeutic relationship are explored, and
conditions essential to the development of a thera-
peutic relationship are discussed. The importance
of values clarification in the development of self-
awareness is emphasized.
custodial caregiver and physician’s handmaiden to
recognition as a unique, independent member of the
professional health-care team.
Peplau (1991) identified several subroles within
the nursing role:
1. The stranger: A nurse is at first a stranger to the
client. The client is also a stranger to the nurse.
Peplau (1991) stated:
Respect and positive interest accorded a stranger is
at first nonpersonal and includes the same ordinary
courtesies that are accorded to a new guest who has
been brought into any situation. This principle im-
plies: (1) accepting the patient as he is; (2) treating
the patient as an emotionally able stranger and relat-
ing to him on this basis until evidence shows him to
be otherwise. (p. 44)
2. The resource person: According to Peplau, “A re-
source person provides specific answers to ques-
tions usually formulated with relation to a larger
problem” (p. 47). In the role of resource person,
the nurse explains, in language that the client can
understand, information related to the client’s
health care.
3. The teacher: In this subrole, the nurse identifies
learning needs and provides information required by
the client or family to improve the health situation.
4. The leader: According to Peplau, “Democratic
leadership in nursing situations implies that the
patient will be permitted to be an active partici-
pant in designing nursing plans for him” (p. 49).
Autocratic leadership promotes overvaluation of
the nurse and clients’ substitution of the nurse’s
goals for their own. Laissez-faire leaders convey a
lack of personal interest in the client.
5. The surrogate: Outside of their awareness, clients
often perceive nurses as symbols of other individ-
uals. They may view the nurse as a mother figure,
a sibling, a former teacher, or another nurse who
has provided care in the past. This perception
occurs when a client is placed in a situation that
generates feelings similar to ones he or she has ex-
perienced previously. Peplau (1991) explained
that the nurse-client relationship progresses along
a continuum. When a client is acutely ill, he or she
may incur the role of infant or child, while the
nurse is perceived as the mother surrogate. Peplau
(1991) stated, “Each nurse has the responsibility
for exercising her professional skill in aiding the
relationship to move forward on the continuum,
so that person to person relations compatible with
chronological age levels can develop” (p. 55).
6. The technical expert: The nurse understands var-
ious professional devices and possesses the clinical
skills necessary to perform interventions that are
in the best interest of the client.
C H A P T E R 7 ■ Relationship Development 135
CORE CONCEPT
Therapeutic Relationship
An interaction between two people (usually a caregiver
and a care receiver) in which input from both partici-
pants contributes to a climate of healing, growth
promotion, and/or illness prevention.
Role of the Psychiatric Nurse
What is a nurse? Undoubtedly, this question would
elicit as many different answers as the number of peo-
ple to whom it was presented. Nursing as a concept has
probably existed since the beginning of the civilized
world, with the provision of “care” for the ill or infirm
by anyone in the environment who took the time to
administer to those in need. However, the emergence
of nursing as a profession only began in the late 1800s
with the graduation of Linda Richards from the New
England Hospital for Women and Children in Boston
upon achievement of the diploma in nursing. Since
that time, the nurse’s role has evolved from that of
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 135
7. The counselor: The nurse uses “interpersonal tech-
niques” to assist clients in adapting to difficulties or
changes in life experiences. Peplau (1991) stated,
“Counseling in nursing has to do with helping the
patient to remember and to understand fully what
is happening to him in the present situation, so that
the experience can be integrated with, rather than
dissociated from, other experiences in life” (p. 64).
Peplau (1962) believed that the emphasis in psy-
chiatric nursing is on the counseling subrole. How
then does this emphasis influence the role of the
nurse in the psychiatric setting? Many sources define
the nurse therapist as a person with graduate prepara-
tion in psychiatric-mental health nursing. He or she
has developed skills through intensive, supervised ed-
ucational experiences to provide helpful individual,
group, or family therapy.
Peplau suggested that it is essential for the staff nurse
working in psychiatry to have a general knowledge of
basic counseling techniques. A therapeutic or “help-
ing” relationship is established through use of these
interpersonal techniques and is based on a sound
knowledge of theories of personality development and
human behavior.
Sullivan (1953) believed that emotional problems
stem from difficulties with interpersonal relation-
ships. Interpersonal theorists, such as Peplau and
Sullivan, emphasize the importance of relationship
development in the provision of emotional care.
Through establishment of a satisfactory nurse-client
relationship, individuals learn to generalize the ability
to achieve satisfactory interpersonal relationships to
other aspects of their lives.
Dynamics of a Therapeutic Nurse-Client
Relationship
Travelbee (1971), who expanded on Peplau’s theory
of interpersonal relations in nursing, stated that only
when each individual in the interaction perceives
the other as a unique human being is a relationship
possible. She refers not to a nurse-client relationship
but rather to a human-to-human relationship, which
she describes as a “mutually significant experience.”
That is, both the nurse and the recipient of care
have needs met when each views the other as a
unique human being, not as “an illness,” as “a room
number,” or as “all nurses” in general.
Therapeutic relationships are goal oriented. Ide-
ally, the nurse and client decide together what the
goal of the relationship will be. Most often, the goal
is promotion of learning and growth in an effort to
bring about change in the client’s life. In general, the
goal of a therapeutic relationship may be based on a
problem-solving model.
EXAMPLE
Goal
The client will demonstrate more adaptive coping strategies
for dealing with (specific life situation).
Interventions
■ Identify what is troubling the client at the present time.
■ Encourage the client to discuss changes he or she would
like to make.
■ Discuss with the client which changes are possible and
which are not possible.
■ Have the client explore feelings about aspects of his or
her life that cannot be changed and alternative ways of
coping more adaptively.
■ Discuss alternative strategies for creating changes the
client desires to make.
■ Weigh the benefits and consequences of each alternative.
■ Assist the client to select an alternative.
■ Encourage the client to implement the change.
■ Provide positive feedback for the client’s attempts to
create change.
■ Assist the client to evaluate outcomes of the change and
make modifications as required.
Therapeutic Use of Self
Travelbee (1971) described the instrument for deliv-
ery of interpersonal nursing as the therapeutic use
of self, which she defined as “the ability to use one’s
personality consciously and in full awareness in an at-
tempt to establish relatedness and to structure nurs-
ing intervention” (p. 19).
Use of the self in a therapeutic manner requires that
the nurse have a great deal of self-awareness and self-
understanding, having arrived at a philosophical belief
about life, death, and the overall human condition.
The nurse must understand that the ability to and the
extent to which one can effectively help others in time
of need is strongly influenced by this internal value
system—a combination of intellect and emotions.
Gaining Self-Awareness
Values Clarification
Knowing and understanding oneself enhances the abil-
ity to form satisfactory interpersonal relationships. Self-
awareness requires that an individual recognize and
accept what he or she values and learn to accept the
uniqueness of and differences in others. This concept
is important in everyday life and in the nursing profes-
sion in general, but it is essential in psychiatric nursing.
An individual’s value system is established very early
in life and has its foundations in the value system held
by the primary caregivers. It is culturally oriented;
consists of beliefs, attitudes, and values; and may
change many times over the course of a lifetime. Val-
ues clarification is one process by which an individual
may gain self-awareness.
136 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 136
Beliefs
A belief is an idea that one holds true, and it can take
any of several forms:
■ Rational beliefs are ideas for which objective evi-
dence exists to substantiate their truth.
EXAMPLE
Alcoholism is a disease.
■ Irrational beliefs are ideas that an individual holds as
true despite the existence of objective contradic-
tory evidence. Delusions can be a form of irrational
beliefs.
EXAMPLE
Once an alcoholic has been through detoxification and
rehabilitation, he or she can drink socially if desired.
■ Faith (sometimes called blind beliefs) is a belief in
something or someone that does not require
proof.
EXAMPLE
Belief in a higher power can help an alcoholic stop drinking.
■ Stereotype is a socially shared belief that describes a
concept in an oversimplified or undifferentiated
matter.
EXAMPLE
All alcoholics are skid-row bums.
Attitudes
An attitude is a frame of reference around which an
individual organizes knowledge about his or her
world. An attitude also has an emotional compo-
nent. It can be a prejudgment and may be selective
and biased. Attitudes fulfill the need to find mean-
ing in life and to provide clarity and consistency for
the individual. The prevailing stigma attached to
mental illness is an example of a negative attitude.
An associated belief might be that “all people with
mental illness are dangerous.”
Values
Values are abstract standards, positive or negative,
that represent an individual’s ideal mode of conduct
and ideal goals. Examples of ideal modes of conduct
include seeking truth and beauty; being clean and
orderly; and behaving with sincerity, justice, reason,
compassion, humility, respect, honor, and loyalty. Ex-
amples of ideal goals are security, happiness, freedom,
equality, ecstasy, fame, and power.
Values differ from attitudes and beliefs in that they
are action oriented or action producing. One may
hold many attitudes and beliefs without behaving in
a way that shows they hold those attitudes and beliefs.
For example, a nurse may believe that all clients have
the right to be told the truth about their diagnosis;
however, he or she may not always act on the belief
by telling all clients the complete truth about their
conditions. Only when the belief is acted on does it
become a value.
Attitudes and beliefs flow out of one’s set of values.
An individual may have thousands of beliefs and hun-
dreds of attitudes, but his or her values probably num-
ber only in the dozens. Values may be viewed as a kind
of core concept or basic standard that determines
one’s attitudes, beliefs, and ultimately, behavior. Raths,
Harmin, and Simon (1978) identified a seven-step
process of valuing that can be used to help clarify per-
sonal values. This process is presented in Table 7–1.
The process can be used by applying these seven steps
to an attitude or belief that one holds. When an atti-
tude or belief has met each of the seven criteria, it can
be considered a value.
C H A P T E R 7 ■ Relationship Development 137
TA B L E 7 – 1 The Process of Values Clarification
LEVEL OF OPERATIONS
Cognitive
Emotional
Behavioral
CATEGORY
Choosing
Prizing
Acting
CRITERIA
1. Freely
2. From alternatives
3. After careful consideration of
the consequences
4. Satisfied; pleased with the
choice
5. Making public affirmation of
the choice, if necessary
6. Taking action to demonstrate
the value behaviorally
7. Demonstrating this pattern
of behavior consistently and
repeatedly
EXPLANATION
“This value is mine. No one forced
me to choose it. I understand and
accept the consequences of holding
this value.”
“I am proud that I hold this value, and
I am willing to tell others about it.”
The value is reflected in the individ-
ual’s behavior for as long as he or she
holds it.
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 137
The Johari Window
The self arises out of self-appraisal and the appraisal
of others. It represents each individual’s unique pat-
tern of values, attitudes, beliefs, behaviors, emotions,
and needs. Self-awareness is the recognition of these
aspects and understanding about their impact on the
self and others. The Johari Window, presented in
Figure 7–1, is a representation of the self and a tool
that can be used to increase self-awareness (Luft,
1970). The Johari Window is divided into four quad-
rants (four aspects of the self): the open self, the un-
knowing self, the private self, and the unknown self.
The Open or Public Self
The upper-left quadrant of the window represents the
part of the self that is public; that is, aspects of the self
about which both the individual and others are aware.
EXAMPLE
Susan, a nurse who is the adult child of an alcoholic, has
strong feelings about helping alcoholics to achieve sobriety.
She volunteers her time as a support person on call to help
recovering alcoholics. She is aware of her feelings and her
desire to help others. Members of the Alcoholics Anonymous
group in which she volunteers her time are also aware of
Susan’s feelings, and they feel comfortable calling her when
they need help with refraining from drinking.
The Unknowing Self
The upper-right quadrant of the window represents
the part of the self that is known to others but remains
hidden from the awareness of the individual.
EXAMPLE
When Susan takes care of patients in detoxification, she does
so without emotion, tending to the technical aspects of the task
in a way that the patients perceive as cold and judgmental. She
is unaware that she comes across to patients in this way.
The Private Self
The lower-left quadrant of the window represents the
part of the self that is known to the individual but
which the individual deliberately and consciously con-
ceals from others.
EXAMPLE
Susan would prefer not to take care of the clients in detoxi-
fication because doing so provokes painful memories from
her childhood. However, because she does not want the
other staff members to know about these feelings, she
volunteers to take care of the detoxification clients whenever
they are assigned to her unit.
The Unknown Self
The lower-right quadrant of the window represents
the part of the self that is unknown to both the indi-
vidual and to others.
EXAMPLE
Susan felt very powerless as a child growing up with an
alcoholic father. She seldom knew in what condition she
would find her father or what his behavior would be. She
learned over the years to find small ways to maintain control
over her life situation, and she left home as soon as she
graduated from high school. The need to stay in control has
always been very important to Susan, and she is unaware
that working with recovering alcoholics helps to fulfill this
need. The people she is helping are also unaware that Susan
is satisfying an unfulfilled personal need as she provides
them with assistance.
The goal of increasing self-awareness by using the Johari
Window is to increase the size of the quadrant that represents
138 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Known to Self Unknown to Self
Known to
Others
Unknown to
Others
The open or
public self
The unknowing
self
The unknown
self
The private
self
FIGURE 7–1 The Johari window.
(From Luft, J. [1970]. Group processes:
An introduction to group dynamics [3rd
ed.]. Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield Publishing,
1984, with permission.)
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 138
the open or public self. The individual who is open to self
and others has the ability to be spontaneous and to share
emotions and experiences with others. This individual also
has a greater understanding of personal behavior and of
others’ responses to him or her. Increased self-awareness
allows an individual to interact comfortably with others, to
accept the differences in others, and to observe each person’s
right to respect and dignity.
Conditions Essential to Development
of a Therapeutic Relationship
Several characteristics that enhance the achievement
of a therapeutic relationship have been identified.
These concepts are highly significant to the use of self
as the therapeutic tool in interpersonal relationship
development.
Rapport
Getting acquainted and establishing rapport is the
primary task in relationship development. Rapport
implies special feelings on the part of both the client
and the nurse based on acceptance, warmth, friend-
liness, common interest, a sense of trust, and a non-
judgmental attitude. Establishing rapport may be
accomplished by discussing non-health-related topics.
Travelbee (1971) states:
[To establish rapport] is to create a sense of harmony
based on knowledge and appreciation of each indi-
vidual’s uniqueness. It is the ability to be still and ex-
perience the other as a human being—to appreciate
the unfolding of each personality one to the other.
The ability to truly care for and about others is the
core of rapport. (pp. 152; 155)
Trust
To trust another, one must feel confidence in that
person’s presence, reliability, integrity, veracity, and
sincere desire to provide assistance when requested.
As discussed in the chapter Theoretical Models
of Personality Development (available online at
www.davisplus.com), trust is the initial developmental
task described by Erikson. If the task has not been
achieved, this component of relationship develop-
ment becomes more difficult. That is not to say that
trust cannot be established, but only that additional
time and patience may be required on the part of the
nurse.
Trust cannot be presumed; it must be earned.
Trustworthiness is demonstrated through nursing
interventions that convey a sense of warmth and
caring to the client. These interventions are initiated
simply and concretely and directed toward activities
that address the client’s basic needs for physiological
and psychological safety and security. Many psychi-
atric clients experience concrete thinking, which
focuses their thought processes on specifics rather
than generalities and on immediate issues rather than
eventual outcomes. Examples of nursing interven-
tions that promote trust in an individual who is think-
ing concretely include the following:
■ Providing a blanket when the client is cold
■ Providing food when the client is hungry
■ Keeping promises
■ Being honest (e.g., saying “I don’t know the answer
to your question, but I’ll try to find out”) and then
following through
■ Simply and clearly providing reasons for certain
policies, procedures, and rules
■ Providing a written, structured schedule of activities
■ Attending activities with the client if he or she is
reluctant to go alone
■ Being consistent in adhering to unit guidelines
■ Listening to the client’s preferences, requests, and
opinions and making collaborative decisions con-
cerning his or her care whenever possible
■ Ensuring confidentiality; providing reassurance
that what is discussed will not be repeated outside
the boundaries of the health-care team
Trust is the basis of a therapeutic relationship. The
nurse working in psychiatry must perfect the skills
that foster the development of trust. Trust must be es-
tablished in order for the nurse-client relationship to
progress beyond the superficial level of tending to the
client’s immediate needs.
Respect
To show respect is to believe in the dignity and worth
of an individual regardless of his or her unacceptable
behavior. The psychologist Carl Rogers called this
unconditional positive regard (Raskin, Rogers, &
Witty, 2014). The attitude is nonjudgmental, and the
respect is unconditional in that it does not depend
on the behavior of the client to meet certain stan-
dards. The nurse, in fact, may not approve of the
client’s lifestyle or behavior patterns. However, with
unconditional positive regard, the client is accepted
and respected for no other reason than that he or she
is considered to be a worthwhile and unique human
being.
Many psychiatric clients have very little self-respect.
Sometimes lack of self-respect is related to the low
self-esteem that accompanies illnesses such as clinical
C H A P T E R 7 ■ Relationship Development 139
CLINICAL PEARL The nurse must convey an aura of trustwor-
thiness, which requires that he or she possess a sense of self-
confidence. Confidence in the self is derived from knowledge
gained through achievement of personal and professional goals
as well as the ability to integrate these roles and to function as
a unified whole.
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 139
depression, and sometimes it is related to rejection
and stigmatization by others. Recognition that they are
unconditionally accepted and respected as unique,
valuable individuals can elevate feelings of self-worth
and self-respect. The nurse can convey an attitude of
respect by
■ Calling the client by name (and title, if he or she
prefers).
■ Spending time with the client.
■ Allowing sufficient time to answer the client’s ques-
tions and concerns.
■ Promoting an atmosphere of privacy during thera-
peutic interactions with the client and during phys-
ical examination or therapy.
■ Always being open and honest with the client, even
when the truth may be difficult to discuss.
■ Listening to the client’s ideas, preferences, and
opinions and making collaborative decisions con-
cerning his or her care whenever possible.
■ Striving to understand the motivation behind the
client’s behavior regardless of how unacceptable it
may seem.
Genuineness
The concept of genuineness refers to the nurse’s abil-
ity to be open, honest, and “real” in interactions with
the client. To be real is to be aware of what one is
experiencing internally and to allow the quality of this
inner experience to be apparent in the therapeutic
relationship. When one is genuine, there is congruence
between what is felt and what is expressed (Raskin
et al., 2014). The nurse who is genuine responds to
the client with truth and honesty rather than with re-
sponses he or she may consider more “professional”
or ones that merely reflect the “nursing role.”
Genuineness may call for a degree of self-disclosure
on the part of the nurse. This is not to say that the
nurse must disclose to the client everything he or she
is feeling or all personal experiences that relate to
what the client is going through. Indeed, care must
be taken when using self-disclosure to avoid reversing
the roles of nurse and client. For example, when a
client tells the nurse, “I just get so upset when some-
one disrespects me; sometimes you have to smack
someone to teach them a lesson,” the nurse might re-
spond, “I get upset by that, too. Let’s talk about some
different ways to respond to your anger rather than
hitting someone.” In this example, the nurse discloses
a common feeling while maintaining a focus on the
client’s need for problem-solving. When the nurse
uses self-disclosure, a quality of “humanness” is re-
vealed to the client, creating a role for the client to
model in similar situations. The client may then feel
more comfortable revealing personal information to
the nurse.
Most individuals have an uncanny ability to detect
when others are artificial. When the nurse does not
bring genuineness and respect to the relationship, a
reality basis for trust cannot be established. These
qualities are essential to helping the client actualize
his or her potential within the nurse-client relation-
ship and for change and growth to occur (Raskin
et al., 2014).
Empathy
Empathy is the ability to see beyond outward behavior
and understand the situation from the client’s point
of view. With empathy, the nurse can accurately per-
ceive and comprehend the meaning and relevance of
the client’s thoughts and feelings. The nurse must
also be able to communicate this perception to the
client by attempting to translate words and behaviors
into feelings.
It is not uncommon for the concept of empathy to
be confused with that of sympathy. The major differ-
ence is that with empathy the nurse “accurately per-
ceives or understands” what the client is feeling and
encourages the client to explore these feelings. With
sympathy the nurse actually “shares” what the client is
feeling and experiences a need to alleviate distress.
Schuster (2000) stated:
Empathy means that you remain emotionally separate
from the other person, even though you can see the
patient’s viewpoint clearly. This is different from sym-
pathy. Sympathy implies taking on the other’s needs
and problems as if they were your own and becoming
emotionally involved to the point of losing your ob-
jectivity. To empathize rather than sympathize, you
must show feelings but not get caught up in feelings
or overly identify with the patient’s and family’s
concerns. (p. 102)
Empathy is considered to be one of the most im-
portant characteristics of a therapeutic relationship.
Accurate empathetic perceptions on the part of the
nurse assist the client to identify feelings that may
have been suppressed or denied. Positive emotions
are generated as the client realizes that he or she is
truly understood by another. As the feelings surface
and are explored, the client learns aspects about self
of which he or she may have been unaware. This con-
tributes to the process of personal identification and
the promotion of positive self-concept.
With empathy, while understanding the client’s
thoughts and feelings, the nurse is able to maintain
sufficient objectivity to allow the client to achieve
problem resolution with minimal assistance. With
sympathy, the nurse actually feels what the client is
feeling, objectivity is lost, and the nurse may become
focused on relief of personal distress rather than on
helping the client resolve the problem at hand. The
140 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 140
following is an example of an empathetic and sympa-
thetic response to the same situation.
EXAMPLE
Situation: BJ is a client on the psychiatric unit with a diag-
nosis of persistent depressive disorder (dysthymia). She
is 5’51⁄2” tall and weighs 295 pounds. BJ has been over-
weight all her life. She is single, has no close friends, and
has never had an intimate relationship with another per-
son. It is her first day on the unit, and she is refusing to
come out of her room. When she appeared for lunch in
the dining room following admission, she was embar-
rassed when several of the other clients laughed out loud
and called her “fatso.”
Sympathetic response: Nurse: “I can certainly identify with
what you are feeling. I’ve been overweight most of my
life, too. I just get so angry when people act like that. They
are so insensitive! It’s just so typical of skinny people to
act that way. You have a right to want to stay away from
them. We’ll just see how loud they laugh when you get
to choose what movie is shown on the unit after dinner
tonight.”
Empathetic response: Nurse: “You feel angry and embar-
rassed by what happened at lunch today.” As tears fill BJ’s
eyes, the nurse encourages her to cry if she feels like it
and to express her anger at the situation. She stays with
BJ but does not dwell on her own feelings about what
happened. Instead, she focuses on BJ and what the client
perceives are her most immediate needs at this time.
Rapport, trust, respect, genuineness, and empathy
all are essential to forming therapeutic relationships,
and they can be assets in social relationships, too. The
primary differences between social and therapeutic
relationships are that therapeutic relationships always
remain focused on the health-care needs of the client,
are never for the purpose of addressing the nurse’s
personal needs, and progress through identified
phases of development for the purpose of helping
the client solve health-related problems.
Phases of a Therapeutic Nurse-Client
Relationship
Psychiatric nurses use interpersonal relationship de-
velopment as the primary intervention with clients in
psychiatric-mental health settings. This is congruent
with Peplau’s (1962) identification of counseling as
the major subrole of nursing in psychiatry. Sullivan
(1953), from whom Peplau patterned her own inter-
personal theory of nursing, strongly believed that
many emotional problems were closely related to dif-
ficulties with interpersonal relationships. With this
concept in mind, this role of the nurse in psychiatry
becomes especially meaningful and purposeful—an
integral part of the total therapeutic regimen.
The therapeutic interpersonal relationship is the
means by which the nursing process is implemented.
Through the relationship, problems are identified
and resolution is sought. Tasks of the relationship
have been categorized into four phases: (1) the
preinteraction phase, (2) the orientation (introduc-
tory) phase, (3) the working phase, and (4) the ter-
mination phase. Although each phase is presented
as specific and distinct from the others, there may be
some overlap of tasks, particularly when the interac-
tion is limited. The major nursing goals during each
phase of the nurse-client relationship are listed in
Table 7–2.
The Preinteraction Phase
The preinteraction phase involves preparation for the
first encounter with the client. Tasks include
■ Obtaining available information about the client
from his or her chart, significant others, or other
health-care team members. From this information,
the initial assessment begins. The nurse may also
become aware of personal responses to knowledge
about the client.
■ Examining one’s feelings, fears, and anxieties
about working with a particular client. For exam-
ple, the nurse may have been reared in an alco-
holic family and have ambivalent feelings about
caring for a client who is dependent on alcohol. All
individuals bring attitudes and feelings from prior
experiences to the clinical setting. The nurse needs
to be aware of how these preconceptions may affect
his or her ability to care for individual clients.
The Orientation (Introductory) Phase
During the orientation phase, the nurse and client
become acquainted. Tasks include
■ Creating an environment for the establishment of
trust and rapport.
■ Establishing a contract for intervention that details
the expectations and responsibilities of both nurse
and client.
C H A P T E R 7 ■ Relationship Development 141
TA B L E 7 – 2 Phases of Relationship Development
and Major Nursing Goals
PHASE
1. Preinteraction
2. Orientation
(introductory)
3. Working
4. Termination
GOALS
Explore self-perceptions
Establish trust
Formulate contract for intervention
Promote client change
Evaluate goal attainment
Ensure therapeutic closure
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 141
■ Gathering assessment information to build a strong
client database.
■ Identifying the client’s strengths and limitations.
■ Formulating nursing diagnoses.
■ Setting goals that are mutually agreeable to the
nurse and client.
■ Developing a plan of action that is realistic for
meeting the established goals.
■ Exploring feelings of both the client and nurse in
terms of the introductory phase.
Introductions are often uncomfortable, and the
participants may experience some anxiety until a de-
gree of rapport has been established. Interactions
may remain on a superficial level until anxiety sub-
sides. Several interactions may be required to fulfill
the tasks associated with this phase.
The Working Phase
The therapeutic work of the relationship is accom-
plished during this phase. Tasks include
■ Maintaining the trust and rapport established dur-
ing the orientation phase.
■ Promoting the client’s insight and perception of
reality.
■ Problem-solving using the model presented earlier
in this chapter.
■ Overcoming resistance behaviors on the part of the
client as the level of anxiety rises in response to
discussion of painful issues.
■ Continuously evaluating progress toward goal
attainment.
Transference and Countertransference
Transference and countertransference are common
phenomena that often arise during the course of a
therapeutic relationship.
Transference
Transference occurs when the client unconsciously
displaces (or “transfers”) to the nurse feelings formed
toward a person from his or her past (Sadock, Sadock,
& Ruiz, 2015). These feelings may be triggered by
something about the nurse’s appearance or person-
ality characteristics that reminds the client of another
person. Transference can interfere with the therapeu-
tic interaction when the feelings expressed include
anger and hostility. Anger toward the nurse can be
manifested by uncooperativeness and resistance to
therapy.
Transference can also take the form of overwhelm-
ing affection for or excessive dependency on the
nurse. The nurse is overvalued, and the client forms
unrealistic expectations of the nurse. When the nurse
is unable to fulfill those expectations or meet the
excessive dependency needs, the client becomes
angry and hostile.
Interventions for Transference
Hilz (2013) states:
In cases of transference, the relationship does not
usually need to be terminated, except when the
transference poses a serious barrier to therapy or
safety. The nurse should work with the patient in
sorting out the past from the present, assist the pa-
tient into identifying the transference, and reassign
a new and more appropriate meaning to the current
nurse-patient relationship. The goal is to guide
patients toward independence by teaching them
to assume responsibility for their own behaviors,
feelings, and thoughts, and to assign the correct
meanings to their relationships based on present
circumstances instead of the past.
Countertransference
Countertransference refers to the nurse’s behavioral
and emotional responses to the client in which the
nurse transfers feelings (often unconscious) about
past experiences or people onto the patient. These
responses may be related to unresolved feelings
toward significant others from the nurse’s past, or
they may be generated in response to transference
feelings on the part of the client. It is not easy to
refrain from becoming angry when the client is
consistently antagonistic, to feel flattered when
showered with affection and attention by the client,
or even to feel quite powerful when the client ex-
hibits excessive dependency on the nurse. These
feelings can interfere with the therapeutic rela-
tionship when they initiate the following types of
behaviors:
■ The nurse overidentifies with the client’s feelings,
as they remind him or her of problems from the
nurse’s past or present.
■ The nurse and client develop a social or personal
relationship.
■ The nurse begins to give advice or attempts to “res-
cue” the client.
■ The nurse encourages and promotes the client’s
dependence.
■ The nurse’s anger engenders feelings of disgust
toward the client.
■ The nurse feels anxious and uneasy in the presence
of the client.
■ The nurse is bored and apathetic in sessions with
the client.
■ The nurse has difficulty setting limits on the client’s
behavior.
■ The nurse defends the client’s behavior to other
staff members.
The nurse may be completely unaware or only
minimally aware of the countertransference as it is
occurring (Hilz, 2013).
142 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 142
Interventions for Countertransference
Hilz (2013) states:
The relationship usually should not be terminated in
the presence of countertransference. Rather, the nurse
or staff member experiencing the countertransference
should be supportively assisted by other staff members
to identify his or her feelings and behaviors and rec-
ognize the occurrence of the phenomenon. It may be
helpful to have evaluative sessions with the nurse after
his or her encounter with the patient, in which both
the nurse and other staff members (who are observing
the interactions) discuss and compare the exhibited
behaviors in the relationship.
The Termination Phase
Termination of the relationship may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons: the mutually agreed-on goals may have
been reached, the client may be discharged from the
hospital, or, in the case of a student nurse, the clinical
rotation ends. Termination can be difficult for both
the client and nurse. The main task involves bringing
a therapeutic conclusion to the relationship. This
occurs when
■ Progress has been made toward attainment of
mutually set goals.
■ A plan for continuing care or for assistance during
stressful life experiences is mutually established by
the nurse and client.
■ Feelings about termination of the relationship are
recognized and explored. Both the nurse and client
may experience feelings of sadness and loss. The
nurse should share his or her feelings with the
client. Through these interactions, the client learns
that it is acceptable to have these kinds of feelings
at a time of separation. With this knowledge, the
client experiences growth during the process of ter-
mination. This is also a time when both nurse and
client may evaluate and summarize the learning that
occurred as an outgrowth of their relationship.
■ Social boundaries: These are established within a
culture and define how individuals are expected to
behave in social situations.
■ Personal boundaries: These are boundaries that in-
dividuals define for themselves. They include phys-
ical distance boundaries, or just how close individuals
will allow others to invade their physical space; and
emotional boundaries, or how much individuals
choose to disclose of their most private and inti-
mate selves to others.
■ Professional boundaries: These boundaries limit
and outline expectations for appropriate profes-
sional relationships with clients. “Professional
boundaries are the spaces between a nurse’s power
and the patient’s vulnerability” (National Council
of State Boards of Nursing [NCSBN], 2014). Nurses
must recognize that they have an imbalance of
power with their patients by virtue of their role and
the patient information to which they have access.
They must be consistently conscientious in avoiding
any circumstance in which they might achieve per-
sonal gain within that relationship. Concerns re-
garding professional boundaries are commonly
related to the following issues:
■ Self-disclosure: Self-disclosure on the part of the
nurse may be appropriate when the information
may therapeutically benefit the client. It should
never be undertaken to meet the nurse’s needs.
■ Gift-giving: Individuals who are receiving care
often feel indebted toward health-care providers.
Indeed, gift-giving may be part of the therapeutic
process for people who receive care (College and
Association of Registered Nurses of Alberta, 2011).
Cultural beliefs and values may also enter into
the decision of whether to accept a gift from a
client. In some cultures, failure to do so would be
interpreted as an insult (Pies, 2012). Accepting
financial gifts is never appropriate, but in some in-
stances nurses may be permitted to suggest instead
a donation to a charity of the client’s choice. If
acceptance of a small gift of gratitude is deemed
appropriate, the nurse may choose to share it with
other staff members who have been involved in the
client’s care. In all instances, nurses should exer-
cise professional judgment when deciding whether
to accept a gift from a client. Attention should be
given to what the gift-giving means to the client, as
well as to institutional policy, the American Nurses
Association (ANA) Code of Ethics for Nurses, and the
ANA Scope and Standards of Practice.
■ Touch: Nursing by its very nature involves touch-
ing clients. Touching is required to perform the
therapeutic procedures involved in the physical
care of clients. Caring touch is the touching of
clients when there is no physical need to do so.
Touching or hugging can be beneficial when it
C H A P T E R 7 ■ Relationship Development 143
CLINICAL PEARL When the client feels sadness and loss, behav-
iors to delay termination may become evident. If the nurse
experiences the same feelings, he or she may allow the client’s
behaviors to delay termination. For therapeutic closure, the
nurse must establish the reality of the separation and resist
being manipulated into repeated delays by the client.
Boundaries in the Nurse-Client Relationship
A boundary indicates a border that determines the
extent of acceptable limits. Many types of boundaries
exist, such as the following:
■ Material boundaries: These are physical property
that can be seen, such as fences that border land.
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 143
is implemented with therapeutic intent and
client consent. When using caring touch, make
sure it is appropriate, supportive, and welcomed
(College of Registered Nurses of British Colum-
bia, 2015). Caring touch may provide comfort or
encouragement, but some vulnerable clients may
misinterpret its meaning. In certain cultures,
such as within Navajo Indian, Chinese, and
Japanese heritages, touch is not considered ac-
ceptable unless the parties know each other very
well (Purnell, 2014). The nurse must be sensitive
to these cultural nuances and aware when touch
is crossing a personal boundary. Additionally,
clients who are experiencing high levels of anxi-
ety or suspicious or psychotic behavior may inter-
pret touch as aggressiveness. These are times
when touch should be avoided or considered
with extreme caution.
■ Friendship or romantic association: When a nurse
is acquainted with a client, the relationship must
move from a personal nature to professional. If
the nurse is unable to accomplish this separation,
he or she should withdraw from the nurse-client
relationship. Likewise, nurses must guard against
personal relationships developing as a result of
the nurse-client relationship. Romantic, sexual, or
otherwise intimate personal relationships are
never appropriate between nurse and client.
Certain warning signs indicate that professional
boundaries of the nurse-client relationship may be in
jeopardy. These may include (Coltrane & Pugh, 1978)
■ Favoring one client’s care over that of another.
■ Keeping secrets with a client.
■ Changing dress style for working with a particular
client.
■ Swapping assignments to care for a particular
client.
■ Giving special attention or treatment to one client
over others.
■ Spending free time with a client.
■ Frequently thinking about the client when away
from work.
■ Sharing personal information or work concerns
with the client.
■ Receipt of gifts or continued contact or communi-
cation with the client after discharge.
Boundary crossing can threaten the integrity of
the nurse-client relationship. Nurses must gain self-
awareness and insight to recognize when professional
integrity is compromised. Although some variables,
such as the care setting, community influences, patient
needs, and the nature of therapy, affect how bound-
aries are delineated, “any actions that overstep the es-
tablished boundaries to meet the needs of the nurse
are boundary violations” (NCSBN, 2014).
Summary and Key Points
■ Nurses who work in the psychiatric-mental health
field use special skills, or “interpersonal tech-
niques,” to assist clients in adapting to difficulties
or changes in life experiences. Therapeutic nurse-
client relationships are goal oriented, and the
problem-solving model is used to try to bring about
some type of change in the client’s life.
■ The instrument for delivery of the process of inter-
personal nursing is the therapeutic use of self,
which requires that the nurse possess a strong sense
of self-awareness and self-understanding.
■ Hildegard Peplau identified seven subroles within
the role of nurse: stranger, resource person, teacher,
leader, surrogate, technical expert, and counselor.
■ Characteristics that enhance the achievement of
a therapeutic relationship include rapport, trust,
respect, genuineness, and empathy.
■ Phases of a therapeutic nurse-client relationship
include the preinteraction phase, the orientation
(introductory) phase, the working phase, and the
termination phase.
■ Transference occurs when the client unconsciously
displaces (or “transfers”) to the nurse feelings
formed toward a person from the past.
■ Countertransference refers to the nurse’s behav-
ioral and emotional response to the client in which
the nurse transfers feelings (often unconscious)
about past experiences or people onto the patient.
These responses may be related to unresolved
feelings toward significant others from the nurse’s
past, or they may be generated in response to trans-
ference feelings on the part of the client.
■ Types of boundaries include material, social, per-
sonal, and professional.
■ Concerns associated with professional boundaries
include self-disclosure, gift-giving, touch, and
developing a friendship or romantic association.
■ Boundary crossings can threaten the integrity of
the nurse-client relationship.
144 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 144
C H A P T E R 7 ■ Relationship Development 145
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. Nurse Mary has been providing care for Tom during his hospital stay. On Tom’s day of discharge, his
wife brings a bouquet of flowers and box of chocolates to his room. He presents these gifts to Nurse
Mary, saying, “Thank you for taking care of me.” What is a correct response by the nurse?
a. “I don’t accept gifts from patients.”
b. “Thank you so much! It is so nice to be appreciated.”
c. “Thank you. I will share these with the rest of the staff.”
d. “Hospital policy forbids me to accept gifts from patients.”
2. Elisa says to the nurse, “I worked as a secretary to put my husband through college, and as soon as he
graduated, he left me. I hate him! I hate all men!” Which of the following is an empathetic response
by the nurse?
a. “You are very angry now. This is a normal response to your loss.”
b. “I know what you mean. Men can be very insensitive.”
c. “I understand completely. My husband divorced me, too.”
d. “You are depressed now, but you will feel better in time.”
3. Which of the following behaviors suggest a possible breach of professional boundaries? (Select all that
apply.)
a. The nurse repeatedly requests to be assigned to a specific client.
b. The nurse shares the details of her divorce with the client.
c. The nurse makes arrangements to meet the client outside of the therapeutic environment.
d. The nurse shares how she dealt with a similar difficult situation.
4. Which of the following tasks are associated with the orientation phase of relationship development?
(Select all that apply.)
a. Promoting the client’s insight and perception of reality
b. Creating an environment for the establishment of trust and rapport
c. Using the problem-solving model toward goal fulfillment
d. Obtaining available information about the client from various sources
e. Formulating nursing diagnoses and setting goals
5. Nurse Rosetta, who is the adult child of an alcoholic, is working with John, a client who abuses alcohol.
John has experienced a successful detoxification process and is beginning a rehabilitation program.
He says to Rosetta, “I’m not going to go to those stupid AA meetings. They don’t help anything.”
Rosetta, whose father died of complications from alcoholism, responds with anger: “Don’t you even
care what happens to your children?” Rosetta’s response is an example of which of the following?
a. Transference
b. Countertransference
c. Self-disclosure
d. A breach of professional boundaries
6. Nurse Jones is working with Kim, a client in the anger-management program. Which of the following
identifies actions associated with the working phase of the therapeutic relationship?
a. Kim tells Nurse Jones she wants to learn more adaptive ways to handle her anger. Together, they set
some goals.
b. The goals of therapy have been met, but Kim cries and says she has to keep coming to therapy in
order to be able to handle her anger appropriately.
c. Nurse Jones reads Kim’s previous medical records. She explores her feelings about working with a
woman who has abused her child.
d. Nurse Jones helps Kim practice various techniques to control her angry outbursts. She gives Kim
positive feedback for attempting to improve maladaptive behaviors.
Continued
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 145
146 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
7. When there is congruence between what is felt and what is expressed, the nurse is exhibiting which
of the following characteristics?
a. Trust
b. Respect
c. Genuineness
d. Empathy
8. When the nurse shows unconditional acceptance of an individual as a worthwhile and unique human
being, he or she is exhibiting which of the following characteristics?
a. Trust
b. Respect
c. Genuineness
d. Empathy
9. Hildegard Peplau identified seven subroles within the role of the nurse. She believed the emphasis
in psychiatric nursing was on which of the subroles?
a. The resource person
b. The teacher
c. The surrogate
d. The counselor
10. Which of the following behaviors are associated with the phenomenon of transference? (Select all that
apply.)
a. The client attributes toward the nurse feelings associated with a person from the client’s past.
b. The nurse attributes toward the client feelings associated with a person from the nurse’s past.
c. The client forms an overwhelming affection for the nurse.
d. The client becomes excessively dependent on the nurse and forms unrealistic expectations of him
or her.
References
College and Association of Registered Nurses of Alberta (CARNA).
(2011). Professional boundaries for registered nurses: Guidelines for
the nurse-client relationship. Edmonton, AB: CARNA.
College of Registered Nurses of British Columbia (CRNBC).
(2015). Boundaries in the nurse-client relationship. Retrieved
from https://www.crnbc.ca/Standards/PracticeStandards/
Pages/boundaries.aspx
Hilz, L.M. (2013). Transference and countertransference. Kathi’s
Mental Health Review. Retrieved from www.toddlertime.com/
mh/terms/countertransference-transference-3.htm
National Council of State Boards of Nursing (NCSBN). (2014).
A nurse’s guide to professional boundaries. Retrieved from
https://www.ncsbn.org/ProfessionalBoundaries_Complete.pdf
Pies, R.W. (2012). The patient gift conundrum. Medscape Psychia-
try & Mental Health. Retrieved from www.medscape.com/
viewarticle/775575
Purnell, L.D. (2014). Guide to culturally competent health care
(3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Raskin, N.J., Rogers, C.R., & Witty, M.C. (2014). Client-centered ther-
apy. In D. Wedding & R.J. Corsini (Eds.), Current psychotherapies
(10th ed., pp. 95-145). Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Sadock, B.J., Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Synopsis of psychiatry:
Behavioral sciences/clinical psychiatry (11th ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Schuster, P.M. (2000). Communication: The key to the therapeutic rela-
tionship. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Classical References
Coltrane, F., & Pugh, C. (1978). Danger signals in staff/patient
relationships. Journal of Psychiatric Nursing & Mental Health
Services, 16(6), 34-36. doi:10.3928/0279-3695-19780601-06
Luft, J. (1970). Group processes: An introduction to group dynamics
(3rd ed.). Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield Publishing.
Peplau, H.E. (1962). Interpersonal techniques: The crux of
psychiatric nursing. American Journal of Nursing, 62(6), 50-54.
doi:10.1007/978-1-349-13441-0_13
Peplau, H.E. (1991). Interpersonal relations in nursing. New York:
Springer.
Raths, L., Harmin, M., & Simon, S. (1978). Values and teaching:
Working with values in the classroom (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH:
Merrill.
Sullivan, H.S. (1953). The interpersonal theory of psychiatry.
New York: W.W. Norton.
Travelbee, J. (1971). Interpersonal aspects of nursing (2nd ed.).
Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
6054_Ch07_133-146 27/07/17 5:21 PM Page 146
8Therapeutic Communication
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
What Is Communication?
The Impact of Preexisting Conditions
Nonverbal Communication
Therapeutic Communication Techniques
Nontherapeutic Communication Techniques
Active Listening
Motivational Interviewing
Process Recordings
Feedback
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
density
distance
intimate distance
motivational interviewing
paralanguage
personal distance
public distance
social distance
territoriality
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Discuss the transactional model of
communication.
2. Identify types of preexisting conditions that
influence the outcome of the communication
process.
3. Define territoriality, density, and distance as
components of the environment.
4. Identify components of nonverbal expression.
5. Describe therapeutic and nontherapeutic
verbal communication techniques.
6. Describe motivational interviewing as a
communication strategy.
7. Describe active listening.
8. Discuss therapeutic feedback.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. A client asks the nurse for advice about a
personal situation, and the nurse responds,
“What do you think you should do?” This is
an example of what technique? Is it thera-
peutic or nontherapeutic?
2. “Just hang in there. Everything will be all
right.” If the nurse makes this statement to
a client, it is an example of what technique?
Is it therapeutic or nontherapeutic?
3. Why might it be more appropriate to conduct
a client interview in a conference room or
interview room rather than in the client’s
room or nurse’s office?
4. Name the five elements of constructive
feedback.
5. Write a one-page journal entry reflecting
on things that friends or close relatives have
told you characterize your style of communi-
cating with others. How can you use this self-
awareness to promote the development of
therapeutic communication?
CORE CONCEPTS
Communication
Therapeutic
Communication
147
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 147
Development of the therapeutic interpersonal relationship
was described in Chapter 7, Relationship Development,
as the process by which nurses provide care for clients
in need of psychosocial intervention. Therapeutic use of
self was identified as the instrument for delivery of care.
The focus of this chapter is on techniques—or, more
specifically, interpersonal communication techniques—to
facilitate the delivery of that care.
In their classic work on therapeutic communica-
tion, Hays and Larson (1963) stated, “To relate thera-
peutically with a patient it is necessary for the nurse to
understand his or her role and its relationship to the
patient’s illness” (p. 1). They describe the role of the
nurse as providing the client with the opportunity to
accomplish the following:
1. Identify and explore problems in relating to others.
2. Discover healthy ways of meeting emotional needs.
3. Experience a satisfying interpersonal relationship.
These goals are achieved through use of interper-
sonal communication techniques (both verbal and
nonverbal). The nurse must be aware of the therapeu-
tic or nontherapeutic value of the communication
techniques used with the client because they are the
tools of psychosocial intervention.
transactional model of communication, both partici-
pants simultaneously perceive each other, listen to
each other, and are mutually involved in creating
meaning in a relationship. The transactional model
is illustrated in Figure 8–1.
The Impact of Preexisting Conditions
In all interpersonal transactions, the sender and re-
ceiver each bring certain preexisting conditions to
the exchange that influence both the intended mes-
sage and the way in which it is interpreted. Examples
of these conditions include one’s value system, inter-
nalized attitudes and beliefs, culture and religion,
social status, gender, background knowledge and
experience, and age or developmental level. The
type of environment in which the communication
takes place may also influence the outcome of the
transaction. Figure 8–2 shows how these influencing
factors are positioned on the transactional model.
Values, Attitudes, and Beliefs
Values, attitudes, and beliefs are learned ways of
thinking. Children generally adopt the value systems
and internalize the attitudes and beliefs of their par-
ents. Children may retain this way of thinking into
adulthood or develop a different set of attitudes and
values as they mature.
Values, attitudes, and beliefs can influence commu-
nication in numerous ways. For example, prejudice is
expressed verbally through negative stereotyping.
148 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
CORE CONCEPT
Communication
An interactive process of transmitting information
between two or more entities.
What Is Communication?
It has been said that individuals “cannot not commu-
nicate.” Every word spoken, every movement made,
and every action taken or not taken gives a message
to someone. Interpersonal communication is a trans-
action between the sender and the receiver. In the
Person 2MessagesPerson 1
FIGURE 8–1 The Transactional Model of Communication.
Person
1
Person
2
Environment
Environment
OUTCOME
Values
Attitudes
Culture
Knowledge
Religion
Gender
Social Status
Values
Attitudes
Culture
Knowledge
Religion
Gender
Social Status
Messages
Age Age
FIGURE 8–2 Factors influencing the Transac-
tional Model of Communication.
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 148
One’s value system may be communicated with be-
haviors that are symbolic in nature. For example, an
individual who values youth may dress and behave in
a manner that is characteristic of one who is much
younger. Persons who value freedom and the American
way of life may fly the U.S. flag in front of their homes
each day. In each of these situations, a message is being
communicated.
Culture and Religion
Communication has its roots in culture. Cultural mores,
norms, ideas, and customs provide the basis for our way
of thinking. Cultural values are learned and differ from
society to society. For example, in some European coun-
tries (e.g., Italy, Spain, and France), men may greet
each other with hugs and kisses. These behaviors are
appropriate in those cultures but may communicate a
different message in the United States or England.
Religion can influence communication as well.
Priests and ministers who wear clerical collars publicly
communicate their mission in life. The collar may
also influence the way in which others relate to them,
either positively or negatively. Other symbolic ges-
tures, such as wearing a cross around the neck or
hanging a crucifix on the wall, communicate an indi-
vidual’s religious beliefs.
Social Status
Studies of nonverbal indicators of social status or power
have suggested that high-status persons are associated
with gestures that communicate their higher-power
position. For example, they use less eye contact, have
a more relaxed posture, use louder voice pitch, place
hands on hips more frequently, are “power dressers,”
have greater height, and maintain more distance when
communicating with individuals considered to be of
lower social status.
Gender
Gender influences the manner in which individuals
communicate. Most cultures have gender signals that
are recognized as either masculine or feminine and
provide a basis for distinguishing between members
of each gender. Examples include differences in pos-
ture, both standing and sitting, between men and
women in the United States. Men usually stand with
thighs 10 to 15 degrees apart, the pelvis rolled back,
and the arms slightly away from the body. Women
often stand with legs close together, the pelvis tipped
forward, and the arms close to the body. When sitting,
men may lean back in the chair with legs apart or may
rest the ankle of one leg over the knee of the other.
Women tend to sit more upright in the chair with legs
together, perhaps crossed at the ankles, or one leg
crossed over the other at thigh level.
Roles have historically been identified as either
male or female. For example, in the United States
masculinity typically was communicated through
such roles as husband, father, breadwinner, doctor,
lawyer, or engineer. Traditional female roles included
those of wife, mother, homemaker, nurse, teacher, or
secretary.
Gender signals are changing in U.S. society as
sexual roles become less distinct. Behaviors that had
been considered typically masculine or feminine in
the past may now be generally accepted in members
of both genders. Words such as unisex communicate
a desire by some individuals to diminish the distinc-
tion between genders and minimize the discrimina-
tion of either. Gender roles are changing as both
women and men enter professions that were once
dominated by members of the opposite gender.
Age or Developmental Level
Age influences communication, which is never more
evident than during adolescence. In their struggle to
separate from parental confines and establish their
own identity, adolescents generate a unique pattern
of communication that changes from generation to
generation. Words such as dude, groovy, clueless, awe-
some, cool, and wasted have had special meaning for cer-
tain generations of adolescents. The technological age
has produced a whole new language for today’s
teenagers. Communication by text messaging includes
such acronyms as BRB (“be right back”), BFF (“best
friends forever”), and MOS (“mom over shoulder”).
Developmental influences on communication may
relate to physiological alterations. One example is
American Sign Language, the system of unique ges-
tures used by many people who are deaf or hearing
impaired. Individuals who are blind at birth never
learn the subtle nonverbal gesticulations that accom-
pany language, which can totally change the meaning
of the spoken word.
Environment in Which the Transaction
Takes Place
The place where communication occurs influences
the outcome of the interaction. Some individuals who
feel uncomfortable and refuse to speak during a
group therapy session may be willing to discuss prob-
lems privately on a one-to-one basis with the nurse.
Territoriality, density, and distance are aspects of
environment that communicate messages. Territoriality
is the innate tendency to own space. Individuals lay
claim to areas around them as their own. This influ-
ences communication when an interaction takes
place in the territory “owned” by one or the other.
Interpersonal communication can be more successful
if the interaction takes place in a “neutral” area. For
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 149
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 149
example, with the concept of territoriality in mind,
the nurse may choose to conduct the psychosocial
assessment in an interview room rather than in his or
her office or in the client’s room.
Density refers to the number of people within a
given environmental space. It has been shown to
influence interpersonal interaction. Some studies in-
dicate that a correlation exists between prolonged
high-density situations and certain behaviors, such as
aggression, stress, criminal activity, hostility toward
others, and a deterioration of mental and physical
health.
Distance is the means by which various cultures
use space to communicate. Hall (1966) identified
four kinds of spatial interaction, or distances, that
people maintain from each other in their interper-
sonal interactions and the kinds of activities in which
people engage at these various distances. Intimate
distance is the closest distance that individuals will
allow between themselves and others. In mainstream
American culture, this distance, which is restricted to
interactions of an intimate nature, is 0 to 18 inches.
Personal distance is approximately 18 to 40 inches
and reserved for interactions that are personal in
nature, such as close conversations with friends or
colleagues. Social distance is about 4 to 12 feet away
from the body. Interactions at this distance include
conversations with strangers or acquaintances, such
as at a cocktail party or in a public building. A public
distance is one that exceeds 12 feet. Examples in-
clude speaking in public or yelling to someone some
distance away. This distance is considered public
space, and communicants are free to move about in it
during the interaction.
Nonverbal Communication
About 70 to 80 percent of all effective communication
is nonverbal (Khan, 2014). Some aspects of nonverbal
expression were discussed in the previous section on
preexisting conditions that influence communica-
tion. Other components of nonverbal communica-
tion include physical appearance and dress, body
movement and posture, touch, facial expressions, eye
behavior, and vocal cues or paralanguage. These non-
verbal messages vary from culture to culture.
Physical Appearance and Dress
Physical appearance and dress are part of the total non-
verbal stimuli that influence interpersonal responses,
and under some conditions, they are the primary de-
terminants of such responses. Body coverings—both
dress and hair—are manipulated by the wearer in a
manner that conveys a distinct message to the receiver.
Dress can be formal or casual, stylish or unkempt. Hair
can be long or short, and even the presence or absence
of hair conveys a message about the person. Other
body adornments that are also considered potential
communicative stimuli include tattoos, masks, cosmet-
ics, badges, jewelry, and eyeglasses. Some jewelry worn
in specific ways can give special messages (e.g., a gold
band or diamond ring worn on the third finger of
the left hand, a pin bearing Greek letters worn on the
lapel, or the wearing of a ring that is inscribed with the
insignia of a college or university). Some individuals
convey a specific message with the total absence of any
type of body adornment.
Body Movement and Posture
The way in which an individual positions his or her
body communicates messages regarding self-esteem,
gender identity, status, and interpersonal warmth or
coldness. The individual whose posture is slumped,
with head and eyes pointed downward, conveys a
message of low self-esteem. Specific ways of standing
or sitting are considered to be either feminine or mas-
culine within a defined culture. In the United States,
to stand straight and tall with head high and hands
on hips indicates a superior status over the person
being addressed.
Reece and Whitman (1962) identified response
behaviors that were used to designate individuals as
either “warm” or “cold” persons. Individuals who
were perceived as warm responded to others with a
shift of posture toward the other person, a smile,
direct eye contact, and hands that remained still.
Individuals who responded to others with a slumped
posture, by looking around the room, drumming
fingers on the desk, and not smiling were perceived
as cold.
Touch
Touch is a powerful communication tool. It can elicit
both negative and positive reactions, depending on
the people involved and the circumstances of the
interaction. It is a very basic and primitive form of
communication, and the appropriateness of its use is
culturally determined.
Touch can be categorized according to the mes-
sage communicated (Knapp & Hall, 2014):
Functional-professional: This type of touch is imper-
sonal and businesslike. It is used to accomplish a task.
EXAMPLE
A tailor measuring a customer for a suit or a physician exam-
ining a client
Social-polite: This type of touch is still rather imper-
sonal, but it conveys an affirmation or acceptance
of the other person.
EXAMPLE
A handshake
150 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 150
Friendship-warmth: Touch at this level indicates a
strong liking for the other person, a feeling that he
or she is a friend.
EXAMPLE
Laying one’s hand on the shoulder of another
Love-intimacy: This type of touch conveys an emo-
tional attachment or attraction for another person.
EXAMPLE
Engaging in a strong, mutual embrace
Sexual arousal: Touch at this level is an expression of
physical attraction only.
EXAMPLE
Touching another in the genital region
Some cultures encourage more touching of various
types than do others. “Contact cultures” (e.g., France,
Latin America, Italy) use a greater frequency of touch
cues than do those in “noncontact cultures” (e.g.,
Germany, United States, Canada) (Givens, 2013c).
The nurse should understand the cultural meaning
of touch before using this method of communication
in specific situations.
Facial Expressions
Next to human speech, facial expression is the pri-
mary source of communication. Facial expressions
reveal an individual’s emotional state, such as happi-
ness, sadness, anger, surprise, and fear. The face is
a complex multimessage system. Facial expressions
serve to complement and qualify other communica-
tion behaviors and at times even take the place of ver-
bal messages. A summary of feelings associated with
various facial expressions is presented in Table 8–1.
Eye Behavior
Eyes have been called the “windows of the soul.” It is
through eye contact that individuals view and are
viewed by others in a revealing way, creating an inter-
personal connection. In American culture, eye contact
conveys a personal interest in the other person. Eye
contact indicates that the communication channel
is open, and it is often the initiating factor in verbal
interaction between two people.
Eye behavior is regulated by social rules. These
rules dictate where, when, for how long, and at
whom we can look. Staring is often used to register
disapproval of the behavior of another. People are
extremely sensitive to being looked at, and if the gaz-
ing or staring behavior violates social rules, they
often assign meaning to it, such as the following
statement implies: “He kept staring at me, and I
began to wonder if I was dressed inappropriately or
had mustard on my face!”
Gazing at another’s eyes arouses strong emotions.
Thus, eye contact rarely lasts longer than 3 seconds
before one or both viewers experience a powerful
urge to glance away. Breaking eye contact lowers
stress levels (Givens, 2013a).
Vocal Cues or Paralanguage
Paralanguage is the gestural component of the spo-
ken word. It consists of pitch, tone, and loudness of
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 151
TA B L E 8 – 1 Summary of Facial Expressions
FACIAL EXPRESSION ASSOCIATED FEELINGS
NOSE
Nostril flare Anger; arousal
Wrinkling up Dislike; disgust
LIPS
Grin; smile Happiness; contentment
Grimace Fear; pain
Compressed Anger; frustration
Canine-type snarl Disgust
Pouted; frown Unhappiness; discontented;
disapproval
Pursing Disagreement
Sneer Contempt; disdain
BROWS
Frown Anger; unhappiness;
concentration
Raised Surprise; enthusiasm
TONGUE
Stick out Dislike; disagree
EYES
Widened Surprise; excitement
Narrowed; lids Threat; fear
squeezed shut
Stare Threat
Stare, blink, then Dislike; disinterest
look away
Eyes downcast; lack Submission; low self-esteem
of eye contact
Eye contact (generally Self-confidence; interest
intermittent as opposed
to a stare)
SOURCES: Givens, D.B. (2013b). Facial expression. In The
Nonverbal Dictionary of Gestures, Signs, and Body Language
Cues. Retrieved from http://www.nonverbal-dictionary.org/2012/
12/facial-expression.html; Hughey, J.D. (1990). Speech communi-
cation. Stillwater: Oklahoma State University; Simon, M. (2005).
Facial expressions: A visual reference for artists. New York:
Watson-Guptill.
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 151
spoken messages; the rate of speaking; expressively
placed pauses; and emphasis assigned to certain words.
These vocal cues greatly influence the way individuals
interpret verbal messages. A normally soft-spoken in-
dividual whose pitch and rate of speaking increases
may be perceived as being anxious or tense.
Different vocal emphases can alter interpretation
of the message. Three examples follow:
1. “I felt SURE you would notice the change.”
Interpretation: I was SURE you would, but you didn’t.
2. “I felt sure YOU would notice the change.”
Interpretation: I thought YOU would, even if no-
body else did.
3. “I felt sure you would notice the CHANGE.”
Interpretation: Even if you didn’t notice anything
else, I thought you would notice the CHANGE.
Verbal cues play a major role in determining re-
sponses in human communication situations. How a
message is verbalized can be as important as what is
verbalized.
Therapeutic Communication Techniques
Hays and Larson (1963) identified a number of tech-
niques to assist the nurse in interacting more therapeu-
tically with clients. These are important “technical
procedures” carried out by the nurse working in psy-
chiatry, and they should serve to enhance development
of a therapeutic nurse-client relationship. Table 8–2
includes a list of these techniques, a short explanation
of their usefulness, and examples of each.
152 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
CORE CONCEPT
Therapeutic Communication
Caregiver verbal and nonverbal techniques that focus
on the care receiver’s needs and advance the promo-
tion of healing and change. Therapeutic communication
encourages exploration of feelings and fosters under-
standing of behavioral motivation. It is nonjudgmental,
discourages defensiveness, and promotes trust.
TA B L E 8 – 2 Therapeutic Communication Techniques
TECHNIQUE EXPLANATION/RATIONALE EXAMPLES
Using silence
Accepting
Giving recognition
Offering self
Giving broad openings
Offering general leads
Placing the event in time
or sequence
Making observations
Silence gives the client the opportunity to
collect and organize thoughts, to think
through a point, or to consider introducing
a topic of greater concern than the one
being discussed.
Conveys an attitude of reception and regard.
Acknowledging and indicating awareness is
better than complimenting, which reflects
the nurse’s judgment.
Making oneself available on an uncondi-
tional basis helps to increase the client’s
feelings of self-worth.
Allowing the client to take the initiative in
introducing the topic emphasizes the impor-
tance of the client’s role in the interaction.
General leads, or prompts, offer the client
encouragement to continue.
Clarifying the relationship of events in time
enables the nurse and client to view them
in perspective.
Verbalizing what is observed or perceived
encourages the client to recognize specific
behaviors and compare perceptions with
the nurse.
The client pauses midsentence in answer-
ing a question. The nurse remains
quiet, does not “rescue” the client with
prompts or by moving on to another
question, and ensures that his or her
body language and facial expression
project interest in and willingness to
wait for the client to answer.
“Yes, I understand what you said.”
Eye contact; nodding.
“Hello, Mr. J. I notice that you made a
ceramic ash tray in OT.”
“I see you made your bed.”
“I’ll stay with you awhile.”
“We can eat our lunch together.”
“I’m interested in talking with you.”
“What would you like to talk about
today?”
“Tell me what you are thinking.”
“Yes, I see.”
“Go on.”
“And after that?”
“What seemed to lead up to . . . ?”
“Was this before or after . . . ?”
“When did this happen?”
“You seem tense.”
“I notice you are pacing a lot.”
“You seem uncomfortable when you. . . .”
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 152
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 153
TA B L E 8 – 2 Therapeutic Communication Techniques—cont’d
TECHNIQUE EXPLANATION/RATIONALE EXAMPLES
Encouraging description of
perceptions
Encouraging comparison
Restating
Reflecting
Focusing
Exploring
Seeking clarification and
validation
Presenting reality
Voicing doubt
Asking the client to verbalize what is being
perceived is often used with clients experi-
encing hallucinations.
Asking the client to compare similarities and
differences in ideas, experiences, or interper-
sonal relationships helps the client recognize
life experiences that tend to recur as well as
those aspects of life that are changeable.
Repeating the main idea of what the client
has said lets the client know whether an ex-
pressed statement has been understood
and gives him or her the chance to continue
or to clarify if necessary.
Questions and feelings are referred back to
the client so that they may be recognized
and accepted and so that the client may
recognize that his or her point of view has
value—a good technique to use when the
client asks the nurse for advice.
Taking notice of a single idea or even a sin-
gle word works especially well with a client
who is moving rapidly from one thought to
another. This technique is not therapeutic,
however, with the client who is very anxious.
Focusing should not be pursued until the
anxiety level has subsided.
Delving further into a subject, idea, experi-
ence, or relationship is especially helpful
with clients who tend to remain on a super-
ficial level of communication. However, if
the client chooses not to disclose further
information, the nurse should refrain from
pushing or probing in an area that obviously
creates discomfort.
Striving to explain that which is vague or
incomprehensible and searching for mutual
understanding of what has been said facili-
tates and increases understanding for
both client and nurse.
When the client has a misperception of the
environment, the nurse defines reality or
indicates his or her perception of the
situation for the client.
Expressing uncertainty as to the reality of
the client’s perceptions is a technique often
used with clients experiencing delusional
thinking.
“Tell me what is happening now.”
“Are you hearing the voices again?”
“What do the voices seem to be saying?”
“Was this something like . . . ?”
“How does this compare with the time
when . . . ?”
“What was your response the last time
this situation occurred?”
Cl: “I can’t study. My mind keeps
wandering.”
Ns: “You have trouble concentrating.”
Cl: “I can’t take that new job. What if I
can’t do it?”
Ns: “You’re afraid you will fail in this new
position.”
Cl: “What do you think I should do about
my wife’s drinking problem?”
Ns: “What do you think you should do?”
Cl: “My sister won’t help a bit with my
mother’s care. I have to do it all!”
Ns: “You feel angry when she doesn’t
help.”
“This point seems worth looking at more
closely. Perhaps you and I can discuss
it together.”
“Please explain that situation in more
detail.”
“Tell me more about that particular
situation.”
“I’m not sure that I understand. Would
you please explain?”
“Tell me if my understanding agrees with
yours.”
“Do I understand correctly that you
said . . . ?”
“I understand that the voices seem real
to you, but I do not hear any voices.”
“There is no one else in the room but
you and me.”
“I understand that you believe that to be
true, but I see the situation differently.”
“I find that hard to believe (or accept).”
“That seems rather doubtful to me.”
Continued
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 153
154 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
TA B L E 8 – 2 Therapeutic Communication Techniques—cont’d
TECHNIQUE EXPLANATION/RATIONALE EXAMPLES
Verbalizing the implied
Attempting to translate
words into feelings
Formulating a plan of action
SOURCE: Adapted from Hays, J.S., & Larson, K.H. (1963). Interacting with patients. New York: Macmillan.
Putting into words what the client has only
implied or said indirectly is a helpful tech-
nique to use with clients who are reticent to
speak as well as with clients who are mute
or are otherwise experiencing impaired
verbal communication. This clarifies that
which is implicit rather than explicit.
When feelings are expressed indirectly, the
nurse tries to “desymbolize” what has been
said and to find clues to the underlying true
feelings.
When a client has a plan in mind for dealing
with what is considered to be a stressful
situation, it may serve to prevent anger or
anxiety from escalating to an unmanageable
level.
Cl: “It’s a waste of time to be here. I
can’t talk to you or anyone.”
Ns: “Are you feeling that no one
understands?”
Cl: (Mute)
Ns: “It must have been very difficult
for you when your husband died in
the fire.”
Cl: “I’m way out in the ocean.”
Ns: “You must be feeling very lonely
right now.”
“What could you do to let your anger out
harmlessly?”
“Next time this comes up, what might you
do to handle it more appropriately?”
Nontherapeutic Communication Techniques
Several approaches are considered to be barriers to
open communication between the nurse and client.
Hays and Larson (1963) identified a number of these
techniques, which are presented in Table 8–3. Nurses
should recognize and eliminate the use of these
patterns in their relationships with clients. Avoiding
these communication barriers will maximize the
effectiveness of communication and enhance the
nurse-client relationship.
Active Listening
To listen actively is to be attentive and really desire
to hear and understand what the client is saying,
both verbally and nonverbally. Attentive listening
creates a climate in which the client can communi-
cate. With active listening, the nurse communicates
acceptance and respect for the client, and trust
is enhanced. A climate is established within the
relationship that promotes openness and honest
expression.
TA B L E 8 – 3 Nontherapeutic Communication Techniques
TECHNIQUE EXPLANATION/RATIONALE EXAMPLES
Giving reassurance
Rejecting
Approving or disapproving
Indicating to the client that there is no
cause for anxiety devalues the client’s
feelings and may discourage the client
from further expression of feelings if he
or she believes they will only be down-
played or ridiculed.
Refusing to consider or showing contempt
for the client’s ideas or behavior may cause
the client to discontinue interaction with the
nurse for fear of further rejection.
Sanctioning or denouncing the client’s ideas
or behavior implies that the nurse has the
right to pass judgment on whether the
client’s ideas or behaviors are “good” or
“bad” and that the client is expected to
please the nurse. The nurse’s acceptance
of the client is then seen as conditional
depending on the client’s behavior.
“I wouldn’t worry about that if I were you.”
“Everything will be all right.”
Better to say: “We will work on that
together.”
“Let’s not discuss. . . .”
“I don’t want to hear about. . . .”
Better to say: “Let’s look at that a little
closer.”
“That’s good. I’m glad that you. . . .”
“That’s bad. I’d rather you wouldn’t. . . .”
Better to say: “Let’s talk about how your
behavior invoked anger in the other
clients at dinner.”
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 154
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 155
TA B L E 8 – 3 Nontherapeutic Communication Techniques—cont’d
TECHNIQUE EXPLANATION/RATIONALE EXAMPLES
Agreeing or disagreeing
Giving advice
Probing
Defending
Requesting an explanation
Indicating the existence of
an external source of power
Belittling feelings expressed
Indicating accord with or opposition to the
client’s ideas or opinions implies that the
nurse has the right to pass judgment on
whether the client’s ideas or opinions are
“right” or “wrong.” Agreement prevents the
client from later modifying his or her point
of view without admitting error. Disagree-
ment implies inaccuracy, provoking the
need for defensiveness on the part of
the client.
Telling the client what to do or how to
behave implies that the nurse knows what
is best and that the client is incapable of any
self-direction. It nurtures the client in the
dependent role by discouraging indepen –
dent thinking.
Persistent questioning of the client and
pushing for answers to issues the client
does not wish to discuss causes the client to
feel used and valued only for what is shared
with the nurse and places the client on the
defensive.
Attempting to protect someone or some-
thing from verbal attack, or defending what
the client has criticized, implies that he or
she has no right to express ideas, opinions,
or feelings. Defending does not change the
client’s feelings and may cause the client
to think the nurse is taking sides against
the client.
Asking the client to provide the reasons for
thoughts, feelings, behavior, and events—
asking “why” a client did something or feels
a certain way—can be very intimidating and
implies that the client must defend his or
her behavior or feelings.
Attributing the source of thoughts, feelings,
and behavior to others or to outside influ-
ences encourages the client to project
blame for his or her thoughts or behaviors
on others rather than accepting the respon-
sibility personally.
When the nurse misjudges the degree of
the client’s discomfort, a lack of empathy
and understanding may be conveyed.
Telling the client to “perk up” or “snap
out of it” causes the client to feel insignifi-
cant or unimportant. When one is experi-
encing discomfort, it is no relief to hear
that others are or have been in similar
situations.
“That’s right. I agree.”
“That’s wrong. I disagree.”
“I don’t believe that.”
Better to say: “Let’s discuss what you
feel is unfair about the new commu-
nity rules.”
“I think you should. . . .”
“Why don’t you. . . .”
Better to say: “What do you think you
should do?” or “What do you think
would be the best way to solve this
problem?
“Tell me how your mother abused you
when you were a child.”
“Tell me how you feel toward your
mother now that she is dead.”
“Now tell me about. . . .”
Better technique: The nurse should be
aware of the client’s response and
discontinue the interaction at the
first sign of discomfort.
“No one here would lie to you.”
“You have a very capable physician. I’m
sure he has only your best interests
in mind.”
Better to say: “I will try to answer your
questions and clarify some issues
regarding your treatment.”
“Why do you think that?”
“Why do you feel this way?”
“Why did you do that?”
Better to say: “Describe what you were
feeling just before that happened.”
“What makes you say that?”
“What made you do that?”
“What made you so angry last night?”
Better to say: “You became angry when
your brother insulted your wife.”
Cl: “I have nothing to live for. I wish I
were dead.”
Ns: “Everybody gets down in the
dumps at times. I feel that way
myself sometimes.”
Better to say: “You must be very
upset. Tell me what you are feeling
right now.”
Continued
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 155
156 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
TA B L E 8 – 3 Nontherapeutic Communication Techniques—cont’d
TECHNIQUE EXPLANATION/RATIONALE EXAMPLES
Making stereotyped
comments
Using denial
Interpreting
Introducing an unrelated
topic
SOURCE: Adapted from Hays, J.S., & Larson, K.H. (1963). Interacting with patients. New York: Macmillan.
Clichés and trite expressions are meaning-
less in a nurse-client relationship. When
the nurse makes empty conversation, it
encourages a like response from the
client.
Denying that a problem exists blocks discus-
sion with the client and precludes helping
the client identify and explore areas of
difficulty.
With this technique, the therapist seeks to
make conscious that which is unconscious,
to tell the client the meaning of his or her
experience.
Changing the subject causes the nurse to
take over the direction of the discussion.
This may occur in order to get to something
that the nurse wants to discuss with the
client or to get away from a topic that he or
she prefers not to discuss.
“I’m fine, and how are you?”
“Hang in there. It’s for your own good.”
“Keep your chin up.”
Better to say: “The therapy must be diffi-
cult for you at times. How do you feel
about your progress at this point?”
Cl: “I’m nothing.”
Ns: “Of course you’re something. Every-
body is somebody.”
Better to say: “You’re feeling like no one
cares about you right now.”
“What you really mean is. . . .”
“Unconsciously you’re saying. . . .”
Better technique: The nurse must leave
interpretation of the client’s behavior
to the psychiatrist. The nurse has not
been prepared to perform this tech-
nique, and in attempting to do so,
may endanger other nursing roles
with the client.
Cl: “I don’t have anything to live for.”
Ns: “Did you have visitors this weekend?”
Better technique: The nurse must remain
open and free to hear the client and to
take in all that is being conveyed, both
verbally and nonverbally.
Several nonverbal behaviors have been designated
as facilitative skills for attentive listening. Those listed
here can be identified by the acronym SOLER:
S—Sit squarely facing the client. This nonverbal cue
gives the message that the nurse is there to listen
and is interested in what the client has to say.
O—Observe an open posture. Posture is considered
“open” when arms and legs remain uncrossed.
This nonverbal cue suggests that the nurse is open
to what the client has to say. With a closed position,
the nurse can convey a somewhat defensive stance,
possibly invoking a similar response in the client.
L—Lean forward toward the client. Leaning forward
conveys to the client that the nurse is involved in
the interaction, interested in what is being said,
and making a sincere effort to be attentive.
E—Establish eye contact. Eye contact, intermittently
directed, is another behavior that conveys the
nurse’s involvement and willingness to listen to
what the client has to say. The absence of eye
“contact or the constant shifting of eye contact
elsewhere in the environment gives the message
that the nurse is not really interested in what is
being said.
CLINICAL PEARL Ensure that eye contact conveys warmth and
is accompanied by smiling and intermittent nodding of the head
and does not come across as staring or glaring, which can create
intense discomfort in the client.
R—Relax. Whether sitting or standing during the in-
teraction, the nurse should communicate a sense
of being relaxed and comfortable with the client.
Restlessness and fidgetiness communicate a lack of
interest and may convey a feeling of discomfort
that is likely to be transferred to the client.
Motivational Interviewing
Patient-centered care has been identified as
an important focus in the quest to improve the
quality of nurse communication and therapeutic
relationships with clients (Institute of Medicine, 2003).
Motivational interviewing is an evidence-based,
patient-centered style of communicating that promotes
behavior change by guiding clients to explore their own
motivation for change and the advantages and disadvan-
tages of their decisions. This style of communication
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 156
incorporates active listening and verbal therapeutic
communication techniques, but it is focused on what
the client wants rather than on what the nurse thinks
should be the next steps in behavior change. Motiva-
tional interviewing was originally developed for use
with clients who were struggling with substance use
disorders, primarily because this style of communication
may decrease defensive client responses. It has since
gained widespread acceptance as a patient-centered
communication strategy that promotes behavior change
for clients with many different health-care issues. See
the “Real People, Real Stories” box for an example
of motivational interviewing described in a process
recording format.
Process Recordings
Process recordings are written reports of verbal in-
teractions with clients. They are verbatim accounts
recorded by the nurse or student as a tool for im-
proving interpersonal communication techniques.
Process recording can take many forms but usually
includes the verbal and nonverbal communication
of both nurse and client. The exercise provides a
means for the nurse to analyze both the content and
pattern of the interaction. Process recording, which
is not considered documentation, is intended to be
used as a learning tool for professional develop-
ment. An example of one type of process recording
is presented in Table 8–4.
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 157
Real People, Real Stories: A Sample of Motivational Interviewing in a Process Recording Format
Interaction
Karyn: You mentioned that you were
at an event and you commented that
you “needed a drink.” Tell me more
about what was happening. (SOLER)
Alan: (nodding) I was perturbed. I felt
like I was stuck at this event. There was
supposed to be entertainment but it
got cancelled due to rain, and sud-
denly I noticed people were drinking
and smoking. It brought back a lot of
memories. (looks down)
Karyn: So you felt perturbed and stuck.
. . . (looking up, not making direct eye
contact)
Alan: Yeah, but it didn’t last long.
Maybe it had something to do with the
fact that there was nothing else going
on and it seemed like the whole thing
became about drinking. But then I just
blacked it out.
Nurse’s Thoughts and Feelings
I wasn’t sure if Alan was willing to talk
about this, but I thought it was impor-
tant to facilitate his looking at his be-
havior in response to this experience.
I was glad that Alan was open to dis-
cussing this experience, but he said
so many things in this short statement
that I had to be thoughtful about what
to follow up on.
I was thinking that I don’t usually ex-
plore feelings right off the bat because
I believe it’s better to help someone
fully describe events and thoughts first
(or at least it’s less threatening), but
I’ve interacted with Alan many times,
he’s been through rehab, sober for
seven years, and he’s pretty comfort-
able talking about feelings
My immediate thought was that I
want to tell him to go to an AA meet-
ing or call his sponsor, but I was trying
to incorporate a motivational inter-
viewing strategy, and that meant it
would be better to help him explore
his motivation for how to respond to
this experience. I didn’t know what he
meant by “blacked it out,” but I felt
uncomfortable when he said that.
Communication Technique/Evaluation
Technique: Exploring
Evaluation: This approach was effective.
Alan talked more about the event and was
able to articulate some thoughts and feel-
ings as well.
Technique: Reflecting
Evaluation: This technique was effective.
Alan began to process his thoughts about
why he might be feeling perturbed and
stuck.
I think I may have been not making direct
eye contact because of my perception that
feelings can be a little more threatening for
some people to talk about.
The following is part of an interaction with Alan, incorporating motivational interviewing communication strategies in a process
recording format. Learn more about Alan’s story in the chapter on substance use disorders.
Continued
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 157
158 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Real People, Real Stories: A Sample of Motivational Interviewing in a Process Recording
Format—cont’d
Interaction
Karyn: What do you mean when you
say you blacked it out? (SOLER)
Alan: (silent for several seconds) I do
need to go back to an AA meeting. I
mean, am I different than other peo-
ple? I know there are other people out
there that have to be struggling with
the same kind of things. When I was
in rehab, my mom and her boyfriend
were always there taking me to meet-
ings. My sister went, too. . . . (silent for
several more seconds) I know it’s
important ( silence) . . . about 75 per-
cent of the people I went to rehab with
are back out there using again.
Karyn: You said that you need to go
back to a meeting and that they are
important. Is it more helpful to go to
meetings when you just start thinking
about needing a drink, or do you think
that meetings are only necessary after
you actually take a drink?
Alan: Oh no, you’ve got to go long be-
fore you take that first drink. (silence)
People told me when I was in rehab
that they could tell I was really listening
in meetings . . . the meetings were
helpful (silence), and I just recon-
nected with my sponsor on Facebook,
so I need to get back to a meeting to
see him.
Karyn: You’ve identified three reasons
why you believe you need to go to a
meeting: because they are helpful to
you, because you want to find out if
others are struggling with the same
kinds of thoughts that you are, and be-
cause you need to reconnect with your
sponsor. Do you have a plan in mind
for how to follow through with that?
Alan: Well, I haven’t done it yet. I guess
I’m still just thinking about it.
Nurse’s Thoughts and Feelings
I thought this was an important state-
ment to clarify, since it might help him
explore how he behaved in response
to this event.
Alan seemed to be thinking a lot
about this and was responding with
several different thoughts, so I felt like
it was important to just use silence
and facilitate his reflection.
I thought Alan seemed to be gen-
uinely considering a behavior change.
I knew that Alan had not been going
to meetings regularly for the last cou-
ple of years, even though he acknowl-
edges their importance, so I wanted
to know more about whether he
thought behavior change (such as
going to AA meetings) was necessary
at this point.
Alan seemed like he was thinking
about what is important to him, so I
continued to remain silent to facilitate
that process.
I was thinking that he talks about
needing to go to AA, and I was feeling
anxious about wanting him to commit
to that, but at the same time, I recog-
nized that the motivation for change
and commitment to a plan of action
has to come from him.
I was appreciating his honesty and
thinking that this is the challenge of
motivational interviewing: accepting
where the client is at while continuing
to explore and facilitate his or her
motivations for behavior change.
Communication Technique/Evaluation
Technique: Clarifying
Evaluation: Asking this question was
effective. Alan talked at length about his
thoughts and feelings.
Technique: Restating, focusing
Evaluation: Restatement was effective.
The way I chose to focus was probably lead-
ing Alan to choose the “right” answer, and
that makes it harder to evaluate whether he
is just telling me what I want to hear or is
really motivated. It might have been better
to use the technique of formulating a plan
of action.
Technique: Summarizing, formulating a
plan of action
Evaluation: I think the techniques were
effective, although Alan may not be ready
to formulate an action plan at present.
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 158
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 159
TA B L E 8 – 4 Sample Process Recording
NURSE’S THOUGHTS AND
NURSE VERBAL FEELINGS CONCERNING ANALYSIS OF THE
(NONVERBAL) CLIENT VERBAL (NONVERBAL) THE INTERACTION INTERACTION
Do you still have
thoughts about harming
yourself? (Sitting facing
the client; looking directly
at client.)
Tell me what you were
feeling before you took
all the pills the other night.
(Using SOLER techniques
of active listening.)
You wanted to hurt him
because you felt betrayed.
(SOLER)
Seems like a pretty drastic
way to get your point
across. (Small frown.)
How are you feeling
about the situation
now? (SOLER)
Yes, I can understand
that you would like things
to be the way they were
before. (Offer client a
tissue.)
What do you think are
the chances of your
getting back together?
(SOLER)
So how are you preparing
to deal with this inevitable
outcome? (SOLER)
It won’t be easy. But you
have come a long way,
and I feel you have gained
strength in your ability to
cope. (Standing. Looking
at client. Smiling.)
Not really. I still feel sad, but
I don’t want to die. (Looking
at hands in lap.)
I was just so angry! To think
that my husband wants a
divorce now that he has a
good job. I worked hard to
put him through college.
(Fists clenched. Face and
neck reddened.)
Yes! If I died, maybe he’d
realize that he loved me
more than that other
woman. (Tears starting to
well up in her eyes.)
I know. It was a stupid thing
to do. (Wiping eyes.)
I don’t know. I still love him.
I want him to come home. I
don’t want him to marry her.
(Starting to cry again)
(Silence. Continues to cry
softly.)
None. He’s refused marriage
counseling. He’s already
moved in with her. He says
it’s over. (Wipes tears. Looks
directly at nurse.)
I’m going to do the things
we talked about: join a
divorced women’s support
group, increase my job
hours to full time, do some
volunteer work, and call the
suicide hotline if I feel like
taking pills again. (Looks
directly at nurse. Smiles.)
Yes, I know I will have hard
times. But I also know I have
support, and I want to go on
with my life and be happy
again. (Standing, smiling at
nurse.)
Felt a little uncomfortable.
Always a hard question
to ask.
Beginning to feel more
comfortable. Client seems
willing to talk, and I think
she trusts me.
Starting to feel sorry for her.
Trying hard to remain
objective.
Wishing there was an easy
way to help relieve some of
her pain.
I’m starting to feel some
anger toward her husband.
Sometimes it’s so hard to
remain objective!
Relieved to know that she
isn’t using denial about the
reality of the situation.
Positive feeling to know that
she remembers what we
discussed earlier and plans
to follow through.
Feeling confident that the
session has gone well;
hopeful that the client will
succeed in what she wants
to do with her life.
Therapeutic. Asking a
direct, closed-ended
question about suicidal
intent to elicit specific
information.
Therapeutic. Exploring.
Delving further into
client’s feelings to help
her better understand
her experience.
Therapeutic. Attempt-
ing to translate words
into feelings to convey
active listening.
Nontherapeutic.
Sounds disapproving.
Better to have pursued
client’s feelings.
Therapeutic. Focusing
on client’s current feel-
ings to assess current
mental status.
Therapeutic. Conveying
empathy to support car-
ing and connectedness.
Therapeutic. Reflecting
on the client’s expressed
feelings to encourage
client to recognize and
clarify their perceptions.
Therapeutic. Formulat-
ing a plan of action to
set the foundation for
problem-solving.
Therapeutic. Presenting
reality, making observa-
tions, and giving recog-
nition to support client’s
progress in problem
solving.
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 159
Feedback
Feedback is a method of communication for helping
the client consider behavior modification by provid-
ing information about how he or she is perceived by
others. Feedback can be useful to the client if pre-
sented with objectivity by a trusted individual in a
manner that discourages defensiveness.
Characteristics of useful feedback include the
following:
■ Feedback is descriptive rather than evaluative and
focuses on the behavior rather than on the client.
Avoiding evaluative language reduces the need for
the client to react defensively. Objective descrip-
tions allow clients to use the information in what-
ever way they choose. When the focus of feedback
is on the client, the nurse makes judgments about
the client.
EXAMPLE
Descriptive and
focused on behavior
Evaluative
Focus on client
■ Feedback should be specific rather than general.
Information that gives details about the client’s be-
havior is more effective than a generalized descrip-
tion in promoting behavior change.
EXAMPLE
Specific
General
■ Feedback should be directed toward behavior that
the client has the capacity to modify. To provide
feedback about a characteristic or situation that the
client cannot change only provokes frustration.
EXAMPLE
Can modify
Cannot modify
■ Feedback should impart information rather than
offer advice. Giving advice fosters dependence and
may convey the message to the client that he or she
is not capable of making decisions and solving
problems independently. It is the client’s right and
privilege to be as self-sufficient as possible.
EXAMPLE
Imparting
information
Giving advice
■ Feedback should be well-timed. Feedback is most
useful when given at the earliest appropriate op-
portunity following the specific behavior.
EXAMPLE
Prompt
response
Delayed
response
Summary and Key Points
■ Interpersonal communication is a transaction
between the sender and the receiver.
■ In all interpersonal transactions, the sender and
receiver each bring certain preexisting conditions
to the exchange that influence both the intended
message and the way in which it is interpreted.
■ Examples of these preexisting conditions include
one’s value system, internalized attitudes and be-
liefs, culture and religion, social status, gender,
background knowledge and experience, age or
developmental level, and the type of environment
in which the communication takes place.
■ Nonverbal expression is a primary communication
system in which meaning is assigned to various
gestures and patterns of behavior.
■ Some components of nonverbal communication
include physical appearance and dress, body move-
ment and posture, touch, facial expressions, eye
behavior, and vocal cues or paralanguage.
■ Meaning of the nonverbal components of commu-
nication is culturally determined.
■ Therapeutic communication is an intentional
process that applies both verbal and nonverbal
techniques to focus on the care receiver’s needs and
advance the promotion of healing and change.
■ Motivational interviewing is an evidence-based,
patient-centered style of therapeutic communication
160 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
“Jessica was very upset in group
today when you called her ‘a cow’
and laughed at her in front of the
others.”
“You were very rude and incon-
siderate to Jessica in group
today.”
“You are a very insensitive person.”
“You were talking to Joe when we were
deciding on the issue. Now you want to
argue about the outcome.”
“You just don’t pay attention.”
“I noticed that you did not want to hold
your baby when the nurse brought her
to you.”
“Your baby daughter is mentally retarded
because you took drugs when you were
pregnant.”
“There are various methods of assistance
for people who want to lose weight,
such as Overeaters Anonymous, Weight
Watchers, regular visits to a dietitian, and
the Physician’s Weight Loss Program. You
can decide what is best for you.”
“You obviously need to lose a great deal
of weight. I think the Physician’s Weight
Loss Program would be best for you.”
“I saw you hit the wall with your fist just
now when you hung up the phone after
talking to your mother.”
“You need to learn some more appropri-
ate ways of dealing with your anger. Last
week after group I saw you pounding
your fist against the wall.”
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 160
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 161
that facilitates clients’ exploration of their own
motivations for behavior change and guides the
client to explore the advantages and disadvantages
of their decisions.
■ Nurses must be aware of and avoid techniques that
are considered barriers to effective communication.
■ Active listening is described as attentiveness to
what the client is saying through both verbal and
nonverbal cues. Skills associated with active listen-
ing include sitting squarely facing the client, ob-
serving an open posture, leaning forward toward
the client, establishing eye contact, and being
relaxed.
■ Process recordings are written reports of verbal
interactions with clients. They are used as learning
tools for professional development.
■ Feedback is a method of communication for help-
ing the client consider a modification of behavior.
■ The nurse must be aware of the therapeutic or non-
therapeutic value of the communication techniques
used with the client because they are the tools of
psychosocial intervention.
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. A client states, “I refuse to shower in this room. I must be very cautious. The FBI has placed a camera
in here to monitor my every move.” Which of the following is the most therapeutic response?
a. “That’s not true.”
b. “I have a hard time believing that is true.”
c. “Surely you don’t really believe that.”
d. “I will help you search this room so that you can see there is no camera.”
2. Simone, a depressed client who has been unkempt and untidy for weeks, today comes to group therapy
wearing makeup and a clean dress with hair washed and combed. Which of the following responses by
the nurse is most appropriate?
a. “Simone, I see you have put on a clean dress and combed your hair.”
b. “Simone, you look wonderful today!”
c. “Simone, I’m sure everyone will appreciate that you have cleaned up for the group today.”
d. “Now that you see how important it is, I hope you will do this every day.”
3. Dorothy was involved in an automobile accident while under the influence of alcohol. She swerved
her car into a tree and narrowly missed hitting a child on a bicycle. She is in the hospital with multiple
abrasions and contusions. She is talking about the accident with the nurse. Which of the following
statements by the nurse is most appropriate?
a. “Now that you know what can happen when you drink and drive, I’m sure you won’t let it happen again.”
b. “You know that was a terrible thing you did. That child could have been killed.”
c. “I’m sure everything is going to be okay now that you understand the possible consequences of such
behavior.”
d. “How are you feeling about what happened?”
4. Judy has been in the hospital for 3 weeks. She has used Valium “to settle her nerves” for the past 15 years.
She was admitted by her psychiatrist for safe withdrawal from the drug. She has passed the physical symp-
toms of withdrawal at this time but states to the nurse, “I don’t know if I will be able to make it without
Valium after I go home. I’m already starting to feel nervous. I have so many personal problems.” Which
is the most appropriate response by the nurse?
a. “Why do you think you need drugs to deal with your problems?”
b. “Everybody has problems, but not everybody uses drugs to deal with them. You’ll just have to do the
best that you can.”
c. “Let’s explore some things you can do to decrease your anxiety without resorting to drugs.”
d. “Just hang in there. I’m sure everything is going to be okay.”
Continued
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 161
162 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
5. Mrs. S. asks the nurse, “Do you think I should tell my husband about my affair with my boss?” Which
is the most appropriate response by the nurse?
a. “What do you think would be best for you to do?”
b. “Of course you should. Marriage has to be based on truth.”
c. “Of course not. That would only make things worse.”
d. “I can’t tell you what to do. You have to decide for yourself.”
6. Abby, an adolescent, just returned from group therapy and is crying. She says to the nurse, “All the
other kids laughed at me! I try to fit in, but I always seem to say the wrong thing. I’ve never had a
close friend. I guess I never will.” Which is the most appropriate response by the nurse?
a. “What makes you think you will never have any friends?”
b. “You’re feeling pretty down on yourself right now.”
c. “I’m sure they didn’t mean to hurt your feelings.”
d. “Why do you feel this way about yourself?”
7. Walter is angry with his psychiatrist and says to the nurse, “He doesn’t know what he is doing. That
medication isn’t helping a thing!” The nurse responds, “He has been a doctor for many years and
has helped many people.” This is an example of what nontherapeutic technique?
a. Rejecting
b. Disapproving
c. Probing
d. Defending
8. The client says to the nurse, “I’ve been offered a promotion, but I don’t know if I can handle it.” The
nurse replies, “You’re afraid you may fail in the new position.” This is an example of which therapeutic
technique?
a. Restating
b. Making observations
c. Focusing
d. Verbalizing the implied
9. The environment in which the communication takes place influences the outcome of the interaction.
Which of the following are aspects of the environment that influence communication? (Select all
that apply.)
a. Territoriality
b. Density
c. Dimension
d. Distance
e. Intensity
10. The nurse says to a client, “You are being readmitted to the hospital. Why did you stop taking your
medication?” What communication technique does this represent?
a. Disapproving
b. Requesting an explanation
c. Disagreeing
d. Probing
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 162
C H A P T E R 8 ■ Therapeutic Communication 163
References
Givens, D.B. (2013a). Eye contact. In The Nonverbal Dictionary
of Gestures, Signs, and Body Language Cues. Retrieved from:
http://www.nonverbal-dictionary.org/2012/12/eyes-
contact.html
Givens, D.B. (2013b). Facial expression. In The Nonverbal Dic-
tionary of Gestures, Signs, and Body Language Cues. Retrieved
from: http://www.nonverbal-dictionary.org/2012/12/
facial-expression.html
Givens, D.B. (2006c). Touch cue. In The Nonverbal Dictionary of
Gestures, Signs, and Body Language Cues. Retrieved from http://
web.archive.org/web/20060627081330/members.aol.com/
doder1/touch1.htm
Institute of Medicine. (2003). Health professions education: A bridge
to quality. Washington, DC: Institute of Medicine.
Hughey, J.D. (1990). Speech communication. Stillwater: Oklahoma
State University.
Khan, A. (2014). Principles for personal growth. Bellevue, WA:
YouMe Works.
Knapp, M.L., & Hall, J.A. (2014). Nonverbal communication in
human interaction (8th ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.
Simon, M. (2005). Facial expressions: A visual reference for artists.
New York: Watson-Guptill.
Classical References
Hall, E.T. (1966). The hidden dimension. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.
Hays, J.S., & Larson, K.H. (1963). Interacting with patients. New York:
Macmillan.
Reece, M., & Whitman, R. (1962). Expressive movements,
warmth, and verbal reinforcement. Journal of Abnormal and
Social Psychology, 64, 234-236. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/
h0039792
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
11. Joe has been in rehabilitation for alcohol dependence. When he returns from a visit to his home, he
tells the nurse, “We were having a celebration and I did have one drink, but it really wasn’t a problem.”
The nurse notices that his breath smells of alcohol. Which of the following responses by the nurse
demonstrates a motivational interviewing style of communication?
a. “You are obviously not motivated to change, so perhaps we should discuss your discharge from the
treatment program.”
b. “You need to abstain from alcohol in order to recover, so let me talk to the doctor about the con-
sequences of your behavior.”
c. “Why would you destroy everything you’ve worked so hard to achieve?”
d. “What do you mean when you say, ‘It really wasn’t a problem’?”
12. Bill, who has been diagnosed with schizophrenia and has been on medication for several months,
states, “I’m not taking that stupid medication anymore.” Which of the following responses by the
nurse demonstrates a motivational interviewing style of communication?
a. “Don’t you know that if you don’t take your medication you will never recover?”
b. “Why won’t you cooperate with the treatment your doctor prescribed?”
c. “Bill, the medication is not stupid.”
d. “Tell me more about why you don’t want to take the medication.”
6054_Ch08_147-163 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 163
9 The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
The Nursing Process
Why Nursing Diagnosis?
Nursing Case Management
Applying the Nursing Process in the Psychiatric
Setting
Concept Mapping
Documentation of the Nursing Process
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
case management
case manager
concept mapping
critical pathways of care
Focus Charting®
interdisciplinary
managed care
Nursing Interventions
Classification (NIC)
Nursing Outcomes
Classification (NOC)
nursing process
PIE charting
problem-oriented recording
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Define nursing process.
2. Identify six steps of the nursing process,
and describe nursing actions associated
with each.
3. Describe the benefits of using nursing
diagnosis.
4. Discuss the list of nursing diagnoses ap-
proved by NANDA International for clinical
use and testing.
5. Define and discuss the use of case manage-
ment and critical pathways of care in the
clinical setting.
6. Apply the six steps of the nursing process in
caring for a client in the psychiatric setting.
7. Document client care that validates use of
the nursing process.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. Nursing outcomes (sometimes referred to
as goals) are derived from the nursing diag-
nosis. Name two essential aspects of an
acceptable outcome or goal.
2. Define managed care.
3. The American Nurses Association identifies
certain interventions that may be performed
only by psychiatric nurses in advanced
practice. What are they?
4. In Focus Charting®, one item cannot be
used as the focus for documentation. What
is this item?
CORE CONCEPTS
Assessment
Evaluation
Nursing Diagnosis
Outcomes
164
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 164
For many years, the nursing process has provided a
systematic framework for the delivery of nursing care.
This framework fulfills the requirement for a scientific
methodology in order for nursing to be considered a
profession.
This chapter examines the steps of the nursing
process as they are set forth by the American Nurses
Association (ANA) in Nursing: Scope and Standards of
Practice (ANA, 2015). An explanation is provided for
the implementation of case management and the crit-
ical pathways of care tool used with this methodology.
A description of concept mapping is included, and
documentation that validates the use of the nursing
process is discussed.
The Nursing Process
Definition
The nursing process consists of six steps and uses a
problem-solving approach that has come to be accepted
as nursing’s scientific methodology. It is goal-directed
with the objective of quality client care delivery.
The nursing process is dynamic, not static. It is
an ongoing process that continues for as long as the
nurse and client have interactions directed toward
change in the client’s physical or behavioral responses.
Figure 9–1 presents a schematic of the ongoing nurs-
ing process.
Standards of Practice
The ANA, in collaboration with the American Psychi-
atric Nurses Association (APNA) and the Interna-
tional Society of Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurses
(ISPN) (2014) has delineated a set of standards that
psychiatric-mental health nurses are expected to fol-
low as they provide care for their clients. The ANA
(2015) describes a standard of practice as an author-
itative statement that is defined and promoted by
the profession and that provides the foundation for
evaluating quality of nursing practice. The nursing
process is a critical thinking model that integrates
professional standards of practice to assess, diagnose,
identify outcomes, plan, implement, and evaluate
nursing care.
Following is a discussion of the standards of practice
for psychiatric-mental health nurses as set forth by the
ANA, APNA, and ISPN (2014). Many of these standards
outline the registered nurse’s role in each step of
the nursing process and apply them to the psychiatric-
mental health nurse. Three changes in the current
standards of practice reflect issues and trends that have
evolved more recently.
First, patients are now referred to as health-care
consumers. This term reflects the trend toward
patient-centered care and conceptualizing that
relationship as a collaborative partnership.
Second, counseling interventions (performed by
psychiatric-mental health registered nurses) are now
differentiated from psychotherapy (performed by
psychiatric-mental health advanced practice registered
nurses). The third change, in Standard 5G. Therapeutic
Relationship and Counseling, adds the phrase “assist-
ing healthcare consumers in their individual recovery
journeys.” This language supports the recovery model
of intervention, a current trend toward focus on a
collaborative recovery process rather than health-care
provider–prescribed treatment alone. (See Chapter 21,
The Recovery Model, for more information.)
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 165
CORE CONCEPT
Assessment
A systematic, dynamic process by which the regis-
tered nurse, through interaction with the patient, family,
groups, communities, populations, and healthcare
providers, collects and analyzes data. Assessment
may include the following dimensions: physical, psy-
chological, sociocultural, spiritual, cognitive, functional
abilities, developmental, economic, and lifestyle (ANA
et al., 2014, p. 87).
FIGURE 9–1 The ongoing nursing process.
Standard 1. Assessment
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse collects and
synthesizes comprehensive health data that are pertinent to
the healthcare consumer’s health and/or situation (ANA
et al., 2014. p. 44).
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 165
In this first step, a database to determine the best
possible client care is established. Information for
this database is gathered from a variety of sources, in-
cluding interviews with the client and/or family, ob-
servation of the client and his or her environment,
consultation with other health team members, review
of the client’s records, and a nursing physical exam-
ination. A biopsychosocial assessment tool based
on the stress-adaptation framework is included in
Box 9–1.
166 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool
I. General Information
Client name: Allergies:
Room number: Diet:
Doctor: Height/weight:
Age: Vital signs: TPR/BP
Sex: Name and phone no. of significant other:
Race:
Dominant language: City of residence:
Marital status: Diagnosis (admitting & current):
Chief complaint:
Conditions of admission:
Date: Time:
Accompanied by:
Route of admission (wheelchair; ambulatory; cart):
Admitted from:
II. Predisposing Factors
A. Genetic Influences
1. Family configuration (use genograms):
Family of origin: Present family:
Family dynamics (describe significant relationships between family members):
2. Medical/psychiatric history:
a. Client:
b. Family members:
3. Other genetic influences affecting present adaptation. This might include effects specific to gender, race, appearance,
such as genetic physical defects, or any other factor related to genetics that is affecting the client’s adaptation that has
not been mentioned elsewhere in this assessment.
B. Past Experiences
1. Cultural and social history:
a. Environmental factors (family living arrangements, type of neighborhood, special working conditions):
(Text continued on page 172)
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 166
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 167
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool—cont’d
b. Health beliefs and practices (personal responsibility for health; special self-care practices):
c. Religious beliefs and practices:
d. Educational background:
e. Significant losses/changes (include dates):
f. Peer/friendship relationships:
g. Occupational history:
h. Previous pattern of coping with stress:
i. Other lifestyle factors contributing to present adaptation:
C. Existing Conditions
1. Stage of development (Erikson):
a. Theoretically:
b. Behaviorally:
c. Rationale:
2. Support systems:
3. Economic security:
4. Avenues of productivity/contribution:
a. Current job status:
b. Role contributions and responsibility for others:
III. Precipitating Event
Describe the situation or events that precipitated this illness/hospitalization:
Continued
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 167
168 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool—cont’d
IV. Client’s Perception of the Stressor
Client’s or family member’s understanding or description of stressor/illness and expectations of hospitalization:
V. Adaptation Responses
A. Psychosocial
1. Anxiety level (circle one of the 4 levels and check the behaviors that apply): Mild Moderate Severe Panic
calm friendly passive alert perceives environment correctly cooperative
impaired attention “jittery” unable to concentrate hypervigilant tremors rapid
speech withdrawn confused disoriented fearful hyperventilating misinterpreting
the environment (hallucinations or delusions) depersonalization obsessions compulsions
somatic complaints excessive hyperactivity other
2. Mood/affect (circle as many as apply): happiness sadness dejection despair elation euphoria suspi-
ciousness apathy (little emotional tone) anger/hostility
3. Ego defense mechanisms (describe how used by client):
Projection
Suppression
Undoing
Displacement
Intellectualization
Rationalization
Denial
Repression
Isolation
Regression
Reaction Formation
Splitting
Religiosity
Sublimation
Compensation
4. Level of self-esteem (circle one): low moderate high
Things client likes about self
Things client would like to change about self
Objective assessment of self-esteem:
Eye contact
General appearance
Personal hygiene
Participation in group activities and interactions with others
5. Stage and manifestations of grief (circle one):
Denial Anger Bargaining Depression Acceptance
Describe the client’s behaviors that are associated with this stage of grieving in response to loss or change.
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 168
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 169
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool—cont’d
6. Thought processes (circle as many as apply): clear logical easy to follow relevant confused blocking delusional
rapid flow of thoughts slowness in thought suspicious
Recent memory (circle one): loss intact Remote memory (circle one): loss intact
Other:
7. Communication patterns (circle as many as apply): clear coherent slurred speech incoherent neologisms loose
associations flight of ideas aphasic perseveration rumination tangential speech loquaciousness slow, impov-
erished speech speech impediment (describe)
Other
8. Interaction patterns (describe client’s pattern of interpersonal interactions with staff and peers on the unit, e.g.,
manipulative, withdrawn, isolated, verbally or physically hostile, argumentative, passive, assertive, aggressive, passive-
aggressive, other):
9. Reality orientation (check those that apply):
Oriented to: Time Person
Place ______________________________ Situation
10. Ideas of destruction to self/others? Yes No
If yes, consider plan; available means
B. Physiological
1. Psychosomatic manifestations (describe any somatic complaints that may be stress-related):
2. Drug history and assessment:
Use of prescribed drugs:
Name Dosage Prescribed for Results
Use of over-the-counter drugs:
Name Dosage Used for Results
Continued
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 169
170 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool—cont’d
Use of street drugs or alcohol:
Amount How Often When Last Effects
Name Used Used Used Produced
3. Pertinent physical assessments:
a. Respirations: normal labored
Rate Rhythm
b. Skin: warm dry moist cool clammy pink
cyanotic poor turgor edematous
Evidence of: rash bruising needle tracks hirsutism
loss of hair other
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. Musculoskeletal status: weakness tremors
Degree of range of motion (describe limitations)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Pain (describe)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Skeletal deformities (describe)
Coordination (describe limitations)
d. Neurological status:
History of (check all that apply): seizures (describe method of control)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
headaches (describe location and frequency)
fainting spells dizziness
tingling/numbness (describe location)
e. Cardiovascular: B/P Pulse
History of (check all that apply):
hypertension palpitations
heart murmur chest pain
shortness of breath pain in legs
phlebitis ankle/leg edema
numbness/tingling in extremities
varicose veins
f. Gastrointestinal:
Usual diet pattern:
Food allergies:
Dentures? Upper Lower
Any problems with chewing or swallowing?
Any recent change in weight?
Any problems with:
Indigestion/heartburn?
Relieved by
Nausea/vomiting?
Relieved by
History of ulcers?
Usual bowel pattern
Constipation? Diarrhea?
Type of self-care assistance provided for either of the above problems
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 170
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 171
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool—cont’d
g. Genitourinary/Reproductive:
Usual voiding pattern
Urinary hesitancy? Frequency?
Nocturia? Pain/burning?
Incontinence?
Any genital lesions?
Discharge? Odor?
History of sexually transmitted disease?
If yes, please explain:
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Any concerns about sexuality/sexual activity?
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Method of birth control used
Females:
Date of last menstrual cycle
Length of cycle
Problems associated with menstruation?
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Breasts: Pain/tenderness?
Swelling? Discharge?
Lumps? Dimpling?
Practice breast self-examination?
Frequency?
Males:
Penile discharge?
Prostate problems?
h. Eyes: Yes No Explain
Glasses? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Contacts? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Swelling? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Discharge? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Itching? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Blurring? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Double vision? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
i. Ears Yes No Explain
Pain? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Drainage? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Difficulty hearing? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Hearing aid? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
Tinnitus? ____________________ ________________ _________________________________________
j. Medication side effects:
What symptoms is the client experiencing that may be attributed to current medication usage?
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
k. Altered lab values and possible significance:
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
l. Activity/rest patterns:
Exercise (amount, type, frequency)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Leisure time activities:
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 171
An example of a simple and quick mental status
evaluation is presented in Table 9–1. Sometimes the
term mental status assessment is used to describe an as-
sessment of the cognitive aspects of functioning, as is
the case with tools such as Folstein’s Mini-Mental State
Evaluation (Folstein, Folstein, & McHugh, 1975).
Likewise, the tool in Table 9–1 focuses strictly on a
brief assessment of the cognitive aspects of mental
functioning. In psychiatry and psychiatric-mental
health nursing, mental status assessment assumes a
much broader definition and includes assessment of
mood, affect, behavior, relationships, speech, percep-
tual disturbances, insight, and judgment in addition
to cognitive function. A comprehensive mental status
assessment guide, with explanations and selected sam-
ple interview questions, is provided in Appendix C,
Mental Status Assessment.
172 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
BOX 9–1 Nursing History and Assessment Tool—cont’d
Patterns of sleep: Number of hours per night
Use of sleep aids?
Pattern of awakening during the night?
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Feel rested upon awakening?
m. Personal hygiene/activities of daily living:
Patterns of self-care: independent _________________________________________________________________
Requires assistance with: mobility _________________________________________________________________
hygiene _________________________________________________________________
toileting _________________________________________________________________
feeding __________________________________________________________________
dressing _________________________________________________________________
other ____________________________________________________________________
Statement describing personal hygiene and general appearance _________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
n. Other pertinent physical assessments: ______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Summary of Initial Psychosocial/Physical Assessment:
Knowledge Deficits Identified:
Nursing Diagnoses Indicated:
CORE CONCEPT
Nursing Diagnosis
Clinical judgments about individual, family, or community
experiences/responses to actual or potential health
problems/life processes. A nursing diagnosis provides
the basis for selection of nursing interventions to achieve
outcomes for which the nurse has accountability
(NANDA International [NANDA-I], 2015a).
Standard 2. Diagnosis
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse analyzes the
assessment data to determine diagnoses, problems, and
areas of focus for care and treatment, including level of risk
(ANA et al., 2014, p. 46).
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 172
In the second step, data gathered during the assess-
ment are analyzed. Diagnoses and potential problem
statements are formulated and prioritized. Diagnoses
are congruent with available and accepted classifica-
tion systems (e.g., NANDA International Nursing Diag-
noses: Definitions and Classification [see Appendix E,
Assigning NANDA International Nursing Diagnoses
to Client Behaviors]).
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 173
TA B L E 9 – 1 Brief Mental Status Evaluation
AREA OF MENTAL FUNCTION EVALUATED
Orientation to time
Orientation to place
Attention and immediate recall
Abstract thinking
Recent memory
Naming objects
Ability to follow simple verbal
command
Ability to follow simple written
command
Ability to use language correctly
Ability to concentrate
Understanding spatial relationships
Scoring: 30–21 = normal; 20–11 = mild cognitive impairment; 10–0 = severe cognitive impairment (scores are not absolute and must
be considered within the comprehensive diagnostic assessment).
SOURCES: Beers, M.H. (2005). The Merck manual of health & aging. New York: Ballentine; Kaufman, D.M., & Zun, L. (1995). A quantifi-
able, brief mental status examination for emergency patients. Journal of Emergency Medicine, 13(4), 440-456; Kokman, E., Smith, G.E.,
Petersen, R.C., Tangalos, E., & Ivnik, R.C. (1991). The short test of mental status: Correlations with standardized psychometric testing.
Archives of Neurology, 48(7), 725-728; Folstein, M.F., Folstein, S.E., & McHugh, P.R. (1975). Mini-mental state: A practical method for
grading the cognitive state of patients for the clinician. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 12(3), 189-198; Pfeiffer, E. (1975). A short portable
mental status questionnaire for the assessment of organic brain deficit in elderly patients. Journal of the American Geriatric Society,
23(10), 433-441.
EVALUATION ACTIVITY
“What year is it?” “What month is it?” “What day is it?” (3 points)
“Where are you now?” (1 point)
“Repeat these words now: bell, book, & candle.” (3 points)
“Remember these words, and I will ask you to repeat them in a few minutes.”
“What does this mean: No use crying over spilled milk.” (3 points)
“Say the 3 words I asked you to remember earlier.” (3 points)
Point to eyeglasses and ask, “What is this?” Repeat with 1 other item (e.g.,
calendar, watch, pencil). (2 points possible)
“Tear this piece of paper in half and put it in the trash container.” (2 points)
Write a command on a piece of paper (e.g., TOUCH YOUR NOSE), give the
paper to the client, and say, “Do what it says on this paper.” (1 point for
correct action)
Ask the patient to write a sentence. (3 points if sentence has a subject, a
verb, and valid meaning)
“Say the months of the year in reverse, starting with December.” (1 point
each for correct answers from November through August; 4 points possible)
Instruct client to draw a clock, put in all the numbers, and set the hands on
3 o’clock. (clock circle = 1 pt; numbers in correct sequence = 1 pt; numbers
placed on clock correctly = 1 pt; two hands on the clock = 1 pt; hands set at
correct time = 1 pt; 5 points possible)
CORE CONCEPT
Outcomes
Client behaviors and responses that are collaboratively
agreed upon, measurable, desired results of nursing
interventions.
Standard 3. Outcomes Identification
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse identifies
expected outcomes and the healthcare consumer’s goals for
a plan individualized to the healthcare consumer or to the
situation (ANA et al., 2014, p. 48).
Expected outcomes are derived from the diagno-
sis. They must be measurable and include a time esti-
mate for attainment. They must be realistic for the
client’s capabilities, and they are most effective when
formulated cooperatively by the interdisciplinary
team members, the client, and significant others.
Nursing Outcomes Classification
The Nursing Outcomes Classification (NOC) is a
comprehensive, standardized classification of client
outcomes developed to evaluate the effects of nursing
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 173
interventions (Moorhead et al., 2013). The outcomes
have been linked to NANDA International (NANDA-I)
diagnoses and to the Nursing Interventions Classifi-
cation (NIC). NANDA-I, NIC, and NOC represent all
domains of nursing and can be used together or sep-
arately (Moorhead & Dochterman, 2012). Each of the
NOC outcomes has a label name, a definition, a list of
indicators to evaluate client status in relation to the
outcome, and a five-point Likert scale to measure
client status (Moorhead et al., 2013).
Standard 4. Planning
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse develops a
plan that prescribes strategies and alternatives to assist the
healthcare consumer in attainment of expected outcomes
(ANA et al., 2014, p. 50).
The care plan is individualized to the client’s mental
health problems, condition, or needs and is developed
in collaboration with the client, significant others, and
interdisciplinary team members if possible. For each
diagnosis identified, the most appropriate interven-
tions are selected on the basis of current psychiatric-
mental health nursing practice, standards, relevant
statutes, and research evidence. Client education and
necessary referrals are included. Priorities for delivery
of nursing care are determined on the basis of safety
needs and the client’s risk for harm to self or others.
Elements of the plan should be prioritized with input
from the client, the family, and others as appropriate
(ANA et al., 2014).
Nursing Interventions Classification
NIC is a comprehensive, standardized language de-
scribing treatments that nurses perform in all settings
and specialties (Bulechek, Butcher, Dochterman, &
Wagner, 2013). NIC includes both physiological and
psychosocial interventions as well as those for illness
treatment, illness prevention, and health promotion.
NIC interventions are comprehensive, based on re-
search, and reflect current clinical practice. They were
developed inductively on the basis of existing practice.
Each NIC intervention has a definition and a de-
tailed set of activities that describe what a nurse does
to implement the intervention. The use of standard-
ized language is thought to enhance continuity of
care and facilitate communication among nurses and
between nurses and other providers.
Standard 5. Implementation
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse implements
the identified plan (ANA et al., 2014, p. 52).
Interventions selected during the planning stage
are executed, taking into consideration the nurse’s
level of practice, education, and certification. The
care plan serves as a blueprint for delivery of safe, eth-
ical, and appropriate interventions. Documentation
of interventions also occurs at this step in the nursing
process.
Several specific interventions are included among
the standards of psychiatric-mental health clinical
nursing practice (ANA et al., 2014):
Standard 5A. Coordination of Care
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse coordinates
care delivery (ANA et al., 2014, p. 54).
Standard 5B. Health Teaching and Health
Promotion
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse employs strate-
gies to promote health and a safe environment (ANA et al.,
2014, p. 55).
Standard 5C. Consultation
The psychiatric-mental health advanced practice registered
nurse provides consultation to influence the identified plan,
enhance the abilities of other clinicians to provide services for
healthcare consumers, and effect change (ANA et al., 2014,
p. 57).
Standard 5D. Prescriptive Authority
and Treatment
The psychiatric-mental health advanced practice registered
nurse uses prescriptive authority, procedures, referrals, treat-
ments, and therapies in accordance with state and federal
laws and regulations (ANA et al., 2014, p. 58).
Standard 5E. Pharmacological, Biological,
and Integrative Therapies
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse incorporates
knowledge of pharmacological, biological, and complemen-
tary interventions with applied clinical skills to restore the
healthcare consumer’s health and prevent further disability
(ANA et al., 2014, p. 59).
Standard 5F. Milieu Therapy
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse provides,
structures, and maintains a safe, therapeutic, recovery-
oriented environment in collaboration with healthcare
consumers, families, and other healthcare clinicians
(ANA et al., 2014, p. 60).
Several models have been developed to identify
what constitutes a therapeutic environment. These
are discussed further in Chapter 12, Milieu Therapy—
The Therapeutic Community. Incorporation of the
health-care environment and the community of clients,
their families, and health-care providers is a unique
aspect of treatment for the client with a psychiatric-
mental health disorder.
Standard 5G. Therapeutic Relationship
and Counseling
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse (PMH-RN)
uses the therapeutic relationship and counseling interventions
174 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 174
to assist healthcare consumers in their individual recovery
journeys by improving and regaining their previous coping
abilities, fostering mental health, and preventing mental
disorder and disability (ANA et al., 2014, p. 62).
As mentioned previously, therapeutic relationship
and counseling interventions are part of the role of
registered nurses practicing in psychiatric-mental
health settings. These are basic psychoeducational
and problem discussion interventions and are differ-
entiated from psychotherapy that requires advanced
practice education and competency.
Standard 5H. Psychotherapy
The psychiatric-mental health advanced practice registered
nurse conducts individual, couples, group, and family
psychotherapy using evidence-based psychotherapeutic frame-
works and the nurse-client therapeutic relationship (ANA
et al., 2014, p. 63).
was initiated in 1973 with the convening of the First
Task Force to Name and Classify Nursing Diagnoses.
The Task Force of the National Conference Group on
the Classification of Nursing Diagnoses was developed
during this conference and charged with the task of
identifying and classifying nursing diagnoses.
Also in the 1970s, the ANA began to write stan-
dards of practice around the steps of the nursing
process, of which nursing diagnosis is an inherent
part. This format encompassed both the general and
specialty standards outlined by the ANA.
From this progression, a policy statement that
includes a definition of nursing was published in
1980. The ANA defined nursing as “the diagnosis
and treatment of human responses to actual or
potential health problems” (ANA, 2010). This defi-
nition has been expanded to describe more appro-
priately nursing’s commitment to society and to
the profession. The ANA (2017) defines nursing as
follows:
Nursing is the protection, promotion, and optimiza-
tion of health and abilities, prevention of illness and
injury, alleviation of suffering through the diagnosis
and treatment of human response, and advocacy in
the care of individuals, families, communities, and
populations.
Nursing diagnosis is an inherent component of both
the original and expanded definitions.
Decisions regarding professional negligence are
made on the basis of the standards of practice defined
by the ANA and the individual state nurse practice
acts. A number of states have incorporated the steps
of the nursing process, including nursing diagnosis,
into the scope of nursing practice described in their
nurse practice acts. When this is the case, it is the legal
duty of the nurse to show that nursing process and
nursing diagnosis were accurately implemented in the
delivery of nursing care.
NANDA-I evolved from the original 1973 task
force to name and classify nursing diagnoses. The
major purpose of NANDA-I is to “to develop, refine
and promote terminology that accurately reflects
nurses’ clinical judgments. NANDA-I will be a global
force for the development and use of nursing’s
standardized terminology to ensure patient safety
through evidence-based care, thereby improving the
health care of all people” (NANDA-I, 2015b). The list
of NANDA-I-approved diagnoses is by no means
all-inclusive. In an effort to maintain a common
language within nursing and encourage clinical test-
ing, most of the nursing diagnoses used in this text
are taken from the 2015–2017 list approved by
NANDA-I. However, in a few instances, nursing diag-
noses that have been retired by NANDA-I for various
reasons will continue to be used because of their
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 175
CORE CONCEPT
Evaluation
The process of determining the healthcare consumer’s
progress toward attainment of expected outcomes, and
the effectiveness of the registered nurse’s care and
interventions (ANA et al., 2014, p. 88).
Standard 6. Evaluation
The psychiatric-mental health registered nurse evaluates
progress toward attainment of expected outcomes (ANA
et al., 2014, p. 65).
During the evaluation step, the nurse measures the
success of the interventions in meeting the outcome
criteria. The client’s response to treatment is docu-
mented, validating use of the nursing process in the
delivery of care. The diagnoses, outcomes, and plan
of care are reviewed and revised as need is deter-
mined by the evaluation.
Why Nursing Diagnosis?
The concept of nursing diagnosis is not new. For
centuries, nurses have identified specific client re-
sponses for which nursing interventions were used
in an effort to improve quality of life. Historically,
however, the autonomy of practice to which nurses
were entitled by virtue of their licensure was lacking
in the provision of nursing care. Nurses assisted
physicians as required and performed a group of
specific tasks that were considered within their scope
of responsibility.
The term diagnosis in relation to nursing first
began to appear in the literature in the early 1950s.
The formalized organization of the concept, however,
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 175
appropriateness and suitability in describing specific
behaviors.
The use of nursing diagnosis affords a degree of
autonomy that historically has been lacking in the
practice of nursing. Nursing diagnosis describes the
client’s condition, facilitating the prescription of
interventions and establishment of parameters for
outcome criteria based on unique components of the
nursing profession. The ultimate benefit is to the
client, who receives effective and consistent nursing
care based on knowledge of the problems that he or
she is experiencing and of the most beneficial nursing
interventions to resolve them.
Nursing Case Management
The concept of case management evolved with the ad-
vent of diagnosis-related groups (DRGs) and shorter
hospital stays. Case management is a model of care
delivery that can result in improved client care. In this
model, clients are assigned a manager who negotiates
with multiple providers to obtain diverse services.
This type of health-care delivery process serves to
decrease fragmentation of care while striving to con-
tain cost of services.
Case management in the acute care setting aims
to organize client care through an episode of illness
so that specific clinical and financial outcomes are
achieved within an allotted time frame. Commonly,
the allotted time frame is determined by the estab-
lished protocols for length of stay as defined by
the DRGs.
Case management has been shown to be an effec-
tive method of treatment for individuals with a severe
and persistent mental illness. This type of care strives
to improve functioning by assisting the individual to
solve problems, improve work and socialization skills,
promote leisure-time activities, and enhance overall
independence.
Ideally, case management incorporates concepts of
care at the primary, secondary, and tertiary levels of
prevention. Various definitions have emerged and
should be clarified, as follows.
Managed care refers to a strategy employed by
purchasers of health services who make determina-
tions about various services in order to maintain
quality and control costs. In a managed care pro-
gram, individuals receive health care based on need
as assessed by coordinators of the providership. Man-
aged care exists in many settings, including (but not
limited to):
■ Insurance-based programs
■ Employer-based medical providerships
■ Social service programs
■ The public health sector
Managed care may exist in virtually any setting in
which a private or government-based organization is
responsible for payment of health-care services for a
group of people. Examples of managed care are
health maintenance organizations (HMOs) and pre-
ferred provider organizations (PPOs).
Case management, the method used to achieve
managed care, is the actual coordination of services
required to meet the needs of a client within the frag-
mented health-care system. Case management strives
to help at-risk clients prevent avoidable episodes of
illness while controlling health-care costs for the con-
sumer and third-party payers.
Types of clients who benefit from case manage-
ment include (but are not limited to):
■ The frail elderly
■ Individuals with developmental disabilities
■ Individuals with physical disabilities
■ Individuals with mental disabilities
■ Individuals with long-term, medically complex
problems that require multifaceted, costly care
(e.g., high-risk infants, those who are HIV positive
or who have AIDS, and transplant clients)
■ Individuals who are severely compromised by an
acute episode of illness or an acute exacerbation of
a severe and persistent illness (e.g., schizophrenia)
The case manager is responsible for negotiating
with multiple health-care providers to obtain a variety
of services for the client. Nurses are exceptionally
qualified to serve as case managers. The very nature
of nursing, which incorporates knowledge about the
biological, psychological, and sociocultural aspects re-
lated to human functioning, makes nurses highly ap-
propriate for this role. Several years of experience as
a registered nurse is usually required for employment
as a case manager. Some case management programs
prefer advanced practice registered nurses who have
experience working with the specific populations for
whom the service will be rendered. The American
Nurses Credentialing Center (ANCC) offers an exam-
ination for nurses to become board certified in nurs-
ing case management.
Critical Pathways of Care
Critical pathways of care (CPCs) may be used as the
tools for provision of care in a case management system.
A critical pathway is an abbreviated care plan that pro-
vides outcome-based guidelines for goal achievement
within a designated length of stay. A sample CPC is pre-
sented in Table 9–2. Only one nursing diagnosis is used
in this sample, but a comprehensive CPC may have nurs-
ing diagnoses for several individual problems and incor-
porates responsibilities of other team members as well.
CPCs are intended to be used by the entire inter-
disciplinary team, which may include a nurse case
176 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 176
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 177
TA
B
L
E
9
–
2
Sa
m
pl
e
Cr
iti
ca
l P
at
hw
ay
o
f C
ar
e
fo
r
Cl
ie
nt
in
A
lc
oh
ol
W
ith
dr
aw
al
Es
ti
m
at
ed
L
en
gt
h
o
f
St
ay
:
7
D
ay
s—
Va
ri
at
io
n
s
Fr
o
m
D
es
ig
n
at
ed
P
at
h
w
ay
S
h
o
u
ld
B
e
D
o
cu
m
en
te
d
in
P
ro
gr
es
s
N
o
te
s
N
U
RS
IN
G
D
IA
G
N
O
SE
S
AN
D
C
AT
EG
O
RI
ES
O
F
C
AR
E
R
is
k
fo
r
in
ju
ry
r
el
at
ed
to
C
N
S
ag
ita
tio
n
R
ef
er
ra
ls
D
ia
g
n
o
st
ic
st
u
d
ie
s
A
d
d
iti
o
n
a
l a
ss
es
sm
en
ts
M
ed
ic
a
tio
n
s
C
lie
n
t
ed
u
ca
tio
n
A
A
, A
lc
o
h
o
lic
s
A
n
o
n
ym
o
u
s;
b
id
, t
w
ic
e
a
d
ay
;
D
C
, d
is
co
n
tin
u
e;
E
C
G
, e
le
ct
ro
ca
rd
io
gr
am
;
ET
O
H
, a
lc
o
h
o
l;
h
s,
b
ed
tim
e;
I&
O
, i
n
ta
ke
a
n
d
o
u
tp
u
t;
p
c,
a
ft
er
m
ea
ls
;
p
rn
, a
s
n
ee
d
ed
;
q
4
h
, e
ve
ry
4
h
o
u
rs
;
q
8
h
,
ev
er
y
8
h
o
u
rs
;
V
S,
v
ita
l s
ig
n
s.
TI
M
E
D
IM
EN
SI
O
N
D
ay
1
D
ay
1
D
ay
1
D
ay
1
–
5
O
n
go
in
g
O
n
go
in
g
D
ay
1
D
ay
2
D
ay
1
–
6
D
ay
1
–
7
G
O
AL
S
AN
D
/O
R
A C
TI
O
N
S
P
sy
ch
ia
tr
is
t
A
ss
es
s
n
ee
d
f
o
r:
N
eu
ro
lo
gi
st
C
ar
d
io
lo
gi
st
In
te
rn
is
t
B
lo
o
d
a
lc
o
h
o
l l
ev
el
D
ru
g
sc
re
en
(
u
rin
e
an
d
b
lo
o
d
)
C
h
em
is
tr
y
p
ro
fil
e
U
rin
al
ys
is
C
h
es
t
x-
ra
y
EC
G
V
S
q
4
h
I&
O
R
es
tr
ai
n
ts
p
rn
f
o
r
cl
ie
n
t
sa
fe
ty
A
ss
es
s
w
ith
d
ra
w
al
s
ym
p
to
m
s:
tr
em
o
rs
, n
au
se
a/
vo
m
iti
n
g,
t
ac
h
y-
ca
rd
ia
, s
w
ea
tin
g,
h
ig
h
b
lo
o
d
p
re
s-
su
re
, s
ei
zu
re
s,
in
so
m
n
ia
,
h
al
lu
ci
n
at
io
n
s
*L
ib
riu
m
2
0
0
m
g
in
d
iv
id
ed
d
o
se
s
Li
b
riu
m
1
6
0
m
g
in
d
iv
id
ed
d
o
se
s
Li
b
riu
m
p
rn
M
aa
lo
x
p
c
&
h
s
*N
o
te
:
So
m
e
p
h
ys
ic
ia
n
s
m
ay
e
le
ct
to
u
se
S
er
ax
o
r
Te
gr
et
o
l i
n
t
h
e
d
et
o
xi
fic
at
io
n
p
ro
ce
ss
TI
M
E
D
IM
EN
SI
O
N
D
ay
4
D
ay
2
–
3
D
ay
6
D
ay
4
D
ay
3
D
ay
4
D
ay
5
G
O
AL
S
AN
D
/O
R
A C
TI
O
N
S
R
ep
ea
t
o
f
se
le
ct
ed
d
ia
g-
n
o
st
ic
s
tu
d
ie
s
as
n
ec
es
sa
ry
V
S
q
8
h
if
s
ta
b
le
D
C
I&
O
M
ar
ke
d
d
ec
re
as
e
in
o
b
je
c-
tiv
e
w
ith
d
ra
w
al
s
ym
p
to
m
s
Li
b
riu
m
1
2
0
m
g
in
d
iv
id
ed
d
o
se
s
Li
b
riu
m
8
0
m
g
in
d
iv
id
ed
d
o
se
s
D
is
cu
ss
g
o
al
s
o
f
A
A
an
d
n
ee
d
f
o
r
o
u
tp
at
ie
n
t
th
er
ap
y
TI
M
E
D
IM
EN
SI
O
N
D
ay
7
D
ay
7
D
ay
4
–
7
D
ay
7
D
ay
5
D
ay
6
D
ay
7
D
ay
7
D
I S
CH
AR
G
E
O
U
TC
O
M
E
C
lie
n
t
sh
o
w
s
n
o
e
vi
d
en
ce
o
f
in
ju
ry
o
b
ta
in
ed
d
u
rin
g
E T
O
H
w
ith
d
ra
w
al
D
is
ch
ar
ge
w
ith
f
o
llo
w
-u
p
ap
p
o
in
tm
en
ts
a
s
re
q
u
ire
d
V
S
b
id
;
re
m
ai
n
s
ta
b
le
D
is
ch
ar
ge
;
ab
se
n
ce
o
f
o
b
je
c-
tiv
e
w
ith
d
ra
w
al
s
ym
p
to
m
s
Li
b
riu
m
4
0
m
g
D
is
co
n
tin
u
e
Li
b
riu
m
D
is
ch
ar
ge
;
n
o
w
ith
d
ra
w
al
sy
m
p
to
m
s
D
is
ch
ar
ge
w
ith
in
fo
rm
at
io
n
re
ga
rd
in
g
A
A
a
tt
en
d
an
ce
o
r
o
u
tp
at
ie
n
t
tr
ea
tm
en
t
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 177
manager, clinical nurse specialist, social worker, psy-
chiatrist, psychologist, dietitian, occupational thera-
pist, recreational therapist, chaplain, and others. The
team decides what categories of care are to be per-
formed, by what date, and by whom. Each member
of the team is then expected to carry out his or her
functions according to the time line designated on
the CPC.
Unlike a nursing care plan, CPCs have the benefit
of describing what an episode of care will look
like when implemented by team members in
collaboration with one another. Clarity about how team
members collaborate is important not only for providing
efficient patient care but also for improving quality and
safety.
As case manager, the nurse is ultimately responsi-
ble for ensuring that each assignment is carried
out. If variations occur in any of the categories of
care, rationale must be documented in the progress
notes. For example, with the sample CPC presented
in Table 9–2, the nurse case manager may admit the
client into the detoxification center. The nurse
contacts the psychiatrist to inform him or her of the
admission. The psychiatrist performs additional
assessments to determine if other consultations are
required and writes the orders for the initial diag-
nostic work-up and medication regimen. Within
24 hours, the interdisciplinary team meets to decide
on other categories of care, complete the CPC, and
make individual care assignments from the CPC.
This particular sample CPC relies heavily on nursing
care of the client through the critical withdrawal
period. However, other problems for the same client,
such as imbalanced nutrition, impaired physical
mobility, or spiritual distress, may involve other mem-
bers of the team to a greater degree. Each member
of the team stays in contact with the nurse case man-
ager regarding individual assignments. Ideally, team
meetings are held daily or every other day to review
progress and modify the plan as required.
CPCs can be standardized, as they are intended to
be used with uncomplicated cases. A CPC can be viewed
as protocol for clients who have specific problems for
which a designated outcome can be predicted.
Applying the Nursing Process
in the Psychiatric Setting
Based on the definition of mental health set forth in
Chapter 2, Mental Health and Mental Illness: Historical
and Theoretical Concepts, the nurse’s role in psychia-
try is to help the client successfully adapt to stressors
in the environment. Goals are directed toward changes
in thoughts, feelings, and behaviors that are age appro-
priate and congruent with local and cultural norms.
Therapy in the psychiatric setting is very often
team oriented, or interdisciplinary. Therefore, it is
important to delineate nursing’s involvement in the
treatment regimen. Nurses are valuable members of
the team. Having progressed beyond the role of cus-
todial caregiver in the psychiatric setting, they provide
defined services within the scope of nursing practice.
Nursing diagnosis is helping to define these nursing
boundaries, providing the degree of autonomy and
professionalism that has for so long been unrealized.
For example, a newly admitted client with the med-
ical diagnosis of schizophrenia may be demonstrating
the following behaviors:
■ Inability to trust others
■ Hearing voices
■ Refusal to interact with staff and peers
■ Fear of failure
■ Poor personal hygiene
From these assessments, the treatment team may
determine that the client has the following problems:
■ Paranoid delusions
■ Auditory hallucinations
■ Social withdrawal
■ Developmental regression
Team goals would be directed toward the following:
■ Reducing suspiciousness
■ Terminating auditory hallucinations
■ Increasing feelings of self-worth
From this team treatment plan, nursing may iden-
tify the following nursing diagnoses:
■ Disturbed sensory perception, auditory (evidenced
by hearing voices)*
■ Disturbed thought processes (evidenced by
delusions)*
■ Low self-esteem (evidenced by fear of failure and
social withdrawal)
■ Self-care deficit (evidenced by poor personal
hygiene)
Nursing diagnoses are prioritized according to life-
threatening potential. Maslow’s hierarchy of needs is
an appropriate model to follow when prioritizing nurs-
ing diagnoses. In this instance, Disturbed sensory per-
ception (auditory) is identified as the priority nursing
diagnosis because the client may be hearing voices that
command him or her to harm self or others. Psychi-
atric nursing, regardless of the setting—hospital (inpa-
tient or outpatient), office, home, community—is
178 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
*Disturbed sensory perception and Disturbed thought processes
have been removed from the NANDA-I list of approved nursing
diagnoses (NANDA-I, 2012). However, they will continue to be
used in this textbook because of their appropriateness to certain
behaviors.
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 178
goal-directed care. The goals (or expected outcomes)
are client-oriented, mea surable, and focused on prob-
lem resolution (if this is realistic) or on a more short-
term outcome (if resolution is unrealistic). For example,
in the previous situation, expected outcomes for the
identified nursing diagnoses might be as follows:
The client:
■ Demonstrates trust in one staff member within 3 days
■ Verbalizes understanding that the voices are not
real (not heard by others) within 5 days
■ Completes one simple craft project within 5 days
■ Takes responsibility for own self-care and performs
activities of daily living independently by time of
discharge
Nursing’s contribution to the interdisciplinary
treatment regimen will focus on establishing trust on
a one-to-one basis (thus reducing the level of anxiety
that may be promoting hallucinations), giving positive
feedback for small day-to-day accomplishments in an
effort to build self-esteem, and assisting with and en-
couraging independent self-care. These interventions
describe independent nursing actions and goals that are
evaluated apart from, while also being directed toward
achievement of, the team’s treatment goals.
In this manner of collaboration with other team
members, nursing provides a unique service based on
sound knowledge of psychopathology, scope of prac-
tice, and legal implications of the role. Although
there is no question that implementing physician’s
orders is an important aspect of nursing care, nursing
interventions that enhance achievement of the over-
all goals of treatment are important contributions
as well. The nurse who administers a medication
prescribed by the physician to decrease anxiety may
also choose to stay with the anxious client and offer
reassurance of safety and security, thereby providing
an independent nursing action that is distinct from,
yet complementary to, the medical treatment.
Concept Mapping∗
Concept mapping is a diagrammatic teaching and
learning strategy that allows students and faculty to
visualize interrelationships between medical diag-
noses, nursing diagnoses, assessment data, and treat-
ments. Basically, it is a diagram of client problems and
interventions. Compared to the commonly used col-
umn format care plans, concept map care plans
are more succinct. They primarily serve to enhance
critical-thinking skills and clinical reasoning ability by
creating a holistic picture of various client problems
and their interconnectedness to one another.
The nursing process is foundational to develop-
ing and using the concept map care plan, just as with
all types of nursing care plans. Client data are col-
lected and analyzed, nursing diagnoses are formu-
lated, outcome criteria are identified, nursing actions
are planned and implemented, and the success of
the interventions in meeting the outcome criteria is
evaluated.
The concept map care plan may be presented in its
entirety on one page, or the assessment data and nurs-
ing diagnoses may appear in diagram format on one
page, with outcomes, interventions, and evaluation
written on a second page. Alternatively, the diagram
may appear in circular format, with nursing diagnoses
and interventions branching off the “client” in the
center of the diagram. Or, it may begin with the
“client” at the top of the diagram, with branches ema-
nating in a linear fashion downward.
Whatever format is chosen to visualize the concept
map, the diagram should reflect the nursing process in
a stepwise fashion, beginning with the client and his or
her reason for needing care, nursing diagnoses with
subjective and objective clinical evidence for each, nurs-
ing interventions, and outcome criteria for evaluation.
Figure 9–2 presents one example of a concept map
care plan. It is assembled for the hypothetical client
with schizophrenia discussed in the previous section,
“Applying the Nursing Process in the Psychiatric Set-
ting.” Different colors may be used in the diagram to
designate various components of the care plan. Con-
necting lines are drawn between components to indi-
cate any relationships that exist. For example, there
may be a relationship between two nursing diagnoses
(e.g., between the nursing diagnoses of Pain or Anx-
iety and Disturbed sleep pattern). A line between
these nursing diagnoses should be drawn to show the
relationship.
Concept map care plans permit viewing the “whole
picture” without generating a great deal of paper-
work. Because they reflect the steps of the nursing
process, concept map care plans also are valuable
guides for documentation of client care. Doenges,
Moorhouse, and Murr (2016) note that traditional
care plans fail to clarify how all the client’s identified
needs are related, so the user may not develop a ho-
listic view. The concept map clarifies those linkages.
Whether these care-planning strategies are used for
learning or in actual practice, both the concept map
and traditional care plan are useful tools for develop-
ing and visualizing the critical-thinking process that
goes into planning client care.
Documentation of the Nursing Process
Equally as important as using the nursing process in
the delivery of care is documenting its use in writing.
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 179
*Content in this section is adapted from Doenges, Moorhouse, &
Murr (2016) and Schuster (2015).
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 179
Some contemporary nursing leaders advocate that
with solid standards of practice and procedures in
place within the institution, nurses need only chart
when there has been a deviation in the care as out-
lined by that standard. This method of documenta-
tion, known as charting by exception, is not widely
accepted, as many legal decisions are still based
on the precept that “if it was not charted, it was
not done.”
Because nursing process and diagnosis are man-
dated by nurse practice acts in some states, documen-
tation of their use is considered evidence in those
states when determining certain cases of negligence
by nurses. Some health-care organization accrediting
agencies also require that nursing process be re-
flected in the delivery of care.
A variety of documentation methods can be used
to reflect use of the nursing process in the delivery of
180 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Clinical Vignette: Harry has been admitted to the psychiatric unit with a diagnosis of schizophrenia. He is socially
isolated and stays in his room unless strongly encouraged by the nurse to come out. He says to the nurse, “You
have to be your own boss. You can’t trust anybody.” He refuses to eat any food from his tray, stating that the voice
of his deceased grandfather is telling him it is poisoned. His clothes are dirty, and he has an objectionable body
odor. The nurse develops the following concept map care plan for Harry.
Disturbed thought
processes
Disturbed sensory
perception (auditory)
Low self-esteem Self-care deficit
(hygiene)
• Delusional
thinking
• Suspiciousness
• Verbalizes
hearing voices
• Listening pose
• Social
withdrawal
• Expresses fear
of failure
• Offensive
body odor
• Soiled clothing
• Unkempt
appearance
• Do not whisper to others
in client’s presence.
• Serve food family style.
• Perform mouth checks
for meds.
• Be cautious with touch.
• Use same staff.
• Meet client needs and
keep promises to
promote trust.
• Observe for signs of
hallucinations.
• Be cautious with touch.
• Use “the voices” instead
of “they” when asking for
content of hallucinations.
• Use distraction to bring
client back to reality.
• Spend time with client
and develop trust.
• Attend groups with client
at first to offer support.
• Encourage simple
methods of achievement.
• Teach effective
communication techniques.
• Encourage verbalization
of fears.
• Encourage
independence in ADLs,
but intervene as
needed.
• Offer recognition and
positive reinforcement
for independent
accomplishments.
Medical Rx:
Risperidone
2 mg bid
• Demonstrates
ability to trust
• Differentiates
between
delusional
thinking and
reality
• Discusses
content of
hallucinations
with nurse
• Hallucinations
are eliminated
• Attends groups
willingly and
without being
accompanied
by nurse
• Interacts
appropriately
with others
• Performs ADLs
independently
• Maintains personal
hygiene at an
acceptable level
Signs and
Symptoms
Signs and
Symptoms
Signs and
Symptoms
Signs and
Symptoms
Nursing
Diagnosis
Nursing
Diagnosis
Nursing
Diagnosis
Nursing
Diagnosis
Nursing Actions Nursing Actions Nursing Actions Nursing Actions
Outcomes Outcomes Outcomes Outcomes
FIGURE 9–2 Example of a concept map care plan for a client with schizophrenia.
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 180
nursing care. Three examples are presented here:
problem-oriented recording (POR); Focus Charting®;
and the problem, intervention, evaluation (PIE) sys-
tem of documentation.
Problem-Oriented Recording
Problem-oriented recording, based on a list of prob-
lems, follows the subjective, objective, assessment,
plan, implementation, and evaluation (SOAPIE) for-
mat. When used in nursing, the problems (nursing
diagnoses) are identified on a written plan of care,
with appropriate nursing interventions described for
each. Documentation written in the SOAPIE format
includes the following:
S = Subjective data: Information gathered from what
the client, family, or other source has said or reported
O = Objective data: Information gathered through di-
rect observation by the person performing the
assessment; may include a physiological measure-
ment such as blood pressure or a behavioral re-
sponse such as affect
A = Assessment: The nurse’s interpretation of the sub-
jective and objective data
P = Plan: The actions or treatments to be carried out
(may be omitted in daily charting if the plan is
clearly explained in the written nursing care plan
and no changes are expected)
I = Intervention: Those nursing actions that were ac-
tually carried out
E = Evaluation: Evaluation of the problem following
nursing intervention (some nursing interventions
cannot be evaluated immediately, so this section
may be optional)
Table 9–3 shows how POR corresponds to the steps
of the nursing process. Following is an example of a
three-column documentation in the POR format.
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 181
EXAMPLE
DATE/TIME PROBLEM PROGRESS NOTES
9-12-17 Social isolation S: States he does not want to sit with or talk to others; “they frighten me.”
1000 O: Stays in room alone unless strongly encouraged to come out; no group involvement;
at times listens to group conversations from a distance but does not interact; some
hypervigilance and scanning noted
A: Inability to trust; panic level of anxiety; delusional thinking
I: Initiated trusting relationship by spending time alone with the client; discussed his
feelings regarding interactions with others; accompanied client to group activities;
provided positive feedback for voluntarily participating in assertiveness training
TA B L E 9 – 3 Validation of the Nursing Process With Problem-Oriented Recording
PROBLEM-ORIENTED RECORDING
S and O (Subjective and
Objective data)
A (Assessment)
P (Plan) (Omitted in charting
if written plan describes care
to be given)
I (Intervention)
E (Evaluation)
NURSING PROCESS
Assessment
Diagnosis and outcome
identification
Planning
Implementation
Evaluation
WHAT IS RECORDED
Verbal reports to, and direct observation and examination
by, the nurse
Nurse’s interpretation of S and O
Description of appropriate nursing actions to resolve the
identified problem
Description of nursing actions actually carried out
A reassessment of the situation to determine results of
nursing actions implemented
Focus Charting
Another type of documentation that reflects use of the
nursing process is Focus Charting®. Focus Charting dif-
fers from POR in that the main perspective has been
changed from “problem” to “focus,” and a data, action,
and response (DAR) format has replaced SOAPIE.
Lampe (1985) suggested that a focus for documen-
tation can be any of the following:
■ Nursing diagnosis
■ Current client concern or behavior
■ Significant change in the client status or behavior
■ Significant event in the client’s therapy
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 181
The focus cannot be a medical diagnosis. The doc-
umentation is organized in the format of DAR. These
categories are defined as follows:
D = Data: Information that supports the stated focus
or describes pertinent observations about the client
A = Action: Immediate or future nursing actions that
address the focus, and evaluation of the present
care plan along with any changes required
R = Response: Description of client’s responses to any
part of the medical or nursing care
Table 9–4 shows how Focus Charting corresponds
to the steps of the nursing process. Following is an ex-
ample of a three-column documentation in the DAR
format.
182 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
EXAMPLE
DATE/TIME FOCUS PROGRESS NOTES
9-12-17 D: States he does not want to sit with or talk to others; they “frighten”
1000 him; stays in room alone unless strongly encouraged to come
out; no group involvement; at times listens to group conversations
from a distance, but does not interact; some hypervigilance and
scanning noted
A: Initiated trusting relationship by spending time alone with client;
discussed his feelings regarding interactions with others; accom-
panied client to group activities; provided positive feedback for
voluntarily participating in assertiveness training
R: Cooperative with therapy; still acts uncomfortable in the presence
of a group of people; accepted positive feedback from nurse
Social isolation related to
mistrust, panic anxiety,
delusions
TA B L E 9 – 4 Validation of the Nursing Process With Focus Charting
FOCUS CHARTING
D (Data)
Focus
A (Action)
R (Response)
NURSING PROCESS
Assessment
Diagnosis and outcome
identification
Plan and implementation
Evaluation
WHAT IS RECORDED
Information that supports the stated focus or describes pertinent
observations about the client
A nursing diagnosis; current client concern or behavior; signifi-
cant change in client status; significant event in the client’s ther-
apy (Note: If outcome appears on written care plan, it need not
be repeated in daily documentation unless a change occurs.)
Immediate or future nursing actions that address the focus;
appraisal of the care plan along with any changes required
Description of client responses to any part of the medical or
nursing care
The PIE Method
The PIE method, or more specifically, “APIE” (as-
sessment, problem, intervention, evaluation), is a
systematic approach of documenting to nursing
process and nursing diagnosis. A problem-oriented
system, PIE charting uses accompanying flow sheets
that are individualized by each institution. Criteria
for documentation are organized in the following
manner:
A = Assessment: A complete client assessment is con-
ducted at the beginning of each shift. Results are
documented under this section in the progress
notes. Some institutions elect instead to use a
daily client assessment sheet designed to meet
specific needs of the unit. Explanation of any de-
viation from the norm is included in the progress
notes.
P = Problem: A problem list, or list of nursing diag-
noses, is an important part of the APIE method of
charting. The name or number of the problem
being addressed is documented in this section.
I = Intervention: Nursing actions are performed,
directed at resolution of the problem.
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 182
E = Evaluation: Outcomes of the implemented inter-
ventions are documented, including an evaluation
of client responses to determine the effectiveness of
nursing interventions and the presence or absence
of progress toward resolution of a problem.
Table 9–5 shows how APIE charting corresponds
to the steps of the nursing process. Following is an
example of a three-column documentation in the
APIE format.
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 183
EXAMPLE
DATE/TIME PROBLEM PROGRESS NOTES
9-12-17 Social isolation A: States he does not want to sit with or talk to others; they “frighten” him;
1000 stays in room alone unless strongly encouraged to come out; no group
involvement; at times listens to group conversations from a distance but
does not interact; some hypervigilance and scanning noted
P: Social isolation related to inability to trust, panic level of anxiety, and
delusional thinking
I: Initiated trusting relationship by spending time alone with client; discussed
his feelings regarding interactions with others; accompanied client to group
activities; provided positive feedback for voluntarily participating in assertive-
ness training
E: Cooperative with therapy; still uncomfortable in the presence of a group of
people; accepted positive feedback from nurse
TA B L E 9 – 5 Validation of the Nursing Process With APIE Method
APIE CHARTING
A (Assessment)
P (Problem)
I (Intervention)
E (Evaluation)
NURSING PROCESS
Assessment
Diagnosis and outcome
identification
Plan and implementation
Evaluation
WHAT IS RECORDED
Subjective and objective data about the client that are gathered
at the beginning of each shift
Name (or number) of nursing diagnosis being addressed from
written problem list, and identified outcome for that problem
(Note: If outcome appears on written care plan, it need not be
repeated in daily documentation unless a change occurs.)
Nursing actions performed, directed at problem resolution
Appraisal of client responses to determine effectiveness of
nursing interventions
Electronic Documentation
Most health-care facilities have implemented an elec-
tronic health record (EHR) or electronic documen-
tation system. Federal regulations and programs have
incentivized the move to EHR systems by requiring
health-care organizations to use them in order to re-
ceive Medicare and Medicaid reimbursement; as of
2015, progressive reductions in reimbursement have
been initiated for health-care providers who are not
demonstrating meaningful use of EHRs.
The rationale for this move is that EHR systems
have been shown to improve both the quality of
client care and the efficiency of the health-care
system (U.S. Government Accountability Office, 2010).
In 2003, the U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services commissioned the Institute of Medicine (IOM)
to study the capabilities of an EHR system. The IOM
identified a set of eight core functions that EHR systems
should perform in the delivery of safer, higher-quality, and
more efficient health care (Institute of Medicine, 2003):
1. Health information and data: EHRs would provide
more rapid access to important patient informa-
tion (e.g., allergies, laboratory test results, a med-
ication list, demographic information, and clinical
narratives), thereby improving care providers’ abil-
ities to make sound clinical decisions in a timely
manner.
2. Results management: Computerized results of all
types (e.g., laboratory test results, radiology proce-
dure result reports) can be accessed more easily
by the provider at the time and place they are
needed.
3. Order entry and order management: Computer-
based order entries improve workflow processes by
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 183
eliminating lost orders and ambiguities caused by
illegible handwriting, generating related orders
automatically, monitoring for duplicate orders,
and improving the speed with which orders are
executed.
4. Decision support: Computerized decision sup-
port systems enhance clinical performance for
many aspects of health care. Using reminders and
prompts, improvement in regular screenings and
other preventive practices can be accomplished.
Other aspects of health-care support include iden-
tifying possible drug interactions and facilitating
diagnosis and treatment.
5. Electronic communication and connectivity: Im-
proved communication among care associates,
such as medicine, nursing, laboratory, pharmacy,
and radiology team members, can enhance client
safety and quality of care. Efficient communication
among providers improves continuity of care,
allows for more timely interventions, and reduces
the risk of adverse events.
6. Patient support: Computer-based interactive
client education, self-testing, and self-monitoring
have been shown to improve control of chronic
illnesses.
7. Administrative processes: Electronic scheduling
systems (e.g., for hospital admissions and outpa-
tient procedures) increase the efficiency of health-
care organizations and provide more timely service
to patients.
8. Reporting and population health management:
Health-care organizations are required to report
health-care data to government and private sectors
for patient safety and public health. Uniform elec-
tronic data standards facilitate this process at the
provider level, reduce the associated costs, and in-
crease the speed and accuracy of the data reported.
Table 9–6 lists some of the advantages and disad-
vantages of paper records and EHRs.
184 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
TA B L E 9 – 6 Advantages and Disadvantages of Paper Records and EHR Systems
PAPER*
ADVANTAGES
■ People know how to use it.
■ It is fast for current practice.
■ It is portable.
■ It is nonbreakable.
■ It accepts multiple data types, such as graphs,
photographs, drawings, and text.
■ Legal issues and costs are understood.
DISADVANTAGES
■ It can be lost.
■ It is often illegible and incomplete.
■ It has no remote access.
■ It can be accessed by only one person at a time.
■ It is often disorganized.
■ Information is duplicated.
■ It is hard to store.
■ It is difficult to research, and continuous quality
improvement is laborious.
■ Same client has separate records at each facility
(physician’s office, hospital, home care).
■ Records are shared only through hard copy.
*From Young, K.M., & Catalano, J. T. (2015). Nursing informatics. In J.T. Catalano (Ed.), Nursing now! Today’s issues, tomorrow’s trends
(7th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis. With permission.
EHR SYSTEM
ADVANTAGES
■ Can be accessed by multiple providers from remote
sites.
■ Facilitates communication between disciplines.
■ Provides reminders about completing information.
■ Provides warnings about incompatibilities of medica-
tions or variances from normal standards.
■ Reduces redundancy of information.
■ Requires less storage space and is more difficult to
lose.
■ Easier to research for audits, quality assurance, and
epidemiological surveillance.
■ Provides immediate retrieval of information (e.g., test
results).
■ Provides links to multiple databases of health-care
knowledge, thus providing diagnostic support.
■ Decreases charting time.
■ Reduces errors due to illegible handwriting.
■ Facilitates billing and claims procedures.
DISADVANTAGES
■ Excessive expense to initiate the system.
■ Substantial learning curve involved for new users;
training and retraining required.
■ Stringent requirements to maintain security and
confidentiality.
■ Technical difficulties are possible.
■ Legal and ethical issues involving privacy and access to
client information.
■ Requires consistent use of standardized terminology to
support information sharing across wide networks.
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 184
Summary and Key Points
■ The nursing process provides a methodology by
which nurses may deliver care using a systematic,
scientific approach.
■ The focus of the nursing process is goal directed
and based on a decision-making or problem-solving
model consisting of six steps: assessment, diagnosis,
outcome identification, planning, implementation,
and evaluation.
■ Assessment is a systematic, dynamic process by
which the nurse, through interaction with the
client, significant others, and health-care providers,
collects and analyzes data about the client.
■ Nursing diagnoses are clinical judgments about in-
dividual, family, or community responses to actual
or potential health problems and life processes.
■ Outcomes are measurable, expected, patient-
focused goals that translate into observable
behaviors.
■ Evaluation is the process of determining both the
client’s progress toward the attainment of expected
outcomes and the effectiveness of nursing care.
■ The psychiatric nurse uses the nursing process to
assist clients to adapt successfully to stressors within
the environment.
■ The nurse serves as a valuable member of the in-
terdisciplinary treatment team, working both inde-
pendently and cooperatively with other team
members.
■ Case management is an innovative model of care
delivery that serves to provide quality client care
while controlling health-care costs. Critical path-
ways of care serve as the tools for provision of care
in a case management system.
■ Nurses may serve as case managers, who are re-
sponsible for negotiating with multiple health-care
providers to obtain a variety of services for the
client.
■ Concept mapping is a diagrammatic teaching and
learning strategy that allows students and faculty
to visualize interrelationships between medical
diagnoses, nursing diagnoses, assessment data,
and treatments. The concept map care plan is an
innovative approach to planning and organizing
nursing care.
■ Nurses must document that the nursing process has
been used in the delivery of care. Three methods
of documentation that reflect use of the nursing
process are POR, Focus Charting, and the PIE
method.
■ Many health-care facilities have implemented the
use of EHRs or electronic documentation systems.
EHRs have been shown to improve both the quality
of client care and the efficiency of the healthcare
system.
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 185
Additional info available
at www.davisplus.com
Review Questions
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
Select the answer that is most appropriate for each of the following questions.
1. The nurse is using nursing process to care for a client who is suicidal. Which of the following nursing
actions is a part of the assessment step of the nursing process?
a. Identifies nursing diagnosis: Risk for suicide
b. Notes that client’s family reports recent suicide attempt
c. Prioritizes the necessity of maintaining a safe client environment
d. Obtains a short-term contract from the client to seek out staff if feeling suicidal
2. The nurse is using nursing process to care for a client who is suicidal. Which of the following nursing
actions is a part of the diagnosis step of the nursing process?
a. Identifies nursing diagnosis: Risk for suicide
b. Notes that client’s family reports recent suicide attempt
c. Prioritizes the necessity for maintaining a safe environment for the client
d. Obtains a short-term contract from the client to seek out staff if feeling suicidal
Continued
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 185
186 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
3. The nurse is using nursing process to care for a client who is suicidal. Which of the following nursing
actions is a part of the outcome identification step of the nursing process?
a. Prioritizes the necessity for maintaining a safe environment for the client
b. Determines if nursing interventions have been appropriate to achieve desired results
c. Obtains a short-term contract from the client to seek out staff if feeling suicidal
d. Establishes goal of care: Client will not harm self during hospitalization
4. The nurse is using nursing process to care for a client who is suicidal. Which of the following nursing
actions is a part of the planning step of the nursing process?
a. Prioritizes the necessity for maintaining a safe environment for the client
b. Determines if nursing interventions have been appropriate to achieve desired results
c. Obtains a short-term contract from the client to seek out staff if feeling suicidal
d. Establishes goal of care: Client will not harm self during hospitalization
5. The nurse is using nursing process to care for a client who is suicidal. Which of the following nursing
actions is a part of the implementation step of the nursing process?
a. Prioritizes the necessity for maintaining a safe environment for the client
b. Determines if nursing interventions have been appropriate to achieve desired results
c. Collaborates with the client to develop a plan for ongoing safety and suicide prevention
d. Establishes goal of care: Client will not harm self during hospitalization
6. The nurse is using nursing process to care for a client who is suicidal. Which of the following nursing
actions is a part of the evaluation step of the nursing process?
a. Prioritizes the necessity for maintaining a safe environment for the client
b. Determines if nursing interventions have been appropriate to achieve desired results
c. Obtains a short-term contract from the client to seek out staff if feeling suicidal
d. Establishes goal of care: Client will not harm self during hospitalization
7. S.T. is a 15-year-old girl who has just been admitted to the adolescent psychiatric unit with a diagnosis
of anorexia nervosa. She is 5 feet 5 inches tall and weighs 82 pounds. She was selected to join the cheer-
leading squad for the fall but states that she is not as good as the others on the squad. The treatment
team has identified the following problems: refusal to eat, occasional purging, refusing to interact with
staff and peers, and fear of failure. Which of the following nursing diagnoses would be appropriate
for S.T.? (Select all that apply.)
a. Social isolation
b. Disturbed body image
c. Low self-esteem
d. Imbalanced nutrition: Less than body requirements
8. S.T. is a 15-year-old girl who has just been admitted to the adolescent psychiatric unit with a diagnosis
of anorexia nervosa. She is 5 feet 5 inches tall and weighs 82 pounds. She was selected to join the cheer-
leading squad for the fall but states that she is not as good as the others on the squad. The treatment
team has identified the following problems: refusal to eat, occasional purging, refusing to interact with
staff and peers, and fear of failure. Which of the following nursing diagnoses would be the priority
diagnosis for S.T.?
a. Social isolation
b. Disturbed body image
c. Low self-esteem
d. Imbalanced nutrition: Less than body requirements
9. Nursing diagnoses are prioritized according to which of the following?
a. Degree of potential for resolution
b. Legal implications associated with nursing intervention
c. Life-threatening potential
d. Client and family requests
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 186
C H A P T E R 9 ■ The Nursing Process in Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 187
Review Questions—cont’d
Self-Examination/Learning Exercise
10. Which of the following describe advantages of electronic health records (EHRs)? (Select all that
apply.)
a. They reduce redundancy of information.
b. They reduce privacy issues.
c. They decrease charting time.
d. They facilitate communication between disciplines.
References
American Nurses Association (2017). What is nursing? Retrieved
from http://www.nursingworld.org/EspeciallyForYou/
What-is-Nursing
American Nurses Association (ANA). (2015). Nursing: Scope and
standards of practice (3rd ed.). Silver Spring, MD: ANA.
American Nurses Association (ANA). (2010). Nursing’s social policy
statement: The essence of the profession (3rd ed.). Silver Spring,
MD: ANA.
American Nurses Association (ANA), American Psychiatric
Nurses Association (APNA), & International Society of
Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurses (ISPN). (2014). Psychiatric-
mental health nursing: Scope and standards of practice (2nd ed.).
Silver Spring, MD: ANA.
Beers, M.H. (2005). Merck manual of health & aging. New York:
Ballentine.
Doenges, M.E., Moorhouse, M.F., & Murr, A.C. (2016). Nursing
diagnosis manual: Planning, individualizing, and documenting
client care (5th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Institute of Medicine. 2003. Key capabilities of an electronic health
record system: Letter report. Washington, DC: The National
Academies Press. doi:https://doi.org/10.17226/10781.
Kaufman, D.M., & Zun, L. (1995). A quantifiable, brief mental
status examination for emergency patients. Journal of Emer-
gency Medicine, 13(4), 440-456. doi:10.1016/0736-4679(95)
80000-X
Kokman, E., Smith, G.E., Petersen, R.C., Tangalos, E., & Ivnik,
R.C. (1991). The short test of mental status: Correlations
with standardized psychometric testing. Archives of Neurology,
48(7), 725-728. doi:10.1001/archneur.1991.00530190071018
Lampe, S.S. (1985). Focus charting: Streamlining documenta-
tion. Nursing Management, 16(7), 43-46.
Moorhead, S., & Dochterman, J.M. (2012). Languages and devel-
opment of the linkages. In M. Johnson, S. Moorhead, G.
Bulechek, M. Butcher, M. Maas, & E. Swanson, NOC and NIC
linkages to NANDA-I and clinical conditions: Supporting critical
reasoning and quality care (3rd ed., pp. 1-10). Maryland
Heights, MO: Mosby.
Moorhead, S., Johnson, M., Maas, M., & Swanson, E. (2013).
Nursing Outcomes Classification (NOC) (5th ed.). St. Louis, MO:
Mosby Elsevier.
NANDA International. (2015a). Nursing diagnoses: Definitions and
classification, 2015–2017. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-Blackwell.
NANDA International. (2015b). About NANDA International.
Retrieved from www.nanda.org/AboutUs.aspx
Pfeiffer, E. (1975). A short portable mental status questionnaire for
the assessment of organic brain deficit in elderly patients. Jour-
nal of the American Geriatric Society, 23(10), 433-441. doi:10.1111/
j.1532-5415.1975.tb00927.x
Schuster, P.M. (2015). Concept mapping: A critical-thinking approach
to care planning (4th ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
U.S. Government Accountability Office (GAO). (2010). Features
of integrated systems support patient care strategies and
access to care, but systems face challenges. GAO-11-49.
Washington, DC: GAO.
Young, K.M., & Catalano, J. T. (2015). Nursing informatics. In
J.T. Catalano (Ed.), Nursing now! Today’s issues, tomorrow’s trends
(7th ed., pp. 429-451). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis.
Classical References
Folstein, M.F., Folstein, S.E., & McHugh, P.R. (1975). Mini-mental
state: A practical method for grading the cognitive state of
patients for the clinician. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 12(3),
189-198. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
6054_Ch09_164-187 27/07/17 5:20 PM Page 187
10 Therapeutic Groups
C H A P T E R O U T L I N E
Objectives
Homework Assignment
Functions of a Group
Types of Groups
Physical Conditions That Influence Group
Dynamics
Therapeutic Factors
Phases of Group Development
Leadership Styles
Member Roles
Psychodrama
The Role of the Nurse in Therapeutic Groups
Summary and Key Points
Review Questions
K EY T E R M S
altruism
autocratic
catharsis
democratic
laissez-faire
psychodrama
universality
O B J EC T I V E S
After reading this chapter, the student will be able to:
1. Define a group.
2. Discuss eight functions of a group.
3. Identify various types of groups.
4. Describe physical conditions that influence
groups.
5. Discuss therapeutic factors that occur in groups.
6. Describe the phases of group development.
7. Identify various leadership styles in groups.
8. Identify various roles that members assume
within a group.
9. Discuss psychodrama as a specialized form
of group therapy.
10. Describe the role of the nurse in group
therapy.
H O M E W O R K A S S I G N M E N T
Please read the chapter and answer the following questions:
1. What is the difference between therapeutic
groups and group therapy?
2. What are the expectations of the leader in
the initial or orientation phase of group
development?
3. How does an autocratic leadership style
affect member enthusiasm and morale?
4. How does size of the group influence group
dynamics?
CORE CONCEPTS
Group
Group Therapy
188
Human beings are complex creatures who share
their activities of daily living with various groups of
people. As Forsyth (2010) stated, “The tendency
to join with others in groups is perhaps the single
most important characteristic of humans and the
processes that unfold within these groups leave
an indelible imprint on their members and on
society” (p. 1).
Health-care professionals share their personal lives
with groups of people and encounter multiple group
situations in their professional operations. Team con-
ferences, committee meetings, grand rounds, and
6054_Ch10_188-198 27/07/17 5:18 PM Page 188
inservice sessions are but a few instances in which this
occurs. In psychiatry, work with clients and families
often takes the form of groups. With group work, not
only does the nurse have the opportunity to reach out
to a greater number of people at one time, but those
individuals also assist each other by sharing their feel-
ings, opinions, ideas, and behaviors with the group.
Clients learn from each other in a group setting.
This chapter explores various types and methods of
therapeutic groups that can be used with psychiatric
clients and the role of the nurse in group intervention.
7. Empowerment: Groups help to bring about improve-
ment in existing conditions by providing support to
individual members who seek to bring about change.
Groups have power that individuals alone do not.
8. Governance: Groups that provide governance
functions oversee and direct activities often within
the context of a larger group organization. “For
example, groups or committees that oversee strate-
gic planning, ensure compliance with quality stan-
dards, or establish rules and policies” within a larger
organization.
Types of Groups
The functions of a group vary depending on the reason
the group was formed. Clark (2009) identified three
types of groups in which nurses most often participate:
task, teaching, and supportive/therapeutic groups.
Task Groups
The function of a task group is to accomplish a specific
outcome or task. The focus is on solving problems and
making decisions to achieve this outcome. Often, a
deadline is placed on completion of the task, and such
importance is placed on a satisfactory outcome that
conflict in the group may be smoothed over or ignored
in order to focus on the priority at hand.
Teaching Groups
Teaching, or educational, groups exist to convey knowl-
edge and information to a number of individuals.
Nurses can be involved in many types of teaching
groups, such as medication education, childbirth edu-
cation, breast self-examination, and effective parenting
classes. These groups usually have a set time frame or
specified number of meetings. Members learn from
each other as well as from the designated instructor.
The objective of teaching groups is verbalization or
demonstration by the learner of the material presented
by the end of the designated period.
Supportive/Therapeutic Groups
Supportive or therapeutic groups are primarily con-
cerned with preventing future upsets by teaching par-
ticipants effective ways to deal with emotional stress
arising from situational or developmental crises.
C H A P T E R 10 ■ Therapeutic Groups 189
CORE CONCEPT
Group
A group is a collection of individuals whose association
is founded on commonalities of interest, values, norms,
or purpose. Membership in a group is generally by
chance (born into the group), by choice (voluntary affil-
iation), or by circumstance (the result of life-cycle events
over which an individual may or may not have control).
Functions of a Group
Sampson and Marthas (1990) outlined the following
eight functions that groups serve for their members.
They contend that groups may serve more than one
function and usually serve different functions for dif-
ferent members of the group.
1. Socialization: The cultural group into which indi-
viduals are born begins the process of teaching so-
cial norms. This process is continued throughout
their lives by members of other groups with which
they become affiliated.
2. Support: One’s fellow group members are avail-
able in time of need. Individuals derive a feeling
of security from group involvement.
3. Task completion: Group members provide assis-
tance in endeavors that are beyond the capacity
of one individual alone or when results can be
achieved more effectively as a team.
4. Camaraderie: Members of a group provide the joy
and pleasure that individuals seek from interac-
tions with significant others.
5. Information sharing: Learning takes place within
groups. Knowledge is gained when individual
members learn how others in the group have re-
solved situations similar to those with which they
are currently struggling.
6. Normative influence: This function relates to the
ways in which groups enforce the established
norms. As group members interact, they influence
each other about expected norms for communica-
tion and behavior.
CORE CONCEPT
Group Therapy
A form of psychosocial treatment in which a number of
clients meet together with a therapist for purposes of
sharing, gaining personal insight, and improving inter-
personal coping strategies.
6054_Ch10_188-198 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 189
For the purposes of this text, it is important to dif-
ferentiate between therapeutic groups and group therapy.
Leaders of group therapy generally have advanced
degrees in psychology, social work, nursing, or medi-
cine. They often have additional training or experience
in conducting group psychotherapy based on various
theoretical frameworks such as psychoanalytic, psycho-
dynamic, interpersonal, or family dynamics, under the
supervision of accomplished professionals. Approaches
based on these theories are used by group therapy
leaders to encourage improvement in group members’
abilities to function on an interpersonal level.
Therapeutic groups, on the other hand, are not
designed for psychotherapy. They focus instead on
group relations, interactions among group members,
and the consideration of selected issues. Like group
therapists, individuals who lead therapeutic groups
must be knowledgeable in group process; that is, the
way in which group members interact with each other.
Interruptions, silences, judgments, glares, and scape-
goating are examples of group processes (Clark,
2009). These interactions may occur whether or not
there is a designated group leader, but nurses acting
as group leaders can guide the ways in which mem-
bers interact to facilitate accomplishing the group’s
goals or tasks. This is one reason that group leaders
are often referred to as group facilitators. They must
also have thorough knowledge of group content, the
topic or issue being discussed by the group, and the
ability to present the topic in language that can be
understood by all members. Many nurses who work
in psychiatry lead supportive/therapeutic groups.
Self-Help Groups
Nurses may also be involved in self-help groups, a
type of group that has grown in number and in cred-
ibility in recent years. They allow clients to talk about
their fears and relieve feelings of isolation while re-
ceiving comfort and advice from others undergoing
similar experiences. Examples of self-help groups for
clients and families dealing with disorders such as
Alzheimer’s disease or anorexia nervosa, Weight
Watchers, Alcoholics Anonymous, Reach to Recovery,
Parents Without Partners, Overeaters Anonymous,
Adult Children of Alcoholics, and many others related
to specific needs or illnesses. These groups may or
may not have a professional leader or consultant.
They are run by the members, and leadership often
rotates from member to member.
Nurses may become involved with self-help groups
either voluntarily or because their advice or participa-
tion has been requested by the members. The nurse
may function as a referral agent, resource person, mem-
ber of an advisory board, or leader of the group. Self-
help groups are a valuable source of referral for clients
with specific problems. However, nurses must be knowl-
edgeable about the purposes of the group, member-
ship, leadership, benefits, and problems that might
threaten the success of the group before making refer-
rals to their clients for a specific self-help group. The
nurse may find it necessary to attend several meetings
of a particular group, if possible, to assess its effective-
ness of purpose and appropriateness for client referral.
Physical Conditions That Influence Group
Dynamics
Seating
When preparing the setting for a group, there should
be no barrier between members. For example, a circle
of chairs is better than chairs set around a table. Mem-
bers should be encouraged to sit in different chairs at
each meeting. This openness and change creates a feel-
ing of discomfort that encourages anxious and unsettled
behaviors that can then be explored within the group.
Size
Various authors have suggested different ranges of
size as ideal for group interaction: 5 to 10 (Yalom &
Leszcz, 2005), 2 to 15 (Sampson & Marthas, 1990),
and 4 to 12 (Clark, 2009). Group size does make a
difference in the interaction among members. The
larger the group, the less time is available to devote
to individual members. In larger groups, more aggres-
sive individuals are most likely to be heard, whereas
quieter members may be left out of the discussions
altogether. Understanding this dynamic alerts the
nurse group leader to this possibility and allows him
or her to facilitate interaction that promotes greater
involvement for all members. Conversely, larger
groups provide more opportunities for individuals to
learn from other members. The wider range of life
experiences and knowledge provides a greater poten-
tial for effective group problem-solving. Studies have
indicated that a composition of 7 or 8 members pro-
vides a favorable climate for optimal group interac-
tion and relationship development.
Membership
Whether the group is open or closed is another condi-
tion that influences the dynamics of group process.
Open groups are those in which members leave and
others join at any time while the group is active. The
continuous movement of members in and out of the
group creates the type of discomfort described previ-
ously that encourages unsettled behaviors in individual
members and fosters the exploration of feelings. These
are the most common types of groups held on short-
term inpatient units, although they are used in outpa-
tient and long-term care facilities as well. Closed groups
190 U N I T 3 ■ Therapeutic Approaches in Psychiatric Nursing Care
6054_Ch10_188-198 27/07/17 5:19 PM Page 190
usually have a predetermined, fixed time frame. All
members join at the time the group is organized and
terminate at the end of the designated time period.
Closed groups are often composed of individuals with
common issues or problems they wish to address.
Therapeutic Factors
Why are therapeutic groups helpful? Yalom and
Leszcz (2005) desc